\VAHli ..: GI.UM
A NO
VOCABULAHY
UCSB LIBRARY
SWAHILI GEAMMAE
AND
VOCABULAEY
DRAWN UP BY
MRS. F. BURT
LONDON
SOCIETY FOR PROMOTING CHRISTIAN KNOWLEDGE
NORTHUMBERLAND AVENUE, W.C.
1910
•WIU.IA'.T ri.mVKS AND SONS, I.'VITK.n,
LOS1XJX AXP ItKCC'LKS.
PREFACE
THIS little work is an attempt to adapt the Berlitz
method of learning modern European languages to the
needs of the student of Swahili ; its aim is to enable the
learner to acquire a working knowledge of the language
without laborious research or great feats of memory.
Grammatical rules occupy a subordinate place : they are
introduced incidentally and are not to be regarded as a
separate subject of study : the ear, rather than {he eye, is
the organ to be pressed into the service. Words are
arranged in subject-groups in order that, by the natural
association of ideas, the student may help himself to learn
Swahili much as a child picks up its mother tongue. The
exercises should, if possible, be reiterated and amplified
with the aid of a native teacher, until the ear is thoroughly
accustomed to the sounds and the mind trained to follow
the constructions. This method, if carefully pursued,
should soon lead to technical accuracy.
The standard of Swahili adopted is that set by the
Eev. W. E. Taylor, M.A., to whose valuable works the
writer is greatly indebted. He has kindly furnished the
Syllabary and Part I. of the work.
A. E. B.
BOUBNE END PABSONAOE,
BOXMOOR,
1910,
A 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I
FAOB
INTRODUCTION AND ARTICLE ON PHONETICS ... ... 7
PART II.
TWENTY-ONE STUDIES IN THE FAMILIAR LANGUAGE OF DAILY
LIFE, CONSISTING OP :—
(a) VOCABULARY ... ... ... ... ... 24
(6) EXERCISES FOR READING AND TRANSLATING (i) SWAHILI
(ii) ENGLISH ... ... ... ... ... 24
(c) GERMANE GRAMMATICAL NOTES ... ... ... 24
(fZ) GRADED STUDIES IN SWAHILI GRAMMAR ... ... 24
KEY TO THE EXERCISES ... ... ... . ... ... 132
TABLE OF MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES ... ... 152
SPECIMENS OF SWAHILI LETTER-WRITING ... ... 154
SWAHILI CALENDAR ... ... ... ... ... 157
TABLE OF SYNONYMS ... ... ... ... ... 158
TABLE OF HOMONYMS ... ... ... ... 159
PART III
VOCABULARY SWAHILI-ENGLISH ... ... 1G2
PART I
INTRODUCTION
SWAHILI is a member of the Bantu family of African
languages found in the region, and to the south, of the
Equator, and all partaking of certain remarkable features
peculiar to this family alone, of which the most striking
is, that all objects in the known universe are divided into
classes, which not only mark the nouns, but also all the
adjectives, pronouns, and verbs connected with them.
This is effected by means of the classifier prefix which
differs according to the class of the noun, and whether it
is singular or plural. Besides this, the Nominative or
Subjective Prefixes and the Objective Infixes, are thrown
together with tense particles into one word with the verb
stem ; so that one word may form a complete and
luminous sentence.
The conveniences of this system will be seen from a
study of the Rev. W. E. Taylor's Groundwork sheet.
Swahili has the additional advantages above others
of these languages, first that it has been enriched and
diversified by the influence of Arabic, Hindustani, and to
a slighter extent, of Persian and Portuguese and also by a
written poetical and religious literature extending over
a long period.
The Swahili language is broadly divided into three
main Dialect-Groups :
THE SOUTHERN ;
THE NORTHERN;
THE CENTRAL.
(a) The Southern includes Ki-Unguja, the Zanzibar!,
in which the labours of Bishop Steere and the U.M.C.A.
have been directed to producing the existing version of
the Bible: Ki-P'emba, spoken on P'emba, the Emerald
Isle, from which cornes a moiety of the clove supply:
SWAHTLI GRAMMAR
Ki-Mrima, ou the Southern Mrima or "Mainland,"
opposite and to the south of Zanzibar.
(6) The Northern comprises Ki-Amu, the speech of
Lamu or Amu and its neighbourhood ; Ki-Pafe, the Pate
dialect ; Ki-Gunya, the brogue of the Northern Islanders
called Wa-Gunya or, by the Arabs, Bajuni : Ki-<i-kuu is
the Mainland variety of this brogue (ITi-kuu, connected
with nfi-k'uu, = Main-land.)
(c) The Central. The only member of importance in
this group, is the Mombasa or Ki-Mvi/a, but this speech
is taken as the standard for some distance along the coast
N. and S. of Mombasa Island, and in and among the
districts on the confines of the other groups.
TABLES SHOWING THE INTER-KELATIONS OF THE CENTRAL
WITH THE SOUTHERN AND NORTHERN GROUPS OF
SWAHILI DIALECTS.
To le studied as occasion requires.
TABLE I. shows how nearly the Central Group is related
to the Southern, and in what respects the Northern
Group stands in contrast to the former two.
(a) Literal Changes —
Southern.
Cerebral T (in some Cerebral T
Mrima B)
J
SH(in
P'emba FY)
Z
w
M (prefix)
VI (prefix)
YTJ (prefix)
(to) Grammatical Changes —
menu.
T
JSortnern.
CH (Bajuni)
J
8H
Y
S
Z
w
M (prefix)
VI (prefix)
YTT (prefix)
DH (Bajuni)
V (frequent)
N (prefix, frequent)
ZI (prefix)
U (prefix)
Relative suffixes vari-
ous, according to
class and number
The suffix - perfect
quite obsolete
Relative suffixes vari-
ous, according to
class and number
The suffix - perfect
seldom used except
in poetry
All classes except Lo-
cative relative suffix
o (sing, and plur.)
The suffix-perfect in
full use
INTRODUCTION
(o) Verbal Changes —
-je, how ? (suffix) -je, how ? (suffix)
hivi, thus, etc. hivi, thus, etc.
iye 1 how ? (not a
suffix)
hiyau, thus, etc.
TABLE II. shows on the other hand some of the affinities
the Central Group possesses with the Northern
dialects.
Southern.
CH
NJ
ninakupen'/ani (and
several other more
or less " barbarous "
Zr. forms), I love
you (plur. obj.)
Central.
Dental T
Dental N£>
nawapen<Za, I love you
(plur. obj.)
Northern.
Dental T
Dental NZ>
nawapen^/a, 1 love you
(plur. obj.)
TABLE III. — A third Table is capable of being constructed
of points wherein each group differs from the others.
One chief word may be cited as an example —
Southern.
ninakuja, I am coming
Central.
naja, I am coming
Northern.
niyao, I am coming
TABLE IV. — Central differs, where Northern and Southern
agree, to the advantage of the Mombasa Group.
Southern.
Ar. ih (kuzani),
dh (ramazani),
dh ( zambi),
frequently are pro-
nounced like Z
Ar. th (selaea) is
pronounced S, some-
times.
-ake (poss. pron.) '
Central.
Ar. th (ku</iaui),
dh (-dAani),
dh (dhambi),
are pronounced as
in Arabic
Ar. th (thalatha) is
always pronounced
TH (except in -su-
bu<u.)
-akwe (poss. pron.)
Northern.
Ar. th (kuzani),
(Ih (-zani),
dh (zambi),
sometimes pro-
nounced like Z
Ar. th (thelatha or
Bel-) is pronounced
S (occasionally).
-ake (poss. pron.)
1 Accordingly, in S. and N. Swahili,. wake, female (pi.), is
indistinguishable from wake, his (pi. of I), the inconvenience of
which may be imagined.
10 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
The above Tables demonstrate the truth of the assertion
that Mombasa is linguistically the Central dialect, as
well as geographically. They also show that, generally
speaking, in form the Mombasa dialect resembles rather
the Southern dialect group than the Northern. Again it
is nearer the Northern in the important quality of rich-
ness of vocabulary, compression, and flexibility, and to
the Southern in the greater distinctness and variety of the
prefixes. The Tables will prepare the student to deal
with the other groups of the language as occasion arises.
PHONETICS
THE Swahili sounds are capable of being represented by
means of twenty-four of the letters of the Koman Alpha-
bet, singly or in combination, supplemented by the use
of three diacritical marks, and, where necessary, by the
use of an inverted comma (') to represent the Arabic 'ain.
Q and x are not used in writing Swahili. C is not used
alone. Its soft sound is represented by s and its hard
sound by k.
INSTRUCTIONS ON THE PHONETICAL EXERCISES.
We begin with the simpler sounds and pass gradually
to the more difficult, taking each as it comes, each to be
practised with the native teacher.
VOWELS.
Of single sounds first take the Vowels, which should
"be practised by themselves for at least one whole day,
and should be rehearsed before other work daily for the
first three weeks, in order to get ear and voice weaned
from the English ring. This is most important. After
that, one should go over them certainly once weekly for
three months, and even then they should be occasionally
run over with the teacher, so that any relapse into a false
pronunciation or accent should be corrected directly it is
observed. Such relapse, though to be guarded against,
will seldom occur, if the vowels are once for all well fixed
in the " language centres " of the brain, by dint of
assiduous practice at the beginning of the long task of
perfecting oneself in this language.
In Swahili the vowels are represented by the
ordinary five letters, a, e, i, o, u. Swahili vowel sounds
12 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
are distinguished by their purity, and are never in-
distinctly slurred, nor do they in the Mombasa dialect
form " diphthongs," as in English speech. Instance the
English final syllables ey, ay, y, which are at least usually
pronounced exactly alike. Nor are the Swahili vowels
affected to the same degree as the English by the presence
of certain consonants. Hence their pure and unerring
pronunciation is a matter of the greatest importance, and
in our study must take precedence of everything else.
In the vowels, and with succeeding sounds studied,
one should exercise oneself as follows : Let the teacher
say each vowel, etc. ten times over, then follow him with
your best possible imitation once, when he should im-
mediately " chime in " with the correct sound once again,
in order that you may correct by the ear any error. (A
friend will no doubt be at hand to explain his duty to
the teacher.) This process should be gone through once
again, after which he need only " sandwich " one utter-
ance of your own with two of his ; after ten or twenty of
such sandwiched repetitions, you may be considered to
have done enough for the occasion, and can go on with
something else.
NOTE. — The learner beginning these exercises will
probably be quite unconscious of the distinctions marked,
which are nevertheless keenly felt by the sensitive ears
of the natives.
A pronounced somewhat as in English far.
E as the pure sound in eh ! (very short, more
forward); perhaps nearer still, is the e in
French.
I as ee in feet.
0 as o in lo. (0 represents also another sound
somewhat as oe in toe, pronounced shortly and
without the second half of the English sound.)
II as oo in food.
NOTE. — English faults are such as these :
An r sound after a Swahili a ;
An impure ee sound instead of the Swahili e ;
An " oo " at the close of the o ; as Nooo (=No).
PHONETICS IJJ
Exercise 1. The vowels to be gone through singly as
already directed. Then, taking them in order, double
each vowel thus : a — a, e — e, i — i, o — o, u — u, and see
that each member of the pair is promnmced distinctly (as
by the teacher) with the accent or stress on the former of
the two (a — a, etc.). Then triple the vowels and as before
lay the stress on the last but one of the groups, a — a — a,
etc.
NOTE. — This, the last syllable but one, is the natural
place for the accent in a Sicaliili word : the object of the
latter variations is to secure the purity of the unaccented
syllables. Do not drop the voice on the last syllable.
Exercise 2. — Again go through the vowels singly as
before. Then try in order the following combinations.
If between the two vowels you hear a w or a y sound, see
you imitate the teacher; for instance, if he pronounce
i— a " iya," or o — a " owa." For between certain vowels
occurring together, such a consonantal sound often arises,
though theoretically it is not required.
a — e e — a a — i i — a
a — o o — a a — u u — a
e — i i — e i — o o — i
o — e e — o i — u u — i
u — e e — u o — u u — o.
Exercise 3. — Repeat Exercise 2, and then go through
the following as a test exercise, saying the contrasted pairs
together with the teacher as before.
Pair 1. a — o, a — u.
Pair 2. [ o — u, o — 0.
Pair 3. e — i, e— e.
These present resemblances in sound, which it is
exceedingly easy for the English learner to confuse ; and
as several of them are of very common occurrence in the
language, it is well to guard against an habitual mis-
pronunciation— so very easily picked up — from the outset,
and to test in this way the effect of the previous exercises
in " clarifying " the voice.
34 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Exercise 4. — The following actual Swahili words con-
sist entirely of vowels.
au, ai ! (oh I of admiration), oa, ua, aoa, aua, aoe, aue,
aoae, uuao, uuae, auuae, uuuao, auae, auuao, aiuae.
The meanings of these words are quite unnecessary to
be learnt at the present stage, and if given would only
confuse.
NOTE. — Just as o has two sounds, one open and
"forward" in the mouth, and the other close and "high"
(as in the examples given above of " toe " and " lo ! "
respectively), so the other vowels have each an open and
a close sound. However, as these distinctions are not so
important in their practical use as they are in some neigh-
bouring languages, and as the close and the open sounds
of the vowels are unvarying in the words in which they
occur, it has been thought sufficient at this stage to
remark, that of all the five, the sound which is the most
important linguistically is the o in its contrasts, and it is
that one which should be mastered to begin with.
Exercise 5. — Practise pronouncing with the teacher
this series of five vowels with a " catch in the voice "
before each :
'a 'e 'i 'o 'u
The (') represents what is called in Arabic a " hamza."
It enters into certain interjectional sounds common in
the language.
'a 'a strongly spoken, with stress oa the first 'a,
means " No ! "
'a 'a 'a is yet stronger, the stress as before on the
last 'a but one, and means " Not at all ! "
'ee, gently sustained, — a woman's word for " Yes ! "
CONSONANTS.
We will comment on those only that seem to require
notice.
W has two sounds :
1. The ordinary English sound, when it follows on
another consonant.
2. The letter, when it stands alone before the vowel,
PHONETICS 15
has something of a v sound, which is however more w
than v.
NOTE. — This letter is liable to mispronunciation by
some East Africans, not Swahilis, as if it were the
ordinary w in English.
T" has its English sound. It is not written between
i and a.
Exercise 6. — Pronounce with the teacher the following
words, neglecting for the present their meaning : —
Wa, ya, yao, yawa, wayawaya, uwayewaye, wewe,
yeye, wao, wawao, yaua, yawaua, iwauayo, wa wayawaya,
wawayawayao, wao wauawe wao, iwe wewe wauawa.
(H) In Swahililand " poor letter h " is far from
having lost its importance — indeed, Swahili without its
h sounds, would be like the play of " Hamlet " without the
Prince of Denmark !
(1) The letter in Swahili is usually pronounced exactly
at that point of the larynx where the " catch in the
throat'' above-mentioned takes place — though this may
be neglected by the beginner.
[(2) The letter, when it represents the Arabic ^ (h)
in proper names and in certain other words derived from
the Arabic, similarly corresponds in its formation to the
sound <*• ('), and can be practised after the more im-
portant sounds among the Arabic consonants. (See Inset.)]
(3) The " aspirate " belonging to the aspirated con-
sonants draws its breath not from the chest, as does the
ordinary h (1), but from the breath that has been already
passed through the windpipe and stored up in the mouth ;
and this will also be treated of in its place.
Exercise 7. — Ha, he, hi, ho, hu.
Haya, hawa, haya hayawi, hao waua, hawa hawaui,
huyu awiwa, huyu hawiwi, huyu awawia, huyu hawawii,
hawa wawiwa, hawa hawawiwi, huu wawaa, huu hauwai,
yaya haya, wao hao, ii hii, wawayawaya wewe, yeye
hawaiwai, wawa hawa. (Haa' ! is a very strong
negative.)
16 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(M) Another very common and most important
consonant pronounced with the lips lightly pressed
together, while the larynx produces sound which passes
through the nose.
(1) When the lips are kept together this sound is
called " Sonant m " as it forms a syllable of itself without
requiring a vowel, and is therefore not strictly speaking
a consonant at all (consonant meaning, a letter " only to
be sounded with the help of a vowel "). This is a very
frequent form of m and, where necessary to distinguish, it
is to be written m'.
A variety of the " sonant m " is that —
(2) " Blended " with 6 ; it will be treated of in its
place.
(3) Open m, a consonant proper, is produced by the
lips opening, not as in English at the centre of the upper
lip, which is slightly raised, but rather by gradually
drawing down the whole of the lower lip from the
corners, the voice or sound from the larynx being sus-
tained evenly and gently from the beginning of bringing
the lips into position and not " snapped " as in English.
Exercise 8. — Ma, me, mi, mo, mu, m'.1
When this exercise shall have been thoroughly
digested and assimilated, say in about a fortnight from
the time of commencing it, the pronunciation of these
syllables should be made once or twice in the ordinary
English way, and the extraordinary contrast that really
exists between that and the African pronunciation will
become apparent.
Ham', hamu, hamo, ham'muui, m'memuua, haumi,
mama, mimi, mee mee, hayawi mema, hawi mwema,
maua haya, mwawaua hawa, muwe, wawe, amuoa, hamuoi,
hao muwauao, mamae, mamayo, hamuumi, aumia, hauini,
haumii, aumie, ham' Waanm, hm'.
(B) Pronounced with the same movement of the
lips as TO (3), but the sound is not allowed to escape
through the nose, only upon the opening of the lips,
1 This is really a contraction for " mu," the vowel suppressed being
alwavs «.
PHONETICS 17
the sound slightly preceding within (with somewhat
of the effect of an organ with the swell stop). It
therefore differs from the English 6 in the same way as
the m.
The full exercise for this letter will be brought in
with the consonant p, with which it is closely connected.
It will be sufficient here to practise —
Exercise 9. — Ba, bi, bu.
(N) (1) The Swahili n is more palatal than the
English, and has a deeper and evener sound.
(2) The Arabic n (nun) is on the contrary more
dental — on the teeth — and lighter than the English.
The latter need not be practised at present.
Notice the position of the tongue in pronouncing" the
n, the fore-edge or point laid evenly across the palate
behind the eye teeth on either side (bicuspids).
(3) The " sonant n " (see on " gonant m ") is a
frequent sound in Swahili, forming a distinct independent
vowelless syllable, the breath and voice being conducted
freely through the nose, while the channel through the
mouth is stopped.
NOTE. — As the vowel u is always suppressed after
the " sonant m " proper, although grammatically required,
so the vowel i is often required to be understood after
the " sonant n."
(4) " Blended n" which differs from " sonant n " in
the same way as " blended m " does from " sonant m " not
forming a syllable by itself, will be discussed in its proper
place. We need only practise varieties (1) and (3) at
this point.
Exercise 10. — Na, ne, ni, no, nu, n'.1
Nina, n'na, n'nani ? n'nini ? amenona, n'nene, mvi him
n'nauona, nna iiini? wewe u nani? m' nani na nani?
anionae n'naui? nawaona, ham'nioni, n'na nini mimi na
wewe ? amuonae humuua, humuua amuonae, huua m'no,
huua m'no-m'no, 'n ' ! — hn' ! — 'n'n' !
1 Practise these syllables in the same way as M' was, and with the
same conditions. The vowel suppressed after a sonant n is i.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR B
18 SWAHILI GEAMMAR
(D) D holds the same relation to n as I to m —
it is pronounced from the same point as n and with the
tongue in the same position. It therefore differs from
English d in being pronounced further back on the
palate from the teeth. The voice must be uttered from
the throat exactly at the time the tongue is brought into
position, and not, as in English d, just after that instant.
Exercise 11. — Da, de, di, do, du.1
Dada, dede Dodo, Dada, auenae nae n' nani ? anenae ni
mwanayo, ni Dede, mdudu huyu wamuona ? ni include wa
nini ? Ya Dodo ni ya mamae ? rndinru him umeao ni wa
baba, midomo yao ni minene m'no, da da, wana hawa
wanidona-dona.
Dental d will be further noticed later, and the
" blends " of both.
(L) (1) The native I formed on the palate and front
teeth, by the blade and point of the tongue (the English
I being formed chiefly by the point of the tongue behind
the front teeth), the tongue being convex and not concave
as in English I.
(2) The Arabic I on the other hand, though pronounced
with the convex tongue, is more dental than the English,
but need not be practised.
Exercise 12. — La, le, li, lo, lu.
NOTE. — In two or three words a double "1" occurs,
and these are all of Arabic derivation, and in which the
first I of the // can often be traced to an original n — they
are Allahu, God ; ilia, and its derivatives, except, but ; illi,
in order that ; killa or kulla, every.
Lala, lele-mama, lulu, ulili, lilo hilo, alilo nalo, lialiwi
n nani aliye lala? lini ? n lini? na alale, lalani lualaloni.
Hana mali, aliyo nayo ni ya Mola (a name for God).
(R) (1) A souncl formed by trilliny the rim of the
concave but well extended front of the tongue. Being
trilled it stands in contrast to the English sound, but is
entirely d ifferent from the French and German sounds.
1 Practise these sounds in the same way as those above.
PHONETICS 19
(2) The Arabic r is much more strongly trilled than
the Swahili, but need not be practised in these exercises.
Hwahili r and I are often confounded by some natives,
especially by Zanzibar is.
Exercise 13. — Ra, re, ri, ro, ru.
Bara, bahari, Kabai, heri, mara habari, mabaharia
waharibu, marere ni inororo, minara ni miema. Kabai
na Ribe, ni heri Eabai, ni heri Ribe ? Rabi (a name for
God).
We are now again to take up the nasal or n sounds.
These are very frequent indeed in the language in
the mechanism of which n plays a distinguished part,
as will be more plain further on when we come to th»
numerous aspirates and blends which that letter forms
with other consonants. The two consonants we are now
to discuss, — although each is represented, owing 1o the
exigencies of the Roman alphabet, by two letters apiece,
— are quite simple sounds, and not compounded of n and
the other consonant which follows it. This fact must bo
grasped to begin with, so that the eye is not allowed to
mislead the ear, as would almost certainly occur if the
warning is not attended to from the first to regard them
as, not compounds, but simple sounds.
NY. Pronounced with the back of the tongue against
the palate, the point being all the while kept well
down ; a nasal sound corresponding to the Spanish 5,
and not at all to be confrnmded with " ni."
Exercise 14.— Nya, nye, nyi, nyo, nyu.
Yanya, nyanya, uyuni, nyama, nyouyoa, unyo, nyii (cry
of hysena^), nyali, nyunia yenu nyoani, m'nyoe, huyu
nyanya hanyoi, m'nyonyoe uyuni huyu, nyuni anyonyo-
lewa, nyanya hanyolewi, yaninyea, munyu ni wa nyanyae.
(NG-') is nasalised n, as in Eng. " singer," " ringer ; " to
be contrasted with ng in finger. Exercise 15. — Practise
pronouncing the former as if written si-ng'er, ri-ng'er ;
then reverse, thus, ng'er-si, ng'er-ri. NOTE: Further
exercises below, in connection with the blend ng (the
sound in finger).
20 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
VOICE AND BREATH CONSONANTS. — In every language
most of the consonants are divisible into these two classes.
Exercise 16. — (a) Utter a loudly whispered hiss, thus,
sss. (6) Do this again, only during the hiss, and in the
middle of it, practise bringing your voice suddenly into
play, and in a moment you will find that the consonant
has altered, and you have changed unawares from the sss
to a continuous " ezz " sound ; thus ssszzz. The difference
therefore between s and z depends upon the voice
accompanying the sound or not ; s accordingly is called a
breath consonant, and z a voice consonant, (c) Now do
the same with fff (efff). On bringing the voice to bear
you find yourself beginning to say vw (evvv). (d) Reverse
the above, stopping the voice accompaniment in the
middle of saying the zzz (ezzz) and vw (ewv), and you will
have again the " breath " sounds sss, fff. Further corre-
spondences can be traced in the Syllabary, after that we
have stopped to examine, first, a few pairs of simple
consonants ; and, secondly, consonants in combination
with N, and the strange effect it has upon them.
(CH and J.) These are produced very simply with
the back of the tongue against the palate, making a soft
velvety sound, which some vainly try to imitate by saying
them as if ty, dy. Exercise 17. — ja, je, ji, JO, ju ; cha,
che, chu ; jana, juzi, chema, jema, chuma, jua, chua.
(K and G.j Somewhat resemble the pair ch and j in
their character and method of production. NOTE : Beware
of uttering ch or k with the English stress, or you may
seem to aspirate them, and so possibly say something
quite different from what you intended. (See the table of
HOMONYMS.) Exercise 18. — Ka, ke, ki, ko, ku ; ga, ge, gi,
go, gu. Jee, Unguja, waja ? siji ; sijui.
(D, T.) From previous practice (p. 18) this pair will
come easily, the t corresponding to the d, as s to the z.
Exercise 19. — Ta, te, etc. ; dada, tata ; dede, tete ; dodo,
toto ; dudu, tutue, mtoni.
(D, T.) A pair contrasted with the preceding in that
the utterance is from a point forward of the English
sound, the tip of the tongue being laid close against the
back ot the upper front teeth (cp. Ar. dal and te).
PHONETICS 21
Exercise 20. — Da, Je, etc. ; /a, te, etc., tata. ; <e/e ; dia, dua.
Contrasts : tua m/o wako mtoni ; mti him utfue na rini.
Namtuma ku/tima ; natumia aftimacho.
COMPOUNDS OF N; BLENDS AND ASPIRATES. — The rule
is that with voice consonants, N forms " blends," but with
breath consonants, " aspirates " ; thus : Blends, mb, mv, nj,
ng, nz. Aspirates, ch', p', k', t', t'. In the blends ng, mb,
we have the hard (English) sounds of g, b, and similarly
the soft sounds of ch and j in ch' and nj become hard as
English ch and j ; while d in nd has a strange " cerebral "
sound like a rolled r. N before v becomes rav ; before s
and f it is simply absorbed and disappears. Note that
the aspirates are pronounced with the supply of breath
already in the mouth, and not from the chest.
Exercise 21. — (a) Practise mba, nda, nga, nza as single
syllables, e.g. not as if emba, but as mba. (6) Go through
the whole five vowels with mb, — as mba, mbe, mbi, etc.
(c) And with nz, ng, nj, nd, nd. (d) Practise similarly
t'a, t'e, t'i, t'o ; and go through the vowels also with
t', p', ch', and k'. (e) Practise the Homonyms (see end. of
book) with your teacher. (/ ) Go through the Syllabary,
and get your teacher to fit each syllable as far as possible
with a meaning, or find it in a " living " word.1
1 That difficult interjection "Mng'wpc" described in African
Aphorisms, § 396, will form aii excellent vocal gymnastic; and so
will the " click assentive," used by womeii, and produced by drawing
down the back of the tongue from the soft palate at the same time
that, with a rapid jerk, the chin is thrown into the air — the lips,
meanwhile, being kept well closed.
22
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SWAH1LI SYLLABARY
a
e
i
o
u
a
e
t
o
H
ba
be
bi
bo
bu
mba
mbe
mbi
mbo
mbu
bwa
bwe
bwi
bya
mbwa
bye
mbwc
byi
mbwi
bywa
cha
bywe
che
bywi
chi
clio
cliu
ch'a
ch'e
ch'i
ch'o
eh'u
ehwa
chwo
chwi
ch'wa
ch'we
cli'wi
da
de
di
do
du
nda
udc
11 di
ndo
ndu
ndwa
ndwe
udwi
da
de
di
do
eta
nda
rida
ndi
ndo
ndu
ndwa
ndwe
udwi
dba
dlie
dhi
dho
dim
fa
fe
fi
fo
fu
i'ya
(Zr.) fywa
fye
i'ywe
fyi
fywe
fyo
fju
ga
ge
gi
g°
gu
nga
uge
ngi
ngo
ngu
ngwa
ha
ngwc
he
ngwi
hi
ho
hu
hwa
hwe
hwi
ja
je
ji
jo
ju
nja
nje
nJi
njo
nju
jwa
jwe
jwi
jijwa
ka
njwe
ko
njwi
ki
ko
ku
kwa
kwe
kwi
k'a
k'e
k'i
k'o
k'u
k'wa
k'we
k'wi
la
le
li
lo
lu
l\va
Iwe
Iwi
m'
ma
me
mi
mo
mil
mwa
mwe
mwi
mja
mye
myo
myu
n'
na ~2i
ne
ni
no
nn
SYLLABARY
23
ng'a
ng'e
ng'i
ng'o
ng'a
HWiV
nwe
nwi
ng'wa
ng'we
ng'wi
nya
nye
nyi
nyo
nyu
nj'wa
nywe
nywi
pa
pc
Pi
po
pa
pwa
pwe
pwi
pya
p'a
p'e
p'i
p'o
p'u
p'wa
p'we
p'wi
ra
re
ri
ro
ru
rwa
rwe
nvi
rya
[rye]
M
86
si
80
8U
sha
she
•hi
sho
shu
swa
swe
swi
shwa
shwe
shwi
*
ta
to
ti
to
tu
twa
twe
twi
t'a
t'e
t'i
t'o
t'a
t'wa
t'we
t'wi
Ml
to
ti
to
<u
<wa
twe
twi
t'a
t'e
t'i
t'o
t'n
£'wa
t'we
t'wi
tha
the
thi
tho
thu
va
ve
vi
vo
TU
vwa
vwe
vwi
vya
vye
vyo
vyu
wa
we
wi
wo
\vu
ya
ye
yi
yo
yu
ywa
ywe
ywi
za
ze
zi
zo
zu
nza
nze
nzi
DZO
nzu
zwa
zwe
zwi
nzwa
nzwe
nzwi
ARABIC SOUNDS OCCASIONALLY USED, TO BE PRACTISED
WITH ARABS FROM ARABIA.
a
'a
ha
gfca
sa
'dhs.
ta
ka
he
Mo
ghc
bi
Mi
si
dhi
ti
ki
ho
leho
gho
so
"u (hamza)
'a ('am)
hu (he)
khu (Me)
ghu (ghain)
su (sad)
dhu'(dh&d)
tu (te)
kn (kaQ
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
PART II
There is no article proper in Swahili, neither definite, in-
definite, nor partitive.
The Swahili Verb has no special interrogative Form. The
difference between statement and question is made
solely by the voice.
STUDY I
-Greetings
nduguyo, your brother (or sister).
jee = ? or ! (generally precedes a
question),
bwana (v.), sir, gentleman, master,
lord.
bibi (v.), madam, lady, mistress,
bwanawangu, my master, dear sir.
bibiyangu, my mistress, dear
madam,
mimi, I, me.
wewe, thou, thee.
yeye, he, him, she, her.
na, and, with,
gani? what? which?
nami, and I, with me.
nawe, and thou, with thee.
nae, and he (or she), with him
(or her).
naam, yes (classical).
ndiyo, yes (general).
la, no (classical),
siyo, no (general),
sana, very, quite, indeed, a great
deal, too much.
mwana (i.), child, son, daughter,
mwanayo, your child.
Marahaba ! Thank you, it is well,
-ema, good.
Jambo ? How are you ? 1 familiar
Good day ! \saluta-
Jatnbo ! Well. Good day ! ) tion.
Hu jambo ? Are you well ? How
do you do ? Are you better?
Si jambo. I am well [thank you].
I am better.
U hali (iii.) gani? Are you
feeling well ?
Ni hali njema. I am quite well
[thank you].
Yu hali gani? How is he? la
he quite well ?
Yu hali njema. He is quite well
[thank you].
Ha jambo? Is he (or she) well
or better ? How is he ?
Ha jambo. He (or she) is well or
better.
Good morning !
Good evening !
Good-bye! Go in
Sabalkheri !
Msaalkheri !
Kwa heri!
happiness.
Kwa herini (plur.).
happiness.
Ahasan/a ! Thank you ! You have
done well ! This is good news !
ndugu (iii.), brother, sister.
Go (ye) in
NOTE. — In the Exercises square brackets [ ] denote that the
word they enclose is to be left untranslated.
NOTE. — Roman Numerals placed after a noun indicate the class it
telongs to. Arabic Numerals preceding a word refer to a footnote.
STUDY I 25
Bead and Translate
Bwana na bibi. Mimi na bwana wangu. Wewe na
mwanayo. Mimi na wewe na yeye. Bibiyangu na ndu-
guyo. l Jambo. Jambo sana. Sabalkheri ! Bwana,
jambo? Jambo. 2Uhaligani? 2Ni hali njema. Jee,
nawe, u liali njema? Ni hali njema sana. 3Hujambo?
3 Si jambo. Ahasanta ! Bibi, jambo! Jambo! Nawe
liu jambo? Mimi si jambo ahasanla. Jee, 4nduguyo,
aha jambo? Ha jambo bibi. Na 4 mwanayo, yu liali
iiaui? 2Yu liali njema sana. Ahasanta! Msaalkheri,
5 bwana. 5 Bibi, 6 kwa heri. Kwa heri.
Translate
Good morning ! How are yon, Madam ? Very well,
thank you, Sir. Are you feeling well? Quite well,
thank you. How do you do, Sir? I am well, thank you.
Is my master well ? He is quite well. And my mistress,
is she well? She is quite well. How is your brother?
He is quite well, thank you. How is your sister ? Thank
you, Sir, she is quite well. He and you and I. My
master. Dear Madam. Your brother. Good evening,
sir. Good evening, Madam. Yes ! No ! Good-bye.
1 Lit. " affair," " matter," plur. mambo (v.), used idiomatically as a
greeting.
2 Ni, u, yu = three pers. sing., pres. indie., strong verb " to be,"
conjugated with hali (state), refer to state of health (also tu, mu, tea,
in plur.).
* Si, hu, 7ta = thrce pers. sing., neg., pres. indie., strong verb " to be,"
conjugated with/amfio, stand for, ''Is there nothing the matter with
you ? " " There is nothing the matter with me," etc. (also hatu,
hamu, hawa, in plur.).
4 -Yo = yaJto, thy (poss. adj.).
s A noun may, by its structure, belong to one of the irrational
classes and form its plural accordingly (e.g. mabwana, mabibi), and
yet by its meaning belong to the living being or sentient class. In
this case it usually takes the concords of Cl. I. As Huyu Inoana
yuaja (this gentleman is coming), wale mabibi hawaji (those ladies
are not coming). See " Groundwork of Swahili Language," bv Kev.
W. E. Taylor, published by 8.P.C.K.
0 Lit. " for good."
26
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SIMPLE TABLE
CLASS I.
CLASS 11. CLASS III. CLASS IV. CLASS V.
Kational.
Irrational.
MT'U
MTI
N
Kl
(MA)
or
or
or
or
or
Sentient Class.
Tree Class.
Species Class.
Small ThingClase
Action Class.
Sing. Plur.
Sinff. Plur.
King. Plur.
Sing. Plur.
Sinff. Plur.
Classifier
M' Mu Wa
M' Mu Mi
N N
Ki Vi
(Ji) Ma
Prefix
Typical
JVotm
m't'u wat'u
person people
rrtl miti
tree trees
nyumba nyumba
house houses
k'itu vit'u
thing things
jina majina
name, names
man men
Typical
Adjective
mdogo wadogo
short, little,
mrefu mirefu
tall, high,
k'ubwa k'ubwa
great, big, large
kibaya vibaya
bad
jipya mapya
new
Email
long
Remarks
Includes only
Not anim-
Both animates
S o me t h i n g
Many verb-
on Class
nouns which
ates. Wide-
and inani-
small and
al nouns
Character-
represent
spre a d i n g
mates. Most
compnct
denot i n g
istics
persons,some
exten s i v e
animals and
action.
•words of for-
things, e.g.
fruits. Com-
Large
eign origin
moto, mto,
mon nouns of
things.
and verbal
mkono
foreign origin.
Fo r e i g n
nouns denot-
In this class
nouns of
ing "agent."
nouns begin-
office
Names and
ning with ch,
nouns of any
k, p, t, t (un-
other class,
less foreign)
representing
are aspirated
persons, take
thus — ch', k',
the agree-
p', t', t'
ments of
Class I.
STUDY I
27
OF CONCORDS
CLASS VI. CLASS VII.
CLASS VIII. CLASS IX. CLASS X.
Irrational.
Locatives and Time.
(Jl)
U (0. & W.)
PA
KU
MU (Plur. of VIII.
or
and
or
or
and IX.) or
Monster Class.
A bstract Class.
^^ Place Class.
Motion Class.
Within Class.
Locative Termination -Nl.
Sinff. Plur.
Sinff. Plur.
Stuff, and Plur.
(Ji) Ml
U Nyu
Pa
Ku
Mu
or -ni suffix
or -ni suffix
or -nl suffix
ubaya
(nyumba) -ni pa
at or by the
(uyumba) -ni kwa
to or towards the
(nyumba)-ni mwa
Sinff. within
(house)
(house)
(house)
Plur. to the
(houses
jit'u mijit'u
uzl nyuzi
pahali
kufa
mwahali
ill-conditioned
person persons
string strings
udogo
a place
(" somewhere")
to die, death,
" dying
places
nyonge minyonge
m'bovu mbovu
pazuri
kwangu
mpana
mean, weak
rotten
beautiful
my
broad
ubovu, rotten
(used with ab-
stract nouns)
Abnormal things
Names of
countries.
Qualities.
The va r i a b 1 e
prep o s i t i o n
pa (of) and
The variable
preposition
Kwa (of) and
The variable
preposition
mwa (of) and
Plural con-
prefix pa or p
prefix kw fol-
prefix mu or m
cords same
following the
lowing the lo-
following the
as Cl. III.
locative, de-
cative, denote
locative (ex-
note rest in,
motion to-
pressed or
or at, a place
wards a place.
understood)
N.B.— The lo-
denote — (1)
cative m a y
within (sinff.),
often be only
(2) to, towards
underst o o d —
(plia:)
not expressed
28
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY II
Watumishi — Servants
m't'u (i.), man, person, somebody.
m'toto (i.), boy, child (boy or girl).
'maji (v. pi.), water.
moto (ii.), fire, heat.
k'itu (iv.), thing, substance,
something, anything,
n'/aa (iii.), hunger, famine,
pssa (iii.), pice,
zainu (iii.), turn, watch,
'mafata (v. pi.), oil, fat.
/aa (iii.), lamp,
k'elele (iii.), noise,
k'engele (iii.), bell,
kazi (iii.), work, task, employ-
ment.
sabrmi (iii.), soap,
nguo (iii.), cloth, clothes,
chakula (iv.), food, bread, a meal,
ki/ambaa (iv.), duster, towel, rag.
mwenzi (i.), companion, fellow,
equal,
ku-tumika, to serve, to be in
service.
ku-sikia, to hear, to feel,
ku-tezama, to look, to look at.
ku-twaa, to take,
ku-oga, to bathe,
ku-nawa (mikono), to wash
(hands).
ku-fua, to wash (lit. beat) clothes.
ku-osha, to wash, to cleanse
(things).
ku-la, to eat.
ku-isna, iini.sh.
kisha, ukisha, ( = when you have
finished) then.
ku-ja, to come.
ku-fanya, to do, to make.
kw-enda, to go.
ku-pata, to get, to have, to bo
able,
kn-lala, to sleep (primarily, to
lie down, to go to bed).
ku-nunua, to buy, to purchase,
ku-leta, to bring.
ku-?aka. to want, to require,
ku-nyamaza, to be quiet, silent,
ku-weza, to be able, to " can.''
ku-ru'/i, to come back, return,
punish.
ku-sahau, to foriM.
ku-tengeza, to prepare, to arrange,
set in readiness,
ba'fo, not yet.
haifai, it won't do.
sasa, now.
sasa hivi, just now, at once,
directly.
pia, also, too, as well, altogether.
in, only, just,
fena, again, and ... as well,
besides, also, moreover,
basi, enough, that will do then !
upesi, quick, quickly, fast.
kwa, by means of, for, from, by,
with, to.
vizuri i well, very well, good !
vyemaj nicely, beautifully.
haya ! Come along ! Now then !
All right ! Here !
lini 1 when ? -a, of.
1 See "General Xotes on Nouns," note 2, Study XXI.
STUDY II 29
Read and Translate
Mtoto, 2 ndoo. - Leto maji. Naam, Bibi, 3 n'tfaleta sasa
hivi. Haya, upesi! Wasikia? Nasikia, Bibi. Twatfaka
chakula sasa. Vyema, Bibi, 3 tuteleta upesi. Jee, Bibi.
Wasikia ndaa? Nyamaza, mtoto, fanya 4kazi <u. Haya,
Bibi, nimeleta chakula. Jee, mtoto, umeleta [5na] maji?
6 Mwenzangu 3alileta, Bibi. Basi sasa waweza kwenda
k(u)oga. Kudi upesi. Ndiyo, Bibi. 6 Mwenzangu ateka
maji 7 ya moto na sabuni. Vyema, 3 atfapata. Mwafanya
k'elele sana, watoto ! TwaJaka (ku)lala. Bibi, nataka
pesa nipate kununua chakula. Haya basi, twaa pesa.
Enda upesi. Ahasania, Bibi !
Translate
Have you brought [the] lamp, boy? Not yet, Ma'am,
my fellow [servant] 8 has gone to buy oil. 9 When will
he come back? He will come back directly, Ma'am.
Have you washed [your] clothes? Yes, Ma'am, I have
washed [them]. Did you wash (and) the duster? No,
Ma'am, 1 forgot [it]. Can you bring [some] water? Yes,
Ma'am, I can. My fellow [servant] has come now, Ma'am,
it is (m) 10 his (yakive) turn to serve. Very well, let him
bring [the] food then, we want to eat. Ba quiet, boy,
you make too much noise, it won't do. Very well, Ma'am,
I will be quiet DOW. Bring [the] lamp quickly, we want
to look at something. That will do, you can go now.
2 .ZVdoo = imperative of kuja. Lete = imperative of kuleta. These
are the only two irregular imperatives in Swahili. All others retain
the final vowel of the stem, e.g. shika, hold ! samehe, forgive ! rud/,
return ! titbu, repent !
3 The objective particle may be omitted in familiar language.
4 Tako (your) understood.
5 Conjunctions are used more freely in Swahili than in English.
0 Contraction of " mwenzi wangu " (my fellow-companion). For
contracted suffixes see Study XVI.
7 Lit. " water of heat," i.e. hot water or water just from the fire.
See Study XI. for variable preposition "of" or " from."
8 Kwenda, to go, kwisha, to finish, and all monosyllabic verbs
retain the ku of the infin. in certain tenses. Vide Study VI.
8 The interrogative, like other adverbs, follows the verb in
Swahili.
10 Adjectives usually follow their substantives.
30
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
w
00
>-,
o
e
s
o>
W "g
§
1
S
II
(C
O
S5 "*"*
en
1— 1
H
1— 1
CO
.5
|
w d
EH PH
H 0
g B
•5
&
a
_J.
of
• fco
s ^
-C P
1C
,5
Cl
a
o
O
S H
•
---^^~"
cT «T aT
o o
O
T
s
^ 1
M
tC
I
5S3
— — p
.§ j
'N '""
-4->
g
"SI
'C
CH
'S
f
oT
fl
t^f
-2
"a
s
- 2 «T
d 3
<y
_
^"*>
u
.2
o S ** c
g =s
c
H
•«"
S
|
a
2 g^ ^
&
O
<J
cl
m
p
§ °
M
r^.
5
£
£
'3
of
a
"a
s 1 1 i 1
|l ill
§
P5
M
H
_;
(N CO
i-i i<i «'
2
w
.8
^
CO
i-S
UH
EH
,2
P3
sT
•«*
O
_s
S
"o
<
_c
S
'-i4
X
3
m
o
P
O
•4
o
2
^ =
S
o
'•*•
o
^ "a-
•w ®
«a
I
«
D .
pt, .Qi
1 -^
o
"o
si
^
•S o ~ %
*3
a
K
kx< •"
w ^^
'"" i
Ji
ill 1
'§
c
a
w
be
w S
o?
o
cf K
0
P-;
i— i
1
S
— fl
C"1 o
H H
J-3:
60
C fe
S *"
60 <o
O >
3 03
a
O
W
•**
W -^
CQ
^^ s "^
s—~~—^. ~
"^
PH
CC
00
1 ***
d
X
ff
— is
«? 1
H
B^
(S -g
tc
r2
„
a
5
£
cf -"
2*
*5»
"3
>-> c<
> y>
^~
at
.5
— " Jj'
~ -^
ja
s
^ '£
S —
O
o
., ,
r & "S
-5 a
5 a
S . . vi
STUDY II
31
" 1 1
•S -S
.•a R 1
G
I
3
1.
ri
P
o ~
"*"* •• t£
-9s c8 ^^ o
• •-T
f \^
£ "5
si s
o aijj
-5 "±: as
'S'N- 1
"5
g
/-N
13
S
•33
'5 „
6 |
»- c3 «^
«-.•§ o
1
k
o
3
ii a
s"^
P
j3 ». 03*
"rH rf*
o
^^
p
• r-l
*"H .— r
(3
^" -2 "P
C*"S
^
•— '^«
rW P
.- — '^
•g c3 os'^ -^
"S •" "os "^
•g
3 IS
'-^4«S
^ 5^'eS "^
£
"75 a
S 8 p
g
H
"p 03
5 a ^
8
ft
r-I i>i CO
r-I <?i CO
£
1-H
c<i eo'
r-!iN CO
rf
5 S *
r-! csico'
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
*••<•».<«•
f 1
to n
3 *•
** tJD
|
,5
>*H
M
a
to
a
<H
'N
1 1
(fl o,
1 J
M
EC
|
O 0 OP
t£ tf. it
S «i
§
<
I
cT
1 £ li
£
^
ff
= = =
n
0
0
| 27,
IMPERATIVE
| 2»rf 7'Zur. k
-PRESENT AND P
Pers. Pronominu
'3
5 a 1
« 7^ CO
;ween the pronomi
, and let him tie.
3 terminal change
OOD.— PAST TEI
"article -nge- or -n
Pers. Prunoinina!
q
9
to
Jp
:.
"a
ci N >.
eo
N
IMPERATI
tie (Mou).
SUBORDINATE
rim/ tie (thou).
BJUNCTIVE MOOD.-
"i -x' i | S
^£ S ^
Subjunctive insert IM bel
Ex. — Akafunge,
end in e, i, or n, make m
CONDITIONAL M
Characteristic Tenso F
i
'i
jl
C w
J
"s
'•" -5
^ 0
of g
P
aT
to
03
to
CQ
8
~o3 <o ^
.2 "S £
£
6=1 *3
' ^^ ""x. "S s _• -^ T — r~^
i ^
M
S3
pf
.S |
- ?
I
te
« « ii
c^
£
3
£
mr.
•S a a
P
•~ fts
fi
.^ t. ^ ^
O
•f*
-r- P
-X
S .g
"3
o
1
"3
to
3}
of
M ^
*"s
w •-.
c
Q
to
to
-a
S
O
s"
1
'ti
2
^ v —
OJ 0
~i
|
1
1
o
6
'^
a "
tc ti
pg,
H J-
O *i
fc
§>
£
0
to
a
C
l"a
DD
'S 9 of
£
'ft
P
03
STUDY III
STUDY III
Walimu — Teachers
mwalimu (i.), teacher, professor,
learned man, schoolmaster.
mwanafunri (i.), scholar, pupil.
chuo (iv.), book.
wino (no pi.) (vii.), ink.
kalamu (iii.), pen, pencil.
peseli, peniseli (iii.), pencil.
harufu (iii.), letter (of alphabet),
scent, smell, odour.
lugha (iii.), language, tongue.
kiti (iv.), chair.
meza (iii.), table.
neno (v.), word.
maana (v. pi.), meaning, reason,
because.
maana yakwe, its or their mean-
ing.
leo, to-day.
jana, yesterday.
nciia (iii.), way, road, street,
path.
lafarfhali, please, if you please.
kujifunza, to learn.
ku-soma, to read, to go to school,
to study.
ku-aniiika, to write.
ku-sema, to speak, to say, to talk.
ku-<amka, to pronounce.
ku-ambia, to tell.
ku-sikiza, to listen.
ku-endeleza, to spell.
ku-jua, to know.
ku-elea, to be clear, to enlighten.
ku-shika, to hold, to catch, to
seize, to take.
ku-ona, to see, to find,
ku-weka, to put, place, put-by,
ordain, appoint,
ku-jaribu, to try, to test, to
tempt,
ku-furahi, to be pleased, happy,
glad.
ku-uliza, to ask (a question),
ku-jibu, to answer,
ku-fundisha, kofunza, to teach,
ku-pa, to give.
ku-k'ed, to sit down, to stay, to
dwell.
nini ? what ? (pron.).
gani ? what (adj.).
matamko (v.), pronunciation,
kw-anza, to begin,
kwanza, first,
kw-isha, to finish,
kisha, then (when that is finished),
afterwards, also.
ku-chelewa, to be late,
labuda, perhaps, that may be.
mbonal why?
hawezi, he is sick,
sana, thoroughly (or any adverb
expressing completeness).
karatasi, paper,
masuali
(v.), questions.
masiala
mauzo
maulizo
majibu (v.), answer.
msteri (ii.), a line.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
34 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1 Bead and Translate
Jee, mwalimu amekuja? Bado, Bibi, yuaja sasa,
namuona 2n<iiani. Bwana, jambo ! Jambo Bibi ! Mtoto
lete viti. Bwana, k'efi. Abasan/a, Bibi, 3nimek'efi. Sasa
naiaka kalamu na karatasi. Haya, Bwana, fafadhali shika
kalamu. Watfaka 4 niandike mimi ? Naam, Bibi, jaribu
kuancZika sasa. Jee umekwisha 5 andika ? Ndiyo, mwa-
limu, nimekwisha. Basi, sasa 4na/aka usome. Nisome
chuo gani ? Soma chuo 6 cha kwanza. Soma maneno.
TJkisha, 7 nambia 8 maana 9 yakwe. 10 Yakwelea ? Naam,
mwalimu, yanelea sana. Wajua maana 9 yakwe ? Najuu.
Vyema Bibi, soma /ena. Ukisha, endeleza maneno. Soma
sana nipate kusikia. Tamka vyema maneno njifunzo
kusoma vizuri.
1 The English custom of suppressing titles in the conversation of
equals would appear abrupt and discourteous if attempted in Swahili.
2 "-ni" suffixed to nouns denotes locative case, and may be
variously translated by the prepositions by, at, to, within, on, of, from,
etc. See Table of Concords.
3 Most Swahili verbs of posture really signify the taking up of a
position, e.g. kuk'eti = to sit on the ground. Hence the perfect tcnst-
(nimek'e/i) = I have taken up a position (J am seated), and the
Present Tense (nak'efi) = I am in the act or habit of (sitting) and so,
in this case, has come to mean I dwell, or stay.
4 Here the Swahili construction analyzes more logically than the
English " me to write."
5 After an auxiliary, the Infin. Jcu of the principal verb is
frequently omitted.
« See note 7, Study II.
7 Contraction of nianibia. All objective particles preceding
imperatives, require the final a of the stem (either primary or
derivative) to change to e, except when the 1st pors. sing. obj.
particle precedes, in which case the final a is retained. E.g. Nipeleka,
Nipelekani, Nipelekea, but Mpeleke, Tupeleke, Wapelekee.
8 See "General Notes on Nouns," note 2, Study XXI.
9 Yakwe (not yao, although it refers to words). N.B. — Possessive
adjectives, having reference to inanimate objects, never take a plural
form.
10 Lit. " Are they clear to you ? " — maana has no sing.
STUDY in 35
Translate
Why is [the] teacher late to-day ? Perhaps he is n ill.
No ! He is coming now. Good-morning, teacher, are
you feeling well ? Quite well, thank you. [Do] sit
down. 12Give me a book, please, Bibi, and you take a
book and read. Now put the book 13on [the] table and
listen. I will ask you questions. Very good ! And I
will try to answer. That will do now, you have answered
well. I am very pleased. Do you want ink ? Yes (I
want) and a pencil (also). The pupil is trying to speak
the Swahili language (luglia ya Ki-swahili). He can
read [the] letters. When did he begin? I taught him
[the] first line yesterday.
11 The Pres. Indie, of kuweza, to be able, conjugated negatively,
stands for "I am sick," etc. To express the primary meaning
" I am not able," etc., the Neg. Fut. is frequently used " sifaweza,"
etc.
12 See note 7 (p. 32).
13 See Note 2.
36
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS— WITH
SEPARABLE PHONOUNS (those that can
Class I.
Class 11.
Class III.
Class IV.
Singular
Subjective
and
Objectice
mimi, I or me
wewe, thou or thee
yeye, he or him, she
or her
uo, that same
(tree)
iyo, that game
(house)
kicho, that
same (thing)
Plural
Subjective
and
Objectiee
swiswi, we or us
nywinywi, ye or you
wao, they or them
iyo, those
same (trees)
zizo, those
same (houses)
vivyo, those
same (things)
Singular
Abbreviated
Pronoun
mi, I or me
we, thou or thee
ye, e, he or him, she
or her
o, it (the
tree)
yo, it (the
house)
cho, it (the
thing)
Plural
Abbreviated
Pronoun
swi, we or us
nywi, ye or you
o, they or them
yo, they (the
trees)
20, they (the
houses)
vyo, they (the
things)
Other separable pronouns are nani! (who?) and nini 1 (what?) — both indeclin-
other). The latter threo
By prefixing na to the abbreviated form, we get the conjunctive pronoun— And
thing)
By prefixing ndi- we obtain the Emphatic
INSEPARABLE PRONOUNS (those bound
Class I.
Class II.
Class HI.
Class IV.
Singular
ni, n', I
u, w, it (tree)
I, y, it (house)
ki, oh, it
Subjective
a, w, thou
(thing)
Prefix
a, yu, he or she
Plural
tu, tw, we
i, y, they
zi, z, they
vi, vy, they
Subjective
ma, mw, m', you
(trees)
(houses)
(things)
Prefix
wa, w, they
Singular
ni, n, me
u, w, it (tree)
i, y, U (house)
ki, ch, it
Objective
ku, kw, k, thee
(thing)
Infix or
mu, mw, m', him or
Prefx
her
Plural
tu, tw, us
i, y, them
«i, z, them
vi, vy, them
Objective
wa, w, you
(trees)
(houses)
(things)
Infix or
wa, w, them
Prefix
-ni, the abbreviated form of nini (what *) can be suffixed to any
NOTE. — The objective infix immediately precedes the stem of the verb.
NOTE. — The " mu (3rd pers. sing, obj.) is used
STUDY III
37
PRONOMINAL PREFIXES AND INFIXES.
stand alone as independent words).
Class V.
Class VI.
Class VII.
Class VIII.
Class IX.
Class X.
lilo, that
eame (word)
lilo, that
same (mon-
ster)
no, that
same (string)
papo, that
same (place)
"just
there "
kuko, that
same (direc-
tion) "just
there"
yayo, those
same (words)
iyo, those
same (mon-
sters)
zizo, those
same
(strings)
mumo, those
same plucea
"just there-
in"
lo, it (the
word)
lo, it (the
monster)
o, it (the
string)
po, it (the
place)
ko, it (the
dying or
direction)
yo, they (the
words)
yo, they (the
monsters)
zo, they (the
strings)
mo,they (the
places)
able — mwenyewe (himself), mwenyi (having, possessing), mwengine (another,
are declinable (see p. 62).
I, and me (/tarn/) ; and he, with her (nae) ; and it (the word) (nalo) ; with it (the
(nac/io), eti1.
Present of the Verb " To Be." See Study XIV.
up in the construction of the verb).
Class V.
Class VI.
Class VII.
Class VIII.
Class IX.
Class X.
li, 1, it
(word)
li, 1, it (mon-
ster)
u, w, it
(string)
pa, p, it
(place)
ku, kw, it
(dying)
ya, y, they
(words)
li, 1, it
(word)
1, y, they
(monsters)
li, 1, it (mon-
ster)
zi, z, they
(strings)
u, w, it
(string)
pa, p, it
(place)
ku, kw, it
(dying)
ma, mw, m',
they
(places)
ya, y, them
(words)
i, y, them
(monsters)
zi, z, them
(strings)
mu, mw, m',
them
(places)
verb as an inseparable particle. Wafanyani 1 What are you doing ?
It is generally expressed as well as the noun in the objective case,
before the vowels o and u, and sometimes before «.
38
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY IV
Nyumbani — In the house
mlango (ii.), door, entrance.
ufunguo (yii.), key.
ukumbi (vii.), ball.
roshani (iii.), balcony.
</araja (v.), stairs, steps (of stone).
dirisha (v.), window.
chumba (iv.), bedroom, room.
ghala (v.), store-room.
sakafu (iii.), flat stone roof or
pavement.
dari (v.), house-top, roof,
orofa (vii.), upper storey,
sebule (iii.), private room,
ua (vii.), courtyard,
baraza (v.), verandab.
kizingifi (iv.), door-step,
mkeka (ii.), mat.
zulia (v.)> carpet.
Moo (iv.), mirror,
p'aka (iii.), cat.
ku-angalia, to regard, to behold,
to visit, to be careful,
ku-panda, to go up, come up,
climb.
ku-sb.uka, to come down, go down,
ku-funga, to sbut, close,
ku-fungua, to undo, open.
ku-<oka, to go out, to come from,
leave (situation), come out.
ku-ngia, to go in, come in, come
on (of rains, etc.).
ku-pea, ku-fyagia (z'bar), to
sweep.
ku-sugua, to rub, polish, clean,
ku-safi, to clean, cleanse.
ku-/afute, to look for, search,
ku-ita, to call.
ku-sihi, to beseech, pray (peremp-
tory),
ku-teka, to laugh, to mock at,
smile.
ku-lia, to cry, weep,
ku-ngoja, to wait, to wait for.
a! oh!
n'de, out, outside,
n'dani, in, inside.
<'ini, down, below,
juu, up, upstairs, over, above,
against,
wapi ? where ?
kidogo (adv.), a little, rather.
wazi (indecl. adj. and adv.),
open, ajar, clear.
siku (iii.), day, twenty-four hours,
nsiku (vii.), night.
m/ana (ii.), day-time, mid-day,
kucha (ix.), dawn, sunrise,
kuiwa (ix.), sunset.
miana kuiwa (or kuiwa), all day
long,
usiku kucha (or kucha), all night
long.
tele, much, many, plenty, a lot of.
p'anya (iii.)> rat.
haidhuru, never mind, it c!ce»
not matter.
STUDY IV 39
Bead and Translate
Fungua dirisha, iiafaka kutezama n'de. Naona wat'u
/elo nf/iani, tufungo mlango upesi. Ufunguo u wapi?
Uko juu. Enda darini kaangalie. Wat'u l wamekwisha
kwenda sasa, jee nifungue mlango? Ndiyo, 2fungua,
kisha pea daraja na ua, na mabaraza pia. Narfaka mkeka
kuweka kizingitfini. Ngoja kidogo utepawa. 3Yuko
wapi p'aka ? Paka anatoka sasa hivi. Anakwenda wapi ?
Labunda ana kwenda ku£afu<a p'anya. Mwite, natfaka ale
chakula ; asikia ndaa usiku kucha alifanya k'elele. Jee,
mtoto umesugua kioo? Naam, bibi, nimesugua pia na
madirisha. Jee wewe ulikwenda wapi? Nalikuwa
sakafuni nikilia. Mbona ulilia ? 4 Maana nalitfaka kutoka
n'de, iakini naliitwa. Haidhimi !
Translate
Come down, I pray you, at once. Your sister is
looking for you. Where is she ? She is in the private
room. Tell her to come (pres. subj.) into the hall. The
bedrooms want sweeping (pass, inf.) and [the] store-room
also. Is the door of the upper-storey open? No, it is
5 shut. Open [it] then. The boy wants to come inside.
Very well, let him come inside and go down below (sub.
subj.). The teacher has laughed all day. Why did he
laugh ? Ask him. He says he saw a rat looking (part,
tense) in the mirror (loc.). Are there (icako) many
rats in the house ? Yes, there are very many.
1 The use of the auxiliary verb kwisha (to finish), is a favourite
way of expressing an emphatic perfect. It may be translated
" already," but is more often omitted altogether in English. This
verb Itwislia has an idiomatic perfect, much used —
nsha, I have finished. tunsha, we have finished.
unshu, mnsha,
ansha, unsha, insha, etc. wansha, insha, yansha, etc.
2 See note 3, Study II.
3 See note 5, Study I.
4 Maana = (primarily) meant MJ, cause, etc., but has come to serve as
a conjunction (because, that is wfey), and may stand at beginning or
end of clause.
5 Perf. Tense of Passive. See next Study.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1
•8
U fefl
o .S
c a
el
p3 o
^ 3
1
ast been.
i, or it has been.
§ s 1
lit
£ j» S
1
b
5
Ill
(3 ? "*
•«^ »,
1 1
||
H
i
^
-i «
5s •«
0>
i&l
2
a
ef
oT
•F-t
•— .— > ^*
H c^
i
^ ^
OB oT
^ ^ § "35
H -S
p
s s
f3 ^
3 S fe S «
M
JC ^
Q3 *j^
S 5 ••* so
M ^*
08
2 ^2 _& c3
-;
^-^
^^"^ • -*^
^^— L —
P5
w
<D tC
:2§
£•§
Si-
Hi
o ,«
§1
X
PH |
£
~g
0
Q B «P
3s a
Q^ " ®
.11
'5 ""
o
*:
1-i
.- '5 '5 .2 g, s
* e S J g^
"3
c
1
s
S
a J |
e"^!
1 «-"a
•2 •§ >-
o
1
o> . -
c!
b*
o •
'& A ,-3 "" a,,
p °
£
O
ime or
a - «
3 8 S
® ® 5 «*
a a- e.
0 . « 0
iiill
v— x
t-.2
'C^
S K
s
P S
5'S :*
r
"Is
^'~; .
w 1
_•
(NCO
r-I 3^1 :-:
1*3
— *~^
'> -^ -
^N
f |
BS i-
h- 1
H
O
§£
1^8
0
w
05 2
£&*
5
g-
&
•S^
0
$h%^
iSllli
i— i
•5
<« Ji 2!
j"
01 n3
-» s u
•
rS
W
tfj
• w t4
1*1
zf
w
no
^
Js^
• I*
1 i»-S
Ij
cs -2"^
S § • -2 II
H ^
.
S "S
H .S
,»
g ^J
C ^ 05 •SJ'L'2
CQ
^*<
"2 s
.
»^4 ?
• *^» ®
w S
^
^fjf1
-£'3
o o^
&ll
c: K
CU <H
•if
of
t> 0)
t^
p
_ t<
O O)
Ut ^
"c3
c
a 3
^ C3
'>
H **
0 ^
I
— S
0
1 o
w G
i* i,
1
P *r
J
S-;
^^•a
°
rfft
S c3"'<*
^ i
f 5 1
I
'5
P ^>
5 a ss
^
O r*s
£
~
c^i «5
i-i ci co
STUDY IV
41
«r
"
*
5* «5i***»
•-;•** a
II
Ilr
3 A
Oa j-
J *
5 SrS
D
i
o
o -jS ~ ;
-s *l'a ^--§
e
1
rt d
-•;5~o- fi"aa*S
o"
&
rH 9* CO
e
k
C3
1
^ ^ "*' •£" '" £
|
0 J-
^>2
P.--2 g "^^.jJ*
1 1
k
3
2 °
^oiis^--^ •S.g'3^
£;3
•~~M «J '^-'3^
& g
J^
•
'S "3 "5 -2'S ^
•
C P
cj -5 S ft
0)
E
£
H
£
i-i *4 CO i-J IN CO
£
r-H ri
co ^<>iec
_^
d
.&
»
"S
'•£
23
3
a
a
^
•**
PH
Q
•«*
.-T
s
ij
8 »^i
•J
*S
••^.
•8 %' . g
M
•
g
oo S
§ S
%r ** ^ v
P^> "» £ s
|
OS
,4 Si 1 1 i
w
H
5 O
^S
A
^ *> i-c
^ ^ «5>-fc*
•9
i— i
&
1 § ^ 1 1 »>
w
g
11
'e ists'e
a gas
§
3
K
*~H S -« £ S>S
H
0 0
e ceo
o
00
.j-
O9
is
w
H
1
&i
.a
OQ
of of
* It p
3 ,2 3
^ ^^J^_
i
•<
*
f
_^
s" s of
^ S_^_
*a
at
»
J3
«5 >j.
ri
V »> ».
H
00
*• r. +.
0)
o> r3
fC
i
B
£
"^ '>
IVNIU
Prefixe
sl| l|
«
o
r *^
1 *
Qj
r^ c3 -rt •— •
1!)
"3
S" o? of J 'S
s
rO •*
H ^
._ , Gi N N
J3
"^ ^ *^£ *N oT
pJ3
i
•— • S •• .^~
°g
-"'"^ J5 aT^
s
^ ^^ ^^
o
5
w «^.- S"S
Ct
a
fl * 'S "^
K*
'S'3'S
2
3 c£" M •• S
®
"^
^ ^.s^ -^^r'l,
fi
c3 a
eTa o, Jj*-^ *
^
I-H s>i co
oj
1^^" s'ii"
j
•a-S-
•i"1 5 "a ^
-
|>
1
FH o4 05 i-i iri co
(2
— ?i r: PH' iji co' ^
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
VE MOOD.
| 2nd Plur. iwani or m'we, be ye.
IMPERATIVE.
| 2nd Plur. mkawe, and be ye.
J
w ^
CO
H
H
H
B
M
Pers. Pronominal Preflxes.
1. tu that ice may or mighi
be, or let us be, 01
Chilli we be ?
2. m' \ we, that ye may or mz'gAi
( be.
3. wa, i, zi, vi, ya, i, zi 1 <7ta< Mey mtty or mighi
/ be, or Zef them be.
onominal prefix and stem. Nikawe, and let me be.
[OOD— PAST TENSE.
Plur.
Pers. Pronominal Preflxes.
1. tunge or tungeli \ we should have been.
2. ninge or m'ngeli ye would have been.
3. wange, inge, zinge, \ kuwa, they would or might
vinge, yange, inge, f have been.
ziiigc
>— i
H
4
PS
H
W
H
$
i— i
Q
O
O
|| ° 1 g H
g e S
\ <3 »
•« ^S 4
', IS «> s &;
PH
3
P
M
a I* 1 N-S o ^ s|J
r-1 t, » fi ^ O o5 F" t- 1 ~S ^
I
3, oe Mow.
SUBO
(Z be thou.
JUNCTIVI
«-^ ^.c. Q S* S
ei Il«i,- 8 ° ssJ
S i^ ®^ ^ •" r«ff *-" ^ ^3 •"
s«m53'*!2SS S '"~e»S? aTffiJ
*~H "*• ,5 •2i'~ O * « °* r^ -^
'SoH'ci'BO'T' U "S •* 1 J> 8
M! fC ifl "* ^
fc
c
«
yj
_
o
03
S
of
if
02 |
.1
>
•S ?
e
03
5
—^~—^ 'a
'*% *^L
F
3
«; -^ T^- 02
ai *^ •> •> -
2*
g*
*S " ~03
*g 9 2 ^
S3
1
1
-: :- i
•2 -"a §
" -^ —",300
*< a) ^3 ^ ^ o3 to
c*j
»l
s 13 o
a '3 9 gs « *
i .*£ ™
O ^ . "^ © CJ
PK ^ »- O
^ §3 ° ®"-S G §
• "2» _r
.S fl fl
. — — —
STUDY V
43
NOTE. — The verbal suffixes po, Tto, mo, may be suffixed to all
these persons and tenses, also interrogatively and negatively, as —
Pers. Sing.
1. Nipo, I am here.
2. Umekuwafco, thou hast been there.
3. Yn/co, he or she is tJiere, he or she exists.
8. ufco ? is it (the mat, mkeka) there ?
3. haki^o, it (the mirror, kioo) is not here.
Plur.
1. tukiwamo, if we are in it, if we have to do with it.
2. m'takuwamo, ye will be in it.
3. vralikuwapo, they were here.
STUDY V
Mezani — At the table
nguo * ya meza (iii.), table cloth.
kijiko (iv.), spoon.
uma (vii.), fork.
sahani (iii.), plate, dish.
2 kisahani (iv.), saucer.
kikombe (iv.), cup.
bilauri (iii.), glass, tumbler.
sinia (v.), tray.
sanduku (v.), box, cupboard.
kawa (iii.), dish-cover (plaited).
chai (iii.), tea.
kahawa (iii-)» coffee.
sukari (iii.), sugar.
mkate (ii.), bread, loaf, cake.
asali (iii.), honey, syrup.
fayari, ready, in readiness.
kuan</ika, to set in order (table).
kuondoka, to go away, to get up,
to leave.
kuondoa, to take away, remove.
kunwa, to drink.
ku<oa, to put out, give (out), take
out, to offer.
kuweka, to put, put away, keep,
appoint, put off.
kupakua, to dish up.
kupasha moto, to warm up.
kupoa moto, to get cold.
kuate, to leave, leave off, to give
up.
kukunrfa, to fold.
kukun</na, to unfold.
kumiza, to swallow.
kufafuna, to chew, eat.
kuon'fa, to taste, try, to tempt.
3 kupiga, to beat, strike.
k'iu (iii.), thirst.
sawasawa, even, straight, pro-
perly.
kabisa, altogether, entirely, quite.
1 See " of," Study XI.
2 "Ki" = common diminutive prefix. See note 5, Study XVIII.
3 " Piga " is capable of various meanings according to the noun
it is coupled with — kupiga msfari, to draw a line ; kupiga k'engele,
to ring a bell; kupiga ch'apa, to print; kupiga k'elele, to make a
noise ; kupiga t'eke, to kick ; kupiga fundo, to tie a knot ; kupiga
magot'i, to kneel ; kupiga pasi, to iron ; kupiga mbinja, to whistle ;
kupiga k'ura, to cast lots ; kupiga yowe, to shout out in fear, etc.
44 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Jama, boy's name. nani ? who ?
bari'/i (iii.), cold, cool. hivi, thus like this.
safi, clean. asububi, morning, this morning.
t'aka, t'akat'aka (iii.), dirt. hapa, here.
kwamba, that (conj.), whether as * /amn, sweet, nice, sweetncsa.
if, if. kumwaya, to spill, to pour away,
lakini, but. kumwaika, to be spilt,
kweli (iii.), truth, true, indeed. katika, in, into, on, among, etc.
Nrfoni tukak'efi mezani, chai ifaletwa sasa hivi. Nguo
ya meza si safi, mbona ? Nasikia kwamba Juma alimwaya
kahawa hapa asubuhi. Mwite Juma. Juma ! waitvva.
Naam bibi, n'nakuja, 4sxilinita? Ndiyo n'nakwita. Ni
kweli ulimwaya kahawa katika nguo ya meza leo ?
Si kweli bibi. Kahawa imemwaika, lakini si mimi !
5 N'nani basi ? Labuda ni p'aka, nalimuona chumbani.
P'aka aweza kumwaya kahawa? Aweza, akisikia kiu
na 6 kufaka kunwa. Haya basi, ondoka sasa. Mwambio
AH alete sukari na mkate na asali. Viko wapi visa-
hani? Vimo sandukuni, walisahau kuviweka mezani.
Vilete upesi, chai ifapoa moto. 7 Imekwisha kuwa baridi
kabisa; haifai, watoto, kuchelewa hivi. Sasa nafaka
vijiko na vikombe.
4 -/amu, tupn, tonga, and other adjectives are capable of an
adverbial use, in which case there is no concord.
4a The unavoidable use of the familiar pronoun " thee " and " thou "
to persons of all ranks and ages is as much to be regretted as the
exclusive use in English of the polite form " you."
s «|p " _ copula "ni " contracted.
6 " Na " (and) cannot connect two finite verbs. In the Past Indie.,
Subj., and Imper., the subordinate tense with " ka " introduces the
" and " and obviates the difficulty. In all other cases, the second
verb must be put in the Infinite, which then bears the force of the
tense and mood of the preceding verb. Neither will " na " connect
two adjectives. If we wish to predicate two or more qualities of one
substantive, the second or last (whichever follows the " na ") must bo
converted into an abstract noun. Ex. Mt'u huyu ni mwema net
upole.
» See note 1, Study IV.
STUDY V 45
Translate
Glasses and plates 8 are wanted for the table, people
are coming for 9 mid-day meal here to-day. Shall I bring
spoons and forks too ? Yes, I want to set the table now
in readiness. Will they drink water ? Yes, they will
drink water 10 if it is clean. Take a tray and dish up the
food, then ring the bell to call the people. You have
forgotten to put the dish-covers n over the dishes. Tell
the cook to warm up 12 yesterday's fowl. Try to fold the
cloth properly. Can you set the table nicely if the cloth
is not clean ? No ! it will not do. We tasted the honey
and we found [it] sweet. The child swallowed something
and he said, " It is sugar." If it 13 was sugar he would
have smiled, but now he is crying. Let us go away, he
will leave off. If a child cries he will not get (hapati)
cake (loaf of sweetness).
EXPLANATION OF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN STRONG VERB
To Be AND SIMPLE COPULA
1. The strong verb "to be" is that which affirms, not
the peculiar quality or identity of the thing or things,
person or persons, but the place, the circumstance, state,
or surroundings, in which it, or they, happen or are
desired to be, differing according to number and person,
tense and mood, as seen above.
2. (a) The u-eak verb " to be " or simple copula (ni = " is "
or " are " — same for all classes) is confined to the present
tense of the Indicative, and differs only from the strong
verb in the third persons of that tense. It is used when
8 Verb must take concords of cl. iii. to which both nouns belong.
But see note 2, Study XII.
" Trans. " meal of mid-day," and so in all cases where one sub-
stantive is used to qualify another.
10 Participial tense.
11 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
''-' There is no possessive form in Swahili. See note 9.
13 The impersonal " it " when not referring to any afore-mentioned
noun, is translated by the pronominal " i " (as in cl. iii.) and its
correlatives.
46 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
one wants to affirm of a thing or things, person or persons,
that it or they " is " or " are " of a certain quality (not
involving the state or position in which it (or they)
happen to be) or to i lentify two titles or nouns —
Fulani ni mwema, so and so is good.
Wevi ni wangi, thieves are many.
AValimu wangu ni Ali na my teachers are Ali and
Abudulla, Abdallah.
(6) The Negative Simple Copula is si (he, she, or it) " is
not," (they) " are not " ;
Ex. Fulani si mwema, so and so is not good.
Wevi si wangi, thieves are not many.
Walimu wangu si Ali na my teachers are not Ali and
Abudulla, Abdallah.
Si kweli ? is it not true ?
Ni kweli, it is true.
PASSIVE VERBS
Passive stems are formed —
1. By inserting w before final vowel in verbs ending
in a, or ea — •
Ex. Kufungwa, to be shut.
Tutfaelewa, we shall be enlightened.
2. By adding wa to verbs ending in i or e.
Ex. Kurudiwa, to be punished.
Alisamehewa, ho was forgiven.
3. By inserting liw or lew between the final vowels of
the stem when it ends in to, oa, or ua.
Ex. Kuoa, to marry, to wed.
Kuolewa, to be married (eaid only of
the bride).
Kufua, to wash.
Kufuliwa, to be washed.
Kukimbia, to run away.
Kukimbiliwa, to be pursued.
STUDY VI 47
Kutia, to put In, makes kutiwa and kutiliwa. Kuua,
to kill, makes kuuwawa.
4. Verbs ending in u, change the u iato i and add wa.
Ex. Kutubu, to repent, kutubiwa; kushukurn, to give
thanks; kuslmkuriwa, except kusahau, to forget, which
makes kusahauliwa.
Monosyllabic verbs are mostly irregular —
Kula, to eat, kuliwa, to be eaten ; kupa, to give, ku-
pewa and kupawa ; kuja, to come, kujiwa ; kufa, to die,
kufiwa.
Passive subjunctive is formed as follows : —
Nirudiwe, that I may be punished.
Kifuliwe, that it (cl. iv.) may be
washed.
Passive negative is formed thus : —
Sifungwi, I am not bound.
Hasamehewi, he is not forgiven.
STUDY \l
Mekoni — In the kitchen
m'pishi (i.), cook. munyu (ii.), salt,
m'iuzi (ii.), stew. pilipili (iii.), pepper,
k'uni (iii.), firewood. soko (v.), market.
1 kibiriti (iv.), box of matches. maivu (v.), ashes,
kisu (iv.), knife. mashizi (v.), soot, smuts, blacks,
sufuria (v.), saucepan. makaa (v.), coals, embers,
mwiko (ii.), spoon (large). wall (vii.), cooked rice,
mbuzi (iii.;, cocoa-nut grater. k'uku (iii.), fowl,
nazi (iii.), cocoa-nut. " mboga (iii.), vegetable,
nyama (iii.), meat, flesh, game, kupika, to cook (boil or stew),
animal. kuk'anga, to fry.
1 A single match (seldom used) = kijiti, a small piece of wood.
2 " Mboga " is also applied in a wider sense to any relish or sauce
(meat, fish, etc.), that is eaten with the plain boiled rice or Indian
corn porridge. Kiteweo = another generic term for the same thing,
Boga (pi. maboga) a pumpkin, must not be confused with " mboga."
48 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
kuoka, to bake. kuyaika, to melt,
kutokosa, to boil (trans.). kuk'ata, to cut.
kutokota, to boil (intrans.). kuoza, to rot.
kuchemka, to boil „ kufinika, to cover,
kuloma, to toast, brand, burn, nkoko (vii.), crust on pot.
prick. chungu (iv.), small cooking-pot,
kuwaka, to burn (intr.), to burn nyungu (Hi.), cooking-pot.
up. rntnngi (ii.), water-pot,
kuwasha, to light, kindle. kandarinya (Hi.), kettle,
kuteketea, to catch fire. birika (v.), cistern, trough,
kuteketeza, to burn, consume (tr.). moshi (ii.), smoke.
kukuna, to grate, to scratch. maziwa (v.), milk.
ku?in<7a, to kill (animals). tangu, since,
kutia, to put in. makusudi (v.). purpose, on pur-
kukoroga, to stir. pose.
kuungua, to be scalded, scorched. katika, in, into, from, etc.
kufembea, to walk about, take a baaJae,halafu(z'bar), afterwards,
walk. presently, later,
kufurika, to boil over, to overflow. knondoa, to take away.
Bead and Translate
Mpishi alisahau kuwasha moto. Mbona hukuwasha
wewe basi ? Sikupata k'uni 3maana, mpifhi anakwenda
kununua sokoni. Haidhuru waweza kutfinda k'uku ukam-
weke tayari. 4 Yuko wapi k'uku ? Yuko uani yuatembea.
.Tee afatfukwa kwa chakula cha mtfana? Naam a<a/akwa.
Nipa kibiriti fafa^hali, moto hauwaki. Tia ruafuta kidogo,
uJawaka npesi. Sioni raafuta, labuda yamekwisha. La,
hayakuislia, 5yamo ghalani. Naliyaona jana. Jee wa-
tokosa nyama? La, naik'anga. Umepika na wali pia?
Sikupika. Nipa kisu nik'ate mboga. Mboga xiraeoza.
Haxikuoza, liujui k'itu wewe. Angalia, maziwa yafurika.
Ondoa snfuria motoni. Maziwa yamengia raashizi (see
note 9, Study XVI.). Haidhuru.
Translate
Have you put salt and pepper in the stew ? Yep, a
little, but I did not put [any] in the vegetables. Do not
stir the milk with a knife, stir [it] with a spoon. Look,
* Vide note 4, Study IV.
4 See note 5, Study I.
* The preposition (in) is frequently duplicated, being expressed
both in the verb or verbal suffix and in the locative case of the noun.
STUDY VI 49
you have burnt [your] clothes, did you not feel the heat V
No, I did not feel anything. Has the boy grated the
cocoa-nut ? Not yet, he will do [it] later. The cook has
taken the cocoa-nut grater. Are you cooking with coal ?
No, we cook with firewood. If we want to bake we cover
the saucepan with 6Lot embers. Why has the boy not
taken away the ashes ? Perhaps he forgot. The water
is boiling, will the kettle melt ? No, I know it will not
melt ; it was made on purpose to boil water. I see
smoke coming out (it comes out) of the window.
B Trans. " embers of heat " and so in innumerable cases owing to
the paucity of adjectives, see Study VIII. For " of," see Study XI.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
50
SWAHILI GBAMMAB
^
a aj
•J-
•||
d
•S .g «
1
2 g
T3rg
l§
z%
**** I*
O "Q ^
-._
^^1
55
*
2*c °
S *•§ «"
"^ ^ "S *>
«* 3 °° *^>
21 tf-
H^S^s
a g"e
^S^
^^ s»
§&l
03
to
£
§1
00 32
o d
S*
£ 60
3
k
aO
ri
S tc
i
DO
as ;-
^6
s
s
1
3
I
& * §
c
H QQ ^
b &
S CM
2
Is8
••8
c s
O no
*
*•
&
^
? i iyi
If
.2
«
a^
a s
0 <3
s
rt* ^ •• r^
S3 *^ C!
bC
0,d
I
^
CM
.5
I ipjf
*p«
g
a
^
§1
•s ™
oa >»
H
H
3
jl
08
o
1
J
o *s s4
^ 53" a s
c
'a
K
£-=J
0.6=
gni
0 (y
OrM
i
^
g £- '53 ^3 -fl
M^if>
V
.s§
3
3
-2
1
H (2 i-J N eo
^ c<i eo
O
0
O
"S s
to o
3
-~
i
-c
"3
M
V
a
|i
5
4
3
,0
.s
2 -Jl
O H*^
•^ « 2.-"
I-* •£
jj
-|.|'f
6
11
:>
•
rS
•""so
g "o
«~
* §
5
3
O
fc
f
o o .,
44
•s^l
1
ce*
ta
8
?-§ •»*""
1 §>^i
1
•S-3
P
of
••«( •**><:
•r.
00 CQ
5
a
3
frl
M
oO
O
00 -
H 'S)
H ^ |
'So
a
Q
•r.
0
cS •«
3
2
/2
i
1 S -8 § 0
1 -a -^l
m | ^
c8
.^-'S
;rbs whos
s'|
i
"3 ^ "3 d"
s -^
T
(J> "^
H
.j1'*
i_
*^ y/
1 ^^
_§
(S*~
* of
<D S.
r^3 """* Oj
^r
^ &*
fi
0 cf-^^
"S o! ci
H^
- o>
t"*-*
'a.'c!'£5.
.a
STUDY
51
52
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1
s
a
ca
a
1 -a &"
'
•2 . •* S
*3
§
C
O
! 1
2 -g
O
X
C
2 3 ,««
"" *a*rf -
*
i:
H a 'ta
a
'J
"* e.2.2 a £ ~
'•5 "33 5 13 "3 S, 5 ^l
d^ d'
II
i *£ »*&
i S .«
I .S .A)
a rz & fe
I ^.2«^
fc |-2 |§
STUDY VII
53
STUDY VII
(lit.
Kgome (iii.), fort.
gereza (iii.), prison.
forodha. (iii.), custom-house.
ukuta (vii.), wall.
lango (v.), gate.
jiwe (v.), stone.
uvumbi (vii.), small fine dust.
vumbi (v.) litter, large dust.
t'ope (iii. pi.), mud.
mvua (iii.), rain.
upepo (vii.) wind.
jua (v.), sun.
mpagazi (i.), porter, carrier.
mbiu (iii.), proclamation
buffalo horn).
masikini (iii.), poor mau, beggar.
mtumwa (i.), slave.
muungwana (i.), free born man,
gentleman.
mwana mume (i.), male (boy or
man).
mwana mke (i.), female (girl or
woman).
mt'u mume (i.), man (adult).
mt'u mke (i.), woman (adult).
mume (i.), husband, man.
mke (i.), wife.
kupita, to pass, cross over, sur-
pass, excel.
kufuata, to follow.
kufuatana, to go in company or
file, to accompany.
similla ! sumile ! make way !
kaanguka, to fall, to fall down.
kuiba, to steal.
kuchoka, to be tired.
kuamkua, to greet, to speak to.
knpigana, to fight.
Ni heri, It is better (fol. by subj.).
kufika, to arrive, reach, lead to.
kuvuma, to blow, roar.
Mjini (ii.) — In the town
kuioroka, to run away.
kutti, to obey.
koala hum, to release, to free.
kunya, to fall (as of rain).
kutunza, to take care (of), to watch.
kukosa, to miss, to fail, transgress.
kuk'nta, to meet, to come across,
to meet with, to find,
kukut'ana, to meet (recip.), as*
semble.
AfueZ&ali, It is better.
kwa, at the house of (" chez ") to.
kwetu, at our house or home,
" chez nous," in our country,
kwenu, at your house or home,
in your country,
kwao, at their house or home, in
their country.
gari (v.), carriage, waggon, trolly,
k'ando, aside, apart, on or by or to
one side,
fulani (iii.), so and so, such a one,
some one.
wala, neither, nor (or),
kesho, to-morrow,
mwivi (i.), thief (pi. wevi).
kesho kutwa, day after to-morrow.
1 ngoma (iii.), dance, drum,
p'ingu (iii.), fetter, charm,
kivuli (iv.), uvuli (vii.), shade,
shadow.
mtoro (i.), runaway slave, truant,
-kali, fierce, strong, cruel,
hunt (pi. mahuru), free,
-kuu, chief, main,
zamani (iii.), time ; (also used ad-
verbially ; formerly, some time
ago).
kijana (iv.), young child, child.
kijana mwana mome, boy, lad.
kijana kike, girl, lass.
Haya twende n'de tukatembee kidogo. Twende uvu-
lini basi, hapa jua ni kali. Mimi nafoika kwenda ngo-
meni, tupite kwa ndia gani? Sijui ndia mimi, lakini
1 Kupiga ngoma = to beat a drum ; kuteza ngoma = to dance.
54 SWAHILI GBAMMAB
fulani ^linambia kwamba ndia k'uu yafika ngomeni.
Lango la mji lilikuwapo hapa zamani nasikia Labuda ni
kweli, sikuwapo. Sikizani, nasikia k'elele, wapagazi wapi-
gana ! Afud/taliusiende(orusende) kuangalia, wako wat'u
tele na uvumbi tele. Kisha mvua 2 yatfaka kunya, ni heri
turudi nyumbani. La ! Tusingie bado, mvua haiji, upepo
wavuma sana. Twende forod^ani basi tukaangalicinagari.
Sumile, sumile ! gari laja upesi, ondoka ndiani. Tunza !
liko jiwe hapa, linaanguka ukutani. Mwalimu yuko
yuasema na masikini— jee tuniwamkue ? Naam, tum-
wamkue — ni mt'u mwema. Vijana watufuata, wambie
wasije. Mtumwa akiforoka twamwita mtoro.
Translate
Only men are wanted, they are beating the drum to
call Hhem. The women are tired, they cannot go.
Perhaps they will follow afterwards? No, they have
missed the trolley, they will 4 stay at home now. Never
mind, they can go to-morrow morning. Will they not be
late? Yes, they will be rather late, but the men will
wait [for them]. People are assembling at our house, what
are they looking for? We are told that they are poor,
they want 5 bread. It is better to give them (Jtuwapa)
bread, that they may not steal. If they steal they will
be put in prison. There is (ziko) much mud and dirt
here, let us pass to one side. Will you be able to reach
home the day after to-morrow? Yes, we shall be able
[to] if we do not meet [with] wind or rain. They issued
a proclamation (beat the buffalo horn) at the gate this
morning to say that slaves who obey their G masters
(jbwana zao} will be 7 set free.
1 The " i " in " ni " is frequently elided.
2 " Taka," used as an auxiliary, stands for " is going to" " in on the
point of."
» See note 1, Study XIV. « See note 3, Study III.
* For " bread " in the wide sense use " chakula." European " bread "
is an unknown luxury to the simple native.
6 " Bwana " and " bibi " take plurals in both cl. iii. and cl. v. See
note 1, Study VIII.
7 The technical expression is " kuafika huru," using the Quasi-
rassive for the Passive. See Study XVII.
STUDY Vlt
55
1
H
H
'o?
£
§i°-
i!4
M|^;
(A C3
« d, 1
C^ S 44
cp 43 ^rj
* *• c
to 05 qj
« *• 8
;si
i s>«
of
§ 1
03
of
£
S 44
" 8 ' ¥-£
£ §03
-<
3
3
0
44
o3
O
£ -3
5 3^1
a 45 „ d
'S~ a
J3 .^
& - * oj
5 *§ '^
^
"B
44
S ••'3 44
p ^ „
•sf2
fijff
3
5
o
€
*^s
<u
rO
MOOD,
_. , of 6»
s a fe j*
"*^ 3 S 44 gq
4n 43 fM ^j
? & -2 •§ 'P .-s
^1'apl
i
•2
pq
£ rH (N CO
i-5 e4 co c^
<£ T-H IM' co
^
K^
w
H
§
1— 1
H
I
|
P
H
3
:utokuwa
INDICA
1
-3
£
^ "*" •«•
>•
44
•£ J °
ill
Is ^
5
5
e
H HSS^
ii|
llr
3
*s*
QQ
H
g1
H
'"•'
P
Q
^ e»
,3
1" ^
1 ^
Sj ,
>s ' ^ r~~~
w 8 '-§ § 3
o3
1 "as 9
fc 1 ^43
S
03 rj pt
'5 S
o3 44
5 ^^ ^'s
•5 *3 23 E?
a -^J^
•^ .rJ"
jj ~3 S ^ r^3
^ "
> 03
Q o3 D _r
5 ^3 of «5 ^
pQ gj1
§ is ^5
£ *3&
« ft
^ '=s -S -S -fl "S" ^
•S a a*"1 "**"
PH i-5 i
56
"si *
egg
££ «
III
^^>^
!
M
^*—
s .£..2*
f^ CD CD
£ '5"1
^ .8,
•« af
•2 "S *
i "5
I a a|l|
»l"al >N
.
i
PI PH <N eo
HILL GRAMMAR
3 g 5
b
£
i=i "1
s-s s
1.S
1
Is- «
"o
h
0
^* ^D ^ o5
r< -V-
1
S »j -g *•••«
•S*
^
1 * Sl S
'e S
1?
^5 ^S
S
^
|»
u oT
1
•
S
^S £
~^
"a
fe
i
H
H
|
"aa
'3
|
£
OQ •<-•
o
.£
1
1
. — 00
•
Q
|
•~'Z
P
^
<•
J'
•2 ""^
O
JE
^'S
O
»
'S
IN
H
'53 '»
• s 9
E ^
1 ^
>
1
(2 ^ e>i
cc
hH
H
1
Q
3 «•£&
"«* O
IMPER.
do not be.
i
cq
>
,g> S ^>
| c^ ag
|"i
8
21"
—
i
oT°
"^ 5*
*
"5 «-« "S S
"c S rd
3
D
rC
g
£
OQ
&> &
£ *
1
1/3 ^ ^—
r
40
|E '5
P
a
^ j*
£
I
*S ._r
H
— oo
1
a
*B,
'33
1
• ,j-
o
"" CD
s?
.-T f
K
£
s .- 'S
'e
'£ •*
. --a
1
•— OQ
i °.
§
(2 rH (N
M
STUDY VII
57
E S
B
1
r< *<
rl *
03
§ 1
1
1
s ^
1
1
111
a 1 a
1 s>*
a
V
I &'
Q
£
of
J3
.
&
a
O
<$
^a
M
—
— * — • ^
o
*n *^[
^s^
a
w" >r=*
o o o
-c
K fc£ £>
g-] fH 0jQ
^.2C.2D
•3
£ _5 .a
"^ ri _rt
o
^ 2 *"" *
a
o ~ ? f
*
.2
PRESENT
1 -.2 °
§ to a kp
£ fc "^
^ of &, o
nil
§ N £>N
C 9 w CD
J^^^j
1
eo
•«*!
A
(S rH c4
CO
d,
a
£
<a »
o
02
0
1 1
1
• rH
B
£_,
"g
a*
s
P
i -^
--s J
i
O
o
g |
5 a' y ;
o ^
, e
CO
II
*si *>
« « s '
rfS o rl
i'S "o
5 „ a
II
.i
M
o g
*** * %
oT oT o* cT
o> ~
.a a)
<a -j3
JH -S .S S g
5 a
<u "JJ
<S o
5-2 j?
a « '3
C3 r^ ^ <3 03
<D ^>
> a
'^ ^
^ 3
#N cT
cs a
o *• O t.
s ® tc 5
aflfl
tc-S
aD'3 a
a C8 03 CQ 53
S -is
Cn QQ pj^
A
H*
<U
f^ ri' <N
CO
5
58 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
THE VERB "To HAVE,"
kuwa na, to have,
kutokuwa na, not to have.
The verb To Have is formed from the verb To Be by
subjoining the word " na " (with) to the Strong Verb in
all persons and tenses, positive and negative.
Ex. — Nina, or n'na, I have; sina, I have not; u/a-
kuwa na, thou wilt have ; wasiwe na, that they may not
have.
NOTE I. — In the present tense only does the " na "
form one word with the verb stem.
NOTE II. — Occasionally the verb To Have has to trans-
late the (English) verb To Be. Where we say, there is,
there are, the Swahilis say there has, there have [i.e. the
place, etc., has (in it such and such things)]. For
instance— Hapa pana wat'u- tele, Here there are many
people, lit. This (place) has people plenty. Kuna upepo
mwingi leo ? Is there (does there exist) much wind to-
day? Hapana mkate. There is no bread (here). Hakuna
kuimba, There is no singing.
NOTE III. — This verb has an idiomatic inversion of
subject and object. Whereas in English we say — Salehe
has them (the keys\ in Swahili we get " zina Salehe "
(funguo), they have Salehe! Vide Psalm xxxvi. 9;
Luke ii. 14.
STUDY VIII
M'tu na Rafikiye — A man and his friend
Eafiki (iii.), friend. ndugu (iii.), mke (i.), sister,
jina (v.), name. cousin.
habari (iii.), news, tidings. jamaa (iii.), family, society, re-
mgeni (i.), guest, visitor, stranger. lative.
baba (iii.), father. kinabibi, women folk, ladies,
mama (iii.), mother. kinabwana, men folk, gentlemen,
ndugu (iii.), mume (i.), brother, 'mjomba (i.), uncle (mother's
cousin. brother).
1 " Mjomba " is also an up-country term for a Swahili.
STUDY VIII
59
°°8hangazi (v.), aunt (father's
sister).
mgonjwa (i.), sick person.
ugonjwa (vii.), sickness.
HoJi ? May I come in ? Is any
one there ?
HoJi ! Come in !
Karibu ! Be welcome- !
Siterehe ! Don't disturb yourself !
(lit. " rest," " take your ease.")
kukaribisha, to welcome.
kukumbuka, to remember.
kuonana, to see one another, to
meet (recip.).
kupen^a, to love, to like, to be
fond of.
kutakia, to hate.
kutakua, to carry, take.
kupeleka, to send, convey, con-
duct, take.
kuomba, to pray, to beg, to ask
for.
kaiosha, to be enough, to suffice.
kusalimu, to salute, send compli-
ments.
kupiga hof/i, to knock at the door.
kubisha nodi, to knock at the
door.
kuzungumza, kosumulia, to talk,
to converse.
kujiznngumza, to amuse oneself,
by talking, etc.
Read and Translate
1 Kafiki wa baba anakuja kutuangalia, mkaribishe.
Nam'jua, si mgeni. Karibu, Bwana, pita ndani ! Sirfarehe,
00 Paternal uncles and maternal aunts are reckoned so near of kin
as to be a kind of senior or junior parent according to the progenitor's
original position in his family.
Ex. Babangu mkubwa, my father's elder brother.
Babangu mdogo, my father's younger brother.
Mamangu mkubwa, my mother's elder sister.
Mamangu mdogo, my mother's younger sister.
1 Kafiki, like most other sentient nouns (whether referring to persons
or animals) in irrational classes, takes concords of both its own class
and cl. i. As a rule, possessive adjectives follow the irrational class,
and other adjectives cl. i. Ex. Eafiki yangu huyu mwema ; ng'ombe
zanga hawa wawili. The verb almost invariably follows cl. i.
kuzua, to invent.
kunradto ) excuse me ; pardon !
niwia rad/w /do not be offended.
inshalla, please God.
Al hamrZu lillahi, Praise God,
thank God.
-enyewe, -self, the owner.
afia (iii.), health.
-ot'e, all, whole.
ha?a, even, till, until, so that, as
far as.
au, or
ela, ilia, but, except.
-gonjwa, ill, sick.
sikuzote, always.
pasipo, where there is not, ex-
cept, without.
-je 1 how? what? (after verb).
-ni 1 what ? (after verb).
hapana burfi, no doubt, without
doubt, probably.
barua (iii.), letter, missive.
zairZi, more, besides, further,
especially.
jawabu (v.), answer.
siku hizi, nowadays.
Ati ! look, they say, see ! I
say!
Ulaya, Europe.
bisikoti (iii.), biscuits.
nimileti (iii.)> lemonade.
60 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
bibi, usiondoke. N'nakuja kuleta babari fa. Habari
gani ? Wat'u wot'e hawajambo ? Wotf'e hawajambo, aha-
sanfa. Habari ni ya afia t\i. Tena baba na mama waku-
salimu sana, wa/aka habari ya kwenu. Huku 2 hakujambo.
Twafaka babari ya buko 3utokako. Kwetu imokunya
mvua sana, ha/a wat'xi wot'e wafurahi. Maana mvua
yaleta vyakula tele, Kweli, bwana, na tuombe kwamba
ifike hapa pia. Insballa itfakuja. Mtoto ! Lete bisiko/i
na nimile/i kwa bwana mgeni. Hodi ! Hodi ! Karibu
ndani. Kina bwana, k'etfini. Ham'jambo ? Hatujambo,
al hamdu lillahi. Wageni hawa wafoka Ulaya, wanaleta
barua kwa inwalimu. Mwite mtoto yule mwana mume
apeleke barua bii upesi. Ati ! mtoto, enda na barua kwa
mwalimu Abudulla, a/akupa jawabu mwenyewe. Mwa-
limu azungumza na mjomba wakwe (his) na shangazi
lakwe.
Translate
Some one is knocking at tbe door, tell him to come in.
4 It is enough to say " welcome " — he will enter without
doubt. 5What is your name? You do not know me.
I am a stranger to you. Pardon me, I am come to beg
(some) rice, I am ill. If you are ill, you cannot eat rice.
It is better [for you] 6 to drink milk. Take these pice and
buy (some) milk. Thank you, lady, I do not like milk, I
will buy a cup of coifee. There are (wako) many sick
persons in the town nowadays. Yes, but formerly there
(they) were more. Your brother has come, what does he
want ? He wants to meet with you. He will wait .until
to-morrow if you are not able to speak with him now.
7 Let him wait then, he is always coming. He says his
(zakwe) relatives hate him and (tena) they have invented
something (neno) against 8 him (yakwe).
2 " Hakujambo," lit. "It (place or direction) has nothing the
matter " = We are all well here.
3 " Where you come from." For Relative Particles, see Study XI.
4 See note 13, Study V.
s Trans. " Your name is who ? " For Possessive Adjectives sec
Study IX.
8 Vide note 4, Study III.
7 Here prefix conjunction " na " with elided vowel.
8 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
STUDY VIII
61
(/)
0
S
2 1
3
• — 1
^fl
&
q
,5 o
p, ^
a
s
'£
-u
0 §*
n S
S
g)
•+J
a
,2 S
3 i.
,_,
43
o
60 ^
o
•0
'S
'So ^
h
a
Sfi
r/1
1 1
M £
•s §».sr
s -5 £. *•
S i» •** (D
S ^S^ S
53 ^3 So 55 ^
2 ~ S
• o -^
' ^ /— v o g*
p '•§ '* «
° £ » 8 ***
'^'S ^J "^
•2 o q^3 g«
o <n •
CO S
H ^
^ .J-
tn ^
c3
03 f[-j r
P p c8
» OQ 5S
Z gj ^
w o o e
^15 «
& a.hn =>
if
"-» s
P CK
•5
•KL
Q>
> H
>•
H
5
M
H
3 5
H d 2
P g-
cc g £ *
C8 02 H «
•
o1 cT P" P" ^ -^
O
'
f
a
g
•i -fi
a 2
/-«; -s
S3 ^ 5
_ 00 ^
2 n s s
->e j^s^if'I!" U
•3 § •S '* S ^ i '» * -2 •« -2 S -S I f3
3 1 §2- Sis a :s s' I s 5 § :e I
CQft^OQflHOQ^&rjaH
T a
a a x M
62
k
6
e
a
1
"o
i
0
ine, anotlier
k
L
1
"o
a
8
0
(elsewhere)
-ja
e
ef
'So
Vn
bn
6
6
'So
k
c
L
TIVES)
mwengiue, m'u;
wengine, other \
mwengine, m'n;
miengine, other
nyengine, anotl
nyeugine, other
§ d
'Ei'bo
o o
0 >•
k
ll
ef.S
jingiuo, another
myengine, o(Ae;
wengine, mwcn
nyengine, other
pengine, anothe
kwengino, ku
(elsewhere)
mwengino, oMe:
^;
"?
t
m
00
••*>
'>>
a
<D
>
a
£ & >> >> N "«
'>.
|
S1!"
o °
mwenyi, „
>->
c
0
N
c'
O
a
o
&
mwenyi, „
OT
1
o
•
^1
^**
S
§
C|
1
9
a
~ »
'^;":-/
a"»
^•xS
"^ v S
.I'S
S
••?.
QJ
o
O2
f
V *'-
8 §
ll
£|
51
ll
^1|
S §
SI
s »
§j
\2''«
S 00
1 s
Si
•§ *
Sot's
J
^>
i>
i
15
Sl
ll
31
1^* ?5
03 ^>
s^s
^> to
1 |
^
00
^
of
*T^~
•S ^
•"S "*!
" ***
•2 •*
«•*
•"5 -c
_-2
„
£
mwenyew
possessc
wenyewe,
wenyewe,
yenyewe,
yenyewe,
zenyewe, \
chenyewe,
vyenyewe
lenyewe, i
yenycwe,
lenyewe, i
yenyewe, \
wenyewe,
zenyewe, \
ponyewe, \
k wenyewe
mwenyew
CQ OQ
K X
STUDY IX
63
STUDY IX
Nguo na Mapambo — Dress and Ornaments
kilemba (iv.), turban.
k'anzu (iii.), tunic.
joho (v.), overcoat.
kizibao (iv.), waistcoat, jacket,
blouse.
kikoi (iv.), loin-cloth,
suruale (Hi.), trousers,
koti (v.), coat,
rinda (v.), skirt.
leso (iii.), large handkerchief,
mamijli (iii.), small handkerchief,
kofia (iii.), hat, cap, helmet,
mwavuli (ii.), umbrella,
fulana (iii.), vest.
msbipi (ii.), belt, girdle, fishing
line.
ki/ambi (iv.), coloured cloth,
mtambo (ii.), machine,
mkufu (ii.), chain,
kuvaa, to wear.
kuvika, to dress, clothe (tr.).
kuvua, to take off, undress,
kumiliki, to possess, to own.
kurarua, to tear,
kuraruka, to be torn.
kushona, to sew, to stitch, to
make,
kushonewa, to be sewn for, to
have made for one.
kujipamba, to adorn oneself.
kunyete, to be conceited.
kupima, to measure.
kupimiwa, to be measured for.
kupotea (inlrans. only), to be lost,
to go astray, to err.
kufaa, to suit, to be fit for, to
become, to be proper or right,
to " do."
kupumuzika, to rest.
kuazima, to lend, to borrow.
kupasa, to be necessary, to be-
hove, to " must."
mfuko (ii.), pocket, bag.
kiatu (iv.), boot, shoe, sandal.
mshoni (i.), tailor.
kifango (iv.), button, stud.
bakora (iii.), walking-stick.
marashi (v. pi.), scent, perfume.
hariri (iii.), silk.
p'amba (iii.), cotton.
kateni (iii.), linen.
sufi (iii.), wool.
p'ete (iii.), ring.
maridadi, finely dressed.
jirani (iii.), neighbour.
mbali, far away, distant.
jioni (iii.), evening, in the
evening.
dunia (iii.), the earth, the world.
Head and Translate
Kizibao changu chatfaka kushonwa, kipeleke kwa
mshoni katika ndia k'uu. Mshoni yule hashoni vyema.
Labuda akiazima mtambo afaweza. Nifamwambia. Kanzu
yako inararuka, :yakupasa kuivua. Niafanyaje? siwezi
kuvaa kanzu ya baba. Twaa kanzu yangu, itakufaa.
Ahasantfa, rafiki yangu, i/anifaa sana. Kweli, pasipo
1 " Kupasa," implying moral obligation, is only used impersonally
of sentient beings, " Yanipasa " (it behoves me), etc. But we can
say " napaswa " (I am obliged) or " yapasayo " (things which are
necessary).
64 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
rafiki mt'u hawezi kukWi duniani. Mandili yangu inapo-
tQSL. La ! haikupofea, mtoto huyu anaiona asubuhi hapa
barazani. Nafurahi sana. Maana, mama 2 alinipa zamani.
Marinda ya watoto wanawake yafaka kufuliwa, waulize
kwamba wamekwisha 3 nunua sabuni. 4 Hawako sasa wa-
nawake, wamekwenda kuteinbea mjini Jee, wamekwenda
mbali? Sijai 5 walikokwenda, n'tfampeleka jirani huyu
awafafute.
Translate
The porters' turbans are 6 lost, they say that thieves
came [in the] evening and (they) stole them. If they find
those thieves they will beat them, and put them in (vika)
fetters. It is not good to steal. Let us dress (her) this
little girl [with] a large handkerchief, it is enough. She
will not feel cold, the sun is strong [in the] daytime.
Where will she sleep [at] night? She will sleep with
7 my sisters (ndugu zangu wake), they will take care [of]
her. Our neighbour has been measured for [an] overcoat,
he will be very conceited. Where is your umbrella? I
left it in the hall, please bring it. Forgive me, I forgot
to bring your silk belt and your bag. Your teacher came
to beg [for] my shoes yesterday, but I was not able to give
[them to] him. Never mind, he will stay at home 8 and
rest.
2 The verb "kupa" only takes the indirect objective particle,
which must always be conjugated with it.
3 See note 5, Study HI.
4 Verbs frequently precede their subjects.
5 " Ko " = relative particle of place. See Study XI.
6 " Are lost " = state, hence use of perf. tense.
7 The possessive and demonstrative precede the qualifying and
numeral adjective— both follow the noun. For concords, see note 1,
Study VIII.
8 See note 6, Study V.
STUDY IX
65
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
(SOMETIMES CALLED POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS)
The possessive adjective immediately follows the noun it
quali6es — taking precedence of other adjectives.
'•'•A-s ( S. wangu, my (man) wako, thy (man) wakwe, hit, her, or its
I. | (man)
P. wangu, my (men) wako, thy (men)
IV.
IS-
\P.
S.
P.
v,(|
vn.{*
VIII.1 S.
IX.1 S.
X.1 P.
m.
IV I8'
1V-\P.
v Is-
v-(p.
vi Is-
vii. 1 1
VIII.1 8.
IX.1 S.
wangu, my (men)
wangu, my (tree)
yangu, my (trees)
yangu, my (house)
zangu, my (houses)
changu, my (thing)
vyangu, my (things)
langu, my (name)
yanga, my (name*)
langu, my (monster)
yangu, my (monsters)
wangu, my (string)
zangu, my (strings)
pangu, my (place)
kwangu, my (dying or
direction)
m wangu, [in] my
(places)
wetu, our (man)
wetu, our (men)
wetu, our (tree)
yetu, our (trees)
yetu, our (house)
zetu, our (houses)
chetu, our (thing)
vyetu, our (things)
letu, our (name)
yetu, our (names)
letu, our (monster)
yetu, our (monsters)
wetn, our (string)
zetu, our (strings)
petu, our (place)
kwetu, our (dying) or
[in] our (direction)
mwetu, [in] our
(places)
wako, thy (tree)
yako, thy (trees)
yako, thy (house)
zako, thy (houses)
chako, thy (th ing)
vyako, thy (thi ngs)
lako, thy (name)
yako, thy (names)
lako, thy (monster)
yako, thy (monsters)
wako, thy (string)
zako, thy (strings)
pako, thy (place)
kwako, thy (dying
or direction)
mwako, [in] thy
{places)
wenu, your (man)
wenu, your (men)
wenu, your (tree)
yenu, your (trees)
yenu, your (house)
zenu, your (houses)
chenu, your (thing)
vyenu, your (things)
lenu, your (name)
yenu, your (names)
lenu, your (monster)
yenu, your (monsters)
wenu, your (string)
zenu, your (strings)
penu, your (place)
kwenu, your (dying)
or [in] your (Direc-
tion)
mwenu, [in] your
(places)
wakwe, his, . . . (men)
wakwe, his (tree)
yakwe, his (trees)
yakwe, his (house)
zakwe, his (houses)
chakwe, his (thing)
vyakwe, his (things)
lakwe, his (name)
yakwe, his (names)
lakwc, his (monster)
lakwe, his (monsters)
wakwe, his (string)
zakwc, his (strings)
pakwe, his (place)
k wakwe, his (dying or
direction)
mwakwe, [in] his
(places)
wao, their (man)
wao, tJieir (men)
wao, their (tree)
yao, their (trees)
yao, their (house)
zao, their (houses)
chao, their (thing)
vyao, their (things)
lao, their (name)
yao, their (names)
lao, their (monster)
yao, their (monsters)
wao, their (string)
zao, their (strings)
pao, tlieir (place)
kwao, their (flying) or
[in] tlteir (direction)
mwao, [in]
(places)
their
•The agreement is with the thing possessed, not with the possessor.
1 None but these can follow the locative.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR E
66
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY X
Sokoni (v.) — At the Market
mai (v.), eggs.
ii (la k'uku) (v.), egg (hen's).
ndizi (iii.), banana.
kiazi (iv.), sweet potato.
chungwa (v.), orange (sec p. 130).
d&tn. (v.), young cocoa-nut.
ndimu (iii.), lime.
mumunye (v.), vegetable marrow.
ujaka (vii.), spinach.
tango (v.), pumpkin.
samaki (iii.), fish.
ng'ombe (iii.), cattle, cow, bull.
mbuzi (iii.), goat.
k'ondoo (iii.)» sheep.
nnga (vii.), flour.
kitunguu (iv.), onion.
t'ende (iii.), dates.
mtele (ii.), rice (uncooked).
rtoibi (v.), washerman.
kuuza, to sell.
kulipa, to pay (for).
kugusa, to touch.
kudanganya, to cheat, deceive.
kupatikana, to be obtainable, to
be found,
kusumbua, to annoy, tease,
trouble, worry (tr.).
kukasirika, to be angry.
kushiudana, to dispute, contend,
compete.
kushindana bei, to bargain,
kuhasiri, to lose in a bargain.
kuokota, to pick up (of solid
bodies).
kuzoa, to gather up, to scoop up.
kusalia, to remain, to be left,
kuzoea, to be used or accustomed
to.
kuteza, to play, to dance.
ktihisabu, kuhasibu, to count,
calculate, reckon.
TJnguja, Zanzibar.
Mzungu, European, White man.
saramala (v.), carpenter.
raJili (v.), pound (lb.)
bei (iii.)j bargain, trade,
ghali, dear, expensive,
rahisi, cheap, easy,
pesa ngapi or nyingapi ? how
much ?
kiasi gani ? what price ?
kikapu (iv.), grass basket,
kasuku (v.), parrot.
hasara (iii.), loss.
fai(/a (iii.), g^in* profit,
fujo (v.), confusion, muddle,
-ngi, much, many,
-ngapi 1 how much, how many ?
-ngine, other.
juzi, day before yesterday, a day
or two ago, the other day.
haki (iii.), right, rightcoubiuss,
juslice, honesty,
funr/i (v.), artizan, expert.
Read and Translate
Wazungu wapenda eana machungwa, sikuzo/'e waja
sokoni knyanumia. Yauzwaje machungwa ya Unguja
siku hizi? Yauzwa ghali, ^oja pesa t'atu inoja pesa
1 Syllables, words, and phrases are frequently reduplicated with
varying significance — here to give the distributive sense, " Three pice
each." See Study XXI.
STUDY X 67
t'atu ; maana hayapatikani mangi. Eafiki zetu wali/af uta
mbuzi kummmua, • wasimwone. Wangolimfanyani mbuzi,
hawana 3pakumweka? Kweli hawana pahali, wangeli-
mdnrfa kwa ckakula hapana budi. Mbuzi ana nyaraa
nyingi 4 ya kufosha wat'u wangi, ukimntmua rahisi yuna
faida sana. Ati ! bwana wafaka ndizi ? Pesa ngapi ndizi
zako? Nne pesa bwana. A! siwezi kununua ndizi hizo,
zinaoza. Tupite kwa masikini yule, auza vit'u vingi —
rnadafu, 2'ende, viazi, mainumunye, raatango ndimu, ha<a
vitunguu na mtele. Muulize auzaje, mtele, kiasi gani
ra/ili ? Usimguse ng'ombe yule, ni mkali sana.
Translate,
The fish-market is not far away, will you go and visit
it? Yes, but I have not paid [for] this flour. That flour
is dear, let us go to another man. That man is 5 used to
cheat Europeans. You are (have) right, he is a thief.
The day before 3 esterday he disputed with me about (juu
ya) a parrot. He wanted much money (many pice), but
I knew that he (that parrot) was ill, and besides he could
not speak a word. So (basi) I picked up my basket and
left him. He was very angry, and now if I pass by he
always does something (neno) to annoy me. What is all
this confusion about (confusion this all, its meaning is
what ?) This poor woman has met with loss — all her eggs
have fallen down, and she (nae} cannot gather them up.
Washermen and carpenters and all artizans are found at
the Market.
- Pres. Subj. Neg. is much used to replace the Past Indie. Neg.
when an adversative sense is required, " but (they) did not," or " but
(they) were not."
3 Pahali understood, i.e. a place of ( (or for) to put him).
4 See note on Adjectives, Study VIII.
5 I.e. " has become accustomed " = Perf. Tense.
68
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES
Numerals take the class-concords of tboir nouns,
is here given ; for others see Study XVIII.
Class III.
moja, one (house)
mbili, two (houses)
t'atu, three
nnc,four •
t'a.no,fice
eifoi,1 sx
eabaa,1 seven
nanc, eight
tisia, kenda,1 nine
kumi,1 ten
kumi na moja, eleven
kumi na mbili, twelve
kumi nci t'atu, thirteen
kumi na nnc, fourteen
kumi na t'&no, fifteen
kumi na sUa,1 sixteen
kumi na sabaa,1 seventeen
kumi na nane, eighteen
kumi na kenda or kumi
tissia,1 nineteen
iskirini,1 twenty
ishirini na moja, twenty-one
SOME ADJECTIVES OF QUANTITY
11.
III.
IV.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
S. mwingi, much or
great
I', \vangi, many
( S. mwingi, much
\ P. mingi, many
S. nyingi, much
P. nyingi, many
S. kingi, much
P. vingi, mvny
S. j'ngi, much
P. mangi, many
S. jingi. much
I', mingi, many
S. ungi (mwingi).
much
P. nyingi, mrmy
P. pangi, much
S. kungi, much
X. P. mwingi, many
mwingapi ? how much ?
wangapi ? how many ?
mwingapi? how much ?
mingapi ? how many ?
nyingapi (ngapi) ? how
much?
nyingapi ? how many ?
kingapi ? how much ?
vingapi ? how many ?
j ingapi ? how much ?
mangapi ? how many ?
j ingapi ? how much ?
mingapi ? how many ?
ungapi (mwingapi) ? hoic
much *
nyingapi ? how many ?
pangapi ? how much ?
kungapi ? how much ?
mungapi ? or mwingapi?
how many 1
wofe,2 live whole (man)
sofc,3 we
nyot'c, you <tll (meii)
Vfot'c, titey
vfot'e, the whole (tree)
yo^'e, all (trees)
yof'c, the whole (Jtouse)
zot'o, all (houses')
cho<V, the ichole (thing)
vyot'e, all (things)
lot'c, the ichole (name)
yof'e, all (names)
lot'e, the whole (monster')
yo<'e, all (monsters)
\\ofc, the whole (string)
zot'e, all (strings)
pof'c, the whole (place)
koi'e, all (flying)
(kof'e ko£'e, on all sides,
everywhere)
mo£'e, [m] all (places),
all over inside, (all
about, in every direc-
tion)
1 Same in all classes.
* The conjunction " pia '
" -of'e," making " all " or " the whole of it, them, us," etc. When preceding, it
forms one word ; if combined with " wo£'e " (3rd pers. plur.), the " w " is elided—
'• piaot'e."
* The aspirate here disappears after the sibilant, "a."
STUDY XI
69
STUDY XI
DuJcani (v.) — In a shop
biashara (iii.), trade.
mwenyi duka (i.), shopkeeper.
bid/taa (iii.). merchandise,
dhahabu (iii.), gold.
fedka. (iii.), silver, money,
pauni (iii.), sovereign, pound,
reale, riali (iii.), dollar (2 Ks.).
rupia (iii.), rupee (Is. 4<Z.).
roboo (iii.), a quarter (of a dollar
= J rupee),
nusu (iii.), half (nusurupia =
£ rupee),
thumuni (iii.), an eighth (dollar),
groat = 4 aunas.
ana (iii.), anna (Id.).
kasuroboo, three-quarters (of any
thing), lit. less a quarter,
mizani (iii.), balance, scales,
mawe ya mizani, weights,
shuhuli (iii.), business, occupation,
aina (iii.), class, kind, species.
kuwia, to be creditor to.
kuwiwa ni, to be in debt to.
ku(?ai, to claim, to sue.
kuvunc/a, to break (" change.")
kuvmu/ika, to be broken, break-
able.
kutoza, to tax, to fine, to exact.
kuMani, to think, to suppose, to
presume,
kufikiri, kuiafakari, to consider,
reflect.
kukimbia, to run away (from),
kupasua, to tear, split, chop,
kugawanya, to divide, distribute,
msumari (ii.), nail, tack,
marudufu (iii.), twill calico
(thick).
marikani (iii.), unbleached calico,
bafuta, (iii.), common nainsook,
uzi (vii.), wire, thread, string.
alama (iii.), mark, sign, spot.
</eni (v.), debt,
mwenyi deni (i.), creditor,
mrfeni (i.) debtor,
ni, by (of the agent),
mzee (i.), old man.
mwongo (i.), liar,
uwongo (vii.), lie, falsehood,
bure, useless, free, in vain, to no
purpose, gratis, for nothing,
namna (iii.), sort, kind, specimen,
-baya, bad.
-zuri, beautiful, nice, pretty,
mkono (ii.), hand or cubit
(18 in.).
shuka (iii.), four hands,
doti (iii.), eight hands,
gunia (v.), sack,
chunia (iv.), iron,
shaba (iii.), brass,
sifuri (iii.), copper,
-chache, few, a little, some,
koti (v.), coat, jacket
Head and Translate
Mwenyi duka huyo ni mt'u asiye haki. AkivumZa rupia
a'wapa wat'u pesa mbaya. Ati ! x mzee, thumuni, siku
hizi ina pesa nyingapi? Thumuni, mtoto, ni pesa kumi na
si/a au ana nne. Zamani nalipata pesa kumi na sabaa kwa
1 This, with mtumia, mama, taba, etc., must not be considered as
disrespectful a mode of addrees as the English equivalent would be.
70 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
thumuni. Sif/tani kwamba ulipata pesa hizo zot'e kwa
thumuni, labuda umesahau. 2Fulani aniwia reale mbili
nami sina 3cha kumlipa; Nalirnuona juzi, hamwambia
"Ngojakidogo." Kweli u masikini wewe,ni heri wende uka-
fanye kazi pahali upate fedAa. Fulani ha/angoja sana.
Kwamba nalikuwa na nueurupia ningelinunua marikano
kidogo kushonewa koti. Nusu-rupia haitoshi kwa koti,
u<a/aka zaidi ; labuda kwa roboo t'atu au reale kasuroboo
wafakupa kotfi ndogo sana. Muulize mwenyewe. Hodi
ndaui ! Hodi karibu ! Tupe mikono mine ya maradufu
bwana, yafaa kwa kod ndiyo ? Yafaa sana, 4 mwanangn, ni
nguo njema, yafoka Ulaya. Na wewe mwenyewe hufaki
k'itu ? Nafaka misumari na magunia na uzi wa shaba.
Translate
It is a good thing to trade (to make trade is well), it
brings much profit. If you begin with one sovereign you
will get two before 5 many days. But you must reflect and
calculate a great deal when you buy your merchandise.
And, moreover, you must not (to) have false scales (scales
of falsehood), or people will sue you [and] (again) they
will run away from you [and] (they) will say, " He is a
bad man, do not let us buy from him (his direction)." A
good man cannot deceive his neighbours. You (pi.) are
in debt to that shopkeeper — you bought of him four yards
(eight hands) of nainsook yesterday and (tr. neither) you
have not paid him. It is not your business, why do you
annoy us for nothing? We shall pay him to-morrow.
Gold and copper are not breakable. Iron is a good thing.
A debtor is not always a liar. Chop this firewood (pi.).
That kind of cloth will not do for a tunic, it is spotted
(ina alama-alama).
2 To translate into English idiom the sentence must be inverted.
3 K'itu understood. For Old English use of preposition before
Infinitive see Luke vii. 24.
4 See Contracted Suffixes, Study XVI.
5 Translate, " A few days hence," i.e. BaaJaya .
STUDY XI
71
SPECIMEN ADJECTIVES, ETC.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
8. mwoma, good (man)
P. werna, good (men)
:S. mwema, good (tree)
P. miema, good (trees)
S. njema, good (house)
P. njema, good (houses)
S. chcma, good (thing)
P. vyema, good (things)
S. jema, good (name)
P. mema, good (names)
S. [jema], good (monster)
P. [miema], good (monsters)
S. wema, mwema, good
(string or condition)
P. njema, good (strings)
S. pema, good (place)
8. kwema, good (dying or
direction)
VARIABLE
m'baya, bad (man)
wabaya, bad (men)
mbaya, bad (tree)
mibaya, bad (trees)
mbaya, bad (house)
mbaya, bad (houses)
kibaya, bad (thing)
vibaya, bad (things)
baya, bad (name)
mabaya, bad (names)
baya, bad (monster)
mibaya, bad (monsters)
ubaya, mbaya, bad
(string or condition)
mbaya, bad (strings)
pabaya, bad (place)
kubaya, bad (dying or
direction)
PREPOSITION "OF."
wa, of (man)
wa, of (men)
wa, of (tree) ,
ya, of (trees)
ya, of (house)
za, of (Jwuses)
cha, of (thing)
vya, of (things)
la, of (name)
ya, of (names)
la, of (monster)
la, of (monsters)
wa, of (string)
za, of (strings)
pa, of (place)
kwa, of (death)
X. P. mwema, </ood (places) mbaya, bad (places) mwa, (of places)
EELATIVE PKONOUNS
There is no separable Relative Pronoun in Swahili. The
variable relative particles given below, which run throiigh all
the classes, are bound up in the construction of the verb, just as
the personal particles are — some tenses preferring them as suffixes,
some as infixes. The Verbs "To Be" and "To Have," which
have no verb-stem proper in the Present Tense, borrow the
particle of the Historical Past Tense to tack the relative on to,
so making aliye, he who is, aliye na, he who has. The Present
Negative of " To Have " takes the common negative particle " si "
as a stem on which to fix the relative, and by adding " liuwa" to
this we obtain the Present (and Past) Negative of the Verb
" To Be."
1 This always agrees with tho noun that precedes it.
72
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
.e'i
&a
s S
i.i S*f
s> •« S? ^ e v-/
5 is §g|
"* <*, e s
E g
-S-S
2^
,t:
51J
a3 l|iililli£?i<Mi3
^H^ S g „-? S
_•• •*" ** •>*
^HS^^ O O *** ^ "** ^S ^ "*"t
•*. *? ^ 2 *7> hfc O ^i. f^ ^* » 5
0 .3 .2 i ^ •- ~ ° o" 2 •-•* 3 S" -S S
^3 'S ^ '> S >-» » ^3 P 'N & -^ S S >»^ T1 5
S fe
"* r«
l|il^|i}«i ill
>>S o >X >>£ F* c
QQf^QQaJQgf^qgA^CJI
QQ
I Illli
STUDY XII
73
STUDY XII
Muwili (ii.) — The Body
KKwa (iv.), head.
uso (vii.), face.
jito (v.), eye.
p'ua (iii.), nose.
shikio (sikio) (v.), ear.
nywele (vii. pi.), hair.
mkono (ii.), hand, arm.
kidole (iv.), finger, toe.
chanda (iv.), linger.
chanda cha gumba (iv.), thumb.
guu (v.), leg, foot.
kanwa (v.), mouth.
ulimi (vii.) (pi. ndimi), tongue.
<avu (v.), cheek.
mdomo (ii.), lip.
jino (v.), tooth.
moyo (ii.), heart.
saud (iii.), voice, tune.
-eupe, white.
•a kusholo, left.
-a kuume, right.
kuumba, to create, to form, to
shape.
kusimama, to stand (up), to stop
(of a watch, etc.).
kulekeza, to point, put opposite to.
kunyosha, to stretch.
kunyoa, to shave.
kuiana, to comb.
kunuk'a, to smell (trans, and
neut.).
kuonyesha, to show.
kufahamu, to understand, re-
member.
kuuma, to hurt, to pain (neut.),
to bite (trans.).
kutuniza, to hurt (tr.), to cause
pain, to injure.
kuumia, to suffer (bodily hurt).
Mngu (i.), God.
Mwenyiezi Mngu, Almighty God.
binadamu (i.), mwanaadamu, sou
of Adam, human being, mau.
bega (v.), shoulder,
maungo (v. pi.), back,
kiungo (iv.), joint, member,
kitena (iv.), comb.
Mdevu (iv.), chin.
ndevu (iii.), beard,
nguvu (iii.), strength,
akili (iii. pi.), sense, intelligence,
upande (vii.), side,
mbavu (vii.), ribs, side.
-eusi, black.
-ekundu, red.
(Zamu (iii.), blood,
tumbo (v.), stomach,
matumbo (v.), entrails,
ngovi (iii.), skin,
mfupa (ii.), bone,
mshipa (ii.), vein, nerve, muscle,
ini (v.), liver,
ubongo (vii.), brain.
ukucha (vii.), nail, claw,
figo (v.) kidney,
shingo (iii.), neck,
k'oo (iii.), throat, glottis,
kaakaa (v.), tonsil,
kilimi (iv.), uvula.
kisigino (iv.), heel,
go/i (v.), knee,
kifua (iv.), chest,
p'umzi (iii. pi.), breath,
-gumu, hard, stiff,
laini, smooth,
-ororo, soft.
Bead and Translate
Nywele zakwe ni nyeusi, meno yakwe ni meupe,
Damn ni kit'u chekundu. Maguu na mikono na ma-
bega na inidomo na ma to na masikio na magot'i
74 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
1 ttmayo 2mawili 3mawili (in two's), ela ki£wa na uso na
kanwa na tumbo na moyo l tunavyo 2 vimoja 3 vimoja tuu
(singly). Una vyanda vingapi? N'na vyanda kunii.
Una vidole vingapi ? N'na vidole ishirini. Ulimi hauna
mfupa. Meno na kucha na mifupa ni vit'u vigumu lakini
ngovi na ulimi na mafavu na kilimi na makaakaa ni
vyororo. Mt'u mwenyi shingo ngumu hafai. Ngovi ya
muwili na maguu yafaka oshwa, lakini ni'tu hunawa
(icill wash) mikono na uso (his). Fulani guu lakvve
4 lamuuma. Sikio halipiti kitfwa. Ubongo wa binadamu
ndio G ulio wenyi akili, niuwili iidio 5 ulio na nguvu,
moyo na misbipa ndiyo 5iliyo na ^amu. Nywele za
wanawake zafaka ku/anwa k\va kitena.
Translate
Stretch out your hand [on] this side. Tell him to
show me his foot. It is the nose which smells odours
[and] it is the tongue which tastes [the] sweetness of
(yd) food. Fold [your] hands, children, and stand
properly. It is [my] uvula which troubles me, it needs to
be cut, I must go to the doctor (dakitari). God Almighty
created man and gave him intelligence and strength.
Men shave, women do not shave. He showed us the
liver, kidneys and ribs 2 of the sheep which was sold in
the market yesterday. Breath comes from the chest.
The thieves injured [his] throat and back. Her skin
is smooth. My right hand hurts me [but my] left has
nothing the matter with it (translate "it has not a word").
It is his heels which will suffer from (kwa) those shoes.
1 Objective pronouns with the Verb " To Have " are expressed by
relative suffixes, instead of by the ordinary infix. Tunayo = we have
them (nouns in Cl. ii. aud v.).
2 When one adjective, verb, adverb, or preposition qualifies or
refers fo two or more substantives of different classes, it may either
agree with the last of these substantives or take the concords of
cl. iv. as here.
3 See note 1, Study X.
4 This neuter verb can only be used transitively of pain to the
object's own person. When inflicted by another " umiza" is used.
5 Since the relative particle with the verb " To Have " is em-
ployed as an objective, the relative sense is obtained in this indirect
way — " it is it which is having," or "it is it which is with."
STUDY XII 75
~ -? .SH-^ni --sl'l 1 -
t" »«« ^ r^j ,2 "flS ^ f^* r^, *** '^ *S "S« ,^ *^ C
-w •* -5 1? .- S -5 'S ~ S .s "S •* ^ S p
76
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
•«• o
"o^
**
'S^S
• ~ .a
•«i -i s ^'
1
•v« .2 ~ g
*S S ""^ >JS "*!
o ^ G
3
C^"*v ^* f*\
; o og .« .£
4 .E** .5* us 02 OQ
0 >>
rc
3 a
r? t^_, o_>
t
S ^
a
i
8
i1!
1 fl
und it (m
bound the
1
a
5
S
-s
O "*"*
* -?
bound it (
ch bound t
O
"5
3
1
:€
V
S
S1
z
6
£
•
p
H
•«!
o
7 M)^o bound the
hou who bountiesi
he who bound the
<e who bound him
e who bound me
they icho bound j
(tree) which bou'i
icy (trees) which
** "^3
||
^ oS
8 ®
O ^
it (thing) which
they (things) ivhi<
(word) which boit
they (icords) whit
(monster) which
ey (monsters) whi
("trintj) which bm
they (strings) w/t,
S
M
e
E
i— i
(_,
be jg*
§2
'SeH
r * * rf -"S ~
las? ?;?0
= c a^ a a
cf cf
bO bO
A
So
s
3
'-«
bo
g
\ bO
M
•S S
of fS
to bo
p c
•"S of
c?£
bo a
of
M
d
«*H S
P ej go
G '' '
^i
r^'S
03 t*-*
t*— ' %-H
O
'3
— N
"*- :— •
7
."
G
^
^1
^ a
M
'•^H "a
II ll
ll
if
j 'i
"o
1'
0
.5*
"rt
'a Is
C3-W
a f- ^ ^
^5 N
•^
>
^5 t*>
^5 ^
"3
'N
e.
~ c: o
J S
15. .2
* S S
cf . ^
bO *
c bo «>
s £
-^ a
.«
OJ OQ OQ ft^' Oj R| 05 &H
CC
STUDY XIII
77
STUDY XIII
Mtoni na Pwani — On the river and by the shore
bahari (iii.), ocean, sea.
nrwana maji (i.), baharia (v.),
sailor, seaman,
mto (ii.), river,
wimbi (v.), wave,
mashua (iii.), boat,
kasia (v.), oar.
shuari (iii.). calm,
tanga (v.), sail,
nanga (iii.), anchor,
jahazi (v.), ship, craft, vessel,
mtumbwi (ii.), canoe,
chombo (iv.), utensil, vessel, boat,
dhow.
Jau (v.), dhow,
abiria (v.), passenger,
ched (iv.), ticket, passport,
nauli (iii.), fare.
shehena (v.), cargo,
meli (iii.), mail-steamer,
mvuvi (i.), fisherman,
ukambaa (vii.), rope (plaited),
kuvuta, to pull, draw (row),
kuvuka, to cross over,
kuzama, to sink, to be drowned,
kttzamisha, to drown (trans.),
kuogelea, to swim.
kupakia, to ship cargo.
ku<npa, to throw, throw away.
ku/embea baharini, or majini, to
go for a row.
kupokea, to receive,
maji yajaa, tide is coming in.
maji yapwa, tide is ebbing,
kufa, to die.
knvua, to fish.
kusafiri, to travel, to start, to sail.
kutweka, to hoist (sail, load).
kutna, to furl (sail), to put down
(load).
kina (iv.), kilindi (iv.), depth,
deep sea.
kamba (iii.), cord, line (of coir).
ng'ambu (iii.), the opposite shore.
1 kisiwa (iv.), island.
mwamba (ii.), rock.
nzio (vii.), fish-trap.
nt'i (iii.), land, earth.
Kisauni, Frere Town.
Mswahili (i.), a Swahili.
Mwarabu (i.), an Arab.
Muhindi (i.), an Indian.
Maskati, Muscat.
Amu, Lamu.
r/Aaruba (iii.), storm.
nahodha (iii.), captain, skipper.
mlingot'i (ii.), mast.
banriari (iii.), landing-place, har-
bour.
rZira (iii.), mariner's compass.
sukani (iii.), rudder, helm.
karibu (na, ya), near, soon, close
by, nearly.
-kavu, dry.
nyavu (iii.), net.
-a pili, the other, the second.
-kubwa, big, great.
-dogo, little, small.
-fupi, short.
-refu, long.
Bead and Translate
Bahari ni k'ubwa, hapana k'itu kiifungacho. Yule
rnzee alikuwa baharia zamani, akasafiri hate, Maskati
na visiwa vya mbali. Mito ya nt'i hii si mikubwa.
1 Kisiwani, an up-country name for Mombasa.
78 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mashua ya Mwarabu huyu ndiyo itupelekayo l Kisauni
sikuzof'e. Vutani makasia, watoto, maji yapwa, tungelifika
ng'ambu, ela ham'kuvuta. Mimi ni mvuvi 2ni/upae
nyavu. Upepo ni mwingi, ni heri tutue tanga. Majahazi
ya Waswahili 3hufika Malindi na Amu na Unguja ilia
hayafiki Ulaya. Mtumbwi hauna nanga wala sukani wzila
rfira. Atekaesafiri katika meli yampasa kutoa nauli.
Waliindi wako wapi leo ? Wanavuka bandarini kupakia
shehena katika rfau lao. Chombo kiliclio ondoka hapa
juzi kilipigwa ni d^aruba, maabiria wangi walizama
baharini 4 wasiweze kuogelea. Penyi wimbi na milango
i papo.
Translate
The fishermen 2 go (hwenda) every day to look for fish
in the trap ; if they find them they are pleased. A captain
whom our friends knew bound his child to the mast with
a rope that he 5 might not be drowned. The little
European at the (kule) Custom House is the one 6 (he it is)
who receives the tickets from those who journey by (in a)
dhow. Cross over [to] the other shore, the tide is
coming in. He who does not fish with a line, fishes with
a net. They left that poor man who was 7 nearly dying.
You are tired already [and] (wala) we are not in sight of
(have not seen) (dry) land yet. Hoist the sail [and] let
us go to deep water, we shall not find waves or rocks, it is
8 (there is a) calm. "When the sailors are wanted (Fut.)
you will not find them on the shore. Our boat is short
and [our] oars are long.
1 A few nouns ending naturally in " ni " do not take the locative
termination — p'wani, jioni, mizani (?), roshani.
2 The pronominal particle must agree with the pronoun antecedent
in number and person.
3 " Hufika " = " can go " or " often go," as opposed to " yafika "-
they are going. See Study XIV.
4 See note 2, Study X.
5 The verb " pata " is often used as an auxiliary. Asipate
kuzama - asizame.
6 See Study XIV.
7 See note on Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
• Vide verb « To Have," Study VII.
STUDY XIII 79
MOKE ABOUT RELATIVES
There being no objective relative particle in Swahili,
the personal objective infix is used, and the relative made
to agree in number and person with this instead of with
the nominative —
aiufungao, we whom he binds. wam'fungae, 1 whom they bind.
atcrtfungao, ye or they whom he wa&ufungae, thou whom they
binds. bind.
a/a'fungac/io, it (the thiwj) which wazifungazo, they (the houses)
he binds. which they bind.
uiwfungao, it (the tree) which I uh'fungafo, it (the word or thing')
bind. which thou bindest.
aliowafaka, they whom he wanted. waliyempa, he to whom they gave.
When, therefore, the subject and object are alike in
number, the sentence may bear a double meaning —
anifungae, he who binds me or I whom he binds.
om'fungae, he who binds him or 7w whom he binds.
wafwfungao, they who bind us or we whom they bind.
m'tcafungao, ye who bind them or they whom ye bind.
For the use of a relative with other than the four
tenses given on p. 75, and to avoid ambiguity generally,
there exists in Swahili a convenient relative stem on to
which the varying suffixes of nouns and pronouns can be
attached — amba ; this immediately precedes the verb.
CLASS
IS. mimi ambae sifungi, / who do not fast.
S. wewe ambae hukwenda, you who did not go.
8. yeye ambae bajaitwa, he who has not yet been called.
P. swiswi ambao turigelipenda, we who would have liked.
P. nywinywi ambao m'likuwako, ye who were there.
P. wao ambao wakali kulima, they who are still cultivating.
IS. no ambao haufcik'atwa, that same (free) which will not be
cut.
P. iyo ambayo iiak'atwa, these same (trees) which will be cut.
III. P. zizo ambazo ni mbaya, these same (houses') which are bad.
S. kicho ambacho chatusumbua, that same (thing) which
IV.
annoys us.
P. vivyo ambavyo havikufaa, these same (things) which did
not suit.
80
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
S. lilo ambalo hali/aanguka, that fame (icord) winch will not
Jail.
P. yayo ambayo yangcJakwa, these same (words) vhich would
be wanted.
VII. S. uo ainbao si mbovu, that same (string') which is not rotten.
VIII. S. papo ambapo papcndeza, that same (place) which phases.
IX. S. kuko ambako walikimbia, that same (direction) ichither
they fed.
X. P. mumo ambarao tnlijififa, these same (places') wherein we hid
ourselves.
STUDY XIV
Shatitbani — In the plantation or field
shamba (v.), vegetable garden,
bus/ani (iii.), flower garden,
udongo (vii.), soil, earth, mould.
m/anga (ii.), s. sand, pi. light
earth.
m'ti (ii.), tree, plant,
nyasi (vii. pi.), grass,
jani (v.), leaf.
ua (v.), flower (-lawarirfi, rose )
kisima (iv.), well,
ndoo (iii.), backet,
tunda (v.), fruit,
jembe (v.), hoe.
mwitu (ii.), forest, jungle,
shoka (v.), axe.
banda (v.), hut.
kibanda (iv.), little hut.
mmea (ii.), crop,
siafu (ii.), soldier ants,
/ungu (iii.), small ants.
shina (v.), root.
-biti, green, fresh, raw, unripe,
-bivu, ripe, mature,
kulima, to hoe, to cultivate, to
clear ground.
kung'oa, to root out, uproot.
kupanda, to sow, plant.
kuvuna, to reap,
kuzaa, kuvyaa, to bear, lo yield.
kukauka, to dry up, become dry.
kunyauka, to wither, shrivel.
kuteka, to draw water.
kulinda, to guard, keep watch.
kutanda, to j)luck, gather.
kufimba. to dig.
kttfema, to cut down, to fell.
kuvuja, to leak.
knjenga, to build.
kumea, to grow, thrive.
mwiba (ii.), (pi. miba), thorn.
k'unde (iii.), beans.
tuta (v.), raised bed for vege-
tables.
kwanini ? why ? what for ?
mk'ulima (i.), agriculturist, hus-
bandman, farmer.
mbeyu (iii.), seed, grain.
t'embe (iii.), a grain (Adj. a
little, a few).
mpanzi (i.), sower.
mavuno (v. pi.), harvest.
k'wekwe (iii.), weeds.
magugn (v. pi.), tangle, under-
growth.
mwembe (ii.), mango tree.
embe (v.), mango.
mbuyu (ii.), baobab tree.
mtomoko (ii.), custard-apple tree.
STUDY XIV 81
mkwaju (ii.), tamarind tree. mnanasi (ii.), pineapple plant.
mpera (ii.), guava tree. -pana, broad.
mlimau (ii.), lemon tree. -embamba, narrow.
mgomba (ii.), plantain tree. kama, like, as, such as, (as it
mdimu (ii.), lime tree. was).
muhogo (ii.), casava. mndu (ii.), hatchet, handbill.
Bead and Translate
Ndugu zetu J mlioweta wanakwenda kulima shambani.
2 Mdogo wao hajui hatfa kung'oa k'wekwe, ndiyo maana ya
yule mktibwa kwenda, apate rufunza 2mdogo wakwe.
Kuna miti gani 3 shambani 4 mwenu ? Kuna 5 miembe,
minazi, luipera, 6 migomba, midimu, mikwaju na mibuyu
— yot'e yazaa. Tena kuna mihogo na minanasi na k'unde
na matuta ya, viazi. Vizuri Sana ! Mna 7 vyof'e m'fakavyo
1 Ai is sometimes contracted into e ; e.g. wete for waite, kefa for
kaifa.
- There are no degrees of comparison in Swahili. " Mdogo wao "
stands for "the younger (or youngest) of them," and "mdogo
wakwe" for "his younger (or youngest) brother (or cousin)." See
Study XVI.
3 When " shamba " takes the locative ending, a special plantation
or garden is referred to ; but in the expression " amekwenda shamba "
" the country " generally is understood.
•• When the locative is followed by the variable proposition -a (of)
or r-itlier of the pos?essive adjectives, different meanings can be
obtained, according as to whether the word is put in —
cl. viii. shambani pa Mzungu, signifying at or ly the European's
plantation.
cl. ix. shambani kwa Mzungu, „ in the direction of, or to
the European's plan-
tation.
cl. x. shambani mwa Mzungu, „ (a) in or within the
E uropean's plantat ion .
cl. x. mashambani mwa Mzungu, „ (I) to or into the Euro-
pean's plantations.
5 All names of trees are in cl. ii. The names of their respective
fruits (in the singular) are found by omitting the class prefix. The-
ft-nits (themselves) are in cl. v. with "ma" plurals. Nazi, ndizi,
ndimu, are exceptions, being in cl. iii.
0 Mgomba is the only tree which differs in nomenclature from its
fruit.
7 Elliptical for " Mna vit'u vyoi'e m'vitekavyo."
SWAHILI GRAMMAR F
82 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
basi 8 isipokuwa michungwa [<u]« Naam ! Na
michungwa hatuifaki, maana matunda 9 yakwe hayafai
kitu. Kwa nini ? Machungwa n'liyoyala hapa juzi
yalikuwa mafamu sana. Labuda, lakini miti yakwe
haikumea huku, yale mazuri yaliwayo yafoka Unguja.
Usiteke inaji kwa ndoo ivujayo.
Translate
Farmers who sow bad seed will not reap a good harvest.
The owner of (mwenyi) this garden always gives us
[some] beautiful flowers. There are not many fruits in
this country (there are) 10 only mangoes and guavas and
pine-apples and bananas — that is all ! But there are
others besides — limes, cocoa-nuts, oranges, tamarinds,
custard -apples and lemons, you forgot these. Our
neighbours have not yet dug a well in their plantation,
they are still building a hut. Your path is broad, ours is
narrow. The jungle which was here has all been cut
down with a hatchet. The grass and the crops are all dried
up n with the hot (fierce) sun, even the undergrowth and
leaves and thorns as well. Cut that root with [your] hoe.
It is not the sower alone who knows that this soil is bad.
These fruits are not fit for eating (pass inf.), they are
quite green. Only one is ripe.
8 The impersonal use of the Negative Participial Tense of the
verb " To Be " for expressing except, urith the exception of, but, has
made the word practically a preposition.
9 See note 9, Study III.
la Tu and pia generally stand at the end of a phrase or sentence.
11 Use "kwa," the instrumental preposition — never "na" which
means together with.
STUDY XIV
83
I'HOUGH "
3 ,>•
»
•8.S-2
S^l*
«« -^- -^_
2>o» g4
iiJ
•SJSS
%
11 1-s
2SS
"3 s *s
* "oo <»
<» _ w
J^ -§«
030
•g-l-g
S £ e
e « S>
a
o
a a -2 a ^
/""s » ai •*•* ^j O
a s a
B C 6
to —. V
s §>^
m
• £j ^} ^.
~ ~ i.
1
i— <
*
•^ 03 ^i flD
V ^ V
<3 *j"j
"o
a
5
gf
H'OOJ
^
S to
to
a
•* -^ to
00
00
7;
M S
^ fcl —
L
S5
t» j3 w
"t* 2
n * 2
H
S *^4 O *"""
o
8
H
?; H
S; - — ^ — -
H
^ TT^
o
a
o
w
W
*» « c"i S^
§ J .i^" .|^
|£
J
Jj
1
01
rf^
3
^-x S **^2 cufi
N .^^
B
N *~1
0
ryS
PH ^, M< ^
QQ
2
CO
0
1 |-|f
|^|
^
f|
"o
H
£
2 ^ cT P o
:^> .-'5
O
-rH ^
a
EH
Pi
I-*
P o _ &1 cT 03
fi o. ° c T-=> S/5"
8.S.MI
3
sa^lj
3
0
H
CO
H- 1
1
n '3 '5* '?
/!"••••
rteq co
M
•8 JB 'S > M
ill
"S
PH
,/a
1 ti ^
. . •»
f
o»-5
1
H
•g
'•S -S s
•S .» **
!a
s»-5
5
0
^
^5 "*^* co
^i 1^ O
EH
"l»-5"r 5s,
1
CcJ
. ao
^ -w'^,
** S4 S
p
~S 3 «
-2
3
to p
"o S § "*" •
2 "o «
3
p^» ao ^,
a
^ O
o
W
0
H £
H "=
- .2
I till
IPs
d
O
s 2 ••^*
0
H
-* O 5 ,r *>
I«l
fa
o
OS •-
s
pT
r^ .-*
H
t£^i4 ^
»
o
-*a
of
g 60
&
£
O .C" 05
g a tc
c«
CO
X a
t*~l C* §
a .~ «2
o
e» ^
s c:
H
.s .« o<2
T
s
Q ^r, ^^
^*1 ^^- ^
H
o
o
5;
^ ^
—
*. •[ 1 ^"
-z
o S3
f S * -S, 5
_cS <S
H
'S "ol J<1
H
^•"2
'5 -
5*
••
-^ •§ .*. J CJ-
J >>
•< T3
£ "S ^'S^
c3 tC- ^ o» .
,^""~ '
^ 4)
-' 0
.5 — -) '.z? ci'^ - 5
ff:^" :^
••^""•3 ^ *^
'•'J'iJ
— *
3 '5 2 '^ S '"' S
~*^ . — 5
•"** i^ *" '^v
~£
o * "~~r <£'"'-
•- .„- a
1
2 ». c-^ ="|»±
r» Q r><^~> ""^
oo '5? J^
'S^'a ^ * §
"§ 3 S"^
•*- -'^'Sa'
llr"1
o
1 - ri :^
r-Ic-iri
i-J ^ ec
84
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
w^
E"1 'oo*
- 9
"A
or a
Hu"1 OB
variabl
•H <S -2
.» S s *
03 C3
tc bo
a a
cScS
3 3
a
IP I
rS S es ,0
s'e g> s
• 3
g> O
-
',:) oS
STUDY XIV
85
b £«
^ C «ti
HI
o f">S
.^^p
m '3 3 ?.
86
SVVAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XV
Safarini (iii.) — On a Journey
kiongozi (iv.), guide, leader,
mnyap'ara (i.), head man (of
caravan).
msafiri (i.), traveller,
mkubwa (i.), chief, big man.
mtumia (i.), elder, veteran
(porter).
mkalimani (i.), interpreter,
asikari (iii.), policeman, soldier,
janmdari (v.), corporal,
hema (iii.), tent,
mzigo (ii.), load, burden,
beramu (iii.), flag, banner,
k'ome (iii.). small flag,
k'ambi (iii.), camp.
p'osho (iii.), rations, food-money,
k'ata (iii.), pad or head-cushion
for loads,
boma (v.), stockade, palisade,
fence,
huruma (iii.), pity, compassion,
mercy.
mbono (ii.), castor-oil plant,
kupiga i ago, to camp,
kung'oa k'ome, to start the day's
march,
kuvunda k'ambi, to break up
camp.
kuterekeza, to halt and refresh.
kufasiri. kugeuza, to translate,
kuvumilia, to endure, to bear, to
put up with,
ku/angamka, to take courage, to
be encouraged, to be cheerful,
kuamka, to awake, to wake up.
kuamsha, to waken.
kuwika, fo crow (of a cock).
kupiga (bunduki, etc.), to shoot,
to fire.
kuinua, to lift.
kukaza, to intensify.
kukaza mwendo, to quicken pace.
kusimamia, to supervise, oversee.
kusemea kuteta na, to scold*
reprimand.
nr/ia nyeupe, way is clear.
nJia imekufa, path is overgrown.
killa, kulla, every, each (invar.).
alfajiri (iii.), dawn, daybreak.
mjinga (i.), simpleton, greenhorn,
novice.
sirikali (iii.), the government.
iaarisbi (iii.). mail-bearer, mail-
runner.
kitete, kiioma (iv.), gourd, water-
bottle.
nguvu (iii.), strength, force.
shimo (v.), hole, pit.
mshare (ii.), arrow.
uta (vii.), upindi (vii.), bow.
mwendo (ii.), journey, distance,
gait.
ngao (iii.), shield.
jimbi, jogoi (v.), cock.
mzinga (ii.), cannon.
bunrfuki (iii.), gun, musket, rifle.
basfola (iii.), pistol.
mkuki (ii.), spear.
rungu (iii.), club, knobkerry.
mtaimbo (ii.), crowbar.
-zito, heavy.
m'no, very, exceedingly.
STUDY XV 87
Bead and Translate
Wapagazi hawatfaki kutfukua mizigo, wasema ni mizito.
Wasipoifukua hawapati posho basi. Wainbie si mbali
tuenclako leo, wafakapofika wafapumuzika. Mnyap'ara
ni mkali m'no, liana hururaa, sikuzot'e hutota na wat'u.
Tena asubuhi kiongozi alikosa nc?ia, tukapo/ea mwituni.
Tulipokuwamo m'le tulionana na wasafiri wengiae ambao
killa mmoja ali/ukua beramu na buncZuki. Mkubwa wa
mji ule yuaja kuzunguraza na mkalimani wetu ambae
pekee awez* kufasiri maneno yakwe. Huyu mzee apenrfa
kusikia habari ya p'wani. Atfaka tukae hapa siku nyingi,
tupige rago kab:sa na kujenga hemazetu. La ! Sipa-
pendi, tena maji yamekwisha vifomani mwa asikari,
na jamudari asema kwamba hawa^avumilia tukingoja.
Wang'oe k'ome basi, sasa hivi, tuondoko : tumeterekeza,
yatosha, mlumia.
Translate
The people of these countries always build fences to
(loc. case) * their villages. They fight with bows and
arrows, spears and clubs ; [and] each one carries a shield.
Although we are tired, we must break up camp to-morrow
when the cock - crows (particp. tense) ; tell that simple
fellow to wake us [at] daybreak. When the government
mail-man comes (fut.), the soldiers will fire a cannon.
This path is overgrown, we had better go back. If you
are bitten 3 by a soldier ant, it will pain (you will suffer
pain) ; but the small ants do not hurt [one]. A strong
man (man having strength) can lift a crowbar. The
women's head-pads fell into a hole. Our porters would
have been cheerful if we had not quickened the pace.
Do not scold them, only supervise (them). Tell them if
they get castor oil from these plants, they will be able to
sell it when they return to the coast.
1 See note 4, Study XIV.
2 This is one of the few instances where the verbal prefixes of a
sentient noun prefer the concords of the class it belongs to by its
form rather than of the one it belongs to by its meaning.
3 " By" referring to the agent, after a passive, is always rendered
"ni."
88
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
¥1
^ s»
a. S,
*ju» S "^ 3 •» ! "s 43 li S^ ~ •*•
g "*•• 3 "!!- a "*" "** tr ""' § 3 'S. z
Q} *-i Qi S C 5 O <D cJ i-i ~ ^
a I sa 1 •S^-^'gi is
no
Q
M
O
p
6
o
H
H
O
H
S
<:
ali.
kub
8 of
Si 5
at 2
^ ***/ o! ^* of*?
eJ^s^/ — - CL K!
K ^ '^ r^ ?*-» ff
>» O "~s c- f^
- 11 s**i
a rf-r «- |^
a i
i
r-4 § i
£# & M >> 0,'a.
51 £a s a a
pap
kuk
6 ^
•§ ^
x*lX ^3
V QQ
e. ^
pf ^
.ft ^
O
PM
CO
STUDY XVI
89
STUDY XVI
Hawa net Nyakati — Weather and Time
hawa hewa (iii.), air, climate,
weather.
waka/i (vii.), time, season,
majira (v.), appropriate time,
mara (iii.), a time (mara t'atu =
tlirce times).
murfo (vii.), interval of time,
zamani (iii.)> time,
saa (iii-), hour, watch, clock,
f/akika (iii.), minute, moment,
jumaa (iii. and v.), ijumaa (iii.),
week.
mweri (ii.) month, moon,
mwaka (ii.), year, season of great
rains.
miongo (ii.), decades,
mshenri (i.). savage, heathen,
masika (v.) (no sing.), great rains,
mchoo (ii.), lesser rains,
vuli (iii.), latter rains,
kusi (iii.), S.W. monsoon,
kasikazi (iii.), N.E. monsoon,
kushinda, to stay, to spend the
day.
kukawia, to delay, to loiter,
kung'aa, kung'ara, to shine,
kuandama, to follow, succeed,
knzirfi (intr.), to exceed, to
increase.
kupungna, to decrease, diminish,
kuonekana, to appear, to be seen,
to become visible,
kuongeza (trans.), to add to, to
increase,
kupambazuka, to dawn.
kucha, to dawn, to fear.
kulwa, kutua, to set (of the sun).
kutanda, to spread out, to be-
spread out.
upeo wa ma<o, limit of sight,
horizon.
haina buiii ... , it doubtless . . .
zamani moja, once upon a time.
hapo kale, long ago.
neema (iii.), grace, plenty, pros-
perous season.
rfalili (iii.), sig11! indication.
muanga (ii.) light.
nuxu (iii.), brightness.
kiza (iv.), darkness.
mbingu (vii. pi.), sky, heaven.
nafasi (iii.), space, room, oppor-
tunity.
ulimwengu (vii.), inhabited world.
wingu (v.), cloud.
nyota (iii.), star, planet.
daima, ever, for ever, always, con-
tinually.
mapema, early.
-a kale, old, of old, ancient.
MCHAMMEDAN WEEK.
Ijumaa (siku ya Jumaa), Friday.
Jumaa-mosi, Saturday.
Jumaa-pili, Sunday.
Jumaa-tatu, Monday.
Jumaa-ne, Tuesday.
Jumaa-fano, Wednesday.
Al'hamisi, Thursday.
90 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Bead and Translate
Mwaka huu 1 hakukunya 2 mwaka sana, lakini nichoo na
vuli ilikuwa neetna, alhamdulillahi. Jumaa-pili yafaa
wat'u wapurazike, na siku si/a wafanye kazi. Mbona
ravua yakawia ? Majira ya masika bado ; labuda kesho
yafangia, mbingu leo kutfwa zina 3 mawingu-mawingu
(cloudy), mvua haina budi karibu ifakunya. 4 Usiku wa
Jumaa (i.e. Thursday night) Avat'u walirudi kushinda
kwao Jomvu (at Jomvu) 5saa /ano za usiku. Mwezi
tdkuhizi wang'ara kucha. Hapo kale kulikuwa kiz*
duniani, kisha Mwenyiezi Mngu aliumba muanga, kukawa
mini kulla mahali. Mwezi u/aandama (there loill be new
moon) juruaa ijayo (it ichich comes next) wakafi wa jua
ku<wa, ndipo washenzi wafakapopata nafasi ya ku/eza
ngoma zao. Mwaka nliopita kasikazi ilivuma kwa nguvu,
lakini kusi kidogo <u. Ni saa ngapi sasa ? Nisaanneza
m<ana, Fulani amiliki saa ya fedAa na mkufu wa dhahabu.
Translate
The sign of rain is clouds. Two decades have gone by
since our father died (tr. since when he died our father).
Where have you been, my child, all this time (muda) ?
I did not go anywhere (pahali), I stayed just here (papa
1 The impersonal pronominals "ku" and "pa" are much used
instead of the proper subjective particles, and may be translated,
" There (is or was, is not or was not), etc." The second " ku " = the
characteristic infix of the Past Neg. Ind. and not the Inf. " ku " of the
monosyllabic " kunya." See Study VI.
2 This term is frequently applied to the great rains themselves.
3 An instance of reduplication lessening the force of a word. See
Study XXI.
4 Nights take the name of the day that follows and not of the one
that precedes.
5 Swahili time, like Jewish, is reckoned from sunrise to sunset
(6 p.m.), and from sunset to sunrise (6 a.m.). Hence noon is the 6th
hour of the day (saa site za m<ana), and midnight is the 6th hour of
the night.
STUDY XVI 91
Jtapa~). Your mother called you two [or] u three times,
did you not hear ? I heard nothing, I was 7 asleep ! Once
upon a time a large star appeared in the heavens. Peoplo
of old followed it, and it became their (tr. to them) guide.
In these countries the sun sets [at] six o'clock [in the]
evening ; [in the] morning it begins to dawn 8 (kwacha)
[at] five o'clock. Next Sunday they will come still earlier
(tr. will exceed to come early). Good people are decreas-
ing in the world. The sky is covered with clouds (tr.
clouds are spread out). Famine has 9come into the
country. God has for ever given (added) grace and
strength to (kwa) His people.
6 The Swahilis are fond of omitting the conjunction " or" both
when it connects words and sentences.
7 Since the " me " infix in verbs of posture (see note 3, Study III.)
is used for time present, past time can only be expressed by intro-
ducing the past tense of the verb " To Be " before it, making it a
compound verb.
8 " Kwacha " ±= kuacha (the impersonal pronominal with the Pres.
Indie, of a monosyllabic verb). We can say " Jua la«wa " or " lita-
kufwa," but cannot make " Jua " the subject of the verb "kucha."
9 With the verb " ngia," used in its wide sense, there is an in-
version of subject and object. Whereas in English we say "An
epidemic has come into the town," in Swahili it is " The town has
come into an epidemic " " Mji unangia m&i&dhi " (cf. Luke xxi. 26).
For another of these inversions, see note on Verb " To Have,"
Study VII.
92
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
-
P
02
CO
H
CO
CO
g
P
PH
H
5z;
o
o
II
s
i
mwenzenu
wenzenu
babaenu
tumwaze, etc.]
mwenenu
wenenu
B
8
„
a!
|
la « »-• _
_3 •« S
-3
cT
-2 S
«s,
^J S
O
i;
2 s
*^s
|e T | 1
1
1
© o
'? a
I
H s ^
5
S £
1
or
-t
u **
s
g
£
*^
O 00
X 8 »'
/*4 •
ef
11
«"
b
CH
CO
•^ ti
1
rnwenziwe
wenziwc
babakAve, babai
(or babae)
babaze
[kit'uclie,jambol
mwanaAve
wanawe
liukuu (great gra
le above contract!
i
o
a *.
i
tc
o
o"
o
•3.2
B N
1
1 1
1
1
as
& 0
S 2
ffl
t-I
o.
•O
a
f>
i
g|
3 1
1
§
0
a
CJ
on
mwanao,
wai
If}
i
U
.S
1
s
mwenzangu
wenzangu
tc
1
1
|
mamangu, etc.
mAvanangu
wanangu
?e), mke (wife), mj
of relatives are alsc
contractions in the
CS
a oo 0
5 <u c
OQ £•{
^ R;
05 a;
J c «
a "S »•<
O O CJ
i— I
<M'
CO
•*'
i^" H
A
^
H"
H
Hfa
STUDY XVI 93
SOME OTHER CONTRACTIONS
The verb prefixes " ha," " hi," " hu " are contracted respectively
from " nika," " niki," " ni ku " by the following process —
nik = nk = k' = h
In the same way the future prefix niia becomes n'te, and
finally t'.
Similarly, mbwa = ni wa
nda = ni ya
For full explanation see p. 20, " African Aphorisms."
SOME INVARIABLE ADJECTIVES AND QUASI-
ADJECTIVES
The following adjectives cannot be used directly to qualify a
noun. They may be employed with the relative verb " To Be," or
as adverbials to the strong verbs, or substantively following the
preposition " of" (-a) : —
hai, alive, living ni hai, I am alive mtu aliye hai, a living man
<amu, swer-t, nice uji huu u t&mu, this por- uji ulio <amu, sweet por-
ridge is sweet ridge
safi, clean, pure ya safi, he is clean k'itu kilicho safi, a clean
thing
karibu, near [soon] wa[po] karibu, they are maji yaliyo karibu. water
near which is near
mbali, far, far away yn[ko]mbali sasa, he is miji ya mbali. distant
far away now towns
n<7e, outside mlikwenda n<7e, ye went mt'u wa nVe, an outsider
outside
n'dani, inside u[ko]ndani 1 are you in- mambo ya ndani, internal
side ? affairs
[yajpi ! (var.) which ? ni ipi ? which (house) is ni zipi 1 which (houses)
it ? are they ? (and so on
throw/It all the clatset)
m&to (lit. eyes), awake yu mafo, he is awake hulala mato, he always
sleeps with his eyes open
tupu-tupu, naked alikimbia tupu-tupo, he
ran away naked
94 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Swahili has no degrees of comparison. There are
various ways of comparing — •
(1) By contrasting one statement with another —
wewe ni mdogo, yeye ni mkubwa is equivalent to "He is
bigger than you."
(2) By the use of the verbs kushinda and kupita (to
surpass, to excel), also the verb kuzidi, to increase—
Salim anamshinda Hamisi Salim is stronger than Ha-
kwa nguvu, lakini Hamed misi, but Hamed is the
anawashinda wotf'e, strongest of all.
Wao ni wangi kupita They are more numerous
swiswi, than we are.
Mwaka jana watoto wall- Last year the children were
kuwa wema, mwaka huu good, this year they are
wanazidi, even better.
(3) By the adverb " zaidi," more, and the relative
" kuliko," than (lit. '• where there are ").
Nyumba hii ni ndogo, hii This house is small, that is
ni ndogo zaidi, smaller.
Ma/o yako ni mazuri kuliko Tour eyes are more beauti-
yangu, ful than mine.
(4) The indeclinable adjectives " heri " (better) and
" bora " (best) are used respectively with a comparative
and superlative force.
Ni heri wende, It is better (or well) for
you to go.
Bora afia, The most important tiling
is health.
STUDY XVI
r/3
02
^
W
>^ C
fa P G
2
<g 5
s»
4
B
i
a
•«
1
,K
J
B
I
if
it may bt-
.0
1
»s
Kg
•"S y
•S ""
C "x
o
^~
S
s»/
**
0
.sfksi
i|
||
g|
toever home
txoerer louxt
fefe
» ^
S 1
•« =
1 1
!> S
.c»
%>
-S5
1
is-.
II
"" -~
atsoerer plo(
whatsoever
1
S S s »
Si-«
y ?
~$ 2
"s 1
§ •«
A
"B
tl
•a
^
'o, whosoerer 1
e, whomever ih<
o, whoxoever he
t'e, whotoever u
off, u-lioxoever
)t'e, whosoever i
« o
5-2
l-i
*£
ox,
wayo yot'e, irh>
ziwazo zot'e, wl
'v "g
J3 JD
~0 "5
^ >,
1 ^
°~ _i~
^1,
*3
"5
o
wot'e, whatsoer
razo zot'e, wliai
e*
of
1L
o
&,
d
S
&.
JD
Zi
o
i
E
p
J3
muwamo mot'e
&Z.1L*
0 ^0
§ 2 « §
£ S £ *
& i
i i
I i-
^.s
^
H
!= ?
3'P
P_P
^ O
~ a
§1
0 8
-n S
z S
-2 S
? 'S
._. P
x^>
"2
"2
^•^ ^>
^rG>
3»
1
^\
.£ j£ ^ -
j_£
11
c £
£'?
0 §
€
a
N >.
P S
£
^
•^
«.
k
i.
*>
i
«
1
1
|
1
0
O
J
•S
5.
-i *.
"i
"B
"e
rC:
re;
k
^ »
K
- -
8 P
^5
s
k
s
9
s
B
»
K ~
^ o
X -wl
V »
s 8
o ^5
1 1
s~\
9
fe i
~ 1
|
1
1
s
B
0 0
*** "^
3J
•|S'|
•e*
J5*
« "5
~ij
"1
^s
£
e
'I
•
-f 'I.
"5 "B
r=S rfS
« 1
^ i»
%*s
1
^:
11
55
ss
V
•h
E
"p
o
, any peop
a o
CW P-
S <c
4s £
s>tl
8 |>
o 3
» a>
8 8
cT oj"
iS-1
C B
C .-.
§91
S
s jy~
o
•S9
r
.Cj
a"
9
i--l'
5*
x &»
t
Sv
s
e
s>
R
8
_a
1
"5
^
.*
1 *
"c "c
^ «
8
- 7-
!
"p
S
~o
p
"o
v~
>-. N
S.S
^
£ £"
4
O
Cl
a
o
o
a
o
& p*>
C O
^H "^*
^H
^»
^ o
, V
X~N
x~s
c
J
*^
11
o i
«
0
T3
P
o N
"c
p
^J
' ~ •**
p p
— •.*"*
G
*c
""C
.- p
"c
'a
i"
a a
S->
Si
p
13
'a
N >>
P B
e.
^
~
co'
B;
050;
<%&;
05 a;
"A ^
CO
a|
cejai
oa
CQ
CQ
96
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XVII
Barani—
bara (iii.), interior of country.
ziwa (v.), lake, pond.
mlima (ii. ), mountain.
kilima (iv.), hill.
jUo la maji (v.), spring, source.
kijuto (iv.), stream.
nikondo (ii.) wa maji, current,
stream.
fombi (v.), ravine, nullah.
genge (v.), cliff, precipice.
n'ti ya tambarare, plain.
kishaka (iv.), patch of jungle.
nguu (iii.). peak of hill.
umande (vii.), flew, moisture.
kunge (v.), mist, haze.
kiko (iv.), pipe.
saburi (iii.), patience.
hatari (iii.)» flanger.
mkoma (ii.), branched palm.
kukwea, to cliinb, to ascend.
kuterem'ka, to descend, go down.
kaua, to kill.
kububujika, to well up, bubble.
kutiririka, to flow, to trickle.
kumimina, to pour (trans.).
kuzoia, to hinder, prevent.
kugeuka, to change, to turn (tr.
geuza).
kupatana, to agree, to be recon-
ciled.
kuongoza, to lead, to guide.
kakataa, to refuse.
-Up-country
kiitumia, to use, to make Use of,
to employ.
katafuna tombaku, to chew (to-
bacco).
kunusa tumbaku, to take snuff.
kuvuta tumbaku, to smoke.
sharti, sharuti (fol. by subj.),
"must," of necessity.
pamoja na, together with.
kwa nini ? what for ? why ?
mpiugo (ii.), ebony tree.
<aifa (iii.), nation, tribe.
kaoila (iii.), tribe, clan.
shauri(v.), palaver, counsel, plan
advice.
a'/ui (iii,), foe, enemy.
vita (pi. iv.), war.
k'ondo (iii.)i quarrel, strife.
mfaume (i.), kiDg, chief.
m<awi (i.), sorcerer, wizard, witch
doctor.
gari la moshi (v.), train.
sitesheni (iii.), railway station.
misheni (iii.), mission station.
<?araja (iii.), bridge.
tumbaku (iii.), tobacco.
mahindi (pi. v.), maize, Indian
corn.
mtama (ii.), millet, Kaffir corn.
mpunga (ii.), rice (as it grows).
nganu (iii.), wheat.
mpira (ii.), rubber tree, india-
rubber.
Bead and Translate
Msafiri ni masikini ajapokuwa mfaume. Eudae bara
sliarti awe na saburi ; haini budi a/ak'uta hafari na ina-
nibo magunm, labudu a/apata hasara pia. Siku hizi kusa-
firi si kamazamani. Sasakuna gari la rnosni likupelekalo
1 kulla upeneZapo — k:limani, fumbini, gengeni, au nt'i ya
1 "Kulla upen</apo" = anywhere (i.e. any place) you like. This
convenient mode of representing a noun by its relative particle is
much used. Ex. Killa utekacho, every(thing) you want ; yot'e use-
mayo, all (the words) you say; tumesikia lililotendeka, we have
heard of (the affair) that has happened.
STUDY XVII !>T
t'ambarare. Lakwca juu, laterem'ka rf'iui ; '2 panapo naito
au vijuto, lapita kwa daraja, hakuna k'itu kilizuiacho !
Tena wazungu wamejenga sifesheni killa mabali gari lisi-
mamapo, illi kwamba wasafirio wapate nafasi kungia na
kutoka 3 kama wapendavyo. 4 Mara kwa mara knna vita
barani. Kabila 5hii ina k'ondo nakabilahii 6 juu yaj'ifo la
maji au neno jingine. Kisha wapigana, na wangi huu-
wawa. Watewi woi'e, waume na wake, niadui za wat'u.
Translate
Here there is a mission-station, the people have planted
maize and rice and wheat and millet. Also they have a
plan to bring a stream of water from that big lake into
their fields, in order (illi) to irrigate (Jcutia maji) [in the]
dry season (time of fierce sun or north-east monsoon).
7 This (hayo) water is continually bubbling up, and pours
6 over that patch of jungle to no purpose. The heathen
[people] who live 6 by the three peaks of hills chew
tobacco all day long. [He] who smokes tobacco must use
a pipe. They agreed to guide us [to the] place where
(psnyi) rubber and ebony trees together with the branched
palm trees [grow], but when we got to (fika) their village,
they refused. This nation has only a few cattle, they
(icenyewe) live [in] a land of mist and dew. Water
trickles [down] the mountain as far as the plain.
2 " Where there is, or are " (lit. '• the place which has " contracted
from <: palipo na ").
3 The adverbs "kama" (as), "jinsi" (as or how), and "kama
vile" (just as) require the relative suffix "vyo" to terminate the
verb they precede, in order to complete the sense. There are other
instances where plural concords of cl. iv. have an adverbial force —
vizuri, vyema, well, nicely. hivi, hivyo, vivyo, thus, so, likewise,
vibaya, badly. vivi hivi, precisely so.
vyengine, differently. vile vile, in like manner.
4 " Time after time," " From time to time," " Now and again."
s Where in English we change the demonstrative k% this " to
" that " in order to sharpen the contrast, in Swahili the same adjective
is repeated with a change in the tone of voice only.
0 See Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
" Demonstratives may sometimes precede their nouns; other
adjectives, never.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR O
98 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
DERIVATIVE FORMS OF THE VERB
1. The Causative. The simple verb, and some of the
following verb forms, may become causative by changing
the termination into -sha, -za, -sa, -ya, -nya or -vya.
(a) -sha. Kupowfta (from kupata), to cause to get ;
kvLSomesJia (from kusoma) to cause to read (hence to teach) ;
knfnndisha (from kufunza) to cause to learn (hence to
teach) ; kunyosAa (from kunyoka) to cause to be straight ;
kurusfta (from kuruk'a) to cause to fly (hence to throw).
(fe) -za. Most verbs whose stems end in two vowels
form their causatives in -za. Kukataza, to prohibit (from
kukataa), to cause to refuse ; kukweza (from kukwea) to
raise ; kukimb«za (from kukimbia) to cause to run away ;
kufoza (from kutoa) to cause to give out (hence to tax, to
fine) ; kupungiua (from kupungua) to lessen, to diminish
(trans.) ; kusahawza, to make forget.
(c) -sa. Kutakosa (from kutakata) to cleanse ; kunwsa
(from kunuk'a) to take snuff.
(d) -ya. Kupon^a (from kupona) to cause to escape
or get out of; kuonya (from kuona) to warn (i.e. to cause
to see) ; kukanya (from kukana) to forbid (i.e. to cause to
refuse or deny).
(e) -nya. Kufungawya (from kufunga) to have (baggage,
mizigo) tied up ; kugawaw^a (from kugawa) to have
divided up.
(/) -vya. Kunaw/a (from kunawa) to cause (hands) to
be washed i.e. (to wash some one's hands, or face, or feet) ;
knlevya (from kulewa) to make (some one) drunk ; knjuvya
(from kujua) to make known.
NOTE. — A verb may have two causative forms with
different meanings. Ex. kuapa, to swear; knopwfta, to
adjure, to administer an oath ; kuopt'za, to swear at, to
curse.
NOTE. — Frequently the causative idea would not occur
to an English mind which would employ a different verb
altogether. Ex. kupanrfteAa (to cause to climb) stands for
to raise, to promote.
STUDY XVII 99
2. The Neuter (also called Resultant or Quasi-Passive)
used (i) When a state resulting from an action is considered
not necessarily implying an agent ; (ii) when we desire
to predicate of a substantive that it is capable of receiving
a given action. Terminations = ika, ikana (following an
a, *', or u, in the stem) ; eka, ekana (following an et or o, in
the stem) ; uka, ukana (following a penultimate u in a
trisyllabic stem) ; Ex. —
(a) Kupatikana, to be obtainable; kupigika, to be
beatable ; kuvundika, to become broken, to be breakable.
(6) Kutendeka, to be " doable," to be done, to have
happened ; kukosekana, to be missing, absent.
(c) Kuraruka, to be torn or tearable ; kufumukana, to
be separated, broken up; kuzumbukana, to be found, to
come to light.
NOTE. — The student must distinguish between Neuters
and Reciprocals with -ana terminations ; also between
Neuters and Transitives with -ika terminations. In each
case the sense will decide. Ex. Kuonana (rec.), to see
each other ; kuonekana (neut.), to be visible ; kufitamana
(neut.), to be hidden; kupika (trans.), to cook; kuzika
(trans.), to bury; kufitfika (neut.), to be concealable;
kuangika (trans.), to hang up ; kualika (trans.), to invite ;
kualika (neut.), to crack or split; kusimika (trans.), to
erect, to set up.
3. The Applied or Prepositional has four uses: (I) To
supply the simple verb with a prepositional meaning ; (II)
To express completeness (with the word " mbali " (right
away) suffixed); (III) To attach to the verb a new meaning ;
(IV) To localize action. It is formed by inserting i (after
an a, i, or u, preceding in the root), or e (after an e, or o
preceding in the root), before the final vowel of the stem.
Examples of Use I. —
(a) Kupatia (from kupata), to procure for (some one) ;
kupitia (from kupita), to pass by; kuangukia (from
kuanguka), to fall down to, at, or before (some one or
something).
(6) Kunenea (from kunena), to speak against; kuo-
mbea (from kuomba), to pray for.
100 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(c) "When the stem ends in two vowels, the letter I is
inserted before the prepositional vowel for the sake of
euphony. Ex. Kuzuilia (from kuzum), to prevent by;
kupasulia (from kupasua), to split with ; kutembelea (from
kutembea), to walk about ; kung'olea (from kun^'oa), to
root up with or for.
(d) The same rule holds when a Causative becomes a
Prepositional. Ex. kuangushia, to cause to fall down to ;
kusomeshea, to cause to read from ; kujalizia (from knjaa),
to cause to fill up with.
Examples of Use 11. —
(e~) Kutapia, or kutfupilia mbali, to throw right away ;
kuishilia (or kupotelea) mbali, to be gone out of reach
altogether, to be lost for ever; Kuulia mbali, to kill off
out of sight. The prepositional syllable lia is occasion-
ally separated from the verb and made an independent
word. See Psalms ii. 3, Ixxxiii. 4 (Ed. 1904).
Examples of Use III. —
(/) Some verbs reduplicate the termination to impart
a different meaning from that conveyed by the simple
prepositional form : Ex. Kupiga, to beat ; kupigia, to
beat for or with ; kupigilia, to consolidate a floor or roof
by a special process of hammering peculiar to the Swahilis.
Kuatfa, to leave; kuatia, to leave to or for; kua/ilia, to
forgive, to remit. Kwenda, to go ; kwendea, to go to (a
person) ; kwendelea, to go on, to make progress. Kupenda,
to love ; kupendelea, to favour.
NOTE. — Some verbs have two prepositional forms
which can be used interchangeably. Ex. Kuja, to come,
makes kujia or kujilia ; kufa, to die, makes kufia or kufilia ;
kufika makes kufikia or kufikilia.
Examples of Use IV. —
(</) Limia hapa, cultivate here ; imeishia huko, it
finished off there.
4. The Reciprocal. — Transitive verbs are made recipro-
cal by adding -na to the root, intransitive verbs by adding
-na to their prepositional form. Ex. Kusaidia, to help ;
kusaidiana, to help each other : kushika, to hold ; kushi-
STUDY XVII 101
kana, to hold each other (or to hold together) : kuimba,
to sing (intrans.) ; kuimbiana, to sing to one another :
kulia, to cry, to call; kuliliana, to call to one another.
Causative reciprocals are common — Kusomeshana, to cause
each other to read ; kufozana, to fine each other. When
the stem ends in two vowels the syllable li or le must be
inserted before the ana; ku/oleana, to give out to each
other ; kufuliana, to wash for each other, to boat on each
other (as waves).
5. The Reflexive. — This is formed by the insertion of
the particle ji (selfj immediately before the verb stem.
Ex. Kujipenda, to love oneself (i.e. to be selfish) ; kujifanya,
to make oneself (i.e. to pretend j ; wajififia nini ? what are
you hiding yourself for ? (prepositional reflexive) ; tutfa-
jingiza, we will force ourselves in (causative reflexive).
G. The Subtractive. — The idea expressed by the
English prefix un- is conveyed in Swahili by inserting
the vowel u (and in rare instances o) before the final a of
the root of transitive verbs. Ex. Kufumba, to close (eyes,
hands, etc.) ; kufumbua, to open, to unclose (eyes, hands,
etc.) ; kukunda, to fold; kukunrfua, to unfold; kuvaa
(nguo), to put on (clothes) ; kuvua, to take off (clothes),
to undress.
7. The Reduplicated, or Modified Form.— This is
obtained by doubling the verb stem, and has the effect of
weakening the signification. Ex. Kum'piga-piga, to beat
him gently; Mtoto alia-lia, the child is fretting (not
actually cry ing ) ; kukunda-kunda, to crease (i.e. to make
little folds) ; kulewa-lewa, to be giddy (from kulewa, to
be drunk).
NOTE (1) — Most of these forms may be made upon one
another as well as upon the simple root.
NOTE (2) — Some verbs are only extant under one or
other of the derived forms.
NOTE (3) — There are roots which have the appearance
of being derived forms, but the sense shows that this is
only apparent.
102 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLE OF DERIVATIVE FORMS OF VERBS
The following illustrate the various forms a verb may assume : —
Simple. Causative applied.
kufunga, to tie, bind, fasten, shut, etc. kufunganyia, to cause to bind with.
kufungishia, to cause to tie for.
kufungizia, to besiege with.
Passive. Passive applied.
kufungwa. to be bound. kufungiwa, kufungiliwa, to be closed to.
Causative. Neuter applied.
kufungisha, kufunganya, to cause to bind, kufungikia, to close (of itself) to.
kufungiza, to besiege, to pen. Reciprocal applied.
kufungania, to be tied together with.
Neuter. Eeflexive applied.
kufungika, to be shutablo, to shut of kujifungia, to tie oneself to.
itself.
Prepositional. Subtractive applied.
kufungia, kufungilia, to shut for or with, kufungulia, to untie for.
Reduplicated applied.
kufungia-fungia, to tie here and there
for.
Reciprocal. Causative passive.
kufungana, to bind each other. kufungishwa, to bo made to fast, to bo
cut off by the tide.
Neuter reciprocal. Subtractive applied passive.
kufungamana, to be tied together. kuf unguliwa, to be opened to.
Neuter reciprocal applied.
kufungamania, to be bound together by.
Reflexive. Reduplicated passive.
kujifunga. to bind oneself. kufungwa-ftmgwa, to be tied here and
there.
Subtractive. Subtractive neuter applied.
kufungua, to untie, unfasten, open. kuftmgukia, to open (of itself).
Modified. Subtractive reflexive.
kufunga-funga, to tie here and there. kujifungua, to untie oneself, to relieve
oneself.
Subtractive neuter. Subtractive reflexive applied.
kufunguka, to be openable, to open kujifungulia, to open for oneself.
(of itself). Subtractive causative.
kufungusha, to cause to open.
Subtractive reciprocal. Causative reciprocal.
kufunguliana, kufunguana, to open to kufungamanisha, to bind by contract,
each other.
Causative neuter.
kufungizika, to be besieged.
STUDY XVIII
103
STUDY XVIII
Nyama — Beasts, Animals
m win/ fa (i.), hunter, sportsman.
m<nkuzi (i.), bearer, porter.
simba (iii.), lion.
kibok'o (iv.), hippopotamus.
ndovu (iii.), elephant.
i'ui (iii.), leopard.
fisi (v.), hysena, jackal.
ngamia (iii.), camel.
p'unda (iii.), ass, donkey.
farasi (iii.), horse.
nyumbu (iii.), mule.
nyati (iii.), buffalo.
kifaru (iv.), fam(iii.), rhinoceros.
p'unda milia (iii.) zebra.
k'ongoni (iii.), haartebeest.
p'aa (iii.), gazelle.
t'ia (iii.), giraffe.
m'bwa (iii.), dog.
m'bweha (iii.), fox.
makao (v. pi.), dwelling, lair, den.
kundi (v.), flock, herd, crowd.
mdudu (i.), insect, vermin.
k'obe (iii.), tortoise.
p'embe (iii.), horn, tusk, ivory,
corner,
kuwinda, to hunt, to chase, to
stalk.
kunguruma, to roar, to thunder,
kutambaa, to creep, to crawl,
kufanana na, to resemble, to be
like.
kufanya khofu, to be afraid,
kutisha, to frighten, to terrify,
kufokea, to appear, to turn up, to
happen.
kupiga mbio, to run.
kusongea, to approach, to draw
near.
kusheta, to bruise, to crush,
kuharibu, to spoil,
kuruka, to jump, to spring,
kupumka, to fly, to fly away,
kusitehili, to deserve, to be
worthy of.
kuparuza, to be rough.
kupeleleza, to spy out, to examine
closely.
ba<a (v.), duck.
mbuni (iii.), ostrich.
mwewe (iii.), kite.
ndiwa (Hi.), dove, pigeon.
k'anga (iii.), guinea-fowl.
bawa (v.), wing.
mkia (ii.), tail.
p'opo (iii.), bat, butterfly.
kipande (iv.), a piece, a slice.
p'ole p'ole, slowly, gently, slow
gait.
anga (iii.), air, atmosphere.
nguwe, nguruwe (iii.), pig.
kiiungule (iv.), rabbit.
t'umbiri (iii.), monkey.
k'ima (iii.), black-faced monkey.
nyani (v.), ape.
nyoka (iii.), snake, serpent.
satu (iii.), python.
ngwena (iii.), mamba (iii.), croco-
dile.
mburuk'enge (iii.), monitor
lizard.
k'unguni (iii.), bug.
kiroboto (iv.), flea.
t'andu (iii.), centipede.
jongoo (v.), millipede.
ng'ge (iii.), scorpion.
mjisi kafiri (iii.), wall lizard.
m'<wa (iii.), white ants.
m'bu (iii.), mosquito.
nyuni ndege (zTbar) (iii.), bird.
silaha (iii.), weapon, arms.
risasi (iii.), lead, ball (cannon),
bullet.
kicho (iv.), khofu (iii.), fear,
dread.
baada ya, after (of time).
baadae, afterwards, after it.
bila, without, except by.
raara, immediately,
104 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Read and Translate
Mwindaji alikwenda 1 bara kuwinda nyama wakubwa-
kama simba, na ndovu na nyati na kifaru. Alianrfika
(wrote on, i.e. made a written agreement with) wapagazi
mia wa kikamba kufuatana nae. Alifukua farasi wawili
na nyumbu watono. Ndiani alipiga t'ia mmoja, k'ongoni
watatu na p'aa wane illi awapatie cliakula wat'u wakwe.
Baada ya mwendo wa siku silashara walifikilia mahali
penyi t'umbiri na nyani wangi. Walipokuwa wakitezama
nyama hao jinsi waruk'avyo raiti hafa miti, walisikia simba
kunguruma 2 karibu nao. Wo/'e walifanya khofu isipoku-
wa mwindaji mwenyewe ambae alifukua banduki k'ubwu
ya 3 kiznngu makusudi apate kupiga nyama wakali (ol )
nam'na hii. Aliposongea karibu kupeleleza, simba mkc
alitokea 2mbele yak we. Mara akalekeza bunduki yakwe,
akampiga risasi mbavuni, akaanguka akafa 4 pale pale.
Lakini wengine wawili simba waume walioandama nao
waliposikia kulia kwakwe, wakafoka mbio mwituni. 5Hapo
1 The " -ni " of the locative is occasionally omitted to give a
general and indefinite sense as opposed to a particular and special
ibrce which the locative termination conveys.
2 See Adverbial Prepositions, Study XX.
3 The syllable Jsi has various uses —
(a) Diminutive Prefix— Kibweta, little box ; kidude, a little thing.
(b) Language and Nationality Prefix — Kisawahili, the Swahili
language; Kimasai, the Masai language; Kingereza, the English
language ; Viazi vya Kizungu, European potatoes ; Wapagazi wa
Kitaita, Taita porters.
(c) Descriptive or "Sort" and "Kind" Prefix — Nguo za kifaume,
royal garments (i.e. of a kingly sort) ; mwendo wa kiume, manly
gait ; mambo ya kike, feminine matters ; maneno yo kitoto, childish
language; kiusouso, face downwards; kilulifuli, in eager haste;
kingalingali, prone, lying flat on the back.
(d) The characteristic particle of singular nouns in the fourth
class.
4 There are two ways of making an emphatic demonstrative —
(a) By reduplicating — Ex. yule yule, that same (man) ; pale pale,
that same (place) or on that spot, etc.
(b) By prefixing the pronominal particle — Ex. ye yule, that very
same man ; pa pale (or pa pale pale), that very same place, etc.
5 The concords of " mahali," have a time as well as n place
significance.
STUDY XVIII 105
ndipo yule ni^ukuzt wa bunduki alishikwa ni khofu k'uu,
akasema Kazi hii yatisha, nae akakimbia. Hivi mwindaji,
masikini, aliafwa pekee, bila silaha. Simba walimruk'ia,
wakamrarua vipande-vipande, wakam'la. Wadudu wak'e-
tio nyumbani mwa wat'u ndio hawa — ra'bu na ng'ge, na
t'audu, na kiroboto na k'unguni na mjisi kafiri. Wajao
inara kwa mara na kuharibu vit'u sana sana, ni m<wa.
The python is a large snake, he can crush a donkey or
a small zebra. Leopards and 113 senas prowl about (iembea
\<nib<:a) [at] night singly (mmoja-mmoja), hippopotami
go in (hwenda kwa) a herd. Foxes have their dens in
the forest, but dogs like to live in their masters' houses
(nyumbani mwa bwanazao^). All birds and butterflies
have wings; they fly about in the air. Ducks, guinea-
fowls, kites, and pigeons can fly ; ostriches are very large
birds, they do not fly. The crocodile has no tongue. The
monitor lizard has a long tail, he eats eggs. The flesh of
pigs and rabbits was forbidden to people of old. Cats and
lions have rough tongues (zakuparuza). The slow gait
of (ya) the tortoise takes him (tr. cause him to arrive)
far. Apes and big monkeys resemble men. He who
creeps [about] in the darkness deserves io be shot. Camels
are huge beasts that carry heavy loads — one camel can
carry a load of ivory of (ica referring to mzigd) 380 Ibs.
[weight].
106
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERALS—
Class I.
Class II.
Class III.
Class IV.
Class V.
IS. mmoja
S. mmoja
S. moja
S. kimoja
8. moja
1...
P. (of one
P. mimoja
P. moja
P. vimoja
P. mamoja
( sort) woraoja
2...
wawili
miwili
mbili
viwili
mawilt
3...
watatu
mitatu
t'atu
vitatu
matatu
4...
wane
mine
nne
vine
mane
5...
wafano
mitano
t'ano
vifann
ma/ano
6...
si/a
si/a
Same throughout all Classes.
7...
sabaa
sabaa
Same throughout all Classes.
8...
wanano
minane
nanc
vinane manane
9...
tlei'A or kenda
t isia or kcmla
Same throughout all Classes.
10...
kumi
kumi
Same throughout all Glasses.
11...
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na 1 kumi na
kumi n a
mmoja
mmoja
moja
kimoja
moja
12...
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
wawili
miwili
mbili
viwili
mawili
13...
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na t'atu
kumi na
kumi na
watatu
mitatu
vitatu
matatu
14...
kumi ua
kumi na
kumi na nne
kumi na vine
kumi na
wane
mine
mane
15...
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
wateno
mifcino
J'ano
vifano
matano
16...
kumi na situ.
kumi na site
Same throughout all Classes.
17...
kumi na
kumi na
Same throughout all Classes.
gabaa
sabaa
18...
kumi na nanc
kumi na
kumi na nane
kumi na
kumi na
minane
vinane
manane
10...
kumi na tlsla,
kumi na fisia
Same throughout all Classes.
or ken da
or keiula
20...
ishirini
ishirini
Same throughout all Classes.
21...
ishirini na
ishirini na
ishirini na
ishirini na
ishirina na
mmoja, etc.
mmoja, etc.
moja, etc.
kimoja, etc.
moja, etc.
STUDY XVIII
107
OABDINALS
Class VI.
Class VII.
Class VIII.
Class IX.
Class X.
In counting.
S. moja
S. umoja
painoja ("to-
kumoja
[mumoja]
mosi
1'. mimoja
P . mmoja
gether ")
(" straight
on")
miwili
mbili
pawili
kuwili
[mnwili]
pili
initatu t'atu
patatu
kutata [mutatuj
t'atu
mine nne
pane
kune : [mime]
n'ne or uno
mitano fa.no
pafano
ku<ano [mutano]
tano
minanc | nane
Same throughout all Classes.
Same throughout all Classes.
| panane | kunane | [munane]
Same throughout all Classes.
Same throughout all Classes.
kurni na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
moja
kumi na
mmoja
kurui na
pamoja
kumi na
kumoja
kumi na
moja
kumi ua
miwili
kumi na
mbili pawili
kumi na kumi na
kuwili
kumi na
mbili
kumi na
mitatu
kumi na
t'atu patatu
kumi na kumi na
kutatu
kumi na
t'atu
kumi na
mine
kurni na
nne
kumi na
pane
kumi na
kune
kumi na
n'no
kumi na
milano t'ano pafono
Same through
ku/ano
out all Classes.
tano
Same throughout all Classes.
krrni na kuini na
kumi na
kumi na
kumi na
minane
nane
£
panane
same through
kunane
out all Classt
nane
s.
ishirini na
S
ishirini na
>ame through
ishirini na
out all Classt
ishirini na
8.
ishirini na
moja, etc.
mmoja
pamoja
kumoja
moj:v
108
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NUMERALS— (continued)
Ordinals.
Swahali Arabic Numbers.
1st, (w)a kwanza
1, wahedi
30, thalatliini
2nd, (w)a pili
2, thineni
40, arubaiui
3rd, (w)a tatu
3, thalatha
42, arubaiui ua mbili
4th, (w)a ne
4, arubaa
50, khamsini
5th, (w)a <ano
5, khamsa
60, sUini
r.th, (w)a si<a
6, sita
70, sabuini
7th, (w)a sabaa
7, sabaa
80, thamaniui
,Sth, (w)a uanc
8, thamanya 00, /isiini
'Jth, (w)a tisia or
9, lisia or fisaa
100, mia
(w)a kenda
120, mia wa ishirini
10th, (w)a kumi
10, ashara
150, mia u khamsiui
llth, (w)a kumi na moja
11, hieZaashara
170, mia na sabuini
1 2th, (w)a kumi na mbili
12, thinaashara
200, miteni, miaicni. or
13th, (w)a kumi na t'atu
13, thalitaashara
mia mbili
llth, (\v)a kumi na nne
14, arubaataashara
500, khamsa mia or mia
15th, (\v")a kumi na <ano
1 5, khamsifaashara
J'ano
16th, (w)a kumi na sita 16, sifaashara
1000, alfu
17th, (w)a kumi na sabaa 17, sabaataashara
2000, alfeni or alufeni
18th, (w)a kumi na nane 18, thaminteashara
19th, (w)a kumi na <isia 19, <isaa<aashara
20th, (w)a ishirini
20, ishirini
21st, (w)a ishirini na
21, wahedi wa ishirini
oitce {at once), mara moja
moja, etc.
twice, mara mbili
four times, mara nnc, etc.
NOTE. — The initial letter
J = thuluthi
of the preposition varies
with the class of the
noun that the ordinal
1^ — mbili kasu roboo
For other fractious see
n B9
firstly, kwanza
qualifies.
£*• V«7«
secondly, pili
thirdly, tatu, etc.
STUDY XIX
109
STUDY XIX
Asipitali — Hospital, Dispensary
dakiteri (v.), doctor.
Jabibu (v.), physician.
mganga (i.). native witch doctor,
medicine man.
uganga (vii.), profession and
practice of medicine.
Jawa (Hi.), medicine, drug,
homa (iii.), fever,
baridi (iii.), a cold,
baridi yabisi (iii.), rheumatism,
marad/ii (v. pi.), disease,
ndui t'ete (iii.), small-pox,
t'ete maji, chicken-pox,
nkoma (vii.), leprosy,
safura (iii.), anaemia,
kifua (iv.), chest (complaint),
kidonda (iv.), sore, ulcer,
donda (v.), large sore,
ipu (jipu) (v.), boil,
kiipu <ungn (iv.), malignant boil,
t'ambazi (iii.), abscess,
jaraha (v.), wound,
kijaraha (iv.), the wound (in foul
diseases),
p'ele (iii.), the itch.
* mbuba, buba (iii.), the yaws or
frambcesia.
* mti (iii.), skin disease, tertiary
stage of former.
funza (iii.), jiirircr, maggot.
kuugua, to be ill.
kuuguza, to see through an ill-
ness— hence, to nurse.
knganga, to apply medicine, to
treat medically.
kuumwa ni, to feel pain in, to be
bitten or hurt by.
kufura, to swell.
kuiva, to be ripe, or well-cooked,
to develop, to come to a head.
kukohoa. to cough.
kuchemua, to sneeze.
kuhara, to have diarrhoea.
kuharisha, to relax.
kutapika, to vomit.
kupoa, to get well, to recover.
kupoza, to heal, to cure (of God).
kupona, to get over it, to pull
through.
kuponya, to deliver,
kuioboa kupasua, to break
through, to pierce, to lance,
kufaa. to benefit,
kutulia, to keep still, to be
tranquil, to be comforted,
kutuliza, to alleviate, to comfort,
kupumbaa, to be foolish, stupid,
kulea, to bring up, to adopt, to
nurse.
kukanyaga, to tread on.
kutonesha, to touch a sore place,
lit. to cause to "drop" or
" run."
tone (v.), drop,
usaha (vii.), pus, matter.
u<ungu (vii.), bitterness, pains,
usingizi (vii.), sleep,
kit'anda (iv.), bedstead,
kip'ofu (iv.), blind person,
bubwi (v.), dumb person,
kiziwi (iv.), deaf person.
kiwe<e (iv.), lame person,
hirimu (iii.), young man.
makohozi (v.), phlegm, cough,
maumivu (v.), aches, pains,
makamasi (v.), mucous,
mafua (v.), catarrh,
msahala (ii.), aperient,
bilauri ya kupimia, measuring
glass.
f'upa (iii.), bottle.
kUambaa (iv.), bandage.
* Diseases peculiar to Negro races.
HO SWAHILI GBAMMAB
desfori, dasiluri (iii.) custom, mpumbavu (i.), fool, idiot, stupid.
fashion. jasho (v.). heat, perspiration,
mashaka (v. pi.), afflictions, kadh'awakadha, various, other.
trouble. -tupu. empty,
binti (iii.), daughter. tupu-tupu, naked,
tejiri (v.), rich man. sababu (iii.), cause.
msairZia (i.), helper. kwa sababu, because,
upumbavu (vii.), foolishness, p'ole ! cheer up ! I hope you will
folly. soon be better.
Bead and Translate
Bwana, mt'u huyu anaugua sana, muwili wot'e unafura.
Mwambie aje basi nimwangalie. Jambo, mzee, u hali gani ?
Mimi ni mgonjwa Bwana, mgonjwa sana. 1 P'ole masikini !
Mngn afakupoza mararfM yako uliyo nayo, upoe. Mimi
ni /abibu /uu, apozae wat'u ni Yeye Mwenyewe. A' ni
mgonjwa sana Bwana, sijui mararf/ti haya kama ntapona,
si<apona. Myaka yako yapata mingapi baba? Myaka
yangu yapata khatnsini na /ano labuda, bwana. Insliaallah
u^apona. Basi kaa hapa kwetu sikTi chache, nlale kit'a-
ndani. Tu^akupa <7awa illi upate usingizi, kisha baadae
ufaona hujambo, u/akwenda 2zako nyumbani kwako.
Ahasanfa Bwana, abasan/a, ri'/akaa. N/ajaribu kutuliz^
moyo wangu. Una nini mtoto 3 we' ? A ! N'na masLaka
mangi, kwanza n'na funza maguuni, pili na/omwa ni inwiba
kidoleni. Mashaka yako si mazito sana mtoto, ya/aondoka
karibu na//*ani. Nf?oo huku kwangu niku/oe funza na
mwiba pia, neno dogo hili, lafanyika mara moja. Bwana
dakitari, 4 waitwa ni kipofu huyu. Asema aumwa sana ni
ma/o tangn alipokwenda kwa yule mganga wa kinyika.
Ni upumbavu wakwe basi,Daliouuonyaasiende. Waganga
wale hawajui lo lot'e isipokuwa kudhuru wat'u na kuwa-
Janganya. Mwambie ak'e/i, /'akuja sasa hivi, 5 wako
1 Etyniologically the word " p'ole " cannot bear the meaning put
upon it here ; it is rather the tone that conveys it.
* A very common ellipsis. The omitted word, " ndia " (ways) is
never inserted.
3 Familiar abbreviation of " wewe."
4 Translate by Active Voice.
5 " They are there " for " there are." " Kuna " or " pana " might
be used, but convey a more general and less definite sense.
STUDY XIX 111
wengine waningojeao, wenyi ukoma na safura na rati na
marad/ti 6 kadha'wakadha.
Translate
This is a Government hospital where white people are
nursed. Black people go to the Mission Hospital, which
is (iliyoko) on the island. There (huko} medicine is given
daily (killa siltu) to every one who comes, whoever he
may be. Those who are ill receive medical treatment
(Jiuganywa) and are cared for. Besides this (zaidi ya
liaya mambo} the doctors train (hufunAisha) intelligent
(having intelligence) young men [in] this work of mercy.
These helpers wash sores, dispense (hutoa) medicine, take
out (ng'oa) teeth, and bandage (funga) wounds. Those
who have colds, coughs, chest complaints, rheumatism,
catarrh and fever live [in] one house, smallpox patients
(having s.p.) [in] another (house), and those who are
suffering from (wauguo) boils, (or) abscesses, (or) the
itch, (or) big sores, or yaws live [in] a third (house).
The daughter of (tr. his daughter) the lame rich man
came yesterday with a malignant boil; to-day it came to
a head and the doctor lanced it. Much pus came away
(toka). These two dumb men have fever. Give them
each (killa mt'u} five drops of this drug (of) to cause (too.)
perspiration, and tell them to go home and go to bed
(lala). It is the custom here that every one who wants
medicine must 7 bring a bottle — empty and clean ! AVhy
do you not keep still ? Because you 8 hurt my sore place.
My adopted (wa kunilea) mother has (feels) pains all over
her body; she coughs and sneezes continually. Do not
go into that house " lest you get chicken-pox.
u This and many other Arabic words do not follow the Swahili
rule of accentuating the penultimate.
' A favourite expression for " bring " is " kuja na " (to come with).
8 When transitive verbs express an action that affects a man's
person or being, the idea of possession is conveyed by inserting the
personal objective infix in the verb, excluding the possessive adjective
from the sentence. Ex. Umenikanyaga guu, you have trodden on me
(the foot) ; itekuumiza kitwa, it will hurt you (the head).
8 "Lest "is translated by the Negative Subjunctive of "kuja"
used as an auxiliary followed by the " ka " tense of the principal verb.
112
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS AND ADVEEBIAL PHRASES
Adverbs generally follow the words they modify, be
they verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. Pure adverbs —
especially of manner — are not very numerous, but they
can be extemporized to an almost unlimited extent by
prefixing the preposition Tcwa to both nouns and infini-
tives of verbs. Ex. kwa furaha, joyfully, kwa kuteka,
laughingly.
ADVERBS OF TIME
sasa, now.
sasa hivi, hivisasa, 71010 at once.
ha<a sasa, until now, even now.
mara moja, once, at once.
mara nibili, twice, etc.
mara nyingi, often.
mara kwa mara, time after time,
from time to time, again and
again.
mara (precedes verb), immedi-
ately.
<cna, again, (not . . .) any more.
karibu, near, soon, lately, not long
ago.
leo, to-day.
jana, yesterday.
jnzi, flay before yesterday.
juzi-juzi, the other day.
kesbo, io-morrow.
kesho-ku<wa, day after to-morrow.
njtondo, three day* hence.
nyuina, after, later.
mapema, early.
asubulii, in the morning.
asubuhi yakwe, the next morning,
on the following morning.
asubuhi sana, early in the morning.
alfajiri, at dawn, at daybreak.
a/A uliuri, at noon.
nifana, in the daytime.
alasiri, in the afternoon.
jioni, in the evening, at dusk.
nsiku, at night, in the night.
usiku sana, late at night.
usiku wa manane, midnight (lit.
2 a.m.).
kwanza, first, firstly, before (in
the first instance).
mwisho, last, lastly.
katikati, in the middle.
barfo, not yet, slill, as yet.
bado kidogo, soon, present'y
baadae p'unde, later on, in a few
minufet.
mbele, before, first, earlier.
baarfae, afterwards, later.
hafa, until, ecen.
palepale, that very moment (past).
p'unde, just now, a little while ago.
p'iudi, when, in a little while.
papo kwa papo, moment 1y
moment.
pnpo hapo, immediately.
hapo kale, long ago, a lotig time,
ago.
hadma, hotimac, finally, in the
end.
zamani, formerly.
mpaka, until.
siku liizi, now-a-days.
sikuzo^'e, ahcay*.
killa siku, daily, every day, re<jn-
larly.
eiku kwa siku, now and again,
fitfully.
siku liafa siku, day by day, day
after day, from one day to
another.
STUDY XIX
113
daima, continually, perpetually.
'/ahari,/or ever.
milclc, for ever ami ever (retro-
spective and anticipatory),
halafu, afterwards, presently.
kabla or kabula (followed by •• j a "
tense), ere, before.
tangu (followed by "po" teiiac),
since.
-po- (adverbial infix), ichen.
ADVERBS OF PLACE
juu. up above, upstairs.
hukojuu, up there.
l"m\, down below, downstairs.
pale <ini, down there.
nt'i, on the ground.
ndani, inside, within.
ndc, oiilxiiJe, icithout.
mbele, in front, at the head, on
before.
katikati, in the middle, in between.
mbeleni, in the future.
nyuma. behind.
mbali,/«;- away.
karibu, near, nigh.
k'ando, aside, apart, to one side.
k'ando k'ando, alongside, all
round, all along the side.
hapa, here.
hapo, there (place in mind).
pale, there, over there.
huku, here, in this direction.
huko, there (place in mind).
kule, there, in that direction.
humu, in here.
humo, in there (place in mind).
m'le, in there, inside tJiere.
papa hapa, just here.
kuku huku, just there.
mumu humu, just in there.
pale pale, on the same spot.
kule kule, in the same direct inn.
po pot'e, anywhere.
pengine, elsewhere.
pia pia, all over the teliole.
ko<'e kot'e, everywhere.
-po- (adverbial infix), where.
ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION
-je ? (suffixed to verb), how ? kwa gababu gani ? for what
joe ? (introduces question), what 1 reason ?
tangu lini? how long ayo? since
when?
ka^iri gani? in what measure?
in ichat proportion ?
wapi ? (-pi ?) where ? whither ?
lini? when !
jinsi gani? how in this?
kwani? why? wherefore?
mbona? why? wherefore?
kiasi gani ? at what price ?
la ! no !
siyo, no, not so.
ADVERBS OF NEGATION
sivyo, not so, not thus.
naam,.ye«.
ndiyo, yes, it is go.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION
ndivyo, it is so, it is thus.
II
114
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF MANNER AND DEGREE
hivi, vile, hivyo, yivyo, thus, so.
vile vile, just so, just the same.
vivyo hivyo, precisely the s:ime.
kama, as, such as.
-vyo . . . vyo, as ... so.
kama . . . vjo \as . . .
jinsi . . . vyo \asorhow . . .
vile . . . vyo (just as ...
kama vile . . . vyo 'ere» as . . .
\kadiri ya . . . vyo, according as
. . . no, in proportion as . . . so.
vyema, well, nicely.
kadbalika, in like manner.
vizuri, beautifully, nicely.
vibaya, badly, ill.
bure, to no purpose, freely, for
nothing.
upesi, quickly, rapidly.
upande, on one side, crookedly.
p'ole p'ole, slowly, gently.
rarafibu, cart-fully.
kwa kusikiiika, sorrowfully.
kwa majonzi, sadly.
KV a urefu, lengthwise.
kwa upana, breadthwise.
kwa bidii, enthusiastically, ener-
getically.
kwa nguvu, by force.
vyengine, differently.
vyepesi, easily.
sharfi, necessarily.
mbalimbali, separately.
wazi, plainly, clearly, obviously.
sawa (adj. and adv.)> right.
straight, level, equal.
sawa sawa, properly,
tu, only, simply (always at the
end of a phrase),
kweli (may precede verb), truly,
really.
kwa kweli, thoroughly.
haraka, quicldy, hurriedly.
ghafula, suddenly, abruptly.
sana, very, very much, thoroughly.
in 'no, exceedingly, a great deal.
haba, a little, very little.
kidogo, a little rather.
p'unde, a little.
kidogo-kidogo, by degrees.
hate kidogo, not even a little, not
any.
z&idi, more.
kabisa, altogether, entirely, not at
all.
kamwe, not at all, never.
halisi, exactly, precisely, genuinely.
pekeyakwe, by himself.
yayo kwayayo, all over again.
NOTE. — The different uses of Icweli must not be confounded.
Ex. Mt'u wa kweli (adj.). a true, just man ; mtu kwa kweli (adv.),
truly (in truth) a man • alimsifu kwa kweli (adv.), he did indeed praise
him or lie praised him thoroughly.
NOTE. — Halisi can be used adjectively to mean "a thorough."
Ex. Ni baharia halisi, he is a thorough sailor.
STUDY XX
115
STUDY XX
Madarasa — School
mkufunzi (i.), teacher.
mzazi (i.), parent.
mafunzo mafundisho (v. pi.),
teaching, instruction
liwali (v.), native governor (also
wali).
darasa (v.), class.
hikima (iii.), wisdom.
hukumu (iii.), authority, com-
mand.
maarifa (\r. pi.), knowledge.
am'ri (iii.), an order, a command.
hisbima (iii.), honour, respect.
had (iii.), handwriting, docu-
ment.
hisabu (iii.), sum, calculation.
rahamani (iii.), map, chart.
kibao (iv.), slate (originally of
wood).
mbao (vii.), boards, forms.
kosa (v.), fault, mistake, trans-
gression.
chuo cha majina (iv.), register.
jiografia (iii.), geography.
ushindani ukaidi (z'bar) (vii.),
obstinacy.
kiburi (iv.), pride.
hasira (iii.), anger, indignation.
kinanda (iv.), musical instrument
(piano, harmonium, organ).
iokaa (iii.), lime.
fimbo (iii.), cane, stick.
thawabu (iii.), prize, reward.
tuzo (iii.), consolation prize.
zawadi (iii.), present, gift.
kupeleka chuoni, to send to
school.
kujKahidi, to endeavour.
kufanya bidii, to take pains.
kuhifimu, to finish education.
kuarifu, to inform (by letter).
kuagiza, to give instructions
to.
kudarisi, to hold a class.
kuhishimu, to honour, to respect,
kuamrn, to command,
kukubali, to receive, to accept,
to agree to, to allow,
kufuliza, to go on, to persevere,
to precipitate.
kufoa kosa, to blame, reproach,
kusifu, to praise,
kuonea, to oppress, to ill-treat,
kujumlisha, to add (addition),
kupunguza, to subtract,
kuzidisha, to multiply,
kumaliza, to complete, to finish,
kukua, to grow (applies only to
animal kingdom),
kunena nwongo, to lie, to tell
lies.
kupiga kofi, to clap hands,
kupiga k'ofi, to box on the ears,
kusikifika, to be sorry,
kuimba, to sing,
kusbinda, to win, to conquer, to
beat,
kutukana, to use insulting
language, to abuse,
knona haya, to feel ashamed,
kutangulia, to be ahead of, to
take the lead, to precede,
kufukiza, to irritate, displease,
offend.
-kai(7i, obstinate, stubborn,
-zima, whole, entire,
horfari, strong, clever, capable,
-tukutu, mischievous, fidgetty.
ji/iha(ft (iii.), effort, endeavour.
bWii (iii.), zeal, pains, enthu-
siasm,
ilimu (iii.), learning, doctrine,
study, knowledge.
arZabu (iii.), politeness, good
manners,
chaki (iii.), chalk.
116 SWAH1LI GRAMMAR
kawaida (iii.), etiquette, custom, wivu (vii.), jealousy, envy.
" the correct thing," unwritten waziwazi. plainly, obviously.
law. wimbo (vii.), hymn, song,
bakishishi (iii.), a gratuity, dole. mashindano (v., pi.), competitiun,
aibu (iii.), shame, disgrace. race,
haya (iii.), sense of shame, mbio (iii.), running, great
modesty. rapidity.
msamaha (vii.)» forgiveness. matukano (v., pi.), insults, vulgar
haja (iii.), request, desire, need. insulting language.
(Zaraja (iii.), promotion, honour, thamani (iii.), price, value.
preferment, degree, order. sifa (iii.), praise, commendation,
uvivu (vii.), idleness, laziness, mapenzi (v., pi.), love, will.
sloth. ruhusa, rukhsa (iii.), leave, per-
-vivu, idle, lazy. mission.
Bead and Translate
Mwana umleavyo, ndivyo akuavyo ! Mwalimu miuoja
wa kihindi anaanza (opened) " skuli " katika mji wa kale
illi kufundisha kizungu, Wanafunzi wakwe hawafu-
nzwi ha/i wala hisabu. Ameandika vijana ishirini na vi
ne katika chuo cha majina ela nasikia hawafulizt kuja
killa siku, nae mwenyewe hana hukumu juu yao. Ohuoni
inwetu swiswi (a< our school) twafunzwa kujumlisha,
kupunguza, kuzidisha na kugawanya. Tuna rahamani
ukutani, tupate kuelewa habari ya ulimwengu tuuke/io —
ilimu hii yaitwa jiografia. 2'ena tuna vibao na peseli
na kalamu na mbao mweusi na chaki — vyo/'e vipaeavyo.
jMkufunzi wetu ni hodari kwa kupiga kinanda — atuimbisha
nyinubo nznri killa namna. Siku k'uu ya ku/olea thawabu
tu/aziimba mbele ya wazungu woi'e na kundi zima la
wat'n. Ku/akuwa na mashindano eiku ile — killa mtoto ku-
shindana na wenziwe kwa kupiga mbio na kuruk'a na
mambo mengine. Wenyi kushinda hupawa zawadfi na
tuzo, wat'u vrote wakipiga k'ofi. Yawapasa wazazi wo/'e
kuwaleta watoto wao chuoni mwetu. Usbindani na uvivu
oa matukano hayakubaliwi kabisa. Sharti killa m'tu
afanye bidii kwendelea mbele.
STUDY XX 117
Translate
The beginning of all wisdom is to fear God and to
keep (fihika) His commandments. The liwali's son (his
son the liwali) does not study any longer, he has finished
his education. His father sent him to school when he
was quite small and he himself persevered, and endea-
voured [to get on], so that (hata) he got great praise
(many praises) from his master the other day when he
left school. If a boy transgresses he must ask forgive-
ness, and he (nae) will be forgiven ; but if he hides his
faults and tells lies he will be disgraced (jpata aibu\ and
(woo) his parents will be sorry. These girls have no
manners nor respect, they play [about] all day and (tena)
have no one to teach them. If they were allowed (got
leave) to come to school they would not be [so] mischievous
and obstinate as they are (Jcama vile walivyo). Love is
a thing of (having) great value in the world. By love
we can help those who are oppressed, and instruct
those who have no knowledge. It is not the correct thing
here to ask for gratuities. He who does this (thing) has
no sense of shame. If your companion is ahead of you
do not be displeased. The young men who get promotion
are those who honour their parents and teachers. I can
see plainly that you will not be able to complete your
task this week.
PKEPOSITIONS
Pure prepositions are few in Swahili, the reason,
presumably, being that the prepositional form of the
verb and the locative case of the noun largely obviate
the necessity of using them. They are : —
katika, in, into, among, about, kwa (instrumental) by, by means
out of, on. of, with, for, to, through.
hate, even, until, as far as. ni, by (said of the agent).
mpaka, until, till, as far as. pasipo, without.
kutoka, toka, fokea, from, since. bila, except, without.
tangu, from, since, for (tangu (i)sipokuwa (var.), save, except,
siku nyingi, for many days). -a (var.), of.
na, with, together with.
118
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Frequently the same preposition is used with two
entirely opposite meanings, each being imparted to it
by the verb with which it is employed. Ex. —
Ametoka katika nyumba,
Amengia katika nyumba,
Nalitoka kwa mwalimu,
Nalingia kwa mwalimu,
lie came out of the house.
Tie went into the house.
1 came out of the teacher's
[house],
1 went into the teacher's
[house].
ADVERBIAL PREPOSITIONS
These are formed by combining in one phrase an
adverb and the variable preposition -a (of). Pronouns
following these require to be in the possessive case. Ex. —
mbele yangu = before me.
nyuma yakwe = behind him.
kinyume chako = against you.
juu ya, upon, above, over, against,
about, with regard to.
<ini ya, under, underneath.
mbele ya (or za), in front of,
before (time and place),
nyuma ya, behind, after (time
and place).
ndani ya, inside of, in.
nde ya, outside of, out of.
kabla ya, before (time),
kwa ajili ya,/or the sake of.
kwa sababu ya, because of, on
account of.
badala ya, instead of, in exchange
for.
baada ya, after (time).
k'ando ya, by, by the side of,
beside.
k'ando k'ando ya, on both sides of,
round about.
karibu ya, near, near to, nearly.
kati ya, during.
kati kati ya, in the middle or
midst of.
kinyume cha, against, contrary to,
upande wa, on the . . . side of.
zak?i ya, beside, in addition to.
mabali pa, in lieu of, in place of,
instead of.
mfano wa, like, similar to.
Occasionally na (with) is substituted for (y)a. Karibu
na, mbali na, pamoja na. These are followed by the
objective not the possessive pronoun. Ex. —
mbali naswi =far away from us.
karibu nae = near him.
pamoja nao = together with them.
STUDY XX 119
CONJUNCTIONS
Several verb tenses have a conjunctive force. Ex. —
(1) The Subordinate Tenses of the Indicative, Impera-
tive, and Subjunctive with "fca" (and). Ukafanya (and
you made), kafanye (and make), ukafanye (and that you,
may make).
(2) The Participial with " ki " (if). Akifanya, if Jte
makes.
(3) The Negative Participial with "sipo'' (if not).
Wasipofanya, if they do not do [it].
(4) The "Even should" or "Although" Tense with
"japo." Nijapofanya, although or even should I do. . . .
(5) The "Though" Tense with "nga" or " ngawa."
Tungafanya or ingawa twafanya, though we do. . . .
Other conjunctions not bound up in verbs are —
na, and, but (this combined with the pronominal suffix of a noun
preceding it in fact or thought means " also " : mfaume nae
akenda, the king went also).
pia, also, too (stands at the end of a phrase or sentence),
tu, provided that, if so be that, if only, so long as (stands at the end
of a phrase or sentence),
lakini, but (see note subjoined),
walakini, but.
ilia, ela, but (except) — not strongly adversative.
£ena, again, moreover, furthermore, besides,
bali, but, rather, but rather,
basi, therefore, then, now, so.
ndiposa, therefore, and so, that is how it was.
kwaniba, kama, kana kwamba, that, whether, if.
ya kwamba, ya kuwa, that.
illi, illi kwaniba, in order that, to the intent that, so that,
au, au . . . au, or, either ... or.
wala, nor, neither . . . nor.
pamoja na haya, nevertheless, notwithstanding,
kisha, then,
kwa kuwa, kwa maana ya, kwa sababu ya, kwani maana, for, because,
for as much as, the reason being.
haia, and, even,
kwa ajili ya hayo, wherefore.
k'wenda (followed by " ka " tense), supposing that, may be that,
isipokuwa, howbeit, but.
mithali na (u . . .), supposing (you were to . . . ), (followed by Subj.).
120 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
NOTE ON "AND" AND "Box"
" Na " bears both meanings. In using this word its
original force should be kept in mind, which is not that
of the conjunction " and," but of the preposition " with."
It means " and " as a conjunctive particle —
Juma na mkewe, Juma and (or with) his icife.
It means " but " as a contrastive particle —
Juma ni mzuri sura zakwe, Juma is handsome as to his
na mkewe ni m'ovu, countenance, but his wife in
ugly.
NOTE. — Here "lakini" (but; would be quite out of
place.
Na is used to introduce a subjunctive phrase : na
tuotnbe, let us pray. When it precedes a vowel the " a "
may be elided to form one word. Ex. Naje for na aje.
Ilia, ela, but. The root-meaning " except " must lie
borne in mind.
Wat'u woJ'e wamekaja, ilia Everybody came, but you <li<l
wewe hukuja, not come.
Juma ni mzuri, ela mkewe Juma is handsome, but his
si mzuri, irife is not.
Lakini, but. This is always used by way of quali-
fying what has been stated in the previous .sentence, <.r
what is implied by it —
Juma ni mzuri, lakini ni Juma is handsome, but In /.<
kiwete, a cripple.
Ulinambia ya Juma, lakini You told me about Juma, but
ya mkewe hukunambia, not about his icife.
Isipokuwa, but. The use of this is much the same
as " ilia " with an extension of meaning.
STUDY XXI
121
STUDY XXI
Dini — Religion
Maumba (i.). Creator.
Bwana Jesu Masihi, Lord Jesus
Christ.
Roho Mtakatifu, Holy Spirit.
Mwokozi (i.), Saviour.
Malaika (iii.), Angel.
Sheifani (v.), Satan, devil.
Mmasihia, Mnasara (i.), Chris-
tian.
Muisilamu (i.), Muhammedan.
Jmamu(v.), Mubammedan priest.
Bishopu (v.), Bishop.
Kasisi (v.), Christian minister,
presbyter.
Shemasi (v.), Deacon.
Mtume (ii.), Apostle.
Nabii (v.), Prophet.
Kafiri (v.), Unbeliever, Infidel.
Msb.iri.ka (i.), Partner, communi-
cant.
Kanisa (v.), The Church.
msikiti (ii.), church, mosque.
Maan(ttko (v. pi.), Writings,
Scriptures.
Kuruani (iii.), Koran.
Injili (iii.), Gospel.
Waraka (vii.), Epistle.
Taureti (iii.), Law (of Moses).
sharia (iii.), l*w.
Zaburi (iii.). Psalms (Prayer-
Book).
Maagano ya Kale (v. pi.), Old
Covenant or Testament.
Maagano Mapya (v. pi.), New
Covenant or Testament.
Mithali (iii.), Proverb, simile,
allegory.
sura (iii.), chapter (of Koran).
ishara (iii.), sign, miracle, wonder.
zaka (Hi.), tithes.
hakika (iii.), proof, certainty.
msalaba (ii.), a cross.
<oba (iii.), repentance.
kuamini, to believe, to trust.
kusatiiki, to believe, to credit.
kuaburZu, to worship.
kuokoa, to save, to deliver.
kukomboa, to redeem, to ransom.
kutamani, to covet, to desire.
kusilimu ki-masihia, to become a
Christian.
kusilimu ki sawahili, to become
a Muhammedan.
kusali, to pray, to say prayers.
kuongoka, to change, to l>e con-
verted.
kubapu/izi, to baptize.
kuhuburi, to preach (to).
kutuma, to send (used only of
persons).
kubasbiri, kufabiri, to prophesy,
to foretell.
kuisbi, to live.
kuwa hai, to be alive.
kushariki, to share, to communi-
cate.
kushukuru, to give thanks.
kuiukuza, to glorify, to praise.
kushuhudia, to witness, to
testify.
kupiga shahada, to witness to
Muhammed by reciting the
creed.
kuwaza, to think, to consider.
kuinama, to bend, to stoop, to
bow down.
kulaani, to curse.
kuapa (kula kiapo), to swear.
kuitika, knitikia, to answer to a
call, to respond (as in church).
kuteajabu, to wonder.
kufariki, to die, to decease.
kuzika, to bury.
kufufuka, to rise from the dead.
kutangaza, to publish, to set
forth, to announce.
122
SWAHILI GRAMMAS
kufawala, to rule, to reign, to
control, to govern.
kufariji, to comfort,
kusalibiwa, to be cruci6ed.
kufubu, (kuju/a), to repent,
imani (iii.), faith, belief, creed,
goodness,
sadaka (iii.), religious offering,
sacrifice, alms,
ibarfa (iii.), worship, service,
wokofu (vii.), salvation, deliver-
ance.
ukombozi (vii.), redemption,
famaa (iii.), desire, passion, lust,
unyenyekevu (vii.), humility.
Islam (iii.)> Mohammedanism,
Islam.
raha (iii.), rest, ease, luxury,
uongofu (vii.), conversion,
nia (iii.), mind, heart, disposition,
n'afusi (iii.), self, person, soul,
spiritual being.
roho (iii.), spirit, soul.
tozi (v.), a tear,
maisha (v. pi.), life, existence,
lifetime.
Ushirika utakatifa (vii.). Holy
Communion,
asili (iii.), origin, root, source,
nature.
utakufu (vii.), glory,
shahir/i (v.), a witness.
Kama</7tani (iii.), Muhammcdan
Fast.
mawazo (v.), thoughts,
sanamu (iii.), idol, image, picture,
laana (iii.), curse,
kiapo (iv.), oath,
anasa (iii.), worldly pleasures.
ajabu (iii.), wonder, surprise,
kifo (iv.), mauti (v. pi.), death,
mortality.
kaburi (v.), grave, tomb,
maiti (iii.), dead person,
kuzimu (iii.), hell, the cold grave,
ahera (iii.), hades, the world to
come.
ad/tabu (iii.), punishment, torturo.
marufuka (v. pi.), prohibition,
forbidden things,
dhambi (iii. and v.), sin.
Bead and Translate
Dim ya kweli ndiyo ituongozayo kwa Mngu na kutn-
fariji roho, Twaamini kwamba Mmasihia ndiye rnwenyi
kmva nayo dini hiyo. Muisilamu hutnwita Mnasara,
kafiri ; lakini pamoja na hay a huserua, Kafir i akufaae J si
Muisilamu asiyekufaa ; maana, ajapo 2shikana sana Da
dim yakwe 3yeyo na knd&arau wenyi dini nyengine
1 " Si" = is better than. This is a common ellipsis in bye-words
and proverbs, and seems to stand for, " [Give me] . . . and not . . . ."
2 Reciprocal verbs are usually followed by •' na " (with) reminding
us of the frequent English prefix (or infix) " con- " (com-), with.
Equivalents for reciprocals may readi.y be found in words of this
category. Ex, Figana, to combat ; shindana, to contend, to compete,
to conflict; shikana, to be connected; patana, to be reconciled, (n
consent, to make a contract ; jadJiliana, to contradict ; gandamana, to
congeal, etc.
* This insertion of the separable pronoun in addition to the
possessive makes the phrase correspond exactly to the English, " His
own religion,"
STUDY XXI 123
woi'e, liaoni vibaya kaniwe kuwatumia ruakaliii, akijiona
kufairfiwa nao tn. Muumba wa mbingu na n/'i na vjot'e
vilivymo ndiye Mwenyiezi Mngu. Aliyetukomboa,
kwa kutufilia msalabani, ni mwanawe pekee, Bwana wetu
Jesu Masihi, ambae ni Mwokozt wa walimwengii wotf'e.
Afunzae nia zetu na kutu/awala n'afusi ni Yeye Roho
M/akatifu, aabudiwae na kufukuzwa pamoja na Baba na
Mwana. Katika kanisa la Masihi kuna daraja t'atu —
mabishopu, makasisi na mashemasi. Kazi yao wotf'e ni
kuhubiri injili na kulisha kundi la Mngu. Kundi hilo
ndiyo jamaa barikiwa ya waaminifu wotf'e. Mabihi ali-
weka sakaramenti mbili kwa wafuasi wakwe — Mabapu/izi
na Karamu ya Bwana, hiyo yaitwa nayo Ushirika Uta-
katifu. Katika chuo cha Biblia kuna tfaureti, vyuo vya
raanabii, zaburi, mithali, injili, matendo ya mitume, na
nyaraka kadh'awakadha. Vryuo hivi vyoi'e vyam'shu-
hurfia Jesu Masihi kuwa ndiye Mwanawe Aliye Juu
Sana; wanafunzi wakwe nao walimkubali wakitiwa ha-
kika kwa ishara zakwe zo<'e alizotenda mbele yao muda
wa kuwamo ulimwenguni. Ilia neno k'uu kupita yofe
nikule kufufuka kwakwe mau^ini kwa ajabu kulikoinwo-
nyesha wazi kuwa mshindi halisi juu ya kifo na ahera
na nguvu zo<'e za kuzimu.
Translate
Man's lifetime is short and (iena) his thoughts are
evil. Saying (Inf.) prayers will not take away sin,
neither will bowing (Inf.) down to idols cleanse the soul.
Muhammedans say there are five things necessary to
salvation : To pray, to give tithes for alms, to witness to
Muhammed by reciting the creed, to fast [in] Ramadhani,
and to go to Mecca. The New Testament teaches us that
we are not saved by good works, nor by tears of repent-
ance ; but by faith in the Lord Jesus Christ who died for
our sake and offered His body as (kuwa) a sacrifice to
God for the sins of the whole world. They who believe
[in] Him have their nature changed (hugeuzwa asili) by
the Holy Spirit, so that they love (icaka-} the things
which they formerly hated, and hate those which they
124 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
loved in the first instance. The Muhammedan religion is
called the " Easy Way " ; the reason being that those
who follow it are not required to give tip worldly plea-
sures or the lusts of the flesh. If a man becomes a
Muhammedan, sins such as hypocrisy and deceit are not
forbidden to him. He who does righteousness is blessed,
he who breaks the law of God is cursed. The writings
which are accepted and believed by Muhammedan con-
verts are called the Koran, a book containing (cJienyi)
114 chapters. In chapters four, six, seven and forty-eight
the doctrine of devils and angels is set forth. All the
faithful meet in the Mosque every Friday, when the
Imamu preaches to them. The Swahilis say, " Give
thanks [for] what you have," and again, " The torture
of the grave the dead man knows."
INTERJECTIONS
Emotion is so much expressed by gesture in Swahili
that Interjections are at a discount. Particularly is this
true of the more educated classes. The following are a
few Interjections in common use : —
a ! oh ! hebu ! (hwebu), please do ! won't
a-a ! no ! you ?
ahasanta ! thank you I it is well ! howe ! there then !
ai ! oh ! (of pain). kumbe ! what ! behold !
aka ! what next ! ngawa . . . ! (followed by Xeg.
ati ! I say ! look ! you know ! Ind.), oh that !
basi ! stop ! that will do ! enough. laifi ! oh that ! would to God !
chapu chapu ! look sharp ! liurry lau kwamba ! (followed by Pres.
up ! Ind.), oh that !
1 ewa ! all right ! very good ! lo' ! well ! (great surprise).
1 ee wallah ! yes, by God ! ngoja kwanza ! wait a njinute !
ewe ! ee ! O ! halloa ! hi ! ole wangu ! alas ! woe is me !
haraka ! haste ! hasten ! sa' ! yes ! here I am !
haya ! get on ! come along ! salala ! plague upon you !
haya basi ! there now 1 there ! sumile ! make way ! move !
hima ! make haste !
1 See p. Ill," African Aphorisms."
STUDY XXI 125
NOTE ON REDUPLICATION
Reduplication is common in undeveloped or partially
developed languages. In Swahili it affects syllables,
words, and phrases, and its uses may be classified as
follows : —
1. To intensify or emphasize. — Ex. Papale, just there ;
pale-pale, on that very spot ; kubwa-kubwa, very large ;
moto-moto, decidedly hot; pana-pana, very broad;
(ku)sihi-sihi, to beseech earnestly; kuponda-ponda, to
crush to pieces.
2. To modify. — Ex. Maji-maji, watery, thin, liquid;
mawe-mawe, stony, pebbly, having little stones ; (ku)k'ata-
k'ata, to cut about, to make little cuts; (ku)zunguka-
zunguka, to walk about ; (ku)lewa-lewa, to be giddy ;
kulia-lia, to fret; (ku)ugua-ugua, to feel unwell, to be
out of sorts ; kunuk'a-nuk'a, to have a slight smell.
3. To show continuous action. — Ex. Kuruka-ruka, to
keep jumping ; (ku)sukuma-sukuma, to go on pushing,
driving, agitating ; (ku)tuma-tuma, to be always sending
on errands ; kubadili-badili, to be for ever changing.
4. To give a distributive force. — Ex. Mbili-mbili, two at
a time ; usiku-usiku, every night, " of a night " ; kidogo
huku, kidogo huku, a little here and there ; kikao wat'u
hamsini, kikao wat'u hamsini, fifty in a row (or batch or
company); kijaacho kiweke k'ando, kijaacho kiweke
k'ando, as each one is full, put it aside.
126
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
THE FORMATION OF VERBAL NOUNS
Verbal nouns may be formed —
1. Prom primary verb stems, active or passive,
(a) By simply prefixing a sonant m' (mu or mw) to denote an
agent and by prefixing u (w or mw) to form an abstract. Ex. —
mrithi. beir, inheritor
m/unga (ii.), shepherd
muhi/aji, needy person
mwenda, a goer
kurithi, to inherit
kutanga, to herd, to tend
kuhiteji, to want
kwenda, to go
mtumwa, slave kutumwa, to be sent
muonewa, oppressed per- kuonewa, to be oppressed
eon
muweza, one who is able kuweza, to be able
(God)
uritM, inheritance
(uftmgaji), shepherding
ubitaji, want
mwen.d(o), gait, goir
conduct
utumwa, slavery
uweza (uwezo),
ability
power,
(&) By the same process as above, with the particle "ji"
suffixed. Ex. —
mwimbaji, singer
muombaji, beggar
muuaji, murderer
mtendaji, doer
mwindaji, hunter
kuimba, to sing
kuomba, to beg
ktrna, to kill
kutenda, to do
kuwin<Za, to hunt
(wimbo), song, hymn
uombaji, begging, beg-
gary
uuwaji, murder
(tendo), action
(ninda), hunting
(c) By the same process a« above with the particle " fu " or
"vu" suffixed, and an occasional change or elision of terminal
vowel —
nWanganyifu, deceiver ktuZanganya, to deceive
udanganyifu, deception,
deceit
kuamini, to believe uaminifu, faithfulness
kuongoa, to lead, to con- uongofu, conversion
vert
kuharibu, to destroy, uharibifu, destruction,
corrupt corruption
kupofea, to be lost or upo/evu, prodigality,
wasted waste
ralegevu, desultory person kulegea, to be slack, loose ulegevn, desultorinesa
mlekevu, upright person kulekea, if) be straight, ulekevu, uprightness
upright
mtulivu, person who sub- kutulia, to be quiet, calm, utulivu,subrni8sion,quiet-
imts to discipline resigned ness
mtakatifu, holy person, kutakata, to be cleansed, utakatifu, holiness, purity
eaint pure
muaminifu, believer
muongofu, convert
m'haribifa, destroyer
mpo<3vu, prodigal
STUDY XXI 127
(d) By the same process as above and a change of final vowel,
with an occasional softening of final consonants. Ex. — •
mwivi, thief kuiba, to thieve wivi (wizi), theft
mshoni, tailor, seamstress kushona, to sew ushoni, sewing, needle-
work
mnyang'anyi, robber kunyang'anya, to rob unyang'anyi, robbery
mpenzi, lover, loved one kupenrZa, to love upenzi (mapenzi), love
mpanzi, sower kupanda, to sow upanzi, sowing
mlinzi, keeper, guard kulinda, to keep, guard ulinzi, protection, keeping
mfuasi, follower, disciple kufuata, to follow ufuasi, discipleship
(e) In a few instances sentient nouns are formed by prefixing
" ki " to the verb —
kinyozi, a barber kunyoa, to shave unyozi, shaving
kiongozi, a leader kuongoza, to lead uongozi, leadership
kipofu, blind person kupofuka, to be blind upofu, blindness, spoiled
sight
kizushi, upstart, intruder kuzuka, to come to the
surface, to happen
2. Prom causative stems by the same process and a change of
final vowel. Ex. —
mzamishi, baptizer kuzamisha, to cause to go uzamishi, baptism
under water
muan<7isb.i, writer, scribe kuandisha (kuandikisha), uandisbi, writing
to cause to write
muashi (z'bar), mason kuasha C?), to cause to uashi, masonry
builder build (masonry)
mpishi, cook kupisha(?),tocausetocook upishi, cookery
mtumishi, servant kutumisha, to cause to utumishi, service
serve
mzishi, undertaker kuzisha, to prepare for uzishi, burial
burial
mtozi, exactor kiUoza, to exact (cause to u£czi, exaction
give out)
mwokozi, saviour kuokcza, to cause to save (wokofu), salvation
mlezi, nurse, rearer kuleza (1), to cause to ulezi, nursing, rearing
bring up
muombezi, mediator kuombeza, to cause to uombezi, intercession
intercede
mpendezi, one who pleases kupendeza, to please upen^ezi, favour, pleasing
(cause to love)
msimamizi, overseer kusimamiza, to cause to usimamizi, stewardship
oversee
mlevi, drunkard kulev[y]a, to intoxicate ulevi, drunkenness
mponyi, deliverer kuponya, to deliver (cause uponyi, deliverance
to escape)
128 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
3. From prepositional stems, by the same process—
mtetea, a champion espouscr kutetea, to fight for
mnenea, a reprover kunenea, to speak to, to scold
mtangazia, one who publishes to kutangazia, to publish to
m/olea, a giver ku/olea, to give to
mtengezea, a provider kutengezea, to provide or prepare
for
4. Prom reciprocal stems (abstract or collective nouns
with the prefix " ma ") —
maonano, a meeting kuonana, to see one another, to
meet
makut'ano, a crowd kukut'ana, to come together
magawanyikano, separation, divi- kugawanyikana, to be separated
sion from each other
mapatano, agreement kupatana, to ajjrce
mapatanisho, atonement kupatanisha (caus. recip.), to
reconcile
maagano, covenant kuagana, to covenant
mapenrfano, mutual love kupentfana, to love each other
mashindano, contention, emula- kushindana, to contend
tion
maimbizano, antiphonal sin<rinjr kuimbizana, to sin"- to each otlicr
majibizano, catechism kujibizana, to answer each other
5. Some passive verbal nouns change the final a to e —
mtume, apostle (or sent one) kutumwa, to be sent
mshinde, conquered one kushindwa, to be conquered
m<eule, chosen one kuteuliwa or ku/auliwa, to be
chosen or elected
kiumbe, created one kuumbwa, to be created
Common nouns, concrete and abstract, may be formed
from verbs by prefixing sonant m', ki, ma, or u (w before
a vowel) —
m'samaha, forgiveness kusamehe, to forgive
m'sa'/a, help kusauZia, to help
m'sangao, astonishment kusangaa, to be astonished
m'sala, praying mat kusali, to pray
kinoo, grindstone kunoa, to grind, to sharpen
kivuko, ford, crossing kuvuka, to cross (water)
kifiniko, lid, covering kufinika, to cover
kiigizo, pattern, copy kuigiza, to copy, to imitate
maombi, prayers kuomba, to pray
STUDY XXI 129
malipo, recompense, reward kulipa, to pay
mateso, affliction kutesa, to afflict
mavazi, style of dress kuvaa, to wear
mavao, clothing kulala, to Bleep
malazi, sleeping-place kutata, to be entangled
matata, complications, tangles kuvuna, to reap
mavuno, harvest kufa, to die
ufu, death kuasi, to rebel
uasi, rebellion kuiba, to thieve
wivi, theft kutisha, to frighten
utisho, alarm, fright kukumbuka, to remember
ukumbusho, reminder
Verbal nouns of Arabic origin usually change root
vowels and take no prefix —
sifa, praise kusifu, to praise
aharZi, a promise kuahu/i, to promise
baraka, a blessing kubariki, to bless
hisabu, a sum kuhasibu, to count
ibarfa, worship kuabu/Zu, to worship
saburi or subira, patience kusubiri, to be patient
sala, prayer kusali, to pray
furaha, joy kufurahi, to rejoice
faraja, comfort kufariji, to comfort
GENERAL NOTES ON NOUNS AND THEIR
CLASSES
1. Many nouns in "ma" (mostly concrete) have a
singular meaning and are in cl. iii. Ex. —
mashua, a boat. maradufu, thick calico,
masikini, a poor man. mashariki, east,
marehemu, the late so and so. raagaribi, west.
marikabu, a ship. mail (pi.), wealth, property
malaika, an angel. (" mail " takes plural concords
marirZadi, a dandy. also from cl. v.).
ma.\ti, dead person. See note 5, majilisi, seat (outside a house —
Study I. used for palavers).
2. Others, also in "ma," having a plural form and
taking only plural concords (of cl. v.) stand for English
nouns which have no plurality in the idea. These are
largely abstract nouns and names of liquids. Ex. —
SWAHILI GRAMMAR I
130
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mafuta, oil.
maji, water.
maziwa, milk.
marashi, perfume.
manuk'ato, perfumed ointment.
mapenzi, love, will.
maisha, life.
mazoea, habit, custom, use.
mashizi, soot.
maana, meaning, reason, cause.
manufaa, profit.
mafrikio, hatred.
maud, death.
majira, time.
majonzi, grief.
maju/o, repentance.
mara<77d, sickness.
marirf/iawa, abundance.
majaaliwa, enabling (divinely
bestowed).
mail, property (also in cl. iii.).
manyezi, abhorrence, disgust,
mate, saliva,
mamlaka, authority, power.
"Vita" (cl. iv. pi.), war, is an instance of this in another class.
3. The student will observe that nouns beginning
with an aspirated consonant belong usually to cl. iii. or
cl. vii. (pi.). The following, though bearing a resemblance
to nouns of cl. iv., are no exception to the rule —
k'iu (yangu), (my) thirst.
ch'umvi (Mi), (this) salt,
ch'aga (zetu), (our) store-houses.
k'ima (wangu),
monkeys.
(my) black
kinda (young bird or animal) has a " ma " plural (cl. v.).
4. Several nouns are
variations of meaning —
mkono (cl. ii.), arm, hand (of
body)
mlango (cl. ii.), door
ukuta (cl. vii.), wall
kikapu (cl. iy.), small basket
unyasi (cl. vii.), blade of grass
dharnbi (pi. cl. iii.), sin (collec-
tively)
ngoma (cl. iii.), dance, drum
kijembe (cl. iv.), pocket knife
pesa (cl. iii.), pice
mbingu (cl. vii. pi.), heaven
mti (cl. ii.), tree, wood
ckungwa (cl. iii.), oranges
kono (cl. v.), arm (of river, creek,
etc.)
in two or more classes with
lango (cl. v.), large door, gate,
entrance
kuta (cl. v.), high wall
k'apu (cl. iii.), large basket
manyasi (cl. v.), grass, weeds
madhambi (cl. v.), individual
sins
goma (cl. v.), big drum
jembe (cl. v.), hoe
mapesa (cl. v.), small change
mawingu (cl. v.), clouds
kiti (cl. iv.), stool, chair (of
wood)
machungwa (cl. v.), large
oranges
STUDY XXI 131
5. Sentient nouns may be found in nearly all the
classes taking the respective plurals of those classes.
Ex.—
CLASS II.
mtume, apostle mitume
m/elea, a laying hen mi/e/ea
CLASS III.
mbari, relative, kinsman mbari
p'epo, evil spirit p'epo
k'ala, ichnumen k'ala
CLASS IV.
kibarna, day labourer ' vibarua
kip'ungu, osprcy vipungu
kiumbe, mortal creature viumbe
kiroboto, flea, swift mail-runner viroboto
CLASS V.
Yahu(/i, Jew Mayahii'/i
asi, rebel maasi
/ajiri, rich man ma/ajiri
shekhe, chief, elder mashekhe
ka^/d, judge ma.ka.il Id
kuhani, priest makuhani
CLASS VI.
jana, big lad mijana
CLASS VII.
udfiri, u/awatawa, poultry lice (used collectively)
No invariable rule can be given for the concords of
other parts of speech used to qualify such nouns ; these
sometimes follow cl. i. (e.g. malaika wale watakatifu),
and sometimes the " irrational " class to which the word
belongs (Ex. Jimbi hili lawika sana). Others again
require some "sentient" and some "irrational" concords
(Ex. Ndugu zangu watatu wanakuja. Wajolize walim-
wona. Kijana kike huyu akwita). See note 1, Study VIII.
1 Probably so called from a chit or ticket of identification.
132 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TRANSLATIONS OF THE EXERCISES
STUDY I
The master and the mistress. I and my master. You
and your child. I and you and he. My mistress and
your sister. Good day ! (very) good day ! Good morning.
How are you, Sir? (Quite) well (thank you). Are you
feeling well? I am quite well (thank you). And are
you quite well? I am very well (thank you). Are you
better ? I am better, thank you. Madam, how are you ?
(Quite) well (thank you). And are you all right ? I am
all right (thank you). Is your brother better? He is
better, Madam. And how is your son feeling? He is
very well indeed. This is good news ! Good evening,
Sir. Good-bye, Madam. Good-bye !
Sabalkheri ! Jambo, bibi ! Sijambo, bwana ! U hali
gani ? Ni hali njema. Hu jambo, bwana? Sijambo,
ahasanfa? Bwana wangu hajambo ? Hajambo sana.
Bibiyangu nae hajambo? Hajambo! Nduguyo yu hali
gani? Yu hali njema sana. Nduguyo (mwanamke) yu
hali gani ? Ahasante, Bwana, yu hali njema. Yeye na
•wewe na mirai. Bwana wangu. Bibiyangu. Nduguyo.
Msaalkheri, bwana. Msaalkheri, bibi. Naam ! La! Kwa
herini.
STUDY II
Boy, come. Bring (some) water. Yes, Ma'am, I will
bring (some) directly. Come along (be) quick! Do
you hear ? I hear, Ma'am. We want food now. Very
well, Ma'am, we will bring it quickly. Are you hungry,
Ma'am ? Be quiet, boy, just do (your) work. Now then,
Ma'am, I have brought (the) food. Have you brought
KEY TO EXERCISES 133
water as well, boy? My fellow (servant) brought it,
Ma'am. That will do, now you can go and bathe. Come
back quickly. Yes, Ma'am. My fellow-servant wants
hot water and soap. Very well, he shall have (them).
You are making a great deal of noise, boys ; we want to
sleep. Ma'am, I want pice that I may buy food. Here,
then, take (these) pice. Go quickly. Thank you, Ma'am.
Jee, mtoto, unale'a /aa? Bado, Bibi, mwenzangu
anakwenda kununua mafuta. Atfarudi lini? Atarndi sasa
hivi, Bibi. Jee, unafua nguo ? Ndiyo, Bibi, n'nafua.
Uruefua na ki/ambaa? La! Bibi nimesahau. Jee, u<a-
pata kuleta maji ? Ndiyo, Bibi, n'tapata. Mwenzangu
amekuja sasa, Bibi, ni zamu yak we kutumika. Vyema,
alete chakula basi, twatfaka kula. Nyainaza, mtoto, wa-
fanya, k'elele sana, haifai. Vyema, Bibi, f'anyamaza sasa.
Lete faa upesi, twafaka kutezama k'itu. Basi, waweza
kwenda sasa.
STUDY III
Has the teacher come ? Not yet, Ma'am, he is coming
now, I see him in the street. Good morning, Bwana.
Good morning, Bibi. Boy, bring (some) chairs. Bwana,
sit down. Thank you, Bibi, lam seated. Now I want (a)
pea and (some) paper. Here, Bwana, please take (this)
pen. Do you want me to write? Yes, Bibi, try to write
now. Have you finished to write (writing) ? Yes, teacher,
I have finished. Well, now, I want you to read. What
book shall I read? Eead (the) First Book. Eead (the)
word*--.1 Then tell me their meaning. Is it clear to you ?
Yes, teacher, it is quite clear to me. Do you know the
meaning? I do (know). Good, Bibi, read again, then
spell the words. Eead out loud that I may (get) to hear.
Pronounce the words well that you may learn to read
nicely.
Mbona mwalimu amechelewa leo? Labuda hawezi.
La ! yuaja sasa. Sabalkheri, mwalimu, u hali gani ? Ni
hali njema. K'et'i (Bwana). Tafa^Aali, Bibi, nipa chuo
1 Lit. " when you finish."
134 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
iiawe twaa chuo ukasome. Sasa \veka chuo mezani uka-
sikize. Takuuliza masuali. Vyema (Bwana) nami nifa-
jaribu kujibu. Basi sasa, umejibu vizuri. Na furahi
sana. Jee, wa£aka wino? Ndiyo na£aka, na peniseli pia.
Mwanafunzi ajaribu kusemalugha ya kisawahili. Aweza
kusoma harufu. Alianza lini ? Nalimfundisha msiari wa
kwanza jana.
STUDY IV
Open the window, I want to look out. I see a lot of
people in the street, let us shut the door quickly. Where
is the key? It is upstairs. Go and look on the roof.
The people are gone now, shall I open the door? Yes,
open (it), then sweep the steps, and the courtyard, also
the verandahs. I want a mat to put on the door-step.
Wait a little (while), you will get (it). Where is the
cat ? The cat has just (now) gone out. Where is she
gone ? Perhaps she is gone to look for a rat. Call her, I.
want her to eat (her) food; she is hungry. All night
long she was making a noise. Boy, have you polished
the looking-glass? Yes, Ma'am, and I cleaned the
windows as well. Where have you been ? I was on the
roof, crying. Why did you cry? Because I wanted to
go out ; but I was called (i.e. wanted by employer). Oh !
never mind !
Shuka, nakusihi, sasa hivi. Nduguyo aku£afu/a. Yu-
ko wapi? Yuko sebuleni. Mwambie aje ukumbini.
Vyumba vyafaka kupewa, na ghala pia. Jee, mlango
wa orofa u wazi? La! Umefungwa. Ufungue, basi.
Mtoto u/ak:i kungia ndani. Vyema, angie ndani aka-
shuke /ini. Mwalimu ameleka m/ana ku<wa. Mbona
aliteka? Muulize. Asema, alimwona p'anya akitezama
kiooni. Wako p'anya tele nyumbani ? Wako tele sana.
STUDY V
Come and let us sit down at the table, tea will be
brought directly. The tablecloth is not clean, why (is
that) ? I hear that Juma spilt some coffee here this
KEY TO EXERCISES 135
morning. Call Juma ! Juma ! You are called. Yes,
Ma'am, here I am (lit. I am come), did you call me?
Yes, I did call you. Is it true (that) you spilt coffee on
the tablecloth to-day ? It is not true, Ma'am. Coffee was
spilt ; but I did not do it (lit. " not I "). Who was (lit.
" is ") it then ? Perhaps it was the cat. I saw her in the
room. Can a cat spill coffee ? She can if she is thirsty
and wants to drink. That will do, go away now. Tell
Ali to bring sugar and bread and honey. Where are the
saucers ? They are in the cupboard, they forgot to put
them on the table. Bring them quickly, the tea will be
cold. It is absolutely cold already. It will not do, boys,
to be late like this. Now I want spoons and cups.
Bilauri na sahani zafakwa mezani, wat'u waja kula
chakula cha mfana hapa leo. Jee, nilete vijiko na uma
pia ? Ndiyo na/aka kuaneftka meza fayari sasa. Jee,
watekunwa maji ? Ndiyo, watekunwa rnaji yakiwa safi.
Twaa sinia ukapakue chakula, kieha piga k'engele ku-
waita wat'u. Umesahau kuweka kawa juu ya sahani.
Mwambie mpishi apashe moto k'uku wa jana. Jaribu
kukuncZa nguo ya meza sawa sawa. Waweza kuancZika
meza vizuri nguo ikiwa si safi ? La ! haifai ! Tulionda
asali tukaiona <amu. Mtoto alimiza Vitu akasema, Ni
sukari. Kwamba ilikuwa sukari angeliteka, lakini sasa
alia. Tuondoke, arfaate. Mtoto akilia ha/apata mkate
wa <amu.
STUDY VI
The cook forgot to light the fire. Why did you not
do it then? I had no firewood, that is why: the cook
has gone to buy (some) in the market. Never mind, you
can kill the fowl in readiness. Where is the fowl ? It is
in the courtyard walking about. Will it be wanted for
the mid-day meal ? Yes, it will be wanted. Give me a
box of matches, please, the fire won't light. Pot a little
oil in, it will burn up quickly. I do not see (any) oil,
perhaps it is finished. No ! it is not finished, it is in the
storeroom. I saw it yesterday. Are you boiling the
136 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
meat? No! I am frying it. Have you cooked rice as
well? I have not cooked any. Give me a knife to cut
up the vegetables. The vegetables are rotten. They are
not rotten, you do not know anything (at all about it).
Look, the milk is boiling over. Take the saucepan off
the fire. Soot has got into the milk. It does not matter.
Jee unatia munyu na pilipili mJuzini ? Ndiyo, kido-
go ; lakiui sikutia katika mboga. TJsikoroge maziwa
kwa kisu, koroga kwa kijiko. Tezama, umeteketeza
nguo, hukuona moto ? La ! Sikuona k'itu. Jee, mtoto
anakunanazi? Bado, afokuna kisha. Mpishi ameiukua
mbuzi. Jee, wapika kwa makaa? La! Twapika kwa
k'uni. Tukifaka kuoka twafinika sufuria kwa niakaa ya
moto. Mbona mtoto hakuondoa maivu? Labuda alisa-
hau. Maji yachemka, jee kandarinya ifayaika ? La !
Najua hai/ayaika. Ilifanywa makusudi kupika maji.
Naona moshi yatoka dirishani.
STUDY VII
Come along, let us go out for a little walk. Let us go
in the shade then, here the sun is very hot. I want to go
to the Fort, which road shall we take ? I do not know
the way, but some one told me that the Main Street leads
to the Fort. I am told (or I hear) that the Gate of the
City stood (was) here formerly. Perhaps it is true, I was
not there. Listen ! I hear a noise, the porters are fight-
ing. You had better not go to look, there are a lot of
people and a lot of dust. (And)^then it is going to rain,
we had better return home. No ! do not let us go in yet,
the rain is not coming, the wind is blowing too much.
Let us go to the Custom-house then and see the trollies.
Make way ! Make way ! A trolly is coming at great
speed, move out of the road. Take care, there is a stone
here, it has fallen from the wall. There is the teacher —
he is talking to a poor man — shall we (go and) speak to
him ? Yes, let us .speak to him, he is a good man. Some
children are following us : tell them not to come. If a
slave runs away we call him a runaway (or renegade).
KEY TO EXEECISES 137
Warfakwa waume tu • wapiga ngoma kuweta. Wana
wake wanachoka, liawawezi kwenda. Labuda waiafuata
baadae ? La ! wamekosa gari, watfak'eti nyumbani saea.
Haidhuru, waweza kwenda kesho asubuhi Hawatfachele-
wa ? Ndiyo, watfachelewa kidogo lakini wanawaume watfa-
wangoja. Wat'u wakut'ana kwetu, watafutfa nini ? Twa-
ambiwa kwamba ni masikini, watfaka chakula. Ni heri
tuwape chakula wasiibe. Wakiiba waiatiwa gerezani.
Ziko t'ope na t'akat'aka tele hapa, tupite k'ando. Jee,
utfaweza kufika kwenu kesho-kutfwa ? Naam, tu^aweza
tusipok'uta upepo wala mvua. Walipiga mbiu langoni
asubuhi kusema kwamba waturnwa wadio bwanazao
wafaadka huru.
STUDY VIII
My father's friend has come to visit us, welcome him.
I know him, he is not a stranger. Welcome, Bwana,
come inside. Do not disturb yourself, Bibi, (please) do
not get up. I am only come to bring news. What news ?
Are all well? All are well, thank you. The tidings are
only of (good) health. Moreover your father and mother
send warm greetings, they want news of you. All are
well here. We want news of (the place) you come from.
With us, there has been heavy rain, so much so that
every one is rejoicing. For rain means abundance (of
food). That is true, Bwana, and let us trust (pray) that
it will come here as well. Please God it will come.
Boy ! bring biscuits and lemonade for the visitor.
(There's a knock at the door.) May I ome in? Come
in ! Do come inside. Sit down, gentlemen ! How do
you do ? We are well, thank God. These guests come
from Europe. They have brought a letter for (our)
master. Call that lad (and tell him) to take this letter
quickly. Look, boy, go with this letter to Abdullah the
teacher, he will give you an answer himself. The teacher
is talking to his Uncle and Aunt.
Mt'u apiga hodi. Mwambie angie ndani. Yafosha
kusema " Karibu," atengia hapana budi. Jina lako
138 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
n'nani ? Hunijui, ni mgeni kwenu. Niwia radhi, n'na-
kuja kuomba wali, ni mgonjwa mimi. Ukiwa mgonjwa,
huwezi kula wali. AfudAali unwe maaiwa. Twaa
pesa hizi, ukanunue maziwa. Ahasanfa, Bibi, sipendi
maziwa, t'antmua kikombe cha kahawa. Wako wagonjwa
tele mjini siku hizi. Ndiyo, lakini zamani walikuwa
zaidi. Nduguyo anakuja, arfakani ? Atfaka kuonana nawe.
Atfangoja hate, kesho usipoweza kusema nae sasa. N'a-
ngoje basi, yuaja sikuzof'e. Asema kwamba jamaa zakwe
wam'^ukia, iena wanazua neno juu yakwe.
STUDY IX
My waistcoat wants stitching. Take it to the tailor
in the Main Street. That tailor does not sew well.
Perhaps if he borrows a machine he could do it. I will
tell him. Your tunic is torn, you must take it off.
What shall I do ? I cannot wear my father's tunic.
Take mine (tunic), it will do for you. Thank you, my
friend, it will do nicely. Truly, without a friend a man
cannot live in the world. I have lost my handkerchief.
No ! It is not lost, this child found it this morning here
on the verandah. I am very glad because my mother
gave it to me some time ago. The girls' skirts want
washing ; ask them if they have bought some soap. The
girls are not here now, they are gone for a walk in the
town. Are they gone far ? I do not know where they
went. I will send this neighbour to look for them.
Vilemba vya wapagazi vinapoiea, wasema kwamba
wevi walikuja jioni wakaviiba. Wakiwaona wale wevi
watfawapiga na kuwatia p'ingu. Si vyema kuiba.
Tumvike leso kijana kike huyu, yatosha. Hatfaona
baridi, jua ni kali mtfana. Aialala wapi usiku ? Atfalala
na ndugu zangu wake, wao wafam'funza. Jirani yetu
amepimiwa joho, a<anye<a sana. Mwavuli wako uko
vvapi ? N'nauatfa ukumbini, /afacZAali ulete. Nisamehe,
nalisahau kuleta mshipi wako wa hariri na mfuko wako.
KEY TO EXERCISES 139
Mwalimu wenu alikuja kuomba viatu vyangu jana, lakini
sikuweza kunipa. Haid/mru, a/ak'e/i nyumbani na; ku-
pumuzika.
STUDY X
Europeans are very fond of oranges, they are always
coming to the market to buy them. How are the
Zanzibar oranges sold nowadays? They are (sold)
dear, three pice each, for this reason, they are not easy
to obtain (many). Our friends were looking for a goat
to purchase, but they did not see one. What would they
have done with a goat ? they have no place to put it.
(Quite) true, they have no place; probably they would
have killed it for food. A goat has a lot of meat (on it),
sufficient for many persons. If you buy it cheap it is
very profitable. Look, sir ! do you want some bananas ?
How much are your bananas ? Four for a pice, sir.
Oh ! I can't buy those bananas, they are rotten. Let
us go to that poor man, he is selling many things
- young cocoanuts, dates, sweet potatoes, vegetable
marrows, pumpkins, limes, and even onions and rice.
Ask him how he sells the rice ; what price per pound ?
Don't touch that bull, he is very fierce.
Soko ya samaki si mbali, jee uJakwemla kuiangalia?
Ndiyo, lakini sikulipa unga huu. Unga ule ni ghali,
twende kwa mt'u mwengine. Mt'u yule amezoea kuda-
nganya Wazungu. Una haki ni mwivi. Jnzi alishi-
ndana nami juu ya kasuku. Yeye aliteka pesa nyingi,
lakini mimi nalijua kwamba yule kasuku alikuwa mgo-
nj\va, na £ena hakuwez* kusema neno. Basi niku/ukua
kikapu changu, nikamuatfa. Alikasirika sana, na sasa,
nikipita, sikuzotf'e afanya neno kunisumbua. Fujo hili
lot'e maana yakwe n'nini? Mwanamke huyu masikini
anapata hasai-a — mai yakwe jot'e yanaanguka nae hawezi
kuyazoa. Madobi na masaramala na mafundi wof'e
hupatikana sokoni.
140 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XI
That shopkeeper is a dishonest man (man who has
not honesty). If he changes a rupee he gives (people)
bad pice. Look here, old fellow, a groat is worth how
much (has how many pice) nowadays? A groat, (my)
child, is sixteen pice, or four annas. Some time ago I
got seventeen pice for a groat. I do not think you got
all those pice for a groat ; perhaps you have forgotten.
I owe so-and-so two dollars, and I have nothing to pay
him. I saw him the other day, and I said to him, " Wait
a little." You are indeed poor ; you had better go and
work somewhere that you may earn (get) some money ;
so-and-so will not wait long. If I had half a rupee I
would have bought a little unbleached calico (and) have
(had) a coat made for me. Half a rupee is not enough for
a coat, you will want more ; perhaps for a rupee and a
half, or three-quarters of a dollar, they will let you have
a very small coat. Ask the owner (of the shop). Is any
one there ? Come in, welcome ! Give u» four hands of
twill calico, sir. That will do for a coat, will it not ?
It will do quite well, my boy ; it is good cloth, it comes
from Europe. And you yourself, do you want something ?
I want some nails and some sacks and some brass wire.
Kufanya biashara ni vyema, yaleta fai<ia nyingi.
Ukianza na pauni moja utfapata mbili baacZa ya siku chache.
Lakini yakupasa kufikiri na kuhasibu sana ununuapo
bidhaa yako. Na tena yakupasa kufokuwa na mizani ya
uwongo, au wat'u wafakudfai, /ena warfakukimbia, wa<a-
sema, " Ni mt'u mbaya, tusinunue kwakwe." Mt'u
mwema hawezi kurfanganya jirani zakwe. Wawiwa ni
mwenyi duka yule — ulinunua kwakwe mikono minane
ya bafutfa jana, wala hukumlipa. Si shuhuli yako,
mbot.a watusumbua bure? Tufamlipa kesho. Dhahabu
na sifuri hazivundiki. Chuma ni k'itu chema. Mdfeni si
mwongo sikuzof'e. Pasua kuni hizi. Aina ile ya nguo
Haifa! kwa k'anzn, ina alama-alama.
KEY TO EXERCISES 141
STUDY XII
His hair is black, his teeth are white. Blood is (a)
red (thing). Legs and arms and shoulders and lips and
eyes and ears and knees we have in twos, but head and
face and mouth and stomach and heart we have singly.
How many fingers have you ? I have ten fingers. How
many fingers and toes have you? I have twenty fingers
and toes. The tongue has no bone. Teeth and nails and
bones are hard things, but the skin and the tongue and
the cheeks and the uvula and the tonsils are soft. A
man with a stiff neck (i.e. obstinate) is no good. The
skin of the body and the legs needs to be (thoroughly)
washed, but a man will only dip his face and hands in
water. So-and-so's leg hurts him. The ear is not
greater than the head. A man's brain is that which has
intelligence, his body that which has strength, his heart
and veins are where the blood is (lit. are those which
have blood). Women's hair needs to be combed with a
comb.
Nyosha mkono wako upande huu. Mwambie anio-
nyeshe gun lakwe. Ni p'ua inuk'ayo harufu, ni ulimi
uoncZao famu ya chakula. Kunrfani mikono, watoto,
msimame sawa sawa. Ni kilimi kinisumbuacho, cha-
/aka kuk'atwa Yanipasa kwenda kwa dakifari. Mwe'-
nyiezi Mngu aliumba binadamu akampa akili na nguvu.
Waume wanyoa, wanawake hawanyoi. Alituonyesba
ini na mafigo na mbavu za kondoo aliyeuzwa sokoni jana.
Fumzi zatoka kifuani. Wevi walimuumiza k'oo na ma-
ungo. Ngovi yakwe ni laini. Mkono wangu wa kuume
waniuma, wa kushofo hauna neno. Ni visigino vyakwe
vifakavyoumia kwa viatu vile.
STUDY XIII
The sea is vast ; there is nothing that binds it. That
old man was formerly a sailor ; he travelled as far as
Muscat and distant islands. The rivers of this country
142 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
are not large. This Arab's boat is the one that always
takes us to Frere Town. Pull hard (the oars), boys, the
tide is going out ; we should have reached the other side
(by now), but you have not been rowing. I am the
fisherman who throws the net. The wind is strong
(much) ; we had better furl the sail. The vessels of the
Swahilis go as far as Malindi and Lamu and Zanzibar,
but they do not reach to Europe. A canoe has no anchor,
nor a rudder, nor a compas«. He who will travel by the
mail-boat must pay the fare. Where are the Indians to-
day? They have crossed over to the landing-place to
ship a cargo in their dhow. The vessel that left here the
other day met with, (lit. was struck by) a storm. Many
passengers were drowned in the sea, not being able to
swim; Where the wave (breaker) is, just there is the
entrance (to the harbour).
Wavuvi hwenda killa siku ku<afu<a samaki katika
uzio, wakiwaona wafurahi. Nahodha nimoja, waliye-
mjua ra6ki zetu, alimfunga mwanawe mlingot'ini kwa
kamba asipate kuzama. Mzungu mdogo kule ForodAani
ndiye apokeae vjeti kwa wale wasafirio katika marfau.
Vukani ng'ambu ya pili, maji yajaa. Asiyevua kwa
mshipi, avua kwa nyavu. Walimuatfa yule masikini
ambae alikuwa karibu na kufa. Umekwisha choka, wala
hatukuona nt'i k'avu bado. Twekani tanga, twende ki-
nani; hatu/aona mawimbi wala miamba, kuna shuari.
Watfakapotfakwa mabaharia, ham'/awak'uta pwani. Ma-
ehua yetu ni fupi, tena makasia ni marefu.
STUDY XIV
Oar brothers whom you were calling have gone to hoe
in the field. The younger one does not even know how
to ptill up weeds ; that is the reason of the elder one
going that he may teach his younger brother. What
trees are there in your plantation ? There are mango
trees, cocoa-nut palms, guava trees, plantain trees, lime
KEY TO EXERCISES 143
trees, tamarind trees and baobabs — all bear fruit. Besides,
there are cassava and pineapple plants, beans and beds of
sweet potatoes. Very good indeed ! You have every-
thing you want, then, except orange trees. Yes, and
orange trees we do not want because their fruit is no
good. Why? The oranges which I ate here the other
day were very sweet. That may be, but the (their) trees
did not grow here; those nice eating ones (which are
eaten) come from Zanzibar. Do not draw water with a
bucket that leaks.
Wak'ulima wapandao mbeyu mbaya hawatevuna
mavuno mazuri. Mwenyi bus/ani hii hutupa sikuzotf'e
maua mazuri. Hakuna matunda mangi katika ntf'i hii ;
kuna maembe na mapera na mananasi na ndizi tfu-basi 1
Lakini kuna mengine z&idi — ndimu na nazi na machu-
ngwa na k'waju na matomoko na malimau, uliyasahau
haya. Jirani zetu hawajatfimba kisima shambani mwao,
wakali wakijenga kibanda. Ndia yenu ni p'ana, yetu ni
iiyembamba. Mwitu uliokuwapo hapa umetemwa wotf'e
kwa mndu. Nyasi na mimea yotf'e inakauka kwa jua kali,
ha<a magugu na majani na miba pia. Tema lile shina
kwa jembe. Si mpanzi peke yakwe ajuae kwamba udongo
huu ni mbaya. Matunda haya hayafai kuliwa, ni mabid
kabisa. Moja tn ni bivu.
STUDY XV
The porters do not want to carry the loads, they say
they are heavy. If they do not carry them they get no
food money then. Tell them it is not far where we are
going to-day, when they arrive they (will) can rest. The
headman is very severe, he has no pity ; he is always
scolding the men. And then again this morning the
guide missed the way and we got lost in the jungle.
When we were in there we came across some other
travellers who were each carrying a flag and a gun. The
chief of that village is coming to talk to our interpreter,
who is the only one able to translate his language. This
144 BWAHILI GRAMMAR
old man loves to hear the news of the coast. He wants
us to stay here for some days, to camp out altogether and
put up our tents. No ! I do not like (this) place, and
besides the water is finished in the soldiers' gourds, and the
corporal says that they will not put up with it, waiting
much longer. Let them start on the march now at once
then and get off; we have had a halt, that is enough, my
good fellow.
Wat'u wa n^'i hizi hujenga inaboma mijini mwao.
Hupigana kwa nyuta na mishare, mikuki na rungu ;
killa mmoja huJukua ngao. Tujapochoka yatupasa
kuvunrfa k'ambi kesho jimbi likiwika ; mwambie yule
injinga atuamshe alifajiri. Taarishi atekapokuja, asikari
watfapiga mzinga. Ndia hii imekufa, ni heri tururfi.
Ukiumwa ni siafu, u/aumia ; ela fungu hawautnizi. Mt'u
mwenyi nguvu aweza kuinua mtfaimbo. K'ata za wana-
wake zilianguka shimoni. Wapagazi wetu wangeli
/angamka kwamba hatukukaza mwendo. Usiwasemee,
wasiraamie tu.. Wambie wakipata mafuta ya mbono
katika miti hii, wateweza kuyauza watfakaporudi p'wani.
STUDY XVI
This year it did not rain much in the rainy season (or
great rains) but the lesser and latter rains were plentiful,
thank God. It is right that people should rest on Sunday
and work for six days. Why is the rain late (in coming) ?
It is not yet the proper time for the great rains; they
may come on to-morrow, the sky has been very cloudy
all day, doubtless rain will soon fall. On Thursday
night the people came back from their stay at Jomvu at
11 p.m. The moon now is shining all night. Long ago
there was darkness on the earth, then God Almighty
created light and there was brightness everywhere. There
will be new moon next week, at the time the sun sets ;
then the heathen people will get an opportunity for their
dances. Last year the N.E. monsoon (blew) was very
strong, but the S.E. only very slight. What time is it
KEY TO EXERCISES 145
now? It is ten o'clock in the morning. So-and-so
possesses a silver watch and a gold chain.
Dalili ya mvua ni mawingu. Miongo mi will inapila
tangu alipokufa babaetu. Ulikuwa wapi mwanangu
muda huu wotf'e? Sikwenda pahali, nalike'fi papahapa.
Mamaako alikwita mara mbili t'atu, hukusikia ? Siku-
sikia loloi'e, nalikuwa nimelala. Zamani moja nyota
k'ubwa ilionekana mbinguni. Wat'u wa kale waliifuata,
ikawa kiongozi kwao. Katika nt'i hizi jua latfwa saa
thinaashara jioni. Asubuhi kwacha saa hidaashara.
Jumaa-pili ijayo wa.ta.zidi kuja mapema. Wat'u wema
wapungua ulimwenguni. Mawingu yametanda mbinguni.
Ntf'i imengia ndaa. Mwenyiezi Mngu daima ameongeza
neema na nguvu kwa wat'u wakwe.
STUDY XVII
A traveller is a poor man even though he be a king.
He who goes up-country must of necessity have patience,
(for) he will doubtless meet dangers and difficulties (lit.
hard things), maybe he will also suffer loss. Nowadays
travelling is not like (what it used to be) long ago.
Now there is a train which takes you anywhere you like
—hills, valleys, precipices or plains. It goes uphill, it
goes downhill ; where there are rivers or streams it
crosses by a bridge, there is no obstacle that it cannot
surmount (lit. there is nothing that hinders it). And in
addition to this the white man has built railway stations
at every place where the train stops, so that those who
are travelling may have an opportunity of getting in and
getting out just as they like. Now and again there is
war up-country — this tribe quarrels with that tribe over
a spring of water or some other matter. Then they fight
and a great many are killed. All sorcerers, wizards, and
witches, are the enemies of mankind.
Hapa pana misheni, wat'u wamepanda mahindi na
mpunga, ngauu na mlama. Kisha wana shauri kuleta
SWAHILI GRAMMAR K
146 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mkondo wa maji katika ziwa lile kubwa mashambani
mwao illi kutia maji wakaJi wa kasikazi. Hayo maji
hububujika daima na kumiminika bure juu ya kishaka
kile. Washenzi wak'efio k'ando ya nguu t'atu hutafuna
ttimbaku m/ana kurfwa. Avutae tumbaku sharti atumie
kiko. Walipatana kutuongoza mahali penyi mipira na
mipingo pamoja na mikoraa, lakini tulipofika mjini mwao,
walikataa. Taifa hii ina ng'ombe chache tu, wenyewe
huketia n<i ya kunge na \imande. Maji ya/iririka mlimani
ha/a nti ya t'ambarare.
STUDY XVIII
A sportsman went up-country to hunt big game — such
as lions, elephants, buffalo and rhinoceros. He wrote on
a hundred Wakamba porters to accompany him. He took
two horses and five mules. On the way he shot one
giraffe, three haartebeest, and four gazelles in order to
procure food for his men. After sixteen days' march they
came to a place abounding with monkeys and apes.
While they were watching how these creatures jump
from tree to tree, they heard a lion roar near them. They
were all afraid except the hunter himself who was carry-
ing a large European rifle for the purpose of shooting
fierce beasts of this kind. When he went near to examine,
a lioness appeared in front of him. He immediately
levelled his gun and shot a bullet into her side; she
dropped down and died on the spot. But her two male
companions who accompanied her, when they heard her
cry, ran out of the jungle. At this juncture his gun-
carrier was seized with fright, and saying, " This sort of
work terrifies," he ran away ! Thus the poor hunter was
left alone without a weapon. The lions leaped on him,
tore him in pieces and ate him. Insects which inhabit
people's houses are these — mosquitoes, scorpions, centi-
pedes, fleas, bugs and wall lizards. The ones that re-
appear constantly and cause great destruction of property
are the white ants.
KEY TO EXERCISES 147
Satu ni nyoka mkubwa, aweza kushetfa p'unda au
p'unda milia radogo. T'ui na mafisi hutembea-fembea
iisiku mmoja-mmoja, vibok'o hwenda kwa kundi. Mbweha
wana makao yao mwituni, ela mbwa hupenda kuk'etfi
nyumbani mwa bwana zao. Nyuni wotf'e na p'opo wana ma-
bawa ; wapuruka-puruka angani. Mabatfa, k'anga, mwewe
na nrfiwa waweza kupuruk'a ; mbuni ni nyuni wakubwa
hawapuruki. Ngwena hana ulimi. Mburuk'enge ana
mkia mrefa, hula mai. Nyama ya nguuwe na vitangule
ilikatazwa kwa wat'u wa kale. P'aka na simba wana
ndimi za kuparuza. Pole p'ole ya k'obe humfisha mbali.
Nyani na t'umbiri k'ubwa hufanana na wat'u. Atambaae
kizani asitfahili kupigwa bunduki. Ngamia ni nyama
wakubwa, watfukuao mizigo mizito — ngamia mmoja aweza
kurfukua mzigo wa p'embe wa ratfli mia t'atu u thamanini.
STUDY XIX
Sir, this man is very ill, his whole body is swollen.
Tell him to come here, then, that I may examine him.
Good morning, my good fellow, how are you feeling ? I
am ill, sir, very ill indeed. Poor fellow, cheer up ! God
will heal you of the sickness you have and you will get
better. I am only a physician. He who works the cure
is (God) Himself. Oh ! but I am very ill, sir, and I do
not know whether I shall pull through this disease or
not. Please God, you will pull through. How old are
you now ? Maybe I am about fifty-five, sir. Well, stay
here with us a few days and keep in bed. We will give
you some medicine to make you sleep and then presently
you will feel better and will go back home again. Thank
you, sir, thank you, I will stay and I'll try and make
myself happy (lit. comfort or quiet my heart). What is
the matter with you, child ? Oh 1 I have a great many
troubles — first of all I have jiggers in my feet, then I've
been pricked by a thorn in my finger. Your troubles are
not very serious, my child ; they will soon be got over,
I think. Come here to me and let me take out both the
jiggers and the thorn — it's only a little matter, it can all
148 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
be done in a minute. Doctor ! this blind man is calling
you. He says he has suffered great pain in his eyes since
lie went to that " Nyika " witch-doctor. It is his own
stupidity then, I warned him not to go. Those medicine-
men know absolutely nothing unless it is how to injure
and deceive people. Tell him to sit down and I will
come directly, there are others who are waiting for me —
people with leprosy and anaemia and skin disease and
various other complaints.
Hii ni Asipitfali ya Sirikali wauguzwapo wat'u weupe.
Wat'u weusi hwenda Asipiteli ya Misheni iliyoko
kisiwani. Huko dawa hutolewa killa sikii kwa killa
mt'u ajae awae yotf'e. Wauguao hugangwa na kutfunzwa.
Zaidi ya haya madakitari hufundisha hirimu wenyi akili,
kazi hii ya hurutna. Wasairfia hao huosha vidonda, hufoa
dawa, hung'oa meno na kufunga majaraha. Wale wenyi
baridi, makohozi, vifua, baridfi yabisi, mafua na hooia
huk'etfi nyumba moja, wenyi fete nyumba ya pili, na wale
wauguao maipu, au t'ambazi, au p'ele, au madonda au
mbuba huk'eti nyumba ya tatu. Bind yak we yule kiwe/u
iajiri alikuja jana na kiipu tfungu ; leo kinaiva, dakifari
akakipasua. Usaha mwingi ukatoka. Hawa mabubwi wa-
wili wana homa. Wape killa mt'u matone matfano ya hiyo
dawa ya kutoa jasho, kawambie warudi nyumbani na
kulala. Ni dasifuri hapa, killa mt'u atekae rfawa sharti
aje na /upa — tupu na iliyo safi. Kwa nini hutulii ? Kwa
sababu wanitonesha jaraha. Mama wa kunilea aona
maumivu mwilini moi'e, akohoa na kuchemua <7aima.
Usingie nyumba ile usije ukapata fete za maji.
STUDY XX
As you bring up your child, so will he grow. An
Indian professor has opened a school in the Old Town, for
teaching English. His pupils are neither taught writing
nor sums. He has written down the names of twenty-
four children in his register, but I hear that they do not
attend regularly (lit. do not persevere to come everyday)
KEY TO EXERCISES 149
and he (himself) has no authority over them. At our
school we are taught Addition, Subtraction, Multiplica-
tion, and Division. We have maps on the wall, that we
may get to understand about the world we live in — this
study is called Geography. Then again we have slates
and pencils and pens and a blackboard and chalk — every-
thing that is necessary. Our teacher is very clever at
playing the harmonium — ho makes us sing all sorts of
pretty songs. On Prize Day (lit. the great day for giving
out prizes) we are to sing them before all the Europeans
and a whole crowd of people. There will be races, too, on
that day, each boy competing with his fellows in running
and jumping and other things. Those who win will get
presents and prizes, while all the people clap. All parents
ought to send their children to our school. Obstinacy and
laziness and vulgar language are not allowed under any
circumstances. Every one must take pains to make
progress.
Mwanzo wa hikima yot'e ni kumcha Mngu na kushika
amri zakwe. Mwanawe liwali hasomi lena, amehirimu.
Babakwe alimpeleka skuli alipokuwa mdogo kabisa, nae
mwenyewe akafanya bidii na kujitfahidi, hate akapata sifa
iiyingi k wa mwalimu wakwe juzi, alipoondoka maeZarasani.
Mtoto akikosa, sharti afake msamaha, nae atesamehewa ;
lakini akifife kosa lakwe na kunena uwongo, afapata aibu,
nao wazazi wakwe watfasikiJika. Watoto hao wanawake
hawana adabu walahishima ; huteza miana kutfwa, fenaha-
wana mt'u wa kuwafunza. Kwamba walipata ruhusa kuja
kusoma hawangekuwa watukutu na ushupavu kama vile
walivyo. Mapenzi ni k'itu chenyi thamani k'uu duniani.
Kwa mapenzi twaweza kusaidia wale waonewaona kuwa-
funza wale ambao hawana ilimu. Si kawaicfa huku kuomba
bakishishi, afanyae neno hili hana haya kabisa. Mwenzio
akikutangulia usifukiwe. Hirimu wapatao daraja ni
wale wahishimuo wazazi wao na wakufunzi wao. Naona
waziwazi kwamba hufaweza kumaliza kazi yako ijumaa
hii.
150 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
STUDY XXI
True religion is the one which leads us to God and
comforts our souls. We believe that it is the Christian
who has this religion. The Muhammedan calls the
Christian unbeliever (or infidel) ; but at the same time
he holds (says) that, " An unbeliever who suits your
purpose is better than a Muhammedan who does not."
The meaning of this is that, although he is very tenacious
of his religion 'and despises all other religionists except
his own, he is not at all above making use of (these so-
called) unbelievers, if he finds profit in doing so. The
Creator of heaven and earth and of all things therein is
God Almighty. He who redeemed us by dying for us ou
the Cross, is His only Son, our Lord Jesus Christ, who is
the Saviour of all the inhabitants of the world. He who
instructs our minds and controls our spiritual beings is
the Holy Spirit/ who is worshipped and glorified together
with the Fatherland the Son. In the Church of Christ
there are three orders — bishops, priests (or presbyters)
and deacons. The work of them all is to preach the
gospel and to feed the flock of God. This flock is the
whole company of faithful people. Christ ordained two
sacraments for His followers — -Baptism and the Lord's
Supper : this latter is also called the Holy Communion.
The Bible contains — the Law of Moses, the books of the
Prophets, Psalms, Proverbs, the Gospels, the Acts of the
Apostles and various Epistles. All these books testify to
Jesus Christ that He is the Son of the Most High ; His
disciples also received Him (as such) being convinced by
all the miracles He did in their presence while He was in
the world. But the greatest thing of all is His wonderful
resurrection from the dead which demonstrated plainly
that He is the complete conqueror over death and hades
and all the powers of hell.
Maisha ya binadamu ni mafupi, fena mawazo yakwe
ni maovu. Kusali hakuondoi dhambi, wala kusujudia
sanamu hakutakasi roho. Waisilamu hunena kwamba kuna
KEY TO EXERCISES 151
mambo matfano yapasaya kwo wokofu — kusali, kufoa zaka
kwa sadoka, kupi ga shahada, kuf unga KamadAani na k wenda
Maka. Maagano Mapya yatufundisha kwamba hatuo-
kolewi kwa vitendo vyema, wala kwa mafozi ya foba ; ilia
kwa imam katika Bwana Jesu Masihi aliyekufa kwa ajili
yetu, akafoa na muwili wakwe kuwa sadaka kwa Mngu
kwa madhambi ya ulimwengu mzima. Wale wamwa-
minio hugeuzwa asili ni Koho Mtakatifu, hatfa wakapenda
yale mambo ambayo zamani waliyatfukia na kuiukia yale
amhayo kwanza waliyapenrfa. Dini ya Islam huitwa
" Nrfia i ahisi," maana, wale waifuatao hawaiakwi kua/a
aua^a za rfunia wala famaa za muwili. Mt'u akisilimu
kisawahili madhambi kama unafiki na udanganyifu si
marufuku kwakwo. Afanyae haki hubarikiwa, avundae
sharia ya Mngu hulaaniwa. Maandiko yaknbaliwayo na
kusadikiwa ni waongofu wa Islam yaitwa "Kuruani"—
chuo chenyi sura mia u arubaafaashai'a. Katika mlango
wane, wa si /a, wa sabaa na wa arubaini-na-nane ilimu ya
masliei/ani na malaika hutangazwa. Waaminifu woi'e
hukut'anika msikit'ini killa siku ya ijumaa ndipo awa
hubiripo imamu. Wasawahili hunena, "Shukuru uliyo
nayo," na /ena " Adhabu ya kaburi ajua maiti."
152 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TABLES OF MONEY, WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
COINAGE
Silver coins. Eupee. Value 16 annas or 64 pice.
„ „ i Eupee. „ 8 „ „ 32 „
„ „ i Eupee. „ 4 „ ,,16 „
„ „ 1 Eupee. „ 2 „ ,,8 „
Bronze coin. Pice. Value j anna.
An Anna is four pice. Pesa nne ni anna moja.
Sixteen anna make one rupee. Anna sitfashara, au
kuiui na si/a, ni rupia moja.
Eoboo ya zamani ni pesa thinen wa thalathini, i.e.
thalathini na mbili.
The meaning of " roboo " is, one quarter ; thirty-two
pice or eight annas is the quarter of a dollar. (The old
reckoning.)
Pesa thalathini na mbili, au anna nane, ni roboo ya
riale, ni hisabu ya zamani.
Eoboo rupia ni pesa sitfashara.
Thumuni ni pesa sitfashara, maana, ni thumuni ya
riale, i.e. the eighth part of a dollar.
Thumuni rupia ni pesa nane, i.e. the eighth part of a
rupee.
MEANS OF MEASURING CORN, ETC.
1. Kibaba, which may be divided thus —
Eoboo kibaba, i.e. ^ kibaba.
Nusu kibaba, i.e. \ kibaba.
Kibaba kasir roboo, i.e. f kibaba.
2. Kisaga, i.e. vibaba viwili.
3. Pishi, i.e. visaga viwili au vibaba vine.
4. Jizila, i.e, pishj
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 153
WEIGHTS
1. Eatili, equals 1 pound.
2. Mani, i.e. ratili tatu.
3. Farasila, i.e. ratili thalathini na sita (36 Ibe.).
MEASUREMENTS OF LENGTH
1 . Shubiri, i.e. a span.
2. Dhiraa, i.e. a cubit — equals "shubiri mbili" (two
Hpans).
3. P'ima, i.e. a fathom — equals " dhiraa nne," or
" shubiri nane" (four cubits or eight spans).
The word " wari " is also used by the Indians, it means
a yard, and equals two cubits. Ni dhiraa nibili.
154 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
SPECIMENS OF SWAHILI LETTEK- WRITING.
Letter No. I.
Ilia janabi (mpenzi wangu), sheikh (mtukufu), ali
mukaram (mwenyi kutukuzwa), ali mukhutaram (ambao
asiyefaa kuuwawa), alakhi (ndugu yangu), ali muaddt
(mwenyi kutimiza ahadi), Hamis bin Shaibu bin Hamis
il Kiliti, Salamahulahutaala (rehema ya Mwenyiezi Mngu
aliyetukuka juu ya watu), Salamu aleika (amani na iwe
jnu yako), Warakhamatulahi wa barakatu (na rehema
ya Mwenyiezi Mngu na baraka), wabadu (baada ya haya),
tangu sikn uliyoj-afiri hata leo sitasa pata barua yako
wala si wajibu wako katna hayo na walio mbali huonana
kwa barua na barua ni nusu ya kuonana na Mombasa
tarehe ya leo hakxina ziada ya khabari ilia mvua nyingi
sana na nyumba nyingi zimevundika kwa sababu ya
mvua kadhalika na pepo jingi sana na siku hizi kume-
fanya ugumu sana wa vitu mtele na kitoeo naswi tuna-
furahi sana kwa sababu ya mwezi huu ni mwezi mtukufu
wa maulidi ya nabii salalakhualthi wa salama (rehema
ya Mwenyiezi Mngu na iwe kwakwe na amani), na liakhi
(ndugxi yangu), Ali bin Omari amepata mtoto mwana
mume na mwezi huu ukisha nimeazimu kusafiri kwenda
koma shamba siku mbili tatu na watu wote nyumbani
wakusalimu sana na jamaa zako wote wakusalimu sana
tena nataka jawabu ya barua hii ya kunijulisha hali yako
nisalimia jamaa huko pia wote nawe takabadhi darizaui
moja ya kanzu na nusu darizani kofia na vikoi vitatu
mikononi mwa hamili li barua tafudhali niuzia kama vita-
kavyomkini aidha na khabari ya ndia hata sasa hatujajua
mwisho wakwe. Wasalainu. Wakatabahu.
Muhammad bin Maalim bin Bwana Kombo biyedihi.
Ta'rihi Alifu thalatha mia wa aruba wa ishirini, 1324.
Rabiu, Hawaii thamania.
SWAHILI LETTERS 155
Letter No. 2.
ALHAMDULILLAHI WAHADAHU.
Ilia janabi alimuhibbi aliakram alimukaramu alazizi
alakhi Bwana fulani bin fulani hadahulahu taala, wabadu
nakurifu hali zetu njema wa thamma nawe kuwa kadhalika
ya afia, na zaidi ya khabari klieri nalipoona mtu ajae huko
nimeilazimu nafusi yangu kukuarifu hali yangu na
kuuliza hali yako basi usiwate kuniarifu hali yako nami
kadhalika ya khabari ya huku ni kheri hakuna ilia iii
mvua nyingi mwaka huo twataraji itakuwa kheri tuna-
furahi sana. Maana katika miji yetu isipokuwa mvua
hatuoni vyema na baraka huwa chache tena tunapata
khabari ya kuwa Ulaya ya Paris imekuwa mvua nyingi
mno kisha nti inatetema zinaanguka nyumba nyingi na
watu wangi waliokufa wapata watu alifu tano basi
tunasikitika sana kupata khabari hiyo lakini ndiyo kheri
inaana kulla neno aletalo Mngu ndiyo kheri. Nawe
usiwate kuniarifu khabari za huko upande wa kwenu
hala hala. Wasalamu.
Wakatabahu, Mula Alii bin Abdirrahaman biyedihi.
Ta'rihi ithenashara Kabii Liawal. Sanati thalatha
niia na aruba wa ishirini.
156 SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Letter No. 3.
ALHAMDULILAHI WHADAHU.
(Addressed to a lady.)
Ilia jinabi alimuhibba alakarama alimukharama alaaza
alaziza indana alukhti fulana binti fulani hadahulahu taala
wabaadu nakuarifu hali zetu ngema wa thamma nawe
kuwa kadhalika ya afia wa zaidi ya khabari khevi nali-
poona mtu ajae huko kwenu nimejilazimisha nafusi yangu
kukujuza hali yangu na kukuuliza hali yako na huku
mjini kwetu tuna furahi sana kwa mvua nyingi lakini
masikini wanazidi hamn sana maana imetoka khabari ya
kuwa mwaka huno kodi ya raajumba itaongezwa basi
masikini wasikitika sana maana hali zao ni nzito hawana
vit'u lakini watafanyaje hawana jinginelo la kufanya
ikenda mno ni kuomba Mngu ndiyo khabari nawe usiwate
kuniarifu khabari za huko upande wa kwenu nami
kadhalika. Wasalamu.
Nisalimia watu wote kwa huko wakubwa na wadogo
waume na wake na huku watu wote wakusalimu salama
nyingi. Wasalamu.
Wakatabahu, Mula Alii bin Abdirrahamani biyedihi.
Ta'rihi ithenaashara Rabii Liawal. Sanati thalatha
niia na aruba wa ishirini.
CALENDAR 157
SWAHILI CALENDAR
The Muhammedan year consists of twelve lunar
months, or 354 days, leaving a discrepancy of eleven days
between it and the solar year. As this is never rectified
by the introduction of intercalary months, there is no
correspondence between the calendar and the seasons,
and we find the Fast of Eamadhan, for instance, occurring
at all times of the year as it works its way round.
The calendar has thus very little practical value — the
seasons, not the months, become the mile-stones in their
annual records. In native letters and documents circu-
lating among themselves their own dates are still used ;
but in commercial and legal transactions the European
system of reckoning time is often adopted, and the
English names of the months are being gradually
assimilated into the language.
The Swahili names for their lunar months are as
follows —
Mfunguo Mosi Mfunguo Sabaa
Mfunguo Pili Mfunguo Nane
Mfunguo Tatu Mfunguo Tisia or Kenda
Mfunguo Nne Eajab
Mfunguo Tano Shaban
Mfunguo Si/a Ramadhan
The seasons are briefly —
Kasikazi or Musimu, period of N.E. monsoon from
November to March.
Maleleji, short period of calms between the former and
the
Kusi or period of S.W. monsoon lasting from April to
September.
Kipupwe, part of Kusi, period of cool winds in June and
July.
158
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Demani, " fair winds " in August and September.
T'anga Mbili, "variable winds" in September and
October.
Maleleji, second period of calms before N.E. monsoon
breaks.
The " rainy seasons " are three, but only the " mwaka "
is really dependable. They are : Mwaka (" former " or
" great " rains) in April or May, Mchoo (" lesser " rains)
in July, Vuli (" latter " rains) in October or November.
(For fuller information see " African Aphorisms," p. 28.)
EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS
(DIFFERENT WORDS WITH SIMILAR MEANINGS)
NOUNS
notisi, English " notice," sum-
mons.
mbiyu, proclamation (by town
crier).
iilani, proclamation, public
notice.
ha'kimu, judge,
muamzi, arbitrator.
ka<Z/ti, magistrate.
dhambi (pi.), sin.
kosa, fault, mistake,
ba/ili, crime, iniquity,
upotofu, iniquity.
uMalimu, wrong, unrighteousness,
kuasi, transgression, rebellion,
ithimu, guilt, guiltiness,
ubaya, wickedness, badness,
uovu, maovu, evil, badness,
ukhaini, treason, treachery,
ukhiana, guile, deceit,
khatia, fault.
hila, guile, duplicity,
udanganyifa, deception.
tk&n&, thoughts, doubts.
azima, intentions, thoughts.
mawazo, tliouglits, ideas, opinions,
reflections.
fikira, consideration, tliouglits.
, difficulty,hardship, trouble.
udhia, trouble, bother, annoy-
ance, difficulty.
<aabu, trouble, difficulty, per-
plexity.
msiba, affliction, calamity.
mateso, sufferings.
mashaka, misfortune.
rZ/tiki, trouble, distress.
huzuoi, grief, sorrow, anxiety.
hamu, grief, sadness.
majonzi, mourning, grief, sadness.
SYNONYMS AND HOMONYMS
159
VERBS
kumiliki, to reign, to govern, to
possess.
kutewala, to rule, to govern.
kuweza, to be able.
kuwabi, to be able (to go to a
place, etc.),
ku'iiriki, to spare time for, to
keep an engagement.
kuzizima, to be, or feel, cool or
damp,
kufanya baridi, to be [spoiled by]
damp, to be mildewed.
ku/ftani, to think, to suppose, to
presume,
kuazimia, to think of, to intend,
to resolve,
kuwaza (kuaza), to ponder, to
reflect,
kafikiri, to consider, to think
over,
kuona, to feel, to think, to
imagine.
kushuka, to come or go down, to
descend,
ku/eremka, to go or come down,
to descend (easily),
(kn)teleza, to slip or slide down.
kukwea, to mount, to climb (step
by step),
kupanda, to ascend, to go up.
kutekabadM, to receive,
kupokea, to receive, to take.
kulinda, to keep, to watch,
ku/unza, to take care of.
kubifatfd, to preserve, to spare, to
keep, to defend.
kuweka salama, to protect, to
preserve.
kuokoa, to save, to deliver,
kuponya, to cause to escape, to
deliver, to save.
ku/aabisha, to vex, to perturb,
kuudhi, to trouble, to bother,
kusumbua, to annoy, to disturb,
to harass,
kntesa, to persecute, to molest.
A LIST OF HOMONYMS
(WORDS HAVING DIFFERENT MEANINGS WHICH ARE NEARLY OR QUITE
ALIKE IN SOUND)
k'aa, crab.
kaa, ember.
(ku)kaa, to dwell, to stay.
k'amba. prawn.
kamba, cord (of cocoa-nut fibre).
kanga, spur of cocoa-nut palm.
k'anga, guiuca-fowl.
(ku)kanga, to fry.
k'ata, head-pad.
kata, ladle (threequarters of
cocoa-nut).
(ku)k'ata, to cut.
kafa, page of book,
(kuji)kala, to strain,
mkata. poor man.
kawa, dish cover (of plaited
grassV
(ku)kawa, to delay.
kitoto, small child,
kitoto, narrow street, alley,
crooked path.
k'ofi, a clap (with the hands),
kofi, flat part of the hand, double
handful.
160
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
k'ombe, shell.
kombe (pi. ma-), large flat dish.
k'onde, field, cultivated land.
konde (pi. ma-), fist.
kooti, court, court of justice,
koti (pi. ma-), coat.
(ku)kua, to grow.
(ku)wa, to be.
kuwa (conj.), seeing that, since.
k'uku, fowl.
kuku(huku) over there, just there.
kuukuu, old, worn-out.
maziwa (uo sing.), milk,
maziwa (pi.), lakes.
majuto, large rivers,
majufo, repentance, remorse.
mto, river.
m<o, cushion, pillow.
mwembe, mango-tree,
wembe, razor.
mt'u, man.
mtn, tamarisk (?), tree growing
in mangrove swamps.
ndoo, pail, bucket.
ndoo ! come ! (irr. imp. of kuja).
nt'a, wax.
nf a, point, end.
n<'i, earth, ground, land,
nt'i, ear rings.
nti, a chart (?).
p'aa, gazelle,
paa, roofing.
(ku)paa, to ascend.
(ku)piga k'ofi, to clap hands,
(ku)piga kofi, to box the ears
(i.e. with the open hand).
p'ia, a top.
pia, also, as well, all.
(ku)taja. to mention,
t'aja, tribute, tax.
f'ama, sweepings, rubbish, off-
scourings.
/ania, end, finis.
(ku)iama, to move, migrate.
kushika tama, to consider (lit.
hold the cheek).
tanga, a sail.
matanga, sails, mourning, f unr-ral
rites.
(ku)tenga, to wander,
mfanga, sand.
t'anu, oven, furnace.
<ano, five.
faa, lamp,
f'aa, obedience,
t'aa, long-tailed fish.
tatu, three.
t'&tu, leaven, yeast, fermented
matter.
i'avu (za maguu), calves (of logs).
t&va. (pi. ma-), cheek.
i'awa, louse.
kutawa, to be in seclusion.
(ku)teka, to draw (water, etc.).
mateka, captives' booty,
kufeka, to laugh, to smile.
(ku)tema, to clear forest, to spit,
(ku)tema, to cut asunder, 1o
slash, to hew, to cut oft'.
(ku)tenga, to alight, to perch .
(ku)tenga, to separate,
t'enga, sea-monster.
t'ete, small-pox,
f'ei'e, sparks.
(ku)tetea, to fight for, to
champion.
(kuXetea, to walk lame, to halt,
to totter, to cackle (hen).
t'eo, sling, catapult.
f'eo, sieves, winnowing trays.
HOMONYMS
161
tezo, game, plaything.
t'ezo, adze.
tini, fig.
t'ini, under, underneath, below.
toka ! go away !
/okaa, chalk, lime.
(ku)tua, to put down, to set (of
sun).
kufua, to rub to powder
J'ua, blemish, flaw.
tui, fat, fatness, marrow, " milk "
(of cocoa-nut).
f'ui, leopard.
(ku)tukia, to happen, to befall.
ia, to hate.
tumo, errand.
<umo, sphere of business, means
of livelihood.
/upa, file.
<'upa, bottle, phial.
(ku)topa, to throw, to throw
away.
(kuXupa, to leap.
kui'upa mpaka, to overstep the
limit.
t'uu, ant-hill.
), only, merely.
Utatu, Trinity.
ut'ahi, sourness, fermentation.
ko<o, spice from Arabia.
koto, play-hour and play-ground
for slaves .
k'oto, middle joint of finger
k'oto, swivel-hook and line.
kikoto, switch.
tundu, cage, nest.
t'undu, hole.
kitundu, nest.
fundo, pocket, purse.
mfundo, grudge, old cause of
quarrel.
tandu, centipede.
tandu, spider's web.
t'andu (pi.), film on cooked rice.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
162
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
PART III
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
adj. for adjective. pi.
adv. „ adverb. poss.
appd. ,, applied. prep.
cf. „ compare. pron.
compr. „ comprehensive. ref.
conj. ,, conjunction. ref. pron.
contrn. „ contraction. rel.
cop. „ copula. sop.
ctr. „ contrast. sing.
dem. „ demonstrative. suf.
distr. „ distributive. v.
inf. „ infix. v. c.
inter. „ interrogative. v. intr.
intj. „ interjection. v. n.
inv. ,, invariable. v. pas.
man. ,, manner. v. prepl.
n. ,, noun. v. rec.
n. prop. „ proper noun. v. red.
n. redup. „ reduplicated noun. v. ref.
num. „ numeral. v. sub.
part. „ participle. v. tr.
per. „ personal. var.
ph. „ phrase. voc.
for plural.
„ possessive.
,, preposition.
„ pronoun.
,, reflexive.
,, reference pronoun.
,, relative.
,, separable.
,, singular.
„ suffix.
„ verb.
,, verb causative.
„ verb intransitive.
verb neuter.
verb passive.
verb prepositional.
verb reciprocal.
verb reduplicated.
verb reflexive.
verb subtractive.
verb transitive.
variable.
vocative.
In this Vocabulary, words beginning with a capital lett-r are
complete in themselves: those with a hyphen before them require
some variable prefix.
Nouns are always given in the singular form when one exists.
Derivative forms of the verb are only given in a few instances ; the
student is referred to Study XVII., where the subject is dealt with
in detail. Verbal nouns, obviously derived, are usually omitted,
unless there be some variation in meaning or in form. Numerals
placed after a noun indicate the class it belongs to.
SWAHILI-ENGLtSH VOCABULARY
163
A! (intj.), Oh!
A-a ! (intj.), No !
-a (var. prep.), of (agrees with
the thing possessed).
AbatJi (adv.), continually, for ever,
always, perpetually.
(Ku)abiri (v. intr.), "to make a
journey one way, by sea or
land.
Abiria (n. 5), passenger, one who
crosses over.
(Ku)aburfu (v. tr.), to worship, to
adore.
Ada (n, 3), custom, usage, habitual
practice.
Adabu (n. 3), manners, politeness,
good behaviour.
(Ku)tia adabu, to teach good
manners by correction.
Adhabu (n. 8), punishment, tor-
ture.
(Ku)a'ii (v. tr.), to accompany out
of the house.
(Ku)adbibu (v. tr.), to punish, to
torture.
A<7ili (n. 3), truth, correct con-
duct, right.
Atfui (n. 3) (also plural maadui),
enemy, foe, adversary.
Afa (n. 5), terror, dread, danger,
disaster, horror (mostly used
in pi.).
Afarika (n. prop.), Africa.
(Ku)afikana (v. rec.), to come to
terms, to make a compact or
covenant.
Afiuni (n. 3), opium.
Afua (n. 3), deliverance, mercy.
(Ku)afu (v. tr.), to save, deliver,
pr< serve, rescue.
Afudhali (adv.), preferably, better,
ratlier.
(Ku)aga (v. tr.), to take leave of,
to bid farewell to.
(Ku)agiia (v. tr.), to give in-
structions to, to direct.
(Ku)agna (v. tr.), to prophesy, io
interpret, to predict, to treat
medically (vide Nyika lagula).
Ahadi (n. 3), promise, agreement.
AhasaiUa ! (n. 3 and intj.), thank
you ! thanks.
Ahera (akhera) (n. 3), Hades,
Invisible World present and
future.
(Ku)abidi (v. intr.), to promise.
Ai! (intj.). Oh! (of pain).
Aibu (n. 3), shame, disgrace, dis-
honour, reproach.
Aili (n. 3), guilt, guilty party.
Aina (n. 3), kind, sort, species,
class.
Ajabu (n. 3), wonder, astonish-
ment.
Ajali (n. 3), fate, destiny, bad
luck, calamity.
Ajili (n. 3), sake, cause, reason.
(Ku)ajiri (v. tr.), to hire, to engage
for payment.
Aka! (iutj.), what next!
(Xu)aka (v. tr.), to build,
-a kale (var. adj.), of old, olden,
ancient.
Akhiri (n. 3), end, latter end.
(Ku)akhiri (v. intr.), to delay, to
remain behind.
(Ku)akbirisha (v. c.), to put off, to
postpone.
Akiba (n. 3), store, provision,
reserve.
Aki(7a (n. 5), officer, captain,
superintendent.
Akili (u. 3), intelligence, wits,
intellect, sense, shrewdness,
-ako (var. poss. adj.), thy, thine,
-akwe (var. poss. adj.), his, her,
hers, its.
Ala (n. 3), sheath, scabbard.
Alama (n. 3), mark, spot, sign,
token.
Alama-alama '(n. redup.), little
spnts.
Kuwa na alama-alama. to be
spotted.
Alasiri (n. 3 & adv.), afternoon
(3 p.m.), in the afternoon.
164
SWAHILl GRAMMAR
Alfajiri (alifajiri) (n. 3 & adv.),
dawn, daybreak, at dawn or
daybreak.
Alfu, alifu (n. 5 & adj.), thousand,
alhamrfu lillahi, praise God,
thank God.
Alhamisi (n. 3 & adv.), Thursday,
(5th day — Jewish reckoning),
on Thursday.
(Ku)alika (v. tr.), to invite, to
call ; (v. intr.), to crack, to
click, to split.
Alufeni (alfeni) (n. & adj.), two
thousand.
Ama (conj.), or, but.
(Ku)ama (v. intr.), to lie on the
chest, to suck.
(Ku)amwa (v. pass.), to be suckled.
(Ku)amwisna (v. c.), to suckle.
Amali (n. 3), trade, occupation,
endeavour.
Amani (n. 3), peace, security,
tranquillity, harmony.
(Ku)amba (v. intr.), to say, to
speak.
Ambari (n. 3), Ambergris.
(Ku)ambata (v. tr.), to stick, to
cleave, to embrace.
(Ku)ambatana (v. rec.), to stick to
each other, to cling together,
to be joined.
(Ku)ambia (v. prepl.), to say to,
to tell, to speak, to inform.
(Ku)anibua (v. tr.), to peel, to re-
move rind or husk, to pare.
(Ku)amini (v. intr.), to believe, to
trust.
(Ku)amka (v. intr.), to awake, to
wake up, to rouse oneself.
(Ku)amkia (v. tr.), to greet, to
salute, to pay respects (in the
morning).
(Ku)amkua (v. tr.), to greet, to
visit, to accost or recognise in
passing.
Amiri (n. 5), commander, officer,
captain, chief.
Amri (u. 3), order, command,
authority, right, power.
(Ku)amirisha (v. c.), to order, to
command.
(Ku)amrn (v. tr.), to order, to
command.
(Ku)amsha (v. tr.), to awaken, to
rouse out of sleep.
Amu (n.), Lamu.
(Ku)amua (v. tr.), to judge a case,
to settle a dispute, to give
judgment.
Ana (n. 3), anna, penny, four pice.
Anasa (n. 3), worldly pleasure.
(Ku)andaa (v. tr.), to prepare tasty
dishes.
(Ku)andama (v. tr.), to accom-
pany, to follow.
Mwezi ukianrfama, at the new
moon (when the next moon
succeeds this).
(Ku)ancfomislia (v. c.), to cause
one to follow another.
(Ku)andika (v. tr.), (1) to lay or
set in O'der, to place on, to
plaster; (2) to write; (3) to
ordain.
(Ku)anga (v. intr.), to count, lo
reckon.
(Ku)angama (v. n.), to be caught
or entangled (in falling).
(Ku)angamia (angamika) (v. n.),
to perish, to be lost.
Anga (n. 5), atmosphere, air,
climate, ether.
(Ku)angaza(nuUo) (v. tr.), to look
up, to fix the eyes, to watch,
to look out, to stare about, to
keep the eyes open.
(Ku)angalia (v. tr.), to look, to
pay attention, to behold, to
observe, to visit.
(Ku)angika (v. tr.), to hang up,
to hang on a peg, to fasten up,
to suspend, to keep in suspense,
to be reckonable.
-angu (var. posg. adj.), my,
mine.
(Ku)angua (v. sub.), to unhook, to
hatch eggs, to take down, to
unfasten.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULAEY
165
(Zu)anguka (v. n.), to fall down,
to drop down.
(Ku)angushia (v. prepl.), to knock
down by means of.
Anuwani (n. 3), address, inscrip-
tion, superscription.
(Ku)anza (v. tr. and iutr.), to
begin, to commence, to start,
to open.
-ao (var. poss. adj.), their, theirs.
(Ku)apa (v. tr. and intr.), to swear,
to take an oath.
(Ku)apisha (v. c.), to adjure, to
administer an oath.
(Ku)apiza (v. c.), to swear at, to
curse.
-a pili (var. num. adj.) (ord.), the
second, the other.
Arazaki (n. prop.), Provider (used
only of God).
(Ku)arifu (v. tr.), to inform (espe-
cially by letter).
Arnbaa (num. adj.), four.
Arubaa<ashara (num. adj.), four-
teen.
Anibaini (num. adj.), forty.
Arujuwani (n. 3), purple.
(Ku)asa (v. c.), (vid. kuatisha).
Asa (conj.), if, supposing (followed
by " ka" tense).
Asali (n. 3), asali ya nyuki, honey ;
asali ya miwa, treacle, cane
syrup.
Asbara (num. adj.), ten.
Asi (n. 5), rebel, apostate.
(Ku)asi (v. tr. and intr.), to rebel,
to be disobedient.
Asikari (n. 3), soldier, policeman.
Asili (n. 3), origin, root source.
Asiye-neno, innocent person.
AsubuM (n. 3), morning, this
morning; (adv.) in the morn ing.
Asubuhi sana (adv.), early in the
morning.
Asubuhi yakwe (adv.), on the fol-
lowing morning.
(Ku)ata (v. tr.), to leave, to leave
off, to cease, to desert, to
abandon.
(Ku)ata burn (v. tr.), to set free,
to release, to let be, to let
alone.
(Ku)atana (v. rec.), to leave mu-
tually (divorce).
(Ku)atisha (kuasa) (v. c.), to wean,
to break off, to make leave
off.
(Ku)atia (v. prepl.), to leave to or
for or with, to commit to.
(Ku)atika huru (v. n.), to be re-
leased or set free.
(Ku)atilia (v. prepl.), to forgive, to
absolve, to pass over.
Ati ! (intj.) I say ! look here ! I
suppose so I
Adhuhuri (n. 3), midday, noon,
12 o'clock in the day.
(Ku)atua (v. tr.), to break, to tear
in two, to rend, to cleave, to
smite.
Au (conj.), or, even.
(Ku)aua (v. tr.), to examine, to
survey, to visit, to search, to
view, to see after.
(Ku)aulia (v. prepl.), to look after
for (some one).
Aula (conj.), or, even.
Auni (n. 3), help, succour.
(Ku)auni (v. tr.), to help, to suc-
cour.
Auteni (n. 7), home (see watani),
habitation.
(Ku)aza (v. intr.), to ponder, to
meditate, to think.
Azima (n. 3), resolve, purpose, in-
tention.
Azima-mbi (n. 3), wicked schemes,
evil devices.
(Ku)azima (v. tr.), to lend, to
borrow.
(Ku)azimia (v. intr.), to intend, to
purpose ; (v. prepl.), to lend to,
to borrow from.
(Ku)azimu (v. intr.), to intend, to
purpose.
Azizi (n. 3), rarity, something dear,
beloved, cherished,
166
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
B
Baa (n. 3), evil, calamity, plague,
nuisance (pi. mabaa).
Baadae (adv.), afterwards, later
on.
Baadae p'unde (adv.), after a little,
presently.
Baada ya (advl. prep), after.
Baadhi (n. 3), a certain number,
some (persons).
Baba (n. 3), father, uncle (see Note
10, Study VIII.).
Baba wa kambo, step father.
Babu (n. 3), grandfather, ancestor.
Bar/alaya (advl. prep.), instead of,
in lieu of.
(Ku)badili (v. tr.), to change, to
alter, to exchange (v. intr.), to
change.
(Ku)badilisha (v. tr.), to transform,
to transfigure, to change.
(Ku)badilika (v. n.), to be changed,
to be altered, to be transformed.
Bado (adv.), not yet, not as yet.
Bado kidogo (adv.), not just yet,
after a bit.
Bafe (n. 5). large snake, adder.
Bafufa (n. 3), fine longcloth, nain-
sook.
(Ku)bagua (v. tr.), to separate, to
classify, to sort out, to choose.
Bahari (n. 3), sea, large lake.
Baharia (n. 5), seaman, sailor.
Bahafi (n. 3),chance, luck, fortune.
Bahasha (n. 3), envelope.
(Ku)bahafisha, to guess, to divine.
Bahili (n. 3), miser, avaricious
person.
(Ku)baini (v. iutr.), to distinguish.
(Ku)bainisha (v. c.), to reveal, to
make manifest.
(Ku)bainika (v. n.), to become
manifest, to be revealed.
(Ku)bainiki (v. tr.), to manifest.
(Ku)baki (v. intr.), to remain over,
to be left.
BakishisM (n. 3), gift, tip, gra-
tuity.
Bakora (n. 3), walking stick.
Bakuli (n. 5), basin, bowl.
Balanga (n. 3), disease that makes
the skin white.
(Ku)baleghe (v. intr.), to reach the
age of puberty.
Bali (conj.), rather but, on the
contrary.
Balozi (n. 5), consul, commissioner.
Bamba (n. 5), thin plate or disc of
iron, tin, etc. ; counsel.
(Ku)bana (v. tr.), to squeeze
(finger).
Banda (n. 5), large shed or hut,
booth tabernacle.
Bandari (n. 3), landing-place,
harbour.
Ban'fia (n. 3), puppet.
Mtoto wa bandia, doll.
(Ku)bandika (v. tr.), to lay or
place or attach a thing; to
put a plaster on.
(Ku)bandua (v. sub.), to chip, to
break off ; to remove a plaster.
Bao (n. 3), game played on a board
with holes.
Bap'a la uso (n. 5), forehead.
(Ku)bapn(izi (v. tr.), to baptize.
Bara (n. 3), interior of a country ;
(adv.), up-country, inland.
Baradhuli (n. 3), rude fellow,
foolish man.
Barafu (n. 3), ice.
Mvua ya barafu, hail.
Baraghumu (n. 3), trumpet, war-
horn.
Baraka (n.3), blessing, prosperity.
Baraza (n. 5), verandah.
Baridi (n. 3), cold, " coolth," cold-
ness, dampness ; a cold.
Mt'u baridi, person of equable
temperament.
Baridi yabisi (n. 3), rheumatism.
(Ktribariki (v. tr.) to bless.
(Ku)barikia (v. prep.), to pray
God to bless ; to knock down to
(auction).
(Zu)barikisha (v. c.), to bless (used
of God oply),
SWAHILI-ENQLISH VOCABULARY
167
(Ku)barikishia (v. prep.), to pro-
nounce blessing (auctioneer) on
thing knocked down to bidder.
Barikisi (n. 3), barracks.
Barua (n. 3), letter, note, bill,
chit.
Barud (n. 3), gunpowder.
(Ku)bashiri (v. intr.), to prophesy,
foretell, announce, publish.
(Ku)basiri (v. intr.), to understand,
to be wise, intelligent.
Basil (intj.), enough, that will
do!
Basi (conj.), then, so, well, there-
fore, now.
Bastola (n. 3), pistol.
Bate (n. 5), duck.
Ba/a mzinga, turkey.
Bad (n. 3), tin.
Batili (n. 3), crime, iniquity, un-
righteousness.
Bawa (n. 5), wing, pinion.
Bawabu (n. 5), door-keeper,
janitor.
Bawasili (n. 3), piles, hemorr-
hoids,
-baya (var. adj.), bad, hurtful,
noxious.
(Ku)beba (v. tr.), to carry a child
on the back in a cloth.
Bega (n. 5), shoulder.
Behewa (n. 3), courtyard, en-
closure, upstairs lobby.
Bai (n. 3), bargain, price.
(Ku)vuno(a bei, to undersell.
(Ku)bembea (v. tr. & intr.), to
swing, to rock.
Bendera (n. 3) (see bindera).
(Ku)jibenua (v. ref.), to lean
upon.
(Ku)benuka (v. neut.), to bend,
bulge out, be crooked, be lean-
ing.
Beramu (n. 3), banner, flag.
Betoto (n. 3), owl.
Biasbara (n. 3), trade.
Bibi (n. 5), lady, mistress, grand-
mother, wife, madam.
Bibiharusi (n. 5), bride.
Biblia (n. 3), Bible.
Bidbaa (n. 3), merchandise, trad-
ing goods.
Bidii (n. 3), enthusiasm, zeal,
diligence, pains, ardour, effort.
Bikira (n. 5), maiden, virgin.
Bila (prep.), without, except by.
BilasM (adv.), without cause,
for nothing, gratuitously, iu
vain.
Bilauri (n. 3), glass, tumbler.
Bin (n. 3) (pi. bani), son.
Binadamu (n. 3), son of Adam,
human being.
Bindera (n. 3), banner, red turkey
twill, flag.
Bindo (n. 5), knot or fold in loin-
cloth, hence pocket or puree.
(Ku)bingiria (v. n.), to roll (of
itself).
(Ku)bingirika (v. n.), to roll, to
roll down, to roll away.
(Ku)bingirisha (v. c.), to take or
roll away, to remove, to roll
along.
Bind (n. 3) (pi. banati), daughter.
(Ku)bisba (v. intr.), to knock at
the door, to announce oneself
at a house by calling " hodi ! "
Bishipu hi. 5), bishop.
Bisikofi (n. 3), biscuit.
-bid (var. adj.), raw, green, un-
ripe, underdone. (01. 4 con-
cord, kiwid).
-bivu (var. adj.), ripe, well-
cooked.
Bizari (n. 3), curry-powder.
Boga (n. 5), pumpkin.
Boma (n. 5), stockade, fence,
fortress, palisade, hedge.
Bomba (n. 5), cylinder, funnel of
steamer, pump, pipe.
(Ku)bompa (v. tr.), to pull down,
demolish, destroy.
Bonde (n. 5), valley.
(Ku)bonyea (v. neut.), to sink in,
to pit, to be soft.
Bop'o (n. 3), gulf, gulley, valley,
deep place.
168
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Bora (inv. adj.), best, noble, great,
important.
Boriti (n. 3), beam, pole, rafter.
Borohoa (n. 5), stew, hotch-potch,
pottage, mashed beans.
(Ku)boromoka (v. neut.),to slide or
slither down, to slip, to glide,
to fall down.
-bovu (var. adj.), rotten, corrupt.
Bua (n. 5), stalk, stem, blade.
Buba (mbuba) (n. 3), the yaws or
framboefcia.
(Ku)bubujika (v. intr.), to bubble
up, to burst forth.
Bubwi (n. 5), dumb person.
BucZi (n. 3), escape.
Sina bndi, I have no escape from :
hence I must.
Buibui (n. 3), spider.
Bukini (n. p.), Madagascar.
Bumbuazi (n. 3), bewilderment,
dumfoundedness, astonish-
ment.
(Ku)bunda (v. tr.), to boat down,
to annihilate.
BunJuki (n. 3), musket, gun.
Buni (n. 3), coffee-berries.
(Ku)buni (v. tr.), to design, to
found, to invent, to originate.
Bunzi (n. 5), hornet.
Bure (adv.), in vain, to no pur-
pose, free, for nothing, gratis.
Buriani (n. 3), leave-taking, part-
ing, reconciliation.
(Ku)burudi, (Ku)burudika (v.
neut), to be relieved of thirst,
to be refreshed.
Buruhani (n. 3), earnest, pledge,
token.
Buruji (n. 3), fortification, castle,
defence, bulwark.
(Ku)buruta (v. tr.), to drag.
Busara (n. 3), prudence, under-
standing, sense, subtlety,
caution, discretion.
Bushuii (n. 3), cloak of camel or
goat's hair (burnoose, blanket).
Bustani (n. 3), garden.
(Ku)busu (v. tr.), to kiss.
(Ku)busiana (v. reo.), to kiss each
other.
Buu (n. 5), worm, maggot.
Buyu (n. 5), fruit of the baobab
tree, calabash.
(Ku)bwaga (v. tr.), to throw down,
to cause to fall, to dump down.
(Ku)bwaga vimba, to murder.
Bwana (n. 5), master, lord, sir,
gentleman.
Bwanahamsi, bridegroom.
Bwana Jesu Masihi, Lord Jesus
Christ.
Bwete (n. 5), small box or desk.
Ch
Cha (var. prep.), of (4th cl. con-
cord).
(Ku)cha (v. intr.), to dawn (see
Kucha).
(Ku)cha (v. tr.), to fear, to be
afraid of.
Chaa (n. 3), tea.
Chaa (n. 4), stable or shed for
cattle.
(Ku)ch'acha (v. intr.), to ferment,
to turn sour.
-chache (var. adj.), few, small,
little.
(Ku)chafulia (v. tr.), to spoil.
(Ku)chafuka (v. neut.), to be
excited, to be hurried.
Ch'aga (n. 7 pi.), barn«, grain-
stores.
Chai (n. 3), tea.
Chaka (n. 4), summer-heat,
drought, desolation.
(Ku)chakarisha (v. intr.), to
flutter.
Chakula (n. 4), (something) to eat,
food, meal, eatable.
Chamba (n. 4) hiding-place, den,
shelter, secret-place for way-
laying.
Chambo (n. 4), bait.
Chandfa (n. 4), finger.
Ohani/a cha gnmba (n, 4), thumb.
SWAHILT-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
169
-changa (var. adj.), young, im-
mature, unripe, embryonic.
Ch'ango (n. 3), intestines, bowels.
(Ku)chanja (v. tr.), to cut, to
prick, to cleave (used of vacci-
nation and of native tattooing),
to split up, to chop (as fire-
wood).
Ghana (n. 4), wooden plate.
Ch'apa (n. 4), stamp, mark.
(Kuipiga cha'pa. to print.
(Ku)checha (v. tr.), to trench (the
soil).
(Ku)chelea (v. prepl.), to be in
fear of.
(Ku)chelewa (v. intr.), to be late.
Chembe (n. 4), arrow-head.
(Ku)chemka (v. intr.), to boil, to
bubble up.
(Ku)chemua (v. intr.), to sneeze.
Chengo (n. 5), halting-place, rest-
ing-place.
Chenza (n. 5), tangerine, orange.
Chep chep ! (intj.), be quick !
look alive !
Cheo (n. 4), measure, degree,
honour, position.
Chetezo (n. 4), cen-er.
(Ku)chewa (v. pass.), to be feared.
Chicha (n. 5), fibrous part of
grated cocoa-nut from which
the " tui " has been squeezed.
Chichi (n. 3), old word for fish.
Chichiri (n. 3), bribe.
Cho (var. rel. part.), which, that,
it.
(Ku)choka (v. intr.), to be tired,
to be weary, to be fatigued.
Chombo (n. ~4), vessel, utensil,
tool.
Ch'onge (n. 3), canine teeth.
Choo (n. 4), lavatory.
(Ku)cfiora (v. tr.), to carve, en-
grave, make deep lines or
marks.
Choyo (n. 4), selfishness, greedi-
ness, churlishness, parsimony.
Cb.ua (chnla) (n. 4), frog.
(Ku)chubuka (v. n.), to be grazed.
Ch'uguu (n. 3), heap, pile (lit.
Ant-hill).
Chuki (n. 4), anger, irritation.
Chumba (n. 4), room, chamber,
bedroom.
Chumbani, in prison, in confine-
ment.
Chumvi (Zanzibar) (n. 3), salt.
(Ku)chuna (Zanzibar) (v. tr.), to
flay, to skin (see kutuna).
Chuagu (n. 4), cooking-pot (earth-
enware), vessel.
Chungwa (n. 5), orange (large).
Ch'ungwa (n. 3), orange (small).
Chunyu (n. 3), brine, gait-crust,
salt desert.
Chuo (n. 4), book.
Mwana wa chuoni, scribe,
scholar.
Chuo cha majina, register, mark-
book.
1)
73afu (n. 5), young cocoanut.
DaftUari (n. 5), account-book,
record.
Dahari (adv.) for ever, evermore.
(Ku)dai (v. tr.), to claim from, sue,
demand from.
(Ku)rfaia (v. prepl.), to plead
(legally).
Daima (adv.), continually, always,
perpetually.
(Ku)daka (v. intr.), to catch,
seize.
Dakika (n. 3), instant, minute,
moment.
Z>akiki (adv.), completely, abso-
lutely.
.Dakifari (n. 3), doctor, physician.
.Dalili (n. 3), sign, token, trace.
7>ama (n. 3), sheet (of a sail).
.Damu (n. 3), blood.
( Kujdandamana (v. n.), to swarm.
(Kui'/angana (v. n.), to be de-
ceived, to be deluded.
(Ku)danganya (v. tr.). to deceive,
170
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
to impose on, to mislead, to
disappoint.
Daraja (n. 3), stairs, steps, stair-
case, bridge.
Uaraja (n. 3), degree, promotion,
preferment, honour, order.
Daraka (n. 3), responsibility.
Kutwaa <?araka, to be respon-
sible.
Zterasa (n. 5), class, lesson, lesson-
hour.
Daxi (n. 3), upper storey, house
top, roof.
7>ariri (n. 3), embroidery.
(Ku)darizi (v. intr.), to embroider,
embellish.
/)arubini (n. C), telescope, bino-
culars.
D&n (n. 3), native boat, dhow,
dug-out.
7>auwa (n. 3), cause, lawsuit, case,
litigation.
D&vra. (n. 3), medicine, remedy,
cure, physic, lawsuit (see
(Jauwa).
(Ku)dawaa (v. intr.), to hesitate,
to be in suspense or doubt, to
be doubtful, to be perplexed.
D&w&ti (n. 3), writing-desk, box,
cash-box.
i'emani (n. 3), period of fair winds,
between S.W.&N.E. monsoons,
about August, cool season.
Dengu (n. 3), lentils.
Deni (n. 3 & 5), debt.
Mr/eni, debtor.
Mwenyi deni, creditor.
JJesturi (dasituri) (n. 3), custom,
habit, customary.
Dliabihu (n. 3), offering, sacrifice.
Dhahabu (n. 3), gold.
Dhaifu (inv. adj.), weak, wretched,
poor, miserable.
Dhambi (n. 3 & 5), sin, crime.
(Ku)dhamini (v. tr.), to give se-
curity for, to be surety or
sponsor for.
Dhamiri (n. 3), conscience, con-
ceptions, thoughts.
(Ku)dharau (v. tr.), to despise.
Dharuba (n. 3), storm, stroke.
Dhihaka (n. 3), derision, scornful
laughter, ridicule.
(Ku)dnihaki (v. tr.), to deride, to
mock, to ridicule.
(Ku)dhii (v. iutr.), to waste or
pine away, to be in distress.
Dhiki (n. 3), t traits, perplexity,
trouble, distress.
(Ku)dhikika (v. n.), to be troubled,
perplexed, tormented.
(Ku)dhili (v. tr.),to despise, set at
nought, abase, belittle.
Dhiraa (n. 3), cubit, arm, half-
yard (nearly).
(Ku)dhoofika (v. intr.), to become
weak or faint.
Dhuli (n. 3), misery, wretchedness.
(Ku)dhuru (v. tr.), to hurt, injure ;
(v. intr.), to matter.
Haidhuru, nevermind, it does not
matter.
ilia (n. 3), compensation, reward,
revenge, amends, blood-money.
Dibaji (n. 3), preface.
/>ini (n. 3), religion.
Dira (n. 3), mariner's compass.
(Ku)dira (v. tr.), to cut, shear.
Dirii (n. 3), metal shield, buckler.
(Ku)diriki (v. intr.), to spare time,
keep an engagement ; (v. tr.),
to meet, await.
Dirisha (n. 5), window.
Divei (fr. duvin) (n. 3), wine.
Dobi (u. 5), washerman.
-dogo (var. adj.), small, little.
Dodoki (n. 5), loofah gourd, fruit
of climbing plant which makes
the " loofah."
Donda (n. ft), large sore.
(n. 5),
morsel.
Donge (n. 5), clot, lump, cake, bit,
Dod (n. 3), eight hands (of cloth),
nearly four yards.
.Dua (n. 3), prayer, intercession,
petition.
Jtaara (n. 3), windlass, crane (see
duwara).
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
171
Dude (n. b), thing, what-is-tbe-
namo.
7>uka (n. 5), shop.
(Ka)<7umu (v. intr.), to continue,
persevere, abide.
(Ku)dunga (v. tr.), to prick,
pie ice.
Uungu (n. 3), watch-housa, watch-
tower, plantation - watchers
shelter, against wild beasts.
l>ua.i (inv. adj.), mean, paltry,
trifling, worthless, despicable.
JJunia (n. 3), earth, world.
7)ura (u. 3), talking parrot.
7>utu (n. 5), substance, shape.
7>uwara (n. 3), wheel, trane,
windlass, globe ; (adj ), round.
E
-e (var. poss. suf.) (shortened form
of -akwe), his, her, its.
Ee! (iutj.), oh!
Ee wallah ! (intj.), yes (by God) !
all right.
(Ku)egesha (v. tr.), to land, bring
to land (a boat).
Ehe ! (intj.), what ! what then ?
-ekundu (var. adj.), red, crimson,
scarlet.
Ela (conj.), but, except, that
(slightly adversative).
(Ku)elea (v. tr.), to be clear or
plain, to enlighten ; (v. intr.),
to float.
Yanelea, that is clear to me.
(Ku)elewa ni..., to understand all
about...
(Ku)eleza (v c.), to explain to, to
make clear or plain to.
(Ku)eleka (v. tr.), to carry.
Elfu (num. adj.) (see Alfu),
thousand.
Elhasili (adv.), ultimately, finally,
-ema (var. adj.), good.
Ema (n. 5), large wicker basket or
trap for catching fish.
-embamba (var. adj.), narrow.
Embe (n. 5), mango (Embe dodo,
large mango).
(Ku)enda or (Kw)enenda (v. intr.),
to go, proceed, set out, walk.
Amekwenda itwa, (some one) has
gone to call him.
Enda zako! (see Note 2, Study
XIX.), go thy way.
(Kw)endea (v. prepl.), to go to, or
for, or towards.
(Kw)endelea (v. prepl.), to go on,
make progress, continue.
(Kw)endeleza (v. tr.), to spell ;
(v. c.), to cause to continue, to
make to last on.
(Kw)endesha (v. c.), to make to go,
drive, guide.
(Ku)eneai (v. intr.), to spread,
penetrate, permeate.
(Ku)eneza (v. c.), to spread over,
cover, distribute.
(Ku)enga-enga (v. intr.), to falter,
mind carefully.
-engine (var. adj.), other, another,
-enu (var. poss. adj.), your, yours,
-enyi (var. prep, or pro.), having,
possessing, owning ; Mwana
wa kuomba, prayed-tbr child;
Mwana mwenyi kuomba, pray-
ing child.
Enywi (voc. pro.), ye, you.
Enzi (n. 3), majesty, power,
sovereignty, dominion, rule,
authority.
(Ku)e'pa (v. intr.), to turn back,
duck, draw back, double,
-epasi (var. adj.), light, slight,
easy, thin, quick, versatile.
Kwa wepesi, quickly, speedily.
(Ku)epua (v. tr.), to remove,
withdraw, turn away, put
nway, take away.
(Ku)epuka (v. tr.), to avoid, shun,
be far from, go away from.
(Ku)epukana na (v. n.), to be
separated from.
(Ku)epusha (v. c.), to put or thrust
away.
172
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
-erevu (var. adj.), cunning, clever,
etc., subtle, shrewd.
(Ku)erevuka (v. n.), to become
cuuning, clever, etc.
eshe (contd. form of aishe), that
he may finish.
-etu (var. poss. pro.), our, ours,
-eupe (var. adj.), white, light,
bright, clear, clean, guileless.
-eusi (var. adj.), black, dark,
dingy.
Ewa ! (intj.), abbreviated form of
Ee wallah 1
Ewe! (intj.), O! holloa! hi!
F
(Ku)fa (v. intr.), to die, perish ;
(Ku)fiwa (v. pass.), to be be-
reaved.
(Ku)fia (v. prepl.), to die to or
for.
(Ku)fa ganzi (v. iutr.), to go to
sleep (of a limb), be callous, be
seized with cramp, be dis-
tracted with grief.
(Ku)faa (v. tr. & intr.), to suit, do,
become, benefit, succeed.
(Ku)fadhili (v. tr.), to show favour
to.
Fadhili (u. 3), favour, kindness,
condescension, grace.
(Ku)fafanua (v. tr.), to see clearly,
discern, report, distinguish
consider.
Fahali (n. 5), bull, male of
animals, warrior.
(Ku)fahanm (v. intr.), to under-
stand ; (v. tr.), to remember,
consider. The final " u " often
disappears, as in (pi. imp.)
" Fahamni."
Fahamu (n. 3), mind, intellect,
memory, intelligence.
Faharasa (n. 3), index.
Faif/a (n. 3), profit, gain, advan-
tage,
i(fi. (v. tr.), to be profitable
to.
Fakhari (n. 3), glory, excel-
lence.
(Ku)fana (v. n.), to be successful,
to succeed.
(Ku)fanana na (v. recip.), to
resemble, to be like.
(Ku)fananisha (v. c.), to draw a
similitude from.
(Ku)fanidisha (v. tr), to compare,
liken, make alike.
(Ku)fanikiwa (v. intr.), to succeed,
prosper.
Fanusi (n. 3), lantern.
(Ku)fanya (v. tr.), to make, do,
perform, act towards (un-
favourably).
(Ku)fanywa (v. pass), to be made.
(Kujjifanya (v. ref.), to pretend to
be, make oneself out to be.
(Ku)fanya baridi (v. intr.), to
become mildewed.
(Ku)fanya birfii (v. intr.), to take
pains, make an effort, exert
oneself.
(Ku)fanya khofu (v. intr.), to be
afraid, fear.
(Ku)fanyia (v. prep.), to deal
with, act towards (favourably).
(Ku)fanyika (v. n.), to be well
made, to be " doable," be
feasible.
(Ku)fanyiza (v. c.), to repair.
Faradhi (n. 3), everyday food.
Faragha (n. 3), leisure, privacy.
Faraja (n. 3), comfort, rest.
Farasi (frasi) (n. 3), horse.
Farasila (n. 3), thirty-six pounds
(36 Ibs.).
(Ku)fariji (n. tr.), to comfort, con-
sole.
(Ku)farikana (v. rec.), to be sepa-
rated, alienated.
(Ku)fariki (v. intr.), to die, de-
cease.
Fasaha (inv. adj.), clean, pure,
correct.
(Ku)fasiri (v. tr.), to translate,
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
173
(Zu)fatahi (v. tr.), to open.
Fatashi (n. 3), opener, provider,
supplier.
(Zu)faulu (v. intr.), to tack (in
sailing).
(Zu)fazaika (v. iutr.), to be
troubled, be worried, dismayed.
Fedha (n. 3), silver, money.
Fedheha (n. 3), confusion, dis-
honour, shame.
(Zu)fedhehe (vr. tr.), to shame,
ridicule.
(Zu)fedheheki (v. n.), to be put
to shame, ridiculed.
Feeli (n. 3), wonder, sign, omen.
Fereji (Feleji) (n. 3), drain, rain-
pipe, channel, stream.
(Ka)fia (v, prepl.), to die to or
for.
(Zu)fidi (v. tr.), to redeem, ransom.
FL/ia (n. 3), ransom, compensa-
tion, blood-money.
(Zu)fifia (v. n.), to fall, disappear,
fade away, be faint.
(Zu)fifiliza (v. tr.), to cheat, em-
bezzle.
(Ku)filia (v. prepl ), to die to or
for.
(Ku)filiwa (v. pass.), to be be-
reaved (see Fiwa).
Figo (n. 3), kidneys, reins.
Figili (n. 3), species of large
radish.
Fiili (n. 3), doing, deed, action.
(K'i)fika (v. intr.), to arrive,
attain, reach,
(Ka)fikia (v. prepl.), to come up
to, attain to.
Tunafikiliwa ni ageni, a guest
lias come io us.
(Kuifikilia (the same as Fikia).
(Zu)fikiliza (v. c.), to fulfil, cause
to arrive.
Fikira (v. 3), thoughts, reflections,
understanding, consideration.
(Zu)fikicha (v. tr.), to rub between
the fingers.
(Zu)fikiri (v. intr.), to consider,
reflect, think over.
(Zu)filisi (v. tr.), to bid at auction ;
Filisi k'ubwa, highest bid.
(Zu)filisiwa (v. pass.), to have
one's goods distrained, be
bankrupt.
Fimbo (n. 3), rod, stick.
(Zu)finanga (v. tr.), to form,
fashion, frame.
(Ku)flnika (v. tr.), to cover.
(Zu)finikiza (v. c.), to cover by
inverting.
(Ku)finya (v. tr.), to pinch.
Fira (fia) (n. 3), venomous snake,
adder.
Firigisi (n. 3), gizzard.
(Zu)fisha (v. c.), to cause to arrive,
cause to die, slay.
Fisi (n. 5), hyaena.
(Zu)fisidi (v. intr.), to become
corrupt or vile.
(Zu)fi<a (v. tr.), to hide, conceal.
secrete.
(Zu)fitamana (v. n.),to be hidden,
concealed.
(Zu)jiMa (v. prepl.), to hide,
conceal from.
Fl^ina (n. 3), conspiracy, treach-
ery, calumny, disloyalty, in-
trigue.
Fito (n. 5), slender sticks or poles
used in building.
Fiwi (n. 3), bean.
Forodha (n. 3), custom-house.
Foromashi (n. 5), wooden box with
partitions, cash-box (made of
teak).
(Kn)fua (v. tr.), to beat (clothes
(in washing), forge (iron, etc.).
Zufua maji, to bale out water.
Mfua chuina. a smith.
(Ku)fuasa (v. c.), to teek out,
reproduce, copy a design.
(Ku)fuata (v. tr.), to follow, suc-
ceed, accompany.
(Ku)faataaa (v. rec.), to follow
each other, go in file.
(Ku)fufuka (v. n,), to rise from
the dead.
(Zu)fofuliwani, resurrection.
SWAH1LI GRAMMAR
(Ka)fuga (v. tr.), to keep or rear
animals.
Fujo (n. 5), confusion, muddle,
disorder, tumult.
(Ku)fuka (moshi), (v. intr.), to
smoke, fume, throw off (as
heat).
Fukara (n. 5), poor man, beggar.
(Ku)fukia (v. tr.),to fill up (hole),
hide (in a hole).
(Ku)fukiza (v. c.), to fumigate,
perfume (uvumba).
(Ku)fukua (v. tr.), to dig (a small
hole).
(Ku)fukuza (v. tr.), to drive
away.
Fulana (n. 3), vest, flannel.
Fulani (n. 3), some one, so and
so, a certain person ; (inv. adj.)
such and such (a thing).
Falifuli (adv.), in crowds, helter
skelter.
(Ku)fulia (v. intr.), to hasten on
with.
(Ku)fulia (v. prepl.), to beat on
(as waves or wind), rise up
against.
(Ku)fuliwa ni, to be choked by.
(Ku)fuliza (v. c.), to make go on
without stopping, persevere.
(Ku)fama (v. 1r.), to hit, shoot,
wound ; weave, sew.
(Ku)fumba (v. tr.), to close, stop,
shut, hide.
(Ku)fumbana (v. n.), to be closed,
be hidden.
(Ku)fumbata (v. tr.), to grasp.
Amefumbata mkono, he has
closed his fist.
Fumbi (n. 5), ravine, gorge, nul-
lah ; torrent that runs through
a gorge.
(Ku)fumbika (v. n.),to be hidden
Fumbo (n. 5), parable, allegory.
(Ku)fumbua (v. sub.), to open,
unclose.
Fumo (n. 5), spear, dart, lance.
(Ku)fumua (v. sub.), to uusew,
unpick, undo ; to dismiss.
(Ku)fumukana (v. n.), to come to
an end, be separated, be broken
up, scattered.
(Ku)funda-funda (v. red.), to dash
in pieces.
Fundi (n. 5), skilled workman,
expert smith, mechanic,artisan.
(Ku)fundikiza (v. tr.), to lay up
money.
(Ku)fundisha (v. c.), to teach,
instruct.
Fundo (n. 5), knot, purse (formed
by knot ia loincloth), pocket.
Fundo la guu, ankle.
(Ku)funga (v. tr.), to tie, shut,
fasten, bind, gird, attach, im-
prison, fast.
Kufunga shariani, to bind in law,
i.e. to condemn.
(Kn)jifunga (v. ref.), to bind one-
self (by promise or contract).
(For other derivatives of the
verb, see Study XVII.).
(Ku)funga-funga, (v. red.), to tie
in places.
(Ku)fungiza (v. c.), to besiege.
Fungo (n. 3), civet cat.
Ftmgu (n. 5), portion, part ; sand-
bank, shoal.
(Ku)fungua (v. sub.), to open,
Tindo, untie, unfasten.
Fano (a. 3), antelope (small).
(Ku)funua (v. sub.), to uncover,
disclose, reveal.
Fanza (n. 3), maggot, jigger.
(Ku)funza (v. tr.), to teach, im-
part knowledge to.
(Ku)jifunza (v. ref), to teach one-
self, ht:nce to learn.
-fupi (var. adj.), short, brief.
(Ku)fupiza (v. c.), to shorten.
(Ku)fura (v. intr.), to swell, bo
puffed up.
Furaha (n. 3), joy, gladness,
pleasure.
(Ku)furahi (v. intr.), to rejoice, be
glad, be pleased.
(Ku)furika (v. n.), to boil over,
overflow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
175
Furukani (n. 3), sacred books
(Muhammedan).
(Ku)futa (v. tr.), to wipe, cancel,
obliterate, blot out ; futa uvu-
mbi, to dust.
(Ku)futa (v. tr.), to draw out (as a
sword, etc.).
Futi (n. 3), foot (measure).
(Ku)futika (v. n.), to be eradicable,
be cancelled.
(Ku)futuka (v. n.), to molt
(feathers, hair).
Futuri (n. 3), span.
Fuforu (n. 3), first meal after
great fast, breakfast.
(Ku)fuza (v. intr.), to progress,
advance, go further (see fuliza).
(Ku)fyagia (v. tr.), to sweep.
(Ku)fyolea (v. tr.), to abuse, insult.
(Ku)fyonya (v. intr.), to mock,
make a mocking noise.
(Ku)fyua (v. tr.), to snap or break
off.
(Ku)fyuka (v. n.), to snap, go off.
Fyuko (n. 5), trap, gin (made with
a stick and cord).
(Ku)gaagaa (v. intr.), to wriggle.
roll, move to and fro, lie about
on the floor.
Gae (n. 5), potsherd.
Galawa (n. 5), canoe (see nga-
rawa).
Ganda (n. 5), rind, peel, skin,
husk, bark.
(Ku)ganda (v. intr.), to congeal,
curdle, freeze.
(Ku)gandamana (v. rec.), to stick
together, cleave, adhere.
Gando (n. 5), claw (of crab, etc.).
(Kn)ganga (v. tr.), to treat medi-
cally, apply medicine.
Ganil (inv. inter, adj.), what
sort? what? which?
Ganjo (n. 5), ruin, desolation.
(Ku)ganza-ganza (v. iiitr.), to va-
cillate, waver, prevaricate,hesi-
tate, slip.
Gari (n. 3 & 5), cart, carriage,
train, trolley, waggon.
Gari ya moshi, train (lit. carriage
of smoke).
Garufuu (n. 3), clove.
(Ku)gawa (v. tr.), to divide up,
distribute, part.
(Zu)gawanya (v. c.),to go shares ;
(v. tr.), to divide.
(Ku)gema (v. tr.), to tap cocoa-
nut trees for palm-wine.
Genge (n. 5), steep place, preci-
pice, cliff, rock.
Gereza (n. 3), prison (from Portu-
guese " Ecclesia ").
(Ku)geuka (v. n.), to turn round,
alter, change.
(Ku)geuza (v. c.), to change, alter,
translate.
Ghadhabu (n. 3), anger, wrath.
(Ku)ghadhibika (v. n.), to be
angry, be indignant.
Ghafi (inv. adj.), gross (weight).
(Ku)ghafilika (v. n.), to be in a
hurry, make haste, be pressed
for time.
Ghafula (adv.), suddenly, ab-
ruptly, hastily.
Ghala (n. 5), store, store-room.
Ghalibu (n. 3), native home,
ghalibu (adv.), probably, most
likely, commonly.
Ghamu (n. 3), apprehension, sad-
ness, grief.
Ghanima (n. 3), abundance,
plenty, good fortune.
Gharama (n. 3), expenses, costs,
value, woith.
Gharika (n. 3), flood.
(Ku)ghariki (v. n.), to bo sub-
merged, be immersed ; to IHJ
wrecked.
(Ku)gharikisha (v. c.), to over-
flow, overwhelm, flood.
Ghasia (n. 3), tumult, confusion,
hurry, noise, throng.
Ghorofa (n. 3) (see orofa).
176
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ghubari (n. 5), rain-cloud.
Ghufira (n. 3), pardon, forgive-
ness.
Ghururi (n. 3), vanity.
Gtodoro (n. 5), mattress, padded
quilt, rug.
Gofu (n. 5), ruin, desolate place.
Gogo (n. 5), log of wood.
Goma (n. 5), big drum.
(Kuteombana (v. rec.), to quarrel.
(Ku)gombeza (v. tr.), to scold,
reprimand.
(Ku)gonga (v. tr.), to knock, beat.
-gonjwa (var. adj.), sick, ill.
Gonyezi (n. 3), languor.
Gora (n. 3), piece of cloth.
(Ku)gota (v. intr.), to knock, beat.
Goti (n. 5), knee.
Goya (u. 5), elegant gait.
Gudulia (n. 5),istone water-bottle
(porous).
Gumegume (n. 3), llint.
-gumu (var. adj.), hard, difficult,
tough.
(Ku)guna (v. intr.), to groan,
grumble, sigh.
Guiiia (n. 5), sack, sacking, bag.
(Ku)gura (v. intr.), to move (from
one place to another), change
one's abode.
Gurudumo (n. 5), wheel.
(Ku)gusa (v. tr.), to touch.
(Ku)gut'uka (v. intr.), to start,
jump, move suddenly,
(ku)gut'usha (v. c.), to startle.
Guu (n. 5), foot, leg.
Gwaride (n. 3), marching, drill.
(Ku)gwia (v. tr.), to lay hold of,
catch, seize, grasp.
H
Ha- (contrn. of Kika) (see speci-
men verb, Study II.). Nika-
nka-k'a-ha.
Ha- (Neg. pref. 3rd p. sing.).
Haba (inv. adj.), few, little, small;
(n. 3), a little.
Haba ya kitu, a mere nothing.
Habari (n. 3), news, tidings,
story, information, history.
Hadaa (n. 3), guile, deception,
cunning.
Hadhari (n. 3), caution, warning.
Harfi (n. 3), limit, restriction,
measure.
Haditbi (n. 3), story, tale, fable,
anecdote, fiction.
Hafifu (inv. adj.), light, flimsy,
light-minded.
Hai (inv. adj.), alive, living.
Haiba (n. 3), beauty, glory.
Haina budi, Doubtless . . .
Hai/asa (followed by inf. of verb),
it has not yet . . .
Haja (n. 3), want, desire, request.
Haji (n. 5), person who has done
the " Haj " or pilgrimage to
Mecca.
(Ku)hajir (v. tr.), to emigrate ;
(v. tr.) to banish.
Haki (n. 3), right, righteousness,
justice, truth.
Hakika (n. 3), proof, certainty.
(Ku)hakikisha (v. c.), to test, try,
prove.
Hakimu (n. 5), judge, governor
(also used for doctor).
Hako, he (or she) is not here (or
there).
Halafu (adv.), afterwards, pre-
sently, by and by.
Halali (inv. adj.), lawful, per-
missible, licit, legitimate.
Hali (n. 3), state, condition.
Halimu (inv. adj.), affable, mild.
(Ku)halifu (khalifu) (v. tr. and
intr.), to commit a crime,
transgress, rebel, swerve from
right course of action.
Halisi (adv.) (see adverbs, Study
XIX.), precisely, exactly.
Hali-uudi (n. 3), perfumed oint-
ment.
Halua (n. 3), a sweetmeat.
Hamadi (n. 3), possession.
Hamali (n. 5), a porter, a coolie.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
177
Hamu (n. 3), sorrow, grief, woe.
Hamuna (ham'na), there is not in
it,
Hanamu (kwa) (adv. man.), diago-
nally, obliquely.
Handaki (n. b), ditch, trench.
(Ku)hangaika (v. n.), to be eager,
be enthusiastic, be assiduous,
be energetic.
Hapa (adv.), here, in this place,
on this spot.
Hapana, Haknna, there is (or
are) not.
Hapana bu<7i, no doubt, doubt-
less.
Hapo (adv.), then, there.
Hapo kale (adv.), long ago, once
upon a time, of old.
(Ku)hara (v. intr.), to have diar-
rhoea.
Harabu (n. 3), injuriousness,
liarin, hurt.
Haraka (adv.), quickly, hastily,
in haste.
Haramu (adv.), illicit, unlawful,
forbidden.
Haram (n. 3), courts of temple
(Mecca).
Harara (n. 3), heat, impetuosity,
fervour.
Hari (n. 3), heat, perspiration,
prickly heat, fierceness.
(Ku)haribu (v. tr.), to spoil, de-
stroy.
(Ku)aaribika (v. n.), to be spoiled
or destroyed.
Hariri (n. 3), silk.
(Ku)b,arisb.a (v. tr.), to relax, act
as an aperient.
Harufu (n. 3), letter (of alphabet),
character.
Harufu (n. 3), smell, odour,
perfume.
Harusi (n. 3), marriage, wedding.
Hasa (adv.), especially, strictly
speaking, particularly.
Hasai (n. v.), eunuch.
Hasara (n. 3), loss, damage,
injury.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Hasha ! (adv., strongly negative),
not at all ! God forbid !
(Ku)hasibu (v. tr.), to couut, cal-
culate, number.
(Ku)hasibika (v. n.), to be calcul-
able, swerve from right course
of action.
HasWi (n. 3), envy.
Hasira (n. 3), anger, wrath.
(Ku)hasiri (v. intr.), to suffer loss,
lose, be out of pocket.
Hate (prep.), until, till, as far as,
to; (conj.) even, so that, and.
Hate kidogo, not even a little.
Hate sasa, even now. up till now.
Hateri (n. 3), danger, risk.
Ha<i (n. 3), handwriting, docu-
ment.
Hatima (adv.), in the end, finally.
(Ku)nadrisha (v. c.), to take risk,
endanger, jeopardize.
Hatua (n. 3), footsteps, footprints.
Hawa (n. 3), (1) air, climate ; (2)
Eve; (dem. adj.), these (first
class).
Hawezi, he (or she) is ill, sick,
(see Mote 2, Study III.).
Haya (n. 3), sense of shame,
modesty, respect.
Haya, (1) (intrj.), come along !
come ! (2) (dem. adj.), these
(fifth class).
Hayawani (n. 3) brute beast,
beast, cattle.
Hazama (n. 3), nose-ring.
Hazina (n. 3), treasure.
Hebu ! (intrj.), just look !
Hema (khema) (n. 3), tent.
Heri (kheri) (1) (n. 3), happiness ;
(2) (inv. adj.), well, better.
Hesi (n. 3), screw.
Hi-, contracted prefix, from niki-
(Niki = nki = k'i = M).
Hi'/aashara (num. adj.), eleven.
HiiVaya (n. 3), present, gift.
Hifathi (n. 3), protection, security.
(Ku)bifatbi, to protect, preserve,
deliver.
Hii (dem. adj.), this (third class).
M
178
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Hija (n. 3), pilgrimage.
Hiki (dem. adj.), this (fourth
class).
Hikima (a. 3), wisdom, clever-
ness.
Hila (n. 3), cunning, craftiness,
cheating, guile.
Hili (dem. adj), this (fifth class).
(Ku)jihiliki (v. ref.), to ruin one's
self.
Hima (adv.), quickly, hastily.
(Ku)himidi (v. tr.), to praise.
(Ku)himili (v. tr.), to carry, en-
dure, support, uphold, sustain.
(Ku)himilika (v. n.), to be bear-
able, be tolerable.
(Ku)himiza (v. tr.), to hasten.
Hirimu (n. H), youth, young man.
Hirizi (n. 3), charm, talisman.
Hisabu (n. 3), sum, calculation,
amount.
Kwa hlsabu ya, according to.
(Ku)Msal)u (see ' ' hasibu "), ( v. tr.),
to number, reckon.
(Ku)hitaji (v. tr.), to need, want,
desire.
(Ku)hitimu (v. intr.), to finish
one's education.
Hivi (1) (adv.), thus, so; (2)
(dem. adj.), these (fourth
class).
Hivi sasa (adv.), just now, this
minute.
Hiryo (1) (adv.), in this manner ;
(2) mem. adj.), these same.
Hiyari (khitiari), (n. 3), choice,
pleasure.
Hiyari yako, as you please.
Ko)hizi (v. tr.), to disgrace, put
to shame, dishonour.
Ho'Zari(inv. adj.), strong, efficient,
capable, able.
Horfi, word used to announce
arrival at a door, equivalent in
English to " may I come in."
Homa (n. 3), fever, ague.
Hori (n. 3), small dug-out canoe,
hollow wooden tray, bay, sound,
creek, a calm,
Howe ! there then 1 (hunter's
cry).
Hu- (contr. of niku) (niku = nku
= k'u = hu).
Hua (n. 3), dove.
Huba (n. 5), love, fondness.
(Ku)hubiri (v. tr. & intr.), to
preach, proclaim, inform.
(Ku)hudhuria (v. intr.), to appear,
stand.
(Ku)hudhurishwa (v. c. pass.), to
be made to meet.
(Ku)hui (v. tr.), to bring to life.
(Ku)huika (v. n.), to conic to life,
live.
(Ku)huisha (v. c.), to give life to,
quicken.
Huja (n. 3), reasoning, objection,
doubt, concern, reason, cause.
(Ku)hujiana (v. c.), to have dial-
ings with.
Huko (adv.), there, over there.
Huku (adv.), here, in this direc-
tion.
Hukumu (n. 3), judgment,
sentence, verdict, authority,
ordinance, rule.
(Ku)hukumu (v. tr.), to condemn,
sentence, judge.
(Ku)hulu (v. intr.), to succeed.
(Kujhuluku (v. tr.), to create.
Homo (adv.), therein, in there.
Humu (adv.), herein, in here.
Hum (adj.), free (mahura is the
only plural).
Huruma (n. 3), compassion, pity,
mercy.
(Ku)hurtunia (v. prepl.), to take
pity on, have compassion on.
(Ku)lmsika (v. intr.), to be im-
portant, be fitting, be proper,
be incumbent.
(Ku)husu (v. intr.), to be related
to.
(Ku)hus'ir7u (v. tr.), to envy.
Huyu (dem. adj.), this (one or
person).
Huzuni (n. 3), grief, sorrow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
179
(Ku)iba (v. tr.), to steal, pilfer.
Iba//a (n. 3), worship, service,
adoration.
Ibilisi (n. 3), devil, tlie accuser.
Id&di (n. 3), number, amount,
complement.
L/i (n. 3), feast, festival.
I'/ili (n. 3), manners, good be-
haviour.
(Ku)ifya (v. tr.). to tantalize, put
into bad humour.
(Ku)igiza (v. tr.), to imitate, copy.
Ihisani (n. 3), goodness, kindness,
mercy.
li (la k'uku) (n. .">), egg (fowl's).
lilani (n. 3), proclamation, public
notice.
Ijara (n. 3), wages, salary, pay,
reward.
Ijumaa (n. 3), week, in a week,
Friday.
Ikibali, acceptance, answer (to
prayer).
(Ku)ikiza (v. c.), to lay across,
place over.
Ila (n. 3), defect, blemish,
nimu (n. 3), doctrine, teaching,
study.
Ilia (prep.), but, except.
Illi (conj.), in order that.
Imamu (n. 5), Muhammedan
priest.
Imani (n. 3), faith, belief, creed,
trust, goodness.
Imara (inv. adj.) (also noun),
strong, firm, solid, tough, dur-
able.
(Ku)tia imara (v. tr.), to confirm,
strengthen.
(Ku)imba (v. tr. & intr.), to sing
(Kwimba).
(Ku)imbiana (v. tr.), to sing
antiphonally.
(Ku)inama (v. intr.), to stoop
down, bow, bend.
(Ku)inamia (v. prepl.), to bow
down to, worship.
(Ka)inamisha (v. c.), to bow or
bend down, lower.
(Zu)inga (v. tr.), to scare, drive
away.
Ini (n. 5), liver.
(Ku)inika (v. tr.), to put down,
strike down, lay or cast or
pour down, bow down.
Injili (n. 3), Gospel.
Inshallab., God willing, please
God, D.V.
(Ku)inua (v. tr.), to lift up,
elevate, raise.
(Ku)inuka (v. n.), to arise, get up
(after stooping or lying), rise.
Ipu (n. 5), boil, tumour.
Ipu tnngu (n. 5), malignant boil.
(Ku)isha (Kwisha) (v. tr. & intr.),
to finish, complete, terminate.
(Ku)ishia (v. prepl.), to finish off
or at.
Ishara (n. 3), sign, omen, wonder,
miracle.
(Ku)isbi (v. intr.), to live, endure,
last.
Ishirim (num. adj.), twenty.
Islam (n. 3), Muhammedanism,
Islam.
(Zu)ita (v. tr.), to call, invite,
summon.
Ithimu (n. 3), guilt, guiltiness.
(Zu)itika or (Zu)itiMa (v. tr. &
prepl), to respond to a call.
(Ku)iva (v. intr.), to ripen, come
to a head (boil, etc.), be fully
developed, be well cooked.
Ivu (n. 5), cinder, ember, ashes.
(Zuji)ivya (v. ref.), to attempt
something in which one is not
likely to succeed.
Ja (adj.), like, similar to, as.
(Ku)ja (v. intr.), to come,
-ja- (verb, inf.), not yet.
Jaa (n. 5), rubbish-heap, dung-
heap, ruination.
180
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)jaa (v. intr.), to be full;
Kujawa ni, to be filled with ;
Xujazwa ni, to be filled up
with . . . by.
(Ku)jaali (Kujali) (v. tr.), to
enable, prosper, appoint, grant,
ordain.
Jabali (n. 5), rook, rocky moun-
tain (cf. Gibraltar, i.e. Jabal-
el-Tir).
Jabari (n. 5), potentate, mighty
one.
(Kuljadiliana (v. intr.), to argue,
dispute, contradict, question.
Jana (n. 3), glory, power, majesty.
Jahazi (n. 5), vessel, craft,
dhow.
Jahanam (n. 3), Gehenna, hell.
Jamaa (n. 3), relative, family,
society.
Jamala (n. 3), obliging act.
Jamanda (n. 5), covered basket.
Jambia (n. 5), dagger.
Jambo (n. 5), matter, affair, thing.
Jambo ! a greeting.
Jamil (n. 3), company, assembly,
community.
Jamu'/ari (n. 5), corporal.
Jamvi (u. 5), large coarse mat.
Jana (n. 6), big hulking lad.
Jana (n. & adv.), yesterday.
Jana (n. 5), larva of insect.
Jani (n. 5), leaf, grass, herb.
Janzi (n. 3), paralysis, cramp.
-japo- (verb inf.), even if, al-
though, under such circum-
stances (see -ngawa).
Jaraha (n. 5), wound, sore.
Jaribu (n. 5), test, trial, tempta-
tion (plur. prefl.).
(Ku)jaribu (v. tr. & intr.), to try,
attempt, tempt, test.
Jarife (Jarifa) (n. f>), large fishing-
net.
Jasho (n. 5), heat, perspiration,
sweat.
Jasi (n. 5), ear-ornament.
Jauri (Jeuri) (n. 3), violent deal-
ing, oppression, insult.
Jawabu (n. 5), answer, matter,
affair.
(Ku)jaza (v. tr.), to fill.
((Ku)jazi (v. tr.), to grant, accord
a favour to.
-je ? (inter, suf.). How ? Wlial ?
Jee ? (inter, part.). How now ?
What?
Jembe (n. 5), hoe, spade, plough.
Jeneza (n. 5), bier.
(Ku)jenga (v. tr.), to build, con-
struct.
(Zu)jengekana (v. n.), to bo built
up, be erected, be established,
be buildable.
Jengo (n. 5), building.
(Kn)jetea (v. intr.), to rely on, have
confidence in, depend on.
-ji- (ref. inf.), self.
(ZtL)jibu (v. tr.), to answer, reply ;
pass ((Ku)jibiwa.
Jibwa (n. ;">), dog, bitch.
Jiko (pi. meko) (n. 5), fireplace,
hence kitchen.
Jimbi (n. 5), cock, " chanticleer."
Jimbi likiwika, cockcrow.
Jimbo (n. 5). region, district,
suburb, field.
Jina (n. 5), name.
Jinamizi, oppressive fooling
caused by night-mare, or by a
place which gives a creepy
sensation.
Jino (pi. meno) (n. 5), tooth.
Jinsi (n. 3), sort, kind, species.
Jinsi...vyo (adv.), as, so.
Jinsi gani? What sort? What
do you mean ?
Jiografia, geography.
Jioni (n. 3), evening, dusk ; (adv.),
in the evening.
Jirani (n. 3), neighbour.
(Ku)jitahirfi (v. intr.), to exert
oneself, take pains.
Jitihadi (n. 3), diligence, effort,
pains, endeavour.
Ji/o (pi. ma/o). (n. 5), eye ; Jito la
gnu, ankle ; Jito la maji, source,
spring of water, fountain.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
181
Jit'u (n. 6), worthless fellow,
vagabond.
Jiwe (u. 5) (pi. mawe),, stone, rock.
Jizila (n. 3), dry goods measure,
60 p'ishi.
Jogoi (n. 5), cock, chanticleer (see
Jimbi).
Johari (n. 5), jewel.
Joho (u. 5), great-coat, overcoat.
Joka (n. 5), large serpent, monster.
Jombo (u. 6), big, crumsy vessel.
(Ku)jongea (v. intr.), to move near
to, approach.
Jongomeo (n. 3), hades
Jongoo(n. 5), millipede (1000 feet),
large black insect with red legs.
Jozi (n. 3), a pair, couple, brace.
Jua (n. 5), sun ; Jua la vitwani,
noon.
(Ku)jua (v. tr.), to know, be ac-
quainted with, understand.
Juhudi (n. 3), zeal, effort, vigour,
energy.
(Ku)julikana (v. n.), to be known,
be notorious, come to light.
(Ku)julisha (v. c.), to make known.
Juma (prop, n.), a boy's name.
Jumaa (n. 3 and 5), week ; Siku
ya jumaa, Friday; i.e. the
great day of the week (Muham-
medan).
Jumaa mosi, Saturday (1st day).
Jumaa pili, Sunday (2nd day).
Jumaa t'atu, Monday (3rd day).
Jumaa ne, Tuesday (4th day).
Jumaa i'ano, Wednesday (5th
day).
For Thursday, see Alhamisi.
Jumba (n. 5), house, large house.
Jumbe (n. 5), noble, prince.
Jumla (n. 3), sum, total, the whole.
(Ku)jumlisb.a (v. tr.), to add, sum
up.
Jura (n. 3), idiot.
Juu (adv.), above, up, upstairs.
Juu ya (advl. prep.), on, upon,
over, on the top of.
(Ku)ju£a (v. intr.), to repent, re-
gret, be sorry.
Juto (n. 5), large river.
(Ku)juvya or (Ku)jnvisha (v. c.), to
make known, show how, teach.
Juzi (n. & adv.), day before yester-
day ; Mwaka juzi, year before
last ; Mwezi juzi, month before
last.
Juzijuzi (adv.), a few days ago,
the other day.
(Ku)juzu (v. intr.), to be impera-
tive or compulsory, be binding
on, behove.
Juzuu (n. 5), section of Koran,
pamphlet.
K
-ka- (verb, inf.), and (used in
subordinate tenses).
K'aa (n. 3), crab
Kaa (n. 5), ember ; Eaa la moto,
hot ember.
(Ku)kaa (v. intr.), to dwell, stay,
remain, tarry.
Kaba (n. 3), lining on shoulder of
" Kanzu."
Kabaila (inv. adj.), noble, free,
distinguished.
Kabaili (n. 5), prince, noble.
Kabari (n. 3), wedge.
Kabila (n. 5),tribe, clan.
(Ku)kabaili (v. intr.), to ba oppo-
site to, in front of, face.
(Ku)kabilisha (v. c.), to turn to-
wards, incline.
Kabisa (adv.), entirely, com-
pletely, quite ; (neg.) not at all.
Kabla or Kabula (adv., followed
by "ja" tense and advl. prep.),
before, ere, previous to.
Kaburi (n. 5), tomb, grave.
Kadhalika (adv.), likewise, simi-
larly, soon.
Kadh'awakadaa (adj.), such and
such, various.
Kadhi (n. 5), judge, magistrate.
Kar/iri (n. 3), measure, proportion ;
Kadiri ya (adv.), in proportion
to, according to.
182
SWAHILI GRAMMAK
Kafara (u. 5), sacrifice, offering,
alms.
Kafi (n. 5), paddle.
Kafiri (n. 5), unbeliever, infidel.
Kahaba (n. 5), harlot, whore.
Kahawa (n. 3), coffee.
Kaida (n. 3), order, office, ap-
pointed method, rite.
-kaidi (var. adj.), obstinate, per-
verse.
Kaifa (Kefa) (adv.), so much,
more, how much rather, pre-
ferably. .
K'ala (n. 3), species of mongoose
with bushy tail and no perfume.
Kalala (n. 5), fibrous sheath of
cocoa-nnt flower used as fire-
wood.
Kalamu (n. 3), pen, style.
Kale (adv.), long ago, formerly ;
-a kale (var. adj.), olden, ancient.
-kali (adj.), sharp, fierce, sour,
acid, severe, savage, ferocious,
cruel.
-kali (verb inf.), still ; (conj.), per-
haps, supposing, peradventure,
lest.
(Ku) jikalia (v. ref.), to sit doing
nothing, settle down
Kalibu (n. 3), furnace, mould,
crucible.
(Ku)kama (v. tr.), to milk.
Kama (adv. adj.), as, like, as if,
such as, rather than.
Kama vile (adv.), just as, pre-
cisely, the same as.
Kama (n. 3), necklet.
K'amange (n. 3), grit, hard sub-
stance in food ; applied to a
person — incorrigible, intract-
able, unruly.
(Ku)kamata (v. tr.), to seize, catch
hold of, snatch.
Kamba (n. 3), lobster, prawns.
Kamba (n. 3), cord (of cocoa-nut
fibre).
K'ambi (n. 3), camp.
Kambo Baba wa kambo, step-
father.
(Ku)kambuka (v. n.), to become
dry.
K'ame (adj.), dried up (said of
spot where water has re-
ceded).
(Ku)kamia (v. tr.), to reproach,
denounce, threaten, to plot,
fix on.
Kamili (inv. adj.), perfect, entire,
whole, complete.
-kamilifu (var. adj.), perfect, com-
plete in all its parts.
(Ku)kamilisha (v. c.), to make
perfect or complete.
(Ku)kamua (v. tr.), to wring,
squeeze.
Kamwe (adv.) (strongly negative),
never, not at all.
Kana (see Kama) (also conj.) ;
Kana kwamba, whether.
(Ku)kana (v. tr.), to deny, dis-
own.
Kanda (n. 5), long matting
bag.
(Ku)kanda (v. tr.), to knead,
massage.
Kandarinya (n. 5), kettle.
K'ande (n. 3), store, provision.
(Ku)kanJika (v. tr.), to daub,
plaster (a wall).
K'ando (adv.), aside apart; (advl.
prep.) Kando ya, by the side
of, beside, along side of.
K'andok'ando (adv.), round about,
on both sides of, till around.
K'anga (n. 3), guinea-fowl.
Kanga (n. 5), spur of cocoa-nut
palm.
(Ku)kanga (v. tr.), to fry, grill.
Kan go (n. 3), frying-pan.
K'ani (n. 3), wrath.
Kaniki (n. 3), dark blue cotton
cloth.
Kanisa (n. 5), church.
Kanju (n. 5), cashew apple.
Kanuni (n. 3), rule, canon, law.
Kanuni (adj.), obligatory, com-
pulsory, canonical.
Kanwa (u. 5), mouth.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
183
(Ku)kanya (v. tr.), to forbid (c. of
to deny), deny to be true, con-
vince of error.
(Ku)kanyaga (v. tr.), to tread
upon, trample down.
Kanzi (n. 3), store, treasure,
treasury.
K'anzu (u. 3), tunic (made of thin
white calico).
K'apu (n. 3), large basket.
Karadha (n. 3), loan, credit ;
Kutoa karadha, to lend ;
Kutwaa karadha, to borrow.
Karaha (u. 3), irritation, annoy-
ance.
Karama (n. 3), gift, present.
Karamu (n. 3), feast.
Karani (n. 5), clerk, secretary.
Karate, (n. 3), playing-card.
Karatfasi (u. 3), paper, cardboard,
card.
(Ku)karibisha (v. c.), to welcome
(lit. cause to come near).
Karibu (n. 3), near relative, kins-
man.
Karibu (adv. pi.), near, close, at
hand ; (adv. time), soon.
Karibu (advl. prep., followed by
" ya " or " na"), near to, close
by.
(Ku)karipia (v. tr.), to remon-
strate with, reprove, expostu-
late, scold, censure, chide.
Kasa (n. 3), turtle.
Kasabu (u. 3), cloth woven of gold
thread.
Kasha (n. 5), box (of teak or other
fine wood) made by a joiner ;
(contr. sanduku = rough box).
(Ku)kashifu (v. tr.), to bring to
light or expose evil.
Kasia (n. 5). oar.
Kasi'U (adv.), on purpose.
Kasikazi (n. H), north, N.E. inon-
soon, period of N.E. monsoon.
Kasiki (n. t>), pitcher, large stone
water-pot.
Kasirani (n. 3), grief, wrath,
anger, sorrow.
(Ku)kasiri (v. tr.), to anger,
offend, provoke.
(Ku)kasirika (v. n.), to be angry,
be offended.
Kasisi (n. 5), Presbyter, priest.
Kasu (adj.), less, minus; Kasu
roboo, three quarters ; Eiali
kasu roboo, dollar less a
quarter, i.e. Ks. 1J.
Kasuku (n. 3), parrot.
Kaia (n. 5), page of a book.
K'ata (n. 3), head-pad.
Kata (n. 3), water ladle (made of
three-quarters of a cocoauut).
(Ku)k'ata (v. tr.), to cut ; Kuk'ata
neno, to decide; Ndia ya
kuk'ata, a short cut.
(Ku)jikafa (v. rcf.), to strain.
(Ku)kataa (v. tr.), to refuse ;
(Ku)katawa (v. pass.), to be
refused, to be rejected.
Karani (n. 3), linen, flax, hemp.
(Ku)kataza (v. c.), to prohibit,
forbid to do a thing; (Ku)ka-
tazwa (v. pass.), to be for-
bidden.
Kati (adv.), in the m'ddle,
through ; Mt'u wa kati,
mediator.
Kati ya (advl. prep.), in between,
in the middle of.
Katika (prep.), in, from, out of,
at, ou, about, concerning,
during.
(Ku)katika (v. n.), to be cut, be
broken, cut short.
Katikati (adv. & advl. prep.), in
the centre or midst.
Katili (var. adj.), murderous.
Katili (n. 5), murderer.
Katu (n. 3), chewing gum.
(Ku)kauka (v. n.), to dry, dry iij>,
wither.
Kauli (n. 3), word, utterance.
Kaumu (n. 3), hott, army, troop,
prank, people.
K'auta (n. 3), grit,
-kavu (var. adj.), dry ; Nyama
ndavu, stale meat.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kawa (u. 3), plaited dish-cover.
(Ku)kawa, (Ku)kawia (v. intr.),
to loiter, tarry, delay ; Haikawi
kuharibika, it will soon be
spoilt.
Kawaida (n. 3), etiquette, good
form, custom, fashion, de
corum.
(Ku)kawilisha (v. c.), to delay,
hinder, cause to be late.
(Ku)kawilishwa (v. pass.), to be
delayod.
(Ku)kaza (v. c.), to cause to stay,
establish, intensify, tighten,
make secure, increase effort.
(Ku)kaza meno, to gnash or grind
the teeth.
(Ku)kazana (v. n.), to hold firmly
together, be intrinsically
strong.
Kazi (n. 3), work, labour, employ-
ment, service, business, occupa-
tion.
Kefa (seeKaifa) (adv.), how much
more, rather.
Kekee (n. 3), gold or silver brace-
let, native tool for taring hole.
K'elele (n. 3), noise, sound,
tumult, clamour, din.
(Ku)kema (v. tr.), to establish.
K'eme (n. 3), cry, noise.
(Ku)kemea (v. tr.), to rebuke, put
down, reprimand.
Kenda (inv. num. adj,), nine.
K'engele (n. 3), bell, gong ;
Kupiga k'engele, to ring.
(Ku)jikengeua (v. ref.), to turn
deliberately out of the way.
(Ku)kengeuka (v. n.), to turn
aside, go astray, swerve.
K'engewa (n. 3), hawk.
(Ku)kereketa (v. tr.), to irritate,
prick.
K'ereng'ende (n. 3), partridge,
Kesha (n. 5), watch, vigil.
(Ku)kesha (v. intr.), to watch,
keep awake.
Kesho (n. & adv.), to-morrow, on
the morrow.
Kesho-kutwa (u. & adv.), day
after to-morrow.
(Ku)k'eti (v. intr.). to sit, take
up a sitting posture, live,
dwell.
Yuak'eti..., he lives at... Ame-
keti, he has sat down.
(Ku)jiketia (v. ref.), to settle
down in a place, sit idle.
Khar/aa (n. 3), deceit.
Khafifu (iuv. adj.), light, slight,
trifling.
Khalifa (halifu) (v. 5), felon,
criminal, malefactor, rebel.
Khamsa (num. adj.), five.
Khamsini (num. adj.), fifty.
Kb.amisfaasb.ara (num. adj.),
fifteen.
Khasa (adv.), especially, in truth.
Kharadali (n. 3), mustard.
Khafamu (n. 3), bridle, reins.
Khafi (had), (n. 3), handwriting,
document.
Khatia (n. 3), guilt, fault, error.
Khema (hema) (n. 3), tent.
Kheri (heri) (n. 3), blessedness,
happiness ; (adj.) well, better.
(Ku)khini (v. tr.), to be false to,
break one's word to.
Khisa (n. 3), part, portion, ad-
vantage.
KhUiari (hiyari) (v. 3), choice,
pleasure.
Khofu (hofu) (n. 3), fear, fright,
apprehension.
(Ku)khofu (v. tr.), to fear,
(Ku)khusika (v. intr.), to be
proper, be fitting, be suit-
able.
(Ku)khusu (v. tr.), to set aside f >r
a special purpose.
Khuiuba (n. 3), sermon, homily,
exhortation.
(It is not thought necessary to
give obvious diminutives of
well-known nouns formed by
the prefix " Ki.")
Ki, a prefix (see Note 3, Study
XVIII.)
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
185
Kia (n. 4), belt, bar, lock ; mem-
ber or part (of body).
(Ku)kia (v. intr.), to step or pass
over.
Kiama (n. 4), resurrection.
Kiambaza (n. 4), inside wall,
partition.
Kiambo (n. 4), seat of a chair.
Kianga (n. 4), sunshine (after
rain), fine weather.
Kiapo (u. 4), oath.
Kiasi (n. 4), measure, price, pro-
portion, rate.
Kiatu (n. 4), shoe, boot, sandal.
Kiazi (n. 4), sweet potato.
Kibaba (n. 4), measure for dry
goods, about one pint.
Kibanda (n. 4), little shed or
hut, hovel.
Kibanzi (n. 4), splinter ; young
locust.
Kibao (n. 4), a slate or small
wooden tablet.
Kibarua (n. 4), day-labourer.
Kibe (n. 4), hide and seek.
Kibiriti (u. 4), sulphur, box of
matches (not a single match).
Kibok'o (n. 4), (1) hippopotamus ;
(2) hippo hide ; (3) strokes
with hippo-hide lash.
Kibuhuti (n. 4), grief.
Kibula (n. 3), north.
Kiburi (n. 4), pride, self-esteem,
haughtiness.
Kibuzi (n. 4), kid, young goat.
Kibweta (u. 4), small box.
Kicho (u. 4), fear.
Kic/aka (n. 4), young cocoanut ;
recess or niche in house.
Kii/au (n, 4), small boat or vessel
(ink-well).
Kidawafi (n. 4) small desk or
box.
Kidemu (n. 4), rag, tatter.
Kidevu (n, 4), chin.
Kidividi (n. 4), black ornament
for lobe of ear.
Kidogo (adj. & adv.), a little, few,
rather.
Xidogo-kidogo (adv.), by degrees,
little by little.
Kidole (n. 4), finger, toe.
Kidonda (n. 4), sore, wound.
Kidonge (n. 4), lump, clot, little
ball, pill, pillule, tabloid.
Xidude (n. 4), a small thing,, a
" what is it."
Kielelezo (n. 4), pattern, example,
model.
Kifafa (n. 4), epilepsy.
Kifani (n. 4). sort, kind.
Kifano (u. 4), image, likeness,
model.
Kifaranga (n. 4), chicken.
Kifaru (n. 4), rhinoceros.
Kifaume (adv.), in royal style.
Kifiniko (n. 4), lid, cover.
Kifo (n. 4), death.
Kifua (n. 4), chest, chc&t com-
plaint, breast, bosom.
Kifufu (n. 6), empty cocoanut
shell.
Kifulifuli (adv. man.), in crowds,
helter-skelter, pell-mell.
Kifumbu (n. 4), long round grass
bag for squeezing grated cocoa-
nut.
Kifungo (n. 4), button, fastening,
knot, band, bond, prison.
Kifunifuni (adv. man.), flat 0:1 the
face, face downwards.
Kifuvu (n. 4), see kifufu.
Kigae (n. 4), potsherd.
Kigano (n. 4), story, tale, story-
telling.
Kigari (v. 4), small cart, ap-
plied to bicyles and peram-
bulators.1
Kigelegele (n. 4), shout of joy.
Kigeugeu (n. 4), chameleon.
Kigoma (n. 4), kettle-drum, small
drum.
Kigongo (n. 4), cudgel, stick.
Kiguguta (u. 4), empty Indian-
corn cob.
Kigumba (n. 4), arrow-head.
Kiguu (n. 4), lameness (lit. small
leg).
186
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kigut'u (n. 4), lame or maimed
person,
Kigwe (n. 4), cord, string, lace,
braid.
Kihcrehere (n. 4), regret, remorse,
sorrow, anxiety, penitence.
Kiigizo (n. 4), copy, pattern,
model.
Eiini (n. 4), centre, heart, inside,
pith, pupil (of eye) ; Kiini cha
ii..yolk of egg.
Kiinima/o (n. 4), sorcery.
Kijakazi (u. 4), young slave girl.
Kijaluba (n. 4), metal snuff-box.
Kijana (n. 4), young child, boy,
girl, youth.
Kijaraha (n. 4), the wound (in
disease).
Kijasi (n. 4), paper ornament for
lobe of ear.
Kijembe (n. 4), pocket knife.
Kijibwa (n. 4), young, dog, puppy.
Kijiji (n. 4), small village.
Kijiko (n. 4), spoon.
Kijimo (n. 4), dwarf.
Kijisu (n. 4), little knife.
Kijiti (n. 4), stick, piece of wood,
small knife.
Kijito (n. 4), spring, source.
Kijitu (n. 4), mannikin.
Kijoyo (n. 4), half-liking.
Kijongo (n. 4), hump-back.
Xijukuu (n. 4), grandchild.
Kijuto (n. 4), brook, rivulet.
JJikao (n. 4), seat, row, group,
company.
Kikapu (n. 4), small basket.
Kike (adj.), female, feminine.
Kiko (n. 4), tobacco-pipe.
Kikoa (n. 4), repast given by turns
in different houses, collection
made for newly-married couple.
XikonJoo (n. 4), young lamb.
Kikoi (n. 4), loin cloth with
coloured border.
Xikombe (n. 4), cup.
Kikomo (n. 4), end, termination.
Kiko/o (n. 4), whip, scourge, lash,
switch.
Kikozi (n. 4), band of soldiers,
regiment.
Kikuku (n. 4), bracelet, stirrup.
Kikuta (n. 4), little wall.
Xikuto (u. 4), monster, jackal,
dragon, large hyaena.
Kilabu (n. 3), club.
Kilalo (n. 4), sleeping-place, rest-
ing-place.
Kilele (n. 4), point, summit.
Kilelet'a (n. 4), top. apex, pinnacle.
Kilema (n. 4) blemish, defect,
deformity.
Kilemba (n. 4), turban, tip.
Kileo (n. 4), intoxicant.
Kilete (n. 4), rowlock.
Kilima (n. 4), hill, mound, knoll.
Kilimi (n. 4), uvula.
Kilimia (n. 4), pleiades.
Kilindi (u. 4), depth, deep, deep
water.
Kilinga p'op'o, Dengue fever
(Aden ague).
Kilio (n. 4), cry, lamentation,
yell, crying, weeping, wailing.
Killa (kulla) (adj.), every, each,
all.
Kima (n. 3), black monkey ; (u. 4)
price, value.
Kimba (n. 4.), corpse, dead body,
carcase.
(Ku)kimbia (v. intr.), to run away,
flee, escape, play truant.
(Ku)kimbilia (v. prepl.), to fly to,
take refuge in. Pa kukimbilia,
place of refuge, shelter.
(Ku)kimbiza (v. c.), to drive
away, aid and abet in escaping.
Kimetemete (n. 4), firefly, glow-
worm.
Ximia (n. 4), fishing-net.
Kimo (n. 4), size, height, stature-.
Kimungu (n. 4), weevil.
Kimwae (adj.), abundant, plenti-
ful.
Kimya (n. & adj.), silence, silent,
still, mute, speechless.
Kina (n. 4), depth, deep sea ;
metre (in poetry).
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
187
Kina(Bibi), (women)folk.
Kina (Bwana), (men) folk.
(Ku)kinai (v. intr.), to be surfeited.
be "blase," be satisfied,
-kinaifu (var. adj.), abundant,
wealthy.
Kinamasi (n. 4), clay, clay soil.
KLnanda (n. 4), generic term for
any musical instrument, piano,
guitar, etc.
Kinara (n. 4), small tower, candle-
stick.
Kinda (n. 5), young (of animals).
(Ku)kindana (v. rec.), argue,
strive, contradict.
Kinga (n. 4), firebrand, sudden
chance.
(Ka)kinga (v. tr.), to protect, pre-
serve, conserve.
Kingalingali (adv.), on the back,
prone. Kuanguka kingalingali,
to fall backwards.
(Ku)kingama (v. tr.), to lie across,
athwart.
(Ku)kingamiwa (v. pass.), to be
thwarted, be opposed.
K'ingio (n. 3), shield.
King'ombe (adv.), in a bovine or
brutish manner.
K'ingoni (n. 3), edge, rim, border.
Kingugwa (n. 4), ravenous beast.
(Ku)kini or (Ku)kinika (v. intr.),
to be possible or probable.
Kinofu (n. 4), chop.
Kinono (n. 4), falling, fatted
animal.
Kinoo (n. 4), small grindstone,
whetstone.
Kina (n. 4), mortar, mill.
Kinubi (adv.), belonging to the
Nubians; (n. 4), musical in-
strument such as the Nubians
use, harp.
Kinundu (n. 4), lump, hump oil
back.
Kinweo (n. 4), beverage, drink-
able, drink.
Kinyaa (n. 4), filth, pollution.
Kinyezi (n. 4), horror.
Kinyongo (n. 4), grudge, offence,
scruple, qualm.
Kinyozi (n. 4), harbor.
KLnytune (prep.), against, con-
trary. Kwenda kinyume, to go
backwards.
Kinyunga (n. 4), dough.
Kioga (n. 4), mushroom, fungus.
Kioja (n. 4), wonder, curiosity
terror.
Xionda (n. 4), wound, sore.
Kiongozi (n. 4), leader, guide.
Kioo (n. 4) mirror, fish-hook.
Kipaku (n. 4), blot, birth-mark.
Kipande (n. 4), piece, slice, chip.
Kipara (n. 4) bald patch (on the
head), patch of hair.
Kipawa (n. 4), gift, present (pre-
ferable in plural).
Kipele (n. 4), pimple.
Kipenu (n. 4) lean-to hut.
Kipenzi (n. 4), little darling.
Kip'ia (n. 4), pinnacle, point,
battlement, storey.
Kipimo (n. 4), measure.
Kipindi (n. 4 & adv.), time, season,
some time ago.
Kipini (n. 4), handle, nose-jewel,
ear-stud.
Kipofu (n. 4), blind person.
Kipupwe (n. 4), cool season, July.
Kiraka (n. 4), patch, piece of
cloth.
(Ku)kiri (v. tr.), to confess, own.
Kiriba (n. 4), water-skin.
(Ku)kiriM (v. tr.), to insult, des-
pise, annoy, disgust.
(Ku)kihirika (v. n.), to be vexed,
be grieved, be provoked, ba
irritated.
(Ku)kirimu (v. tr.), to bestow
upon, grant, confer a favour
on.
Kirisimasi, Christmas.
Kirobo<o (n. 4), flea, swift mail-
runner.
Kisa (n. 4), tale, legend.
Kisaga (n. 4), measure (about
two pints).
188
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Kisahani (11. 4), saucer, small
plate.
Kisala (n. 4), short prayer, collect.
Kisale (n. 4), remainder, remains,
leavings.
Kisasi (n. 4), revenge, vengeance.
Kisauni, Frere Town.
Kisha (adv.), then (when that is
finished), afterwards.
Kishaka (n. 4), patch, of jungle
or forest, thicket.
Kishindo (n. 4), noise, report,
roar, booming-sound, tumult,
uproar, panic.
Kishogo (n.4), nape of neck.
Kisigino (n. 4), heel.
Kisiki (n. 4), trunk or stump of
tree (fallen). Kisiki cha mvua,
rainbow.
Kisima (n. 4), well (of water).
Kisiwa (n. 4), island. Up-coun-
try term for Mombasa island.
Kisu (n. 4), knife.
Kisuli (n. 4), giddiness, vertigo.
Kisulisuli (n. 4), whirlwind.
Kiiabu (n. 4), book.
Kitako (n. 4), hinder part, re-
mainder. Kitako cha mto, bed
of river.
Ki<alu (n. 4), fence.
Ki/ambaa (n. 4), rag, duster,
napkin, cloth, towel, bandage.
Kifambi (n. 4), coloured cloth
(worn over shoulders).
Kitambo (n. >4), space of time,
(adv.), some time ago.
KKana (n. 4), comb.
Kitanda (n. 4), bedstead.
Kitango-pepeta (n. 4), small
round cucumber. KKangu
(n. 4).
Ki/anu (n. 4), splinter.
Kitanzi (u. 4), loop, noose.
Ki/a/a cha asali (n. 4), honey-
comb.
Kite (n. 4), effort, straining, in-
tense affection. (Ku)piga kite,
to bear down, to strain the inner
man, to make an effort accom-
panied by groaning. Of. Gen.
43. 30, " bowels did yearn."
Ki/eko (n. 4), laugh, smile.
KUeku (n. 4), pickaxe.
Ki/embe (n. 4), lisp.
Kitendawili (Kitandawili) (u. 4),
riddle, enigma.
Kifepukuzi (n. 4), sprout, shoot.
JLitete (n. 4), gourd, water-bottle.
Kitetemo (cha n£i) (u. 4), earth-
quake.
Kiteweo (n. 4), relish, sauce (see
Note 2, Study VI.).
Kiti (n. 4), seat, chair ; Kiti
kirefu, lounge chair.
Kirtati (n. 4), little blue bird
(cordon bleu?).
Kilo (n. 4), gem, jewel, precious
stone.
Kitoka (n. 4), hatchet, axe.
Kitoma (n. 4), calabash, gourd,
water-bottle.
Kitongoji (n. 4), suburb.
Kitato (n. 4), small or young
child, infant, babe.
KUoto (n. 4), alley, narrow pas-
sage, winding tortuous path.
Kitovu (n. 4), navel.
Kitu (n. 4), thing, something,
substance.
Kitua (cha mti) (n. 4), space oc-
cupied or covered by shrub or
bush.
Ki/uko (n. 4), fear, fright.
Kiftikuu (n. 4), great grandchild.
Kitumbua (n. 4), kind of crumpet,
native bun or cake.
Kitumwa, in low (or slave) style.
Kitundu (u. 4), cage, nest.
Kifungule (n. 4), rabbit.
Kitunguu (u. 4), onion, bulb.
Kituo (u. 4), resting-place, camp-
ing-ground.
Kitushi (n. 4), abuse, reproach.
Kitwa (n. 4), head.
Kiu (n. 3), thirst.
Kiumbe (n. 4), creature, created
being, mortal.
Kiumbizi (n. 4), soaring bird.
SWAHILI-ENGLI8H VOCABULARY
189
Kiume (adj.), male, masculine.
Kiunga (n. 4), plantation. Loca-
tive form, Kiungani, has come
to stand for grassy surround-
ings of plantations.
Kiungani (where the " Kiunga "
is), name given to a district in
Z-inzibar, once a suburb called
after a plantation made there.
Kiungo (n. 4), joint, something
ailded, as spice, relish, zest.
Kiungwana, in gentle style.
Kiuno (n. 4), loin, hip, lower part
of back.
Kiusouso (adv.), face downwards,
on the face.
Kivirio (n. 4), cry, outcry.
Kivuko (n. 4), ferry, crossing.
Kivuli (n. 4), shadow, shade.
Kivumi (n. 4), noise, report,
fame.
KiwancZa (n. 4), plot of ground,
site, enclosure, courtyard.
Kiwele (n. 4), udder ; (var. adj.)
sick, old, done for, good lor
nothing.
Kiwe/e (n. 4), cripple, lame
person.
Kiwewe (n. 4), amazement, aston-
ishment, bewilderment, terror,
shudder.
Kiwi (n. 4), evil.
Kiwi cha mafo, flinching from
light (of eyes), dazzled sight,
photophobia.
Kiwiko-cha-mkono (n. 4), wrist ;
Kiwiko-cha-guu, ankle.
Kiwiliwili (n. 4), trunk of body,
body.
Kiwingu (u. 4), storm-cloud,
viper ; Kiwingu joshini, squall
seaward.
Kiza (n. 4), darkness, dimness ;
Kumefunga kiza, darkness lias
set in.
Kizazi (n. 4), generation.
Kizee (n. 4), old woman.
Kizibao (n. 4), waistcoat, blouse,
bodice, jacket.
Kizibo (n. 4), stopper, plug, hence
a cork.
Kizingiti (n. 4). threshold, door-
step.
Kiziwi (n. 4), deaf person.
Kizuka(n. 4), fetish, image, idol.
Kizunguzungu (n. 4), giddiness,
dizziness.
Kizushi (n. 4), upstart, intruder,
innovation.
Kizuzi (n. 4), something unreal,
undependable, false, vain.
K'oa (n. 3), snail.
Ko'be (n. 3), tortoise.
Ko«ii (n. 3), tax, rate levied.
(Ku)kodolea (ma/o), (v. prep.), to
stare at, fix one's eyes on.
Kofi (n. 5), handful (double), flat
of hand (Ln. 6. 29) ; (n. 3), a
clasp (with hands) vide "Piga."
Kofia (n. 3), hat, cap, bonnet.
K'oga (n. 3), mildew ; (Ku)fanya
k'oga, to become mildewed.
K'ogo (n. 3), back of head.
(Ku)kohoa (v. intr.), to cough.
(Ku)kohoza (v. c.), to bring on a
cough.
Koikoi (n. 3), stork.
Koja (n. 3), chain.
(Ku)kojoa (v. intr.), to urinate.
(Ku)koka (moto) (v. tr.), to stir
or make up (a fire).
Koko (n. 5), stone or kernel (of
fruit), (n. 3), thicket, jangle,
swamp.
(Ku)kokoa (v. tr.), to gather, col-
lect.
(Ku)kokomea (v. tr.), to wedge,
jamb.
(Ku)kokota (v. tr.), to drag, draw.
(v. intr.), to trail, drag.
(Ku)kokota koo (v.), to have
death-rattle, i.e. to die.
Koko/o (n. 3), gravel, pebble.
Koma (n. 2), departed spirit.
(Ku)koma (v. intr.) to come to an
eud, cease, leave off.
(Ku)komba (v.), to scrape or
hollow or scoop out.
190
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
K'omba (n. 3), lemur.
Komba-mwiko (n.), cockroach.
Kombe (n. 3), bhcll ; (n. 5) flat
dish.
Kombo (n. 5), remainder, residue,
posterity, something left.
K'ombo (adv.), crooked, bent,
curved.
(Ku)komboa (v. tr.), to redeem,
ransom.
Kombora (n. f>), shell, bomb.
Kome (n. 3), small caravan
flag.
(Ku)komea (v. tr.), 1o lock, bar.
Komeo (n. 5), wooden lock, bolt,
bar.
(Ku)komesha (v. c.), to bring to an
end, cause to cease.
K'omio (n. 3), throat.
(Ku)konda (v. intr.), to become
thin.
Konde (n. 5), fist (straight for-
ward).
K'onde (n. 3), cultivated land,
field.
K'onde (n. 3), kernel or stone of
fruit.
K'ondo (n. 3), battle, quarrel, con-
tention, strife.
K'onrfoo (n. 3), sheep ; Mwana-
k'ondoo, lamb ; K'on Joo mume,
ram.
Kongo (n. 5), species of cactus
yielding a strong fibre.
K'ongo (n. 3), old cocoanut tree ;
K'ongo za Mbuba, symptoms of
the yaws.
Kongo! (mwezi), exclamation on
seeing the new moon ; (n. 3)
arm (distinguished from
" Mkono " which is also
" hand."
(Ku)kongoa (v. tr.), to destroy,
cut oft', pull up by the roots.
(Ku)kongomana (v. rec.), to meet
together for consultation, con-
fer together.
K'ongoni (n. 3), haartibeest.
Kongwa (Kongo) (n. 5), yoke.
Kono (n. 3), arm (of sea or lake),
shoot, branch.
K'onok'ono (n. 3), snail ; (Zun.),
see K'oa.
(Ku)konyeza (v. intr.), to wink,
make a sign.
K'onzi (n. 3), fist, handful
(single).
K'oo, throat, glottis.
Koo (n. 5), breeding animal — us
laying-hen.
(Ku)kopa (v. tr.), to give credit,
cheat, deceive.
K'ope (n. 3), eyelid; (Ku)pesa
k'ope, to wink, blink.
(Ku)kopesha (v. tr.), to borrow,
lend.
Kopo (Kopwe) (n. 5), cup, goblrt,
drinking vessel, pipe (for
water).
Korofi (adj.), wicked, bad, base.
(Ku)koroga (v. tr.), to stir.
Koroma (n. 4), cocoanut not fully
developed.
(Ku)koroma (v. intr.), to snore.
groan.
Korosho (n. 3), cashew nuts.
Korrathi (n. 3), leek.
Kosa (n. 5), mistake, fault, trans-
gression.
(Ku)kosa (v. tr. & intr.), to miss,
err, fail, mistake, sin.
(Ku)kosekana (v. n.), to be absent,
missing.
(Ku)kosesha, (Ku)koseza (v. c.),to
make to sin, cause to miss or
fall short of.
K'osi(kikosi) (n. 3), top of back,
between the shoulders.
Kotekote (adv.), on all sides, in
every direction, in every way.
Koti (n. 5). coat.
Kooti (n. 3), court of justice, law
courts.
Ko/o (n. 3), spice from Arabia;
K'o<o (n. 3), rap with knuckles,
swivel-hook and line for deep
sea.
Koto (n. 3), play-hour for slavee.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
191
K'ovu (n. 3), scar, scab.
Kozi (n. 3), falcon (crested).
Ku- is the infinitive prefix ; -ku
is the 2nd person sing, objec-
tive infix.
(Ku)kua (v. intr.), to grow, de-
velop ; "Kulia juu <ini ku
moto," grow up tall, it is not on
the ground : said to a child.
(Ku)jikua (v. ref.), to be proud, to
lx>ast; (Ku)jikuza (v. ref.), to
make much of oneself.
(Ku)kubali (v. tr.), to accept,
acknowledge, receive; (v. intr.),
to agree to, assent, approve.
-kubwa (viir. adj.), big, great,
tall, large.
Kubikubi*(adv.), snugly.
Kucha (n. 7, pi.), claws, nails ;
(n. i») dawn, dawning, day-
break, cast (elliptical for
" usiku kucha"), all night
long till dawn.
Kufuli (n. 3), padlock.
(Ku)furu (v. intr.). to blaspheme,
apostatize, use profane lan-
guage.
Kufuu (n. 3), equal, fellow.
Kuhani (n. 3), priest.
Kuko (adv.), there.
Kuku (adv.), here ; Kuku huku
(adv.), just here.
K'uku (n. 3), fowl; K'uku mke,
hen.
(Ku)kukumiza (v. tr.), to wring
out, drain.
(Ku)kuk'uta (v. tr.), to shake off,
beat.
(Ku)kukutika (v. n.). to palpitate
(heart).
Kola-muwi (n. 3), hush-money.
Kule (adv.), there, yonder, over
there.
Kulekule (adv.), just there.
(Ku)kulia (v. tr.), to overpower,
affect strongly, gain mastery
over, conquer.
Kaliko (lit. " where there are ")
(rel. adv.^ than, more than.
Kulla (killa) (distr. adj.), each
every.
K'ulungu (n. 3), impallah, ante-
lope.
(Zu)kumba(v.tr.), to come against
come upon, befall, overtake.
(Ku)kumbatia (v. prepl.), to em-
brace, caress.
Kumbi (la mnazi) (n. 3), frond of
cocoanut palm ; Kumbi la
mnazi, cocoanut fibre.
Kumbifu (n. 5), withered frond of
cocoanut palm.
Kumbikumbi (n. 3), white ants in
the winged stage.
(Ku)kumbuka (v. tr.), to remem-
ber, recollect.
K'umbuu (n. 3), girdle ; K'umbwe
(n. 3), morsel of food.
Kumi (num. adj.), ten ; Kumi-na-
moja (num. adj.), eleven.
K'umvi (n. 3). chaff, husks.
Kuna, there is, there are (imper-
sonal pronominal with verb To
have, English To be).
(Ku)kuna (v. tr.), to grate, scratch ,
scrape.
(Ku)kuncZa (v. tr.), to fold, double ;
(Ku)kunrfa uso, to frown, scowl ;
(Ku )kun</a maguu, to lie down,
rest.
(Ku)kundakunda (v. tr.), to crease,
wrinkle.
Kunde (n. 3), bean (reddish-brown
— larger than " flwi ").
Kundi (n. 3), flock, herd, drove,
swarm.
(Ku)kmWua (v. subt.), to unfold,
unroll, undo, open out, sim-
plify; Ku kundua maisha, to
lengthen life.
(Ku)kunga (v. tr.), to hem.
Kunge (n. 3), mist, haze.
K'unguni (n. 3), bug.
K'unguru (n. 5), check cloth worn
by the prisoners : hence the
prisoners themselves.
(Ku)kung'uta (v. tr.), to shake
out (Mom. Kuk'nta).
192
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
K'unguu (n. 3), raven, antelope
(species of), hart.
(Ku)knnguwaa (v. intr.), to
stumble, trip.
Kunguwazo (n. 3), cause of
offence, stumbling-block.
Kungwi (n. 5), person who in-
structs young persons in the
duties of married life.
K'uni (n. 3), firewood.
Kunradhi, excuse me, forgive me,
do not be angry.
(Ku)kunyata (v. intr.), to wear a
deprecating air, have a deplor-
ing, down-trodden look.
(Ku)jikunyata (v. ref.), to be
bowed down, depressed.
(Ku)kunyea (v. n.), to itch, to
irritate.
(Ku)kunytia (v. tr.), to scratch,
pinch.
Kura (n. 3), lot, share ; (Ku)piga
kura, to cast lots.
Kurasa (n. 7), pages (of book), folio.
Kuruani (n. 3), Koran.
Kusanyiko (n. 5), congregation,
assembly.
(Ku)kurubia (v. prepl.), to
approach, draw near to.
(Ku)kusa (Ku)k'utislia (v. c.), to
bring upon, cause one to meet
with.
(Ku)kusanya (v. tr.), to gather,
collect.
Kushofo (n. 3), the left (hand).
Kusi (n. 3), south, south-west
monsoon.
Kusfubani (n. 3), thimble.
Kusudi (adv.), on purpose.
(Ku)kusufZia (v. intr.), to intend,
propose.
K'uta (n. 3), wall.
Knfa (n. 5), large wall.
(Ku)kuta (v. tr.), to meet with,
happen to, befal.
(Ku)kut'ana (v. rec.), to meet
together.
(Ku)kut'anika (v. n.), to gather
together, assemble.
Kuti (n. 5), slip of the frond or
leaf of cocoanut palm tree.
These are cut off the mid-rib
and plaited (see Makuti).
K'utu (n. 3), rust.
Ku^wa (n. 9), sunset, west, all
day long till sunset,
-kuu (var. adj.), chief, main,
great.
-kuukuu (var. adj.), old, worn-
out (not applied to persons).
Kuume (n. 3), right (hand).
Kuwa (conj.), iu that, seeing,
since.
(Ku)kuwaa (v. intr.), to stumble.
Kuwili (adj. & adv.), double,
twice over, over and above.
(Ku)kuza (v. c.), to exalt, magnify,
make great, promote, cause to
grow.
(Ku)knza (v. tr.), to sell.
Kuzimu (n. 3), the cold grave,
Hades.
Kwa (prep, intrumental), with,
by, at, at the house of, to, also,
as well as, etc.
Ewako- kwakwe (poss. pro.), to
(or at) thy (or his) house, to (or
at) thee (or him).
Kwamba (conj.), if. whether,
that.
Kwamba si..., if it were not
for...
Kwamba hakufanya..., if he had
not done...
K'wang'a (n. 3), hyrax.
Kwangu (poss. pro.), to (or at)
my house, to (or at) me.
(Ku)kwangua (Ku)kwangura (v.
tr.), to tcrape out.
Kwani 1 (intr. adv.), why? of
course !
Kwa nini ? what for ? why ?
Kwanza (adv.), firstly, primarily,
before (followed by the "ja"
tense).
Kwao (poss. pro.), to (or at) their
house, to (or at) them, equiva-
lent to " their home."
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
193
Kwapa (n. 3), arm-pit.
Kware (u. 3), quail, a very large
kind of partridge.
(Ku)kwaruza (v. intr.), to be
rough, grating.
Kwa sababu gani ? why ? for
what reason ?
Kwato (n. 7), hoofs.
(Ku)kwatua (v. tr.), to polish, to
rub; (Ku)kwatuka (v. n.), to
shine (by polishing).
(Ku)kwea (v. tr.), to climb up,
mount, go (or come) up.
K'wenda (conj.), if, supposing
(followed by " ka" tense).
(Ku)kwejuka (v. intr.), to fade,
lose colour.
(Ku)kweza (v. c.), to raise, pro-
mote, make go up.
K'wekwe (n. 3), weeds.
K'weleo (n. 3), tongs, pincers.
Kweli (n., adj. & adv.), truth,
true, truly, indeed; Mt'u wa
kweli, a true man ; Mt'u kwa
kweli, (he is) in truth a man,
a thorough man; Nimt'u kweli,
he is really a man, no doubt
about him.
Kwa kweli (adv.), thoroughly,
indeed and in truth.
Kweli kweli (adv.), really, verily,
in earnest.
Kwema (adj. cl. 0), a good or
nice (place or condition).
Kw'enda (conj.), supposing that,
may be that.
Kwenu (poss. pro.), to (or at) your
house, to (or at) you, " your
home."
K'were (k'ware) (n. 3), quail.
Kwetu (poss. pro.), to (or at) our
house, to (or at) us, "our
home."
La ! (adv.), no 1 (denial and
refusal).
(Ku)la (v. tr.), to eat.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)lia (v. prepl.), to eat with ;
Mkono wa kulia, the right
hand.
(Ku)lika (v. n.), to be eatable, to
be worn out (of " viatu, ma-
jembe,'' etc.).
(Ku)lisha (v. c.), to feed.
Laa (imp. of kula), to eat.
Laana (n. 3), curse.
(Ku)laani (v. tr.), to curse.
Labeka ! yes ! here I am at your
service (answer of a slave when
called).
Labuda (adv.), perhaps, possibly.
Ladu (n. 3), native sweetmeat (in
form a yellow ball).
(Ku)jilafua (v. ref.), to be foolish,
brutish, gluttonous.
Laini (adj. inv.), smooth, soft,
delicate, fine.
(Ku)lainika (v. n.), to be smooth.
(Ku)jilainisb.a kwa, to take de-
light in.
Laiti! (interj.), oh that! alas!
(Ku)laki (v. tr.), to go to meet
(some one).
Laki (n. 3), lac, 100,000.
Lakini (advers. conj.), but, never-
theless, still, yet.
(Ku)lala (v. intr.), to lie down,
go to bed, recline (not necessary
to sleep).
(Ku)lalamika (v. intr.), to bemoan,
bewail, lament.
Lami (n. 3), tar, glue.
Lango (n. 5), large door, gate,
branch of a family.
Latifu (inv. adj.), meek, tender,
kind.
Laukwamba (followed by pros,
ind.) (interj.), oh that ! if
only !
Laumu (n. 3), blame, reproach.
(Ku)laumu (v. tr.) , to blame, con-
demn.
(Ku)laza (v. c.), to lay down, lie
flat on the back, put to sleep.
Lazima (adj.), obligatory, neces-
sary, essential, indispensable.
N
194
SWAHILI GRAMMAE
(Ku)lazimisha (v. c.), to compel,
oblige, constrain, force.
(Ku)lazimu (v. tr.), to be binding
upon.
(Ku)lea (v. tr.), to bring up, rear,
adopt, nurse, educate.
Leba (n. 3), fraud, dishonesty.
(Ku)legea (v. intr.), to be loose or
slack, flag, relax effort.
(Ku)legeza (v. c.), to let go, give
up, forsake.
Leila (n. 3), eve, vigil.
(Ku)lekea (v. tr.), to face, be
opposite to, turn towards.
(Ku)lekeza (v. «.), to point to (or
towards), put opposite to (or
against).
(Ku)lemea (v. tr.), to lean upon
(or against), set in a direction,
press upon, oppress.
(Ku)lemewa, (Ku)lemelewa (v.
pas.), to be pressed upon,
weighed down, oppressed.
(Ku)lenga (v. intr.), to aim, take
aim.
Lengelenge (n. 5), blister.
Leo (n. & adv.), to-day.
Lepe (n. 3), slumber, drowsiness,
doze.
Leso (n. 3), large handkerchief or
square of coloured cloth worn
by women.
(Ku)leta (v. tr.), to bring, fetch,
send, conduct.
Lete (irreg. imp. of kuleta).
(Ku)levya (v. c.), to make drunk,
rear, bring up.
(Ku)lewa (v. intr.), to be drunk,
intoxicated, tipsy.
(Ku)lewa (v. pas.), to be brought
up, adopted, educated.
(Ku)lewa-lewa (v. red.), to be
giddy, reel, sway, shake.
(Xu)lia (v. intr.), to shout, weep,
ring, creak.
(Ku)lialia (v. intr.), to whimper,
grizzle, whine.
Libasi (n. 3), garment, clothes.
Lijamu (n. 3), bit (harness).
Lilam (n. 3), auction ; Lile (dem.
adj., 5th cl. s.), that; Lile kwa
lile, same thing over again.
(Ku)liliana (v. rcc.), to call to
each other.
Like (n. 3), ferry, crossing-place.
(Ku)liza (v. c.), to make cry,
cause to make a noise.
(Ku)lima (v. tr.), to cultivate,
hoe, till the soil.
(Ku)limbika (v. intr.), to wait or
stay for.
(Ku)limbua (v. sub.), to enjoy
result of waiting, e.<j, to eat
first-fruits.
(Ku)limia (v. prepl.), to hoe for
(or at or with).
(Ku)limka (v. n.), to bo \\ isc,
shrewd, intelligent, prudent.
Limau (n. 5), lemon.
(Ku)linda (v. tr.), to keep, pro-
tect, preserve, guard, mount
guard over, watch, note.
Lindi (n. 5), depth, hole, pit.
(Ku)lingana (v. rec.), to bo like
each other, resemble, compare ;
(v. tr.), to cry unto, call upon.
(Ku)linganisha (v. c.), to compare
one with 'another, to join to-
gether.
Lini? (inter, adv.), when?
(Ku)lipa (v. tr.), to pay, pay bark,
pay for, re-pay.
(Ku)jilipiza (v. ref.), to pay one-
self back, take revenge.
Lisani (n. 3), facirg of Kanzu.
Liwali (n. 3), governor (not
applied to Europeans).
(Ku)liwata (v. tr.), to tread upon,
trample under foot.
(Ku)liza (v. tr.), to sell to.
(Ku)liza (v. c.), to make cry, to
cause to weep.
Lo! (interj.), there! what ! just
look!
(Ku)loga (v. tr.), to bewitch,
enchant.
(Ku)loweka (v. tr.), to put in
soak, steep.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
195
Lozi (n. 5), almond.
Lugha (11. 3), language, tongue.
Lulu (n. 3), pearl.
Lumbwi (n. 3), chameleon.
M
M, a sonant letter prefixed to
nouns in tho first and second
classes.
Ma, plural prefix of nouns in the
fifth class.
Maa</ini (n. 3), metal ore.
Maagano (n. 5), covenant, com-
pact, agreement.
Maagizo (n. 5), instructions,
commandments.
Maaguzi (n. 5), prophecy, inter-
pretation, explanation, utter-
ance of an oracle.
Maamzi (n. 5), judgment, sen-
tence, verdict, justice.
Maana (n. 5), meaning, reason,
signification.
Mtu wa maana, important or
excellent person.
Maana, kwa maana (conj.),
because, for, the reason being,
that is why.
Maandiko (n. 5), writing, scrip-
tures.
Maanguko (n. 5), fall, falling.
Maarifa (n. 5), knowledge, in-
formation, science.
Maarufu (adj. inv.), celebrated,
well-known.
Maasi (n. 5), rebellion.
Maawio (mawao) (n. 5), east,
sun-rising.
Mabaputizi (n. 5), baptism.
Maburuki (inv. adj.), blessed.
Macnoka (n. 5), weariness.
Madaha (n. 5), wooing manner,
ingratiating behaviour.
Madarasa (n. 5), school.
Madanganya (n. 5), deceitful
behaviour.
(n. 5), injury, harm.
Madhibahu (n. 3), altar.
Madhihabi (n. 5), sect, following.
Madhubuti (n. 5), confirmation,
proof, security.
Madoadoa (n. o), spots (dappled).
Mafua (n. 5), catarrh, cold.
Mafuatano (n. 5), following, con-
gregation.
Mafukizo (n. 5), incense (general).
Mafundisho (n. 5), teaching, doc-
trine, moral lessons.
Mafungo (n. 5, pi.), limbs ; Kum-
sbika mafungo=to collar him.
Mafuta (n. 5), fat, oil, grease.
Mafunuo (n. 5), manifestation.
Magaribi, Magharibi (n. 3), west,
sunsetting — hence evening.
Magawanyikano (no sing., u. 5),
division, schism.
Magawio (n. 5), distribution.
Mageule, mageuzi (n. 5), change,
alteration.
Magogo (n. 5), obstacles.
Magugn (n. 5), tangled under-
growth, weeds.
Mahaba (n. 5), love, affection.
Mab.alb.ali (n. 5, pi.), bells on
feet.
Mahali (n. 8), place ; Mahali pa
(advl. prep.), instead of.
Manama, ointment.
Mahana (n. 3), kind of leprosy.
Mahari (n. 3), dowry paid by
bridegroom to father-in-law.
Mahasai (n. 3), eunuch.
Mahali (n. 5), song.
Mabindi (n. 5), Indian corn,
maize.
Mahuluko (n. 5), created things.
Mai (pi. of ii) (n. 5), eggs.
Maimbizano (n. 5), chorus, re-
frain, i
Maisha (n. 5), life, outward
manifestation, of life, lifetime,
existence, durability, manner
of living.
Maid (n. 3), dead person.
Majaliwa (n. 5), fate, destiny,
enabling.
196
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Majani, Mani (n. 5), grass (lit.
leaves), herbs.
Majaza (n. 5), gift, present.
Maji (11. 5), water, waters; Maji
ya Kimo, deep water.
Maji-maji (adj.), watery, liquid,
wet.
Maji-mafu, neap tides; Maji male,
ppring tides.
Maji mafomu, drinking water,
fresh water.
Maji ya barirft, cold water, fresh
water ; Maji ya m'unyu,
brackish water.
Maji yajaa, in-coming tide ; Maji
yapwa, out-going tide.
Majibizano (n. 5), question and
answer, catechism.
Majibu (no sing., n. 5), answer,
reply.
Majilisi (u. 3), stono scats outside
house.
Majilisi-shauri, council, palaver.
Majira (u. 5), appropriate time,
season.
Majivuli (n. 5, pl.|, shadows.
Majivuno (n. 5), ostentation,
pride, boasting.
Majonzi (n. 5), grief, distress,
bereavement.
Majuruhu (adj.), wounded.
Majuio (n. 5), repentance, pcni-
tenco, regret, remorse.
Maka (n. prop.), Mecca.
(Ku)maka (v. intr.), to wonder.
Makaa ya mawe, coals.
Mak'aak'aa (n. 5), soft palate,
roof of mouth.
MakarZara (n. 5), (God's) appoint-
ment or ordaining.
Makamasi (n. 5), mucous, phlegm.
Makamu (adj.), great, important.
Makani (n. 3), dwelling-place.
Makao (n. 5), abode, dwelling,
lair, den, residence.
Makapi (n. 5), chaff.
Makasi (n. 5), scissors.
Makazi (n. 5), dwelling, stylo of
dwelling.
Makengeza (u. 5), squint.
Makerubu (n. 5), cherubim.
Maki (n. 3), thickness.
Makimbilio (n. 5), refuge.
Makini (n. 5), tranquillity, quiet-
ness, steadiness; Kwa makini,
with decorum, solemnly.
Makohozi (n. 5), phlegm, cough.
Makombo (n. 5), remnants, re-
mains, crumbs.
Makungu (n. 5), brightness of
sky in early morning, Aurora,
dawn.
Makuruhu (o. 5), annoyances.
Makusanyiko (n. 5), meeting-
place, place of assembly.
MakusurZi (n. 5), purpose; (adv.)
purposely, on purpose.
Makut'ano (n. 5), multitude,
crowd, assembly.
Makuti (n. 5, pi.), cocoa-nut
leaves (plaited for roofing).
Makuu (n. 5), great things, pride,
self-sufficiency.
Malaika (n. 3), angel ; (n. 5)
small hairs on body, plural of
laika.
Malazi (n. 5), sleeping-place.
Maleleji (n. 5), periods of calms
between N.E. and S.W. mon-
soons.
Malham (n. 3), gum, resin.
Mali (n. 3 or 5), riches, property,
estate, possession.
Malimbuo (n. 5), first-fruits.
Malimwengu (n. 5), changes and
chances of this world.
Malipo (n. 5), reward, payment,
desert.
Malisha (n. 5), pastures, grazing
ground.
(Ku)maliza (v. tr.), to complete,
finish.
Malkia (n. 3), queen.
Malubani (n. 5), oil.
Mama (n. 3), mother; Mamae
mt'u, the mother.
Mamavyaa, mavyaa, mother-in-
law, on the woman's side.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
197
Mamba (n. 3), crocodile, scales of
fish, etc.
Mambo (n. 3) (sing, jambo),
matters, affairs, things, cir-
cumstances.
Mamlaka (u. 3), authority, power,
rule, dominion.
liana (n. 3), manna.
Manani (n. prop.), the Beneficent
Ohihammedan name for God).
Man<Zano (n. 3), turmeric ; Rangi
ya, yellow.
Man<?ili (n. 3), handkerchief,
scarf.
Manemane (n. 3), myrrh.
Manga (n. 3), Arabia.
Mangazimbwe (n. 3), phantom,
mirage.
Mango (n. 3), round stone,
pebble.
Man! (vide majani).
Manufaa (n. 5), profit, advantage.
Manuk'ato (n. 5), perfume, scent.
Manyezi (n. 5), horror, disgust,
abhorrence.
Manyonyota (n. 5), gentle rain,
light showers, drizzle.
Manyoya (n. 5), feathers, down,
fur, wool, hair.
Manyunyu (n. 5), showers.
Maombezano (n. 5), intercessory
prayer, litany.
Maombi (n. 5), prayer.
Maonano (n. 5), meeting together.
Maondo (n. 5), temptation.
Maongeo (n. 5, pi.), increase, pro-
duce, addition.
Maonye (n. 5), warning.
Maovu (n. 5), evil.
Mapaja (n. 5), lap.
Mapambauko (n. 5), dawn.
Mapambo (n. 5), adornment, or-
naments, decoration.
Mapatanisho (n. 5), reconciliation,
atonement.
Mapatano (n. 5), agreement, com-
pact.
Mapatilizo (n. 5), vengeance, re-
tribution.
Mapema (adv.), early, in good
time ; Asubuhi na mapema,
early in the morning.
MapencZano (n. 5), mutual love.
Mapenri (n. 5), will, pleasure,
desire, love.
Mapesa (n. 5), small change.
Mapigano (n. 5), fighting, battle,
combat, fight.
Mapindi (n. 5), windings, sinuosi-
ties.
Maponyea (n. 5, pi.), make-shifts,
substitutes for food in famine
time.
Mara (n. 3), time, occasion ;
(adv.) immediately.
Mara kwa mara (adv.), from time
to time, time after time, now
and again.
Mara moja (adv.), once, at once,
just once.
Mara mbili (adv.), twice.
Mara t'atu (adv.), three times,
thrice.
Mara nne (adv.), four times.
Mara nyingi (adv.), many times,
often.
Mara<//d (n. 3), disease, sicknesp.
Maradufu (n. 3), thick twill calico.
Marahaba ! (interj). Thank you !
it is well !
Marasha-rasha (n. 5, pi.), fine
rain, drizzling shower.
Marashi (n. 5), ecent, perfume.
Marehemu (adj.), the late . . .,
deceased.
Marejeo (n. 5), return, coming
back.
Maridadi (adj.), finely dressed.
MarkZAawa (n. 5), satisfaction,
gratification, compensation,
abundance.
Marijani (u. 3), red coral.
Marikabu (n. 3), ship, vessel.
Marikano (n. 3), coarse un-
bleached calico.
(Ku)marisi (v. tr.), to investigate,
search, examine closely.
Marisau (n. 5), email shot.
198
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Marufuku (n. 5), prohibition, for-
bidden things; Kupiga marti-
fuku, to prohibit.
Masazo (n. 5), leavings, remnants,
remains.
Mashairi (n. 5), poetry, verses,
poem.
Mashaka (n. 5), trouble, misfor-
tune, difficulty.
Mashangirio (n. 5), rejoicing,
festivities.
Mashapa (n. 5, pi.), floats.
Mashariki (n. 3), east, sun-rising.
Masha Allah! (interj.), what God
willeth !
Mashindano (n. 5), conflict, coin-
petition, race, contention, de-
bate, strife.
Mashifaka (n. 5), accusation.
Mashua (n. 3), boat.
Mashuke (n. 5), ears of corn.
Mashupatu (n. 5), flat broad strips
of plaited grass.
Mashurubu (n. 5), whiskers,
moustache.
Mashufamu (n. 5), reproach, cen-
sure.
Masia, kwenda masia, to walk
about with the mind pre-
occupied, not observing one's
surroundings, abstractedly.
Masika (n. 5), great rains.
Masikani (n. 3 or 5), dwelling,
abode.
Masikini (n. 3), poor person,
pauper, beggar.
Masiku (u. 5, pi. of usiku), nights
(reckoned individually).
Masizi (mashizi) (n. 5), soot,
smuts, blacks.
Maskati (n. prop.), muscat.
Maso (irreg. pi. of uso) (n. 5),
edges (of knife, etc.).
Masuluhisho (u. 5), atonement,
reconciliation.
Mata (n. 5) (sing, uta), bows.
Mafaajabu (n. 5), wonders.
Ma<aka<a (n. 5), stubble, wood-
shavings.
Mateko (n. 5), the seat, buttocks.
Ma<akwa (n. 5), request, petition,
desire ; Matelizo (u. 5), plaster.
Matembavu (n. 5), charm worn
crosswise over shoulders ami
side ; (adv. ph.) at the side.
Mafamko (n. 5), pronunciation.
Mafamvua (n. 5), fringe, border
of garment.
Matandiko (n. 5), rugs, blankets,
bedding.
Matandu (n. 5), spider's web.
Matanga (n. 5), sails, mourning,
funeral rites.
Mafango (u. 5), slanders.
Matata (n. 5), tangle, complica-
tion; Yuna matata, he id diffi-
cult to deal with.
Ma/aza (n. 5), rice gruel.
TS.ata.yo (n. 5), slanders, re-
proaches, defamation.
Mate(n. 5), saliva.
Mateka (n. 5), booty, spoil, cap-
tives.
Matembezi (n. 5). walking, walk.
Mateso (n. 5), afflictions, distress.
Matilaba (n. 5), desire, ambition,
pursuit, wish, quest.
Matilai (n. 3), east wind, east.
Ma<in*Zio (u. 5), altar (for sacri-
fice).
Jf&tindo (n. 5), slaughter-house.
Ma(i<i (n. 5), breasts, teats.
Mato (pi. of jito), use;l with Kuwa
for " To be awake."
Mafokeo (n. 5), cast, sun-rising.
Matoleo (n. 5), offering, oblation.
Matukano (n. 5), insults, re-
proaches, abuse.
Mafukio (n. 5), hatred.
Matakizo (u. 5), provocation,
offence.
Matule (n. 5), confusion, shame.
Matumbo (n. 5), entrails, bowels,
intestines.
Matumizi (. 5), use, service.
Mafungu (n. 5), bitterness.
Matushi (n. 5), bad language,
insults.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
199
Mai'wio, mafweo (n. 5), west, sun-
setting.
Mauguzi (n. 5), sick-nursing.
Mauli<?i (n. 5), birth.
Maume na make, masculine and
feminine matters.
Maumivu (n. 5), pain, suffering,
aches, sorrows.
Maungo (n. 5), the back, back-
bone, spinal column.
Kupa maungo, to turn one's
back on.
Maungwana (n. 5), gentle man-
ners.
Mausio (n. 5), commandments,
behests, commands.
Mausufu (adj.), well-known.
Mauti (n. 5), death.
Mava (n. 3), burial place, grave-
yard.
Mavao (n. 5), dress, garments,
habiliments.
Mavazi (n. 5), style of dress,
manner of dress.
May! (n. 5), dung.
Mavunda-vyombo (n. 5), breaker,
one who smashes crockery.
Mavungu (n. 5), prey.
Mavuno (n. 5), harvest, reap-
ing.
Mavyaa (n. 3), mother-in-law.
Mawaa (n. 5, pi.), blemishes,
faults.
Mawao (n. 5), east (v. maawio).
Mawato (n. 5), liberty, release.
Mawazo (n. 5), thoughts, opinions,
ideas.
Mawe (pi. of jiwe) ; Mawe ya
mizani, weights (of scales).
Maweko (n. 5), foundations.
Mawele (n. 5), small edible grain
or cereal.
Mawindo (n. 5), game, hunted
animals.
Mawingu (n. 5), clouds ; yame-
tanda, the sky is overcast (with
clouds) ; yametefuka, yame-
tanduka = (the clouds) have
cleared awav.
Mazao (n. 5) (sing, ozao), fruits,
progeny.
Maziga (n.), censer.
Maziko (n. 5), burial.
Maziwa (n. 5), milk, breasts,
lakes.
Mazoea (n. 5), custom, habit;
(inv. adj.), tame, friendly,
gentle.
Mazungnmzo (n. 5), conversation,
amusement.
Mbali (adv.), far, far away, far
off, distant, distinct, different.
Mbalimbali, unlike, dissimilar,
separate, distinct.
Mbambakofi (n. 2), African tree
bearing remarkable seed-pods.
Mbambo (sing, ubambo) (n. 7),
wing-bones.
Mbao (n. 7), boards, benches,
planks.
Mbao mweusi, black board.
Mbari (n. 3), kinsman, relative.
Mbaruwai (n. 3), swallow.
Mbavu (n. 7) (sing, ubavu), ribs,
side.
Mbawa (n. 7) (sing, ubawa), wing,
feathers.
Mbawaa (n. 3), gazelle, hind,
antelope.
Mbawazi (n. 3), pity, compassion.
Mbazi (n. 3), mercy, compassion ;
(2) bean-plant.
Mbega (n. 3), Colobus monkey,
dandy.
Mbele (adv.), in front, before,
primarily, previously, forward.
Mbele ya (adv. prep.), in front of,
prior to.
Mbeleni, in the future, on before.
Mbeyu, mbeu (n. 3), seed, grain.
Mbigili (n. 2), thistle.
Mbi (mbwi), enclitic denoting
badness.
Mbili (num. adj.), two.
Mbili kasu roboo, If (lit. two less
a quarter).
Mbili-tatu, two or three, a few,
some.
200
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mbili kimo. dwarf, pigmy.
Mbiliwili (n. 2), thistle.
Mbingu (n. 7) (sing, uwingu),
heaven, sky, heavens ; Zina
mawingu, it is cloudy ; Zime-
takata, it has cleared.
Mbinja (n. 7), whistle, whistling ;
Kupiga mbinja, to whistle.
Mbio (n. 3), running, race, speed ;
Kupiga mbio, to run.
Mbiombio (adv.), very fast, at
high speed.
MbisM (n. 1), jester, caviller,
scornful person.
Mbiyu, mbiu (n. 3), buffalo-horn,
announcement made by beat-
ing buffalo-horn, hence pro-
clamation.
Kupiga mbiu, to issue decree,
to make proclamation.
Mbizi (n. 2), dive ; Kwenda mbizi,
to dive.
Mboga (n. 3), vegetable (see note
2, Study VI.).
Mbona? (inter, adv.), why? for
what reason ? how is it ?
Mboni (n. 3), apple (or pupil) of
the eye, something greatly
prized and cared for.
Mbono (u. 2), castor oil plant.
Mbu (n. 3), mosquito, gnat.
Mbuba (j>uba) (n. 3), a skin
disease, the yaws.
Mbuji (n. 1), clever person,
skilled, skilful, able, capable,
adept.
Mbuni (n. 1), inventor, founder,
author, composer.
Mbuni (n. 3), ostrich.
M'buni (n. 2), coffee-plant.
Mburuk'enge (n. 3), monitor,
lizard.
Mbuyu (n. 2), baobab tree.
Mbuzi(n. 3), goat; Mwana-mbuzi,
kid.
Mbuzi (n. 3), iron utensil for
scraping cocoa-nuts.
M'bwa (M'mbwa) (n. 3), dog.
Mbwa (equals ni wa, contracted
poss. pronoun), whose? of
whom?
Mbwako (equals ni wako).
Mbwao (equals ni wao) ; etc.
Mbweha (n. 3), fox, jackal.
Mbwiji (mbwiaji) (n. 1), beast of
prey (from gwia).
Mcha Mngu (n. 1), one who fears
God, godly man.
Mchaji (n. 1), one who fears.
Mchiro (n. 3), mongoose.
Mchoo (n. 3), lesser rains about
July.
Mchungwa (n. 2), orange tree
(see note 5, Study XIV.).
Mchuruzi (n. 1), small tradesman,
middleman.
Mdalasini (n. 3), cinnamon.
BLZanganyifu (n. 1), deceiver,
imposter.
Mdauwa, mcZawa (n. 1), adver-
sary, legal opponent, litigant,
defendant.
Mdeni (n. 1), debtor.
Mdhabidhabina (n. 1), busybody.
Mdhambi (n. 1), sinner.
Mdhamini, sponsor, surety.
Mdimu (n. 2), lemon-tree.
Mdomo (n. 2), lip, beak, mouth,
bill.
Mdudu (n. 1), insect, worm,
vermin.
Mdumu (n. 2), jug, mug.
Mduwara (inv. adj.), round, cir-
cular, spherical.
(Ku)mea (v. intr.), to grow,
spring up, thrive (only used of
vegetable kingdom).
(Ku)mega (v. tr.), to make neat
handful of food for eating.
Meko (n. 5) (sing, jiko), kitchen,
fire-place, stove.
(Ku)meleza (v. c.), to cause to
grow or spring up.
Meli (n. 3), mail steamer.
(Ku)memetnka (v. intr.), to glitter,
sparkle, shine.
(Ku)mena (v. tr.), to slight, to
despise.
SWAH1LI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
201
Yenenzi (n. 5), conduct, behaviour,
walk.
(Zu)menya (v. tr.), to break or
divide (of food).
(Ku)meta (v. intr.), to shine,
glisten.
Meza (n. 3), table.
(Ku)meza (v. c.), to cause to grow
or spring up.
Mfano (n. 2), pattern, likeness,
image, figure, similitude,
simile.
Mfano wa, like, similar to, such
as, according to.
Mfaransa (n. 1), Frenchman.
Mfariji (n. 1), comforter.
Mfaume(mfalme) (n. 1), king,
chief, emperor.
Mfenesi (n. 2), jack-fruit tree.
Mfilisi (n. 1), auctioneer.
Mflnanzi (n. 1), potter.
Mfitini (n. 1), traitor.
Mforosaji (n. 2), sycamine tree.
Mfu (n. 1), dead person.
Mfuasi (n. 1), follower, disciple,
adherent.
Mfugo (n. 2), flock, any beast of
pasture.
Mfuko (n. 2), bag, pocket.
Mfulizo (n. 2), haste.
Mfundo (n. 2), grudge, bad feel-
ing ; kiKukulia mfundo = to
owe a grudge.
Mfungo (n. 2), fasting-gift sent
during Samadhan.
Mfunguo (u. 2), month (see
Page of Metals).
Mfupa (u. 2), bone.
Mfuzi (n. 1), forger of silver.
Mfyozi (n. 1), abusive person.
Mganda (n. 2), sheaf.
Mganga (n. 1), witch-doctor,
medicine-man.
Mgemi (n. 1), man who taps cocoa-
nut trees for palm- wine.
Mgeni (n. 1), stranger, visitor,
guest, foreigner.
Mgomba (n. 1), banana or plan-
tain tree.
Mgomvi (n. 1), quarrelsome per-
son.
Mgongo (n. 2), back.
Mgonjwa (n. 1), sick person.
Mg'umba (n. 2), iron hook at-
tached to arrow-head.
Mgwisho (n. 2), long tail of black
hair used by witch-doctors.
Mhalifu (n. 1), transgressor, male-
factor, rebel.
Mharibifu (n. 1), destroyer.
Mhimili (n. 2), beam, girder.
Mhirabu (n. 2), pulpit.
Mhiiaji (n. 1), needy person.
Mhubiri (n. 1), preacher.
Mia (n. & adj.), hundred; Mia
mbili, two hundred.
Miateni, mifeni, two hundred.
Miayu (n. 3), yawn ; Kwenda
miayu, to yawn.
Mic/irara (adv.), ever, always.
Mie(miye) (proii.), familiar form
of tnimi-
Mijuto (n. G, pi.), swollen rivers.
Mikaha (n. 3), marriage.
Mikojo (n. 2, pi.), urine.
Mila (takes cl. 2 concords in the
plural, n. 3), sect.
MUele (n. & adv.), eternity, for
ever, eternally, through eter-
nity.
(Ku)miliki (v. tr.), to govern,
reign, rule, possess, to afford.
Mil'ki (n. 3), dominion, power,
territory governed, possession.
Mimba (n. 3), pregnancy, concep-
tion ; (Xu)fungua mimba, to
give birth.
Mimbari (n. 3), pulpit, reading-
desk.
Mimi (sep. pron.), I, me.
(Ku)mimina (v. tr.), to pour, pour
out.
Mingurumo'(n. 2, pi.), thundering,
alarms, terrors.
Miongo (n. 2), decades.
Miraji (n. 3) feast-day, holiday.
Mishabaka (misharabaka) (n. 2,
pi.), carving.
202
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Misheni (n. 3), mission, mission-
station.
Misiri (prop, n.), Egypt.
Mitanga (n. 2, pi.), light earth.
Mithali (n. 3), proverb, hypo-
thesis, parable, allegory ; Mi-
thali na, supposing.
Mitilizi (n. 2, pi.), eaves of roof,
ground under the eaves.
Miuja (n. 2), perils, dangers,
billows, breakers.
Miujiza (n. 2, pi. of Muujiza).
Miwa (see Muwa).
Miwani (n. 2), spectacles, eye-
glasses.
Miyaa (n. 2, pi.), palm-leaf slips,
used in plaiting mats, etc.
(see Muwaa).
(Ku)miza (v. tr.), to swallow.
Mizani (n. 3), balance, scales.
Mizi (n. 2), small roots, suckers,
tendrils.
Mja (n. 1), slave; Mjakazi (n. 1),
female slave.
Mjane (n. 1), widow.
Mjanja (n. 1), sharper, cheat,
swindler.
Mjeledi (n. 2), whip, lash.
Mjenzi (n. 1), builder.
Mji (n. 2), town, village, hamlet.
Mjinga (n. 1), fool, simpleton,
stupid, duffer, green horn.
Mjisi kafiri (n. 2), small house
lizard.
Mjoli (n. 1), fellow-slave.
MjombV (n. 1), maternal uncle, a
Swahili.
Mjukuu (n. 1), grand child.
Mjumbe (n. 1), messenger.
Mjuvi (n. 1), one who knows
(also Mjua).
Mkaa (n. 1), dweller.
Mkakamava (adj.), sharp, clever.
Mkakasi (n. 2), ornamental box
(round).
Mkalimani (n. 1), interpreter.
Mkanju (n. 2), cashew-nut, tree.
Mkaragazo (n. 2), downpour,
" burst " of monsoon.
Mkata (n. 1), poor man.
Mkatale (n. 2), stocks (for feet).
Mkate (n. 2), loaf of bread, bread ;
Mkate m<anra, cake.
Mkazi (n. 1), dweller.
Mke (n. 1). woman, wife, female.
Mkebe (n. 2), tin, cannister.
Mkeka (n. 2), mat.
Mkia (n. 2), tail.
Mkimbizi (n. 1), fugitive.
MMndani (n. 1), opponent, enemy.
Mkindu (n. 2), species of palm-
tree, leaves of which yield line
fibre for making mats.
(Ku)mkini (v. intr.), to be prob-
able (see Yamkini).
Mkiwa (n. 1), poor man.
Mkizi (n. 2), a fish.
Mkoba (u. 2), pocket, wallet.
Mkoko (n. 2), mangrove tree.
Mkoma (n. 1), leper ; (n. 2),
branched or hyphene palm-tree.
Mkoma manga (n. 2), pome-
granate-tree.
Mkombozi (n. 1), redeemer.
Mk'ondo (n. 1), enemy, adversary.
Mkondo (n. 2), current, stream,
flood, torrent, way, trail.
Mkongojo (u. 2), staff.
Mkono (n. 2), hand, arm, hand
(measure), cubit.
Mkorofi (n. 1), rogue, wicked
person.
Muubwa (n. 1), chief, elder.
Mkufu (n. 2), chain.
Mkufunzi (n. 1), teacher.
Mkuki (n. 2), spear.
Mkulima (n. 1), agriculturist,
husbandman, farmer.
Mkumbuu (n. 2), girdle, belt.
Mkunazi (n. 2), tropical tree with
small green or yellow fruit.
Mkunga (n. 1), midwife.
Mkungu (n. 2), sweet almond tree.
Mkungu (n. 2), bunch.
Mkunguru (n. 2), climatic attack.
Mkut'ano (u. 2), crowd, meeting,
assemblage, company, congre-
gation.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
203
Mkuu (n. 1), chief, great man.
Mkwaju (n. 2), tamarind tree.
Mkwasi (n. 1), rich man, prince.
Mkwavi (n. 1), a niasai.
Mkwe (n. 1), parcnt-in-law, son-
in-law, daughter-in-law.
Mia (also mlaji) (n. 1), cater.
Mlafi (n. 1), glutton.
Mlango (n. 2), door, gate, entrance.
Mlango (n. 2), chater, lineage,
tribe, branch of family.
Mle (adv.), in there, inside it.
Mlegevu (n. 1), desultory, pleg-
matic person, 'one who is pur-
poseless, lax, slack, lazy.
Mlekevu (n. 1), upright, straight-
forward person.
Mlele (n. 2), long tail feathers of
a bird.
Mlevi (n. 1), drunkard.
Mleza (n. 2), buoy, harbour mark.
Mlezi (n. 1), nurse, a bringer-up
of children.
Mlikuu (n. 1), great-great grand-
child.
Mlima (n. 2), mountain.
Mlimbolimbo (u. 2), thorn bush
(used for hedge).
Mlimau (n. 2), lemon tree.
Mlimwengu (n. 1), inhabitant of
•world.
Mlingoti (n. 2), mast, flagstaff.
Mlinzi (n. 1), guard, keeper,
guardian, watchman.
Mlio (n. 2), cry, sound, noise (of
bird, beast, etc.).
Mlishi (n. 1), shepherd, feeder,
provider.
Mlizamo (n. 2), gutter, shoot,
cataract, trench, ditch, water-
spout (?).
Mlizi (n. 1), professional mourner.
Mmande (n. 3), land-breeze that
blows in the early morning.
Mmasihia (n. 1), Christian.
Mmea (u. 2), crop, growth.
M'miji (n. 1), citizen-member of
a federation.
Mnaanaa (n. 2), mint.
Mnar/a (n. 2), auction.
Mnadi (n. 1), auctioneer.
Mnanasi (n. 2), pine-apple plant.
Mnandi (n. 2), cormorant.
Mnara (n. 2), tower, minaret.
Mnasara (n. 1), Christian.
Mnazi (n. 2), cocoa-nut palm tree ;
Mnazi-mkinda (n. 2), young
cocoa-nut palm tree.
Mnenea (n. 1), accuser, one who
speaks against.
Mneni (n. 1), orator, speaker.
Mng'aro (n. 2), brightness.
Mngazija (prop, n.), Comoro
islander.
Mngereza (n. 1, pi. Wengereza),
Englishman.
Mngqjezi (n. 1), minister, servant.
Mngu (n. 1), God (pi. waungu).
Mngumi (n. 2), whale.
Mno (adv.), exceedingly, very
much, greatly.
Mnyamavu (n. 1), silent laciturn
person.
Mnyanga'nyi (n. 1), robber.
Mnyap'ara (n. 1), headman of
caravan.
Mnyau (n. 2), old cat.
Mnyoo (n. 2), worm, prison-
chain.
Mnyororo (n. 2), chain, fetter.
Mofa (n. 3), small native cake or
bun, originally the oven in
which they were baked.
Moja (num. adj.), one, single.
Mola, God.
Molina, our Lord (Mohammedan
name for God).
Membee (n. prop.), Bombay.
Mori (n. 3), grease, tallow, fat.
M'osha (n. 1), corpse-washer.
Moshi (n. 2), smoke (mioshi, pi.) ;
(Ku)fuka moshi (v. intr.), to
smoke (of chimney, etc.).
Mosi (num. adj.), one (in count-
ing).
Moto (n. 2, pi. myoto), fire, heat ;
Kazi moto, quick work.
Mou, old form of maguu ; Nashika
204
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
mou, slave's expression of hum-
ble submission.
M'oyo (n. 2, pi. myoyo, also nyoyo) ,
heart— organ of life, inind,
courage, pluck ; (Ku)shiriki
moyo, to give way to one's de-
sires, to be proud, overbearing,
self-satisfied.
Mpagazi (n. 1), porter, carrier,
bearer.
Mpaji (n. 1), giver, generous
person.
Mpak'a (prep.), until, as far as,
up to.
Mpaka (n. 2), boundary, limit,
border; (Ku)rupa mpaka, to
exceed the limit.
Mpamba (n. 2), cotton plant.
Mpambe (n. 1), serving maid.
Mpango (n. 2), host, rank, troop.
Mpanzi (n. 1), sower, planter.
Mpapayu (n. 2), papaw tree.
Mpatanishi (n. 1), peacemaker,
mediator.
Mpelekwa (n. 1), missionary,
sent-one.
Mpelelezi (n. 1), spy.
Mpentfezi (n. 1), flatterer, ingrati-
ating person.
Mpenzi (n. 1), beloved, loved one,
favourite, dear one.
Mpera (n. 2) guava trees.
Mpilipili (n. 2), red pepper
tree.
Mpingamizi (n. 1), adversary,
opponent.
Mpingu (n. 2), ebony tree.
Mpini (n. 2), handle.
Mpira (n. 2), rubber tree.
Mpira (n. 2), caoutchouc, india-
rubber, hence india-rubber ball
of any kind.
Mpishi (n. 1), cook.
Mpita-ndia (n. 1), passer-by.
Mponyi (n. 1), deliverer.
Mpopoo (n. 2), areca-nut palm.
Mpotevu (n. 1), prodigal, delin-
quent.
Mpotofu (n. 1), wicked, perverse,
capricious person, one who per-
verts others.
Mpumbavu (n. 1), fool.
Mpungufu (n. 1), one who is de-
ficient.
Mpunga (n. 2), rice (in the husk
as it grows).
Mpuuzi (n. 1), silly, empty-
headed person .
Mp'wa (n. 3), shore (from the sea
point of view).
(M)pya (var. adj.), new.
Mrama (n. 2), swaying rolling
motion as of a ship at sea.
MritM (n. 1), heir, inheritor.
Mrongo (n. 1), liar.
Mrututu (n.i2), green vitriol, sul-
phate of copper.
Msaada (n. 2), help, succour,
assistance ; (Ku)mtukulia (mt'u)
msaada, to help, succour, sup-
port (a person).
Msafara (11. 2), caravan.
Msafiri (n. 1), traveller, pilgrim.
Msahafu (n. 2), manuscript copy
of Koran.
Msahala (n. 2), aperient, pur-
gative.
MsaWia (n. 1), helper, assistant,
succourer.
Msaji (n. 2), teak tree, teak wood.
Msaalkheri! good evening ! good
night !
Msala (n. 2), prayer-mat (oval).
Msalaba (n. 2), cross.
Msamaha (n. 2), forgiveness,
pardon, indulgence, respite,
absolution.
Msamba (n. 2)> leg(?); (Ku)piga
msamba, to kick out the leg
when bathing.
Msana (n. 2), piece of skilled
handiwork.
Msangao (n. 2), astonishment.
Msemi (n. 1), speaker, spokes-
man.
Mshahara (n. 2), wages, salary.
Mshairi (n. 1), poet.
Mshare (mshale) (n. 2), arrow.
8WAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
205
Mshari (n. 1), wicked person,
evil one.
Mshenzi (n. 1), heathen, savage,
country bumpkin, uncivilized
person.
Mshinde (n. 1), vanquished per-
son.
Mshindi (n. 1), conqueror, victor.
Mshindo (n. 2), thud, detonation,
report, dull heavy sound.
Mshinsi (n. 1), visitor per diem
(from Shinda).
Mshipa (n. 2), vein, nerve, muscle,
blood vessel.
Msbipi (n. 2), belt, girdle, band,
fishing-line.
Mshirika (n. 1), partner, com-
municant, associate.
Mshi<aki (n. 1), accuser.
Mshoni (n. 1), tailor, sewer.
Mshono (n. 2), seam, join.
Mshumaa (n. 2), candle.
Mshupavu (n. 1), fool, obstinate
fellow, rebellious person.
Mshwaki (n. 2), tootli-brush.
Msi-, prefix, equivalent to Eng.
suffix " less " ; Msiwana, child-
less ; Msikiteko, joyless.
Msiba (n. 2), calamity, affliction,
visitation of God.
Msichana (n. 1), damsel, maiden,
virgin.
Msikiti (n. 2), mosque, church,
chapel, school.
Msikizi (n. 1), hearer, adherent,
one of the faithful.
Msikujua (n. 1), ignoramus.
Msilimu (n. 1), Mohammedan.
Msimato (n. 1), sightless person.
Msimamizi (n. 1), overseer, super-
visor.
Msimbo (n. 2), by-word, proverb,
reproach.
MsinaMari (n. 1), witless per-
son.
Msingi (n. 2), foundation.
Msira (n. 2), miser.
Msifadi (n. 1), expert, adept,
skilled worker.
Msomi (n. 1), reader, lay-reader,
catechist.
Msonge (n . 2), crowd, throng.
Msonobari (n. 2), pine-tree, fir-
tree, deal.
Msonsi (n. 1), hair-dresser.
Msiaarabu (adj.), precocious,
sharp.
Ms/ari (u. 2), line.
Msubukuo (u. 2), blow on cheek,
grazing of the cheek.
Msufi (n. 2), a cotton tree (ctr.
Mpamba).
Msuko (n. 2), weaving, plaiting,
shaking.
Msukosuko (n. 2), tempest, storm.
Msuluhisbi (n. 1), peacemaker,
reconciler.
Msuluhivu (adj.), clever, capable.
Msumari (n. 2), nail, tintack.
Mtsumeno (n. 2), saw.
Mswahili, Msawahili (n. prop.),
a Swahili.
Mtaa (n. 2), quarter, district (of
a town).
Mfaimbo (n. 2), crow-bar.
Mtaji (n. 2), deal (in playing) ;
Mtaji wa ngoma (n. 1), musical
composer.
Mtakatifu (n. 1), saint, holy
person.
Mfali (n. 2), silver anklet.
Mtama (n. 2), millet, Kaffir-
corn.
Mta-mate (n. 1), spitter.
Mtamba (n. 2), heifer.
Mtambo (n. 2), machine, trap,
spring-engine.
BOana (n. 2), daytime, daylight,
midday, day ; Mlana kutwa,
all day long till sunset.
Mtanda (n. 2), strip of dried meat
(cfr. Boer's beltong).
M/anga (n. 2), sand, soil, earth,
mould.
Mtanganyiko (n. 2), gathering or
meeting together, confluence.
Mtangazia (n. 1), announcer,
advertiser.
206
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mtangulizi (n. 1), predecessor,
leader, one in front.
M<auwaa (n. 1), pious, godly
person.
MtewanJa (n. 2), wooden sandal.
Miawi, witch, wizard, sorcerer,
magician.
M<e (n. 2), sprout, shoot, slip,
seedling.
Mtego (n. 2), trap.
Miele (n. 2), husked rice (un-
boiled).
Mtembezi (n. 1), gadder-about.
Mtendaji (n. 1), one who acts,
man of action.
Mtenda-kazi (n. 1), worker ;
Mtenda-upuuzi, evil-doer.
Mtende (n. 2), date tree.
Mtengenezea (n. 1), preparcr,
provider.
Mtenzi (n. 1), doer, maker, author,
poet.
Mtepa (n. 2), boat with square
sails.
Mterehemezi, mteremezi (n. 1),
compassionate, merciful person,
one who is friendly.
Mtesi (n. 1), adversary, perse-
cutor.
Mtetea (n. 1), champion; Mtetea
(n. 2), laying-hen.
Mtetemo(wa nti), n. 2, earth-
quake.
Mteule (n. 1), chosen one, elect.
Mteusi (n. 1), feast-maker.
Mti (n. 2), tree, wood, timber,
pole ; a skin disease peculiar
to negro races ; stage of
"mbuba."
M^'i (n. 2), pestle (wooden).
Mtii (n. 1), one who is obedient,
submissive.
Mtikati (n. 2), noon, midday.
Mtilizi (n. 2), gutter, conduit,
piping, guttering ; (pi.), eaves,
ends of eaves (where water
trickles down).
Mtima (n. 2), heart, core (old
Swa.),
ULtindo (n. 2), cutting, pattern,
shape, cut, end.
Miini (n. 2), fig-tree.
Mtitimo (u. 2), thunder.
M/o (u. 2), cushion, pillow ; Mto
(n. 2), river.
Mtofu wa mato (n. 1), blind man,
blind person.
Mtoki (n. 2), swelling and pain
in groin.
M/olea (n. 1), giver.
Mtomoko (n. 2), custard-apple
tree.
Mtondo (u. 2 and adj.), day after
to-morrow : Mtondo goa (n. 2
and adj.), day after that.
Mtoro (n. 1), runaway slave, fugi-
tive. (By implication, also
robber, plunderer, pirate.)
Mtoto (n. 1), child ; Mtoto mcha-
nga, infant.
Mfozi (m/oza) (n. 1), exactor, ex-
tortioner, collector ; M/ozi wa
ushuru, tax-gatherer, publican
(Bible).
Mt'u (n. 1), person, man, someone,
human being.
Mt'u mke (n. 1), woman, female
(adult) ; M'tu mume, man, male
(adult).
Mfti (n. 2), a tree (tamarisk ?)
(willow ?).
Mftiku (n. 1), worthless person.
M^ukufu (n. 1), exalted personage,
man in high rank. -
MtuKutu (n. 1), obstreperous,
fidgetty, unruly person.
Mtakuu (n. 1), great grandchild.
Mfukuzi (n. 1), carrier, bearer,
porter.
Mtulivu (u. 1), one who is sub-
missive, disciplined, tranquil,
obedient.
M/umba (n. 1), sweetheart, fiance'.
Mtumbwi (n. 2), canoe, dug-
out.
Mtume (n. 2), apostle, messenger,
ambassador, emissary, sent-one,
M/umia (n. 1), old man.
SWAHILI-ENGLISn VOCABULARY
207
Mtumishi (n. 1), servant, domestic,
retainer.
Mtumwa (n. 1), slave.
Mtundaufu (n. 2), species of wild
jasmine.
M/unga (n. 1), shepherd.
M/ungi (n. 2), earthen water pot.
Mtungo (n. 2), a string of things
strung together, a number, a
lot.
Mtushi (n. 1), abusive person.
Mftizi (n. 2), gravy, broth, sauce.
M^wa (n. 2), white ant.
Mtwana (n. 1), man slave.
Muajiriwa (n. 1), hired person.'
Muaminifu (n. 1), one who is
faithful, trustworthy.
Muamu (n. 1), brother-in-law,
sister-in-law.
Muamzi (n. 1), arbitrator, judge.
Mnandamo (adj.), following, suc-
ceeding (said of next moon).
Muandazi, or Mwandazi (n. 1),
preparer of food, baker, cook.
Muandishi (see Mwandishi), (n. 1).
Muanga (pi. mianga), (n. 2), light.
Muangaza (n. 2), enlightenment,
light-hole.
Muashi (n. 1), builder.
MucZa (pi. mida) (n. 2), interval
of time, time.
Muedini, or muadini (n. 1), caller
to prayer.
Muerezi (n. 2), cedar tree.
Muhabeshia (n. 1), an Abyssinian.
Muhindi (n. 1), an Indian.
Muhifoji (n. 1), needy person.
Muhogo (n. 2), Cassava.
Muhula (n. 2), appointed time.
Muhtmzi (n. 1), smith, workman.
Muhuri (n. 2), seal, signet.
Muimbaji (n. 1), singer, songster.
Muisilamu (n. 1), Mohammedan.
Mukateba (n. 2), document, writ-
ing, bond.
Ku mulika (v. tr.), to throw light
on, illuminate, lighten, shine.
Mnmbuji (n. 1), maker of nice
things.
Hume (pi. waume) (n. 1), male,
husband, man in contradistinc-
tion to woman.
Mumu-humu (;idv.), in this same
place.
Ku mumunya (v. tr.), to suck,
retain in the mouth without
biting.
Munmnye (n. 5), vegetable
marrow.
Mdu (n. 2). billhook, hatchet,
chopper.
Munyu (u. 2), salt.
Ku mung'unjruka (v. n.), to bo
putrid, decomposed, rotten.
Muoga (n. 1), coward.
Muombaji (n. 1), beggar.
Muombezi (n. 2), intercessor,
mediator.
Muombi (n. 1), one who prays.
Muonewa (n. 1), one who is op-
pressed.
Muongezi (n. 1), amuser.
Muongofu (n. 1), convert, believer.
Muotezi, ormuoteji (n. 1), lier-in-
wait.
Musimu (n. 2), N.E. monsoon,
the hot season (lit. the mon-
soon).
Muuaji (n. 1), murderer.
Muujiza (n. 2), miracle.
Muumba (n. 1), creator.
Muungwana (n. 1), person of
gentle birth, free man.
Muwa (n. 2), sugar cane; pi.,
miwa.
Muwaa (n. 2), dwarf fan palm;
pi. miaa.
Muali (n. 2), flame ; pi. miyali.
Muwanga (sec nmanga).
Muweza (n. 1), one who is able
(used of God).
Muwili, mwili (n. 2), body, flesh,
form.
Mvi (n. 2), arrow.
Mvi (n.7, pi), grey or white hair.
MvinJe (n. 2), the casuarina.
Mvinyn (n. 3), wine.
Mvite (prop, n.), Mombasa.
208
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mviringo (n. 2), round, round-
ness, sphere.
M'vo (pi. mivo) (n. 2), flood.
Mvua (n. 3), rain.
Mvuke (n. 2), steam, vapour,
incense.
Mvuli (n. 1), young man.
Mvumo (n. 2), borassus palm.
Mvungu (n. 2), hollow space, as
under a bed.
Mvuvi (n. 1), fisherman.
Mwa (var. prep. cl. 10, following
locative), in, within, to, into.
Ku mwaika (v. intr.), to be spilt.
Mwaka (pi. myaka) (n. 2), year,
season of great rains ; Mwakani,
in the year's time.
Mwakani, in the south.
Mwalimu (n. 1), teacher, pro-
fessor, learned man.
Mwalio (n. 2), wound. Wood put
at the bottom of cooking pot to
prevent food burning.
Mwalishi (n. 1), inviter to a
feast.
Mwamba (pi. myamba) (n. 2), rock.
Ridge pole of native house.
Mwamnda (n. 2), garden fruits.
Mwamzi (n. 1), judge, arbitrator.
Mwana (pi. wana) (n. 1), child,
son, daughter, mistress, queen.
Mwanafunzi (n. 1), scholar, pupil,
disciple.
Mwanamke (pl.wanawake) (n. 1),
woman, female.
Mwanamume (pi. wanawaurae)
(n. 1), man, male.
Mwanamwali (n. 1), virgin,
maiden who has not yet left
her father's house.
Mwandamizi (n. 1), follower,
successor, companion.
Mwandani (pi. wandani or wen-
dani) (n. 1), friend, companion,
fellow acquaintance.
MwanfZa-wazinro (n. 1), lunatic,
idiot.
Mwandishif(n. 1), writer, scribe,
butler.
Mwanrfo (n. 2), pasture-fields,
hamlet of skepherds' huts.
Mwanga (n. 1), witch.
Mwango (u. 2), lamp-stand,
luminary.
Mwangwi (n. 2), echo (usually
mwengo).
Mwanya (n. 2), defile, narrow
alley, space between teeth.
Mwanza (n. 2), instrument <>f
witchcraft.
Mwanzamkwa (n. 1), Name of
God (equals Maker and Up-
briuger).
Mwanzi (u. 2), reed, bamboo,
cane ; pi. myanzi.
Mwanzo (n. 2), beginning.
Mwao (n. 3), under support; Kwa
.mwao, properly, well done.
Mwarabu (n. 1), an Arab.
Mwari (n. 2), pelican.
Mwavuli (n. 2), umbrella, sun-
shade.
Ku mwaya or mwaga (v. tr.), to
spill, throw away ; Ku mwaya
matozi, to shed tears ; ku
mwaya raaneno, to talk at
random.
Mwele (n. 1), sick person,
Mwembe (n. 2), mango tree.
Mwembembe (n. 1), wild bee.
Mwenda (n. 1), he who goes.
Mwenendo, mwendo (n. 2), going,
gait, living, conduct, walk,
life.
Mwenge (n. 2), torch.
Mwenyeji (pi. wenyeji) (n. 1),
citizen, townsman, subject,
inhabitant, host.
Mwenyewe (n. 1), possessor,
owner ; Mimi mwenyewe, my-
self.
Mwenyi (sec enyi) (n. 1) ; Mwenyi
deni, creditor ; Mwenyi duka,
shopkeeper.
Mwenyiezi (lit. Mwenyi enzi)
(adj.), having majesty, power,
Almighty (always coupled with
God).
SWAHILI-ENQLISH VOCABULARY
209
Mwenzi (n. 1), companion, fellow,
comrade.
Mwewe (n. 3), kite, hawk.
Mwezi (n. 2), moon, month ;
Mwezi mwandamo, next month.
Mwiba (pi. miba) (n. 2), thorn.
Mwiko (pi. miko) (n. 2), large
spoon.
Mwimbaji (n. 1) ; sec muimbaji.
Mwindaji (n. 1), hunter, sports-
man.
Mwinyi (n. 1), Lord.
Mwiro (n. 2), trunk, proboscis.
Mwisho (n. 2), end, termination.
Mwito (n. 2), call, calling, elec-
tion.
Mwitu (n. 2), forest, jungle,
wood, bush.
Mwivi (pi. wevi) (n. 1), thief.
Mwoga, muoga (n. 1), coward,
poltroon.
Mwokozi (u. 1), Saviour.
Mwongo (n. 1), liar.
Mwoni (n. 1), teer.
Myanzi or inianzi, pi. of Mwanzi.
Myongo, see miongo. Myongoni
mwa (prepl. phiasc), among, in
the company of.
Mza (n. 1), seller.
Mzabibu (n. 2), vine, grapes.
Mzaha (n. 2), scorn, levity,
ridicule.
Mzalia (n. 1), native or coast-
born slave.
Mzalishi (n. 1), midwife, ac-
coucher.
Mzaliwa-mbele (D. 1), first-born.
Mzamishi (n. ]), baptizer (lit. one
svho causes to sink).
Mzazi (n. 1), parent.
Mzee (u. 1), old man, elder, chief.
Mzeituni (n. 2), olive tree.
Mzi (n. 2), rootlet, sucker, feeler.
Mzigo (n. 2), burden, load.
Mzinga (n, 2), canon, native bee-
hive.
MzisM (n. 1), burier, undertaker.
Mzoga (n. 2), carrion, corpse of
uncircuincised.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Mzungu (n. 1), an European.
Mzushi (n. 1), one who invents.
Mzuzi (n. 1), a tale-bearer.
N
N', abbreviated form of Ni.
Na (conj.), and, also; (prep.)
with.
Naam (adv.), yes (classical).
Naanaa (n. 3), mint.
Nabii (n. 6), prophet.
Nadhari (n. 3), caution, discretion.
Nadhiri (n. 3), vow ; Ku-weka
nadhiri, to make a vow ; Ku
ondoa nadhiri, to pay a vow.
Ku nadi (v. tr.), to sell by auction.
Nafaka (n. 3), corn, cereal, grain.
Nafasi (n. 3), space, room, oppor-
tunity, leisure, time.
Nafiki (n. 5), hypocrite.
Ku nafisi (v. tr.), to provide
means for development.
Nafusi, nafsi (n. 3), person, self,
soul, individual, soul-subject of
life.
Nafuu (n. 3), salvation, deliver-
ance.
Nahao (n. 3), grammar.
Nahodha (n. 3), captain of vessel.
Najisi (n. 3), defilement, pollution.
Nakishi (n. 3). cuiving, engraving,
art of curving.
Ku nakishika (v. n.), to be well
carved.
Ku nakishiwa (v. pass.), to bo
carved in relief, to be inlaid.
Namba (n. 3), turtle.
Kami (conj. pron.), and I, with
me.
Namna (n. 3), sort, kind, pattern ;
Namna-namna, all sorts.
Nanasi (n. 5), pine apple.
Nane (num. adj.), eight.
Nanga (n. 3), anchor.
Ku nang'anika (v. n.), to shine,
as with oil.
Nani ? (inter, pron.) who ? whom ?
0
210
S\VAHILI GRAMMAR
Ku nanua (v. tr.), to loosen,
undo.
Nao (conj. pron.), and, or with,
them.
Ku nasibisha (v. c.), to naturalize.
Nasibu (n. 3), accident, mishap,
chance.
TSa.tha.ri (n. 3), common sense,
discretion.
Nauli (n. 3), fare,, passage money,
freight.
Ku navya (v. c.), to partially wash
another.
Ku nawa (v. tr.), to wash the
hands, face, or feet.
Ku nawiri (v. intr.), to shine.
Nazaa (n. 3), notoriety, exposure,
publicity.
Nazi (n. 3), cocoanut.
Nda, cotr. form of Ni ya.
Ndaa (n. 3), hunger, famine ;
Ndaa k'uu, great scarcity.
Ndago (u. 3), weed, rush having
small tubers attached t> the
roots which have a sweet aro-
matic smell. Genus cyperus,
sweet cane of scripture.
Ndakaka (n. 3), horizontal roof-
sticks.
Ndako, rntr. form of Ni yako.
NcZama (n. 3), calf, heifer.
NfZangu, coir, form of Ni yangu.
Ndari (adv.), iuside, within ;
Ndani ya (advl. prop.), in, into,
inside.
NfZao, cont. form of Ni yao.
Ndau (n. 3), baling ladle.
NYZe (adv.), out, outside; N'de
ya (advl. prep.), outside of.
Ndege (n. 3), bird, Zanzibar
dialect.
NtZenge (n. 3), he-goat.
Ndeo (n. 3), surfeiting, excess,
drunkenness.
NfZeremo (n. 3),- rejoicing, ex-
pression of joy, merry-making.
Nrferi (n. 3), eagle, vulture.
Ndevu (pi. n. 7), beard; TTdevu,
ia a single hair of the beard.
Ndewe (n. 3), perforated car-lobe,
for insertion of ornament.
Ndi, pronominal copula, used in
conjunction with pronouns it
forms the Amphatic Present of
the Verb To be ; Ndimi, it is I.
NfZia (n. 3), way, pith, road,
street ; Ndia ya kukata, a
short cut. Also, course of
action, straight course, sound
judgment.
Ndimi, see Ulimi.
Ndimu (n. 3), lime, fruit.
Ndimu za kali, sour limes ; Ndimu
za tamu, sweet limes.
Ndiposa (conj.), therefore.
Ndivyo (adv.), thus it is.
NcZiwa (n. 3), dove, pigeon,
turtle-dove ; NfZiwa manga,
tamo pigeon.
Ndiyo (udv.), yes (lit. they) ;
mambo, arc so.
Ndizi (n. 3), banana, plantain
(see Mgomba).
Ndoa (n. 3), nurriagc.
Ndole (n. 3), big-toe, claw.
Ndongo (n. 3), land, earth, soil.
Ndoj (n. 3), bucket, pail.
NrZoo (Irreg. imp. of verb Ku ja),
come.
Ndoto (n. 3), dreim, vision.
NcZovu (n. 3), elephant.
Ndugu (n. 3), brother, sister,
cousin, relative ; Ndugu baba
mmoja, mama mmoja, own
brother or sister ; Ndugu mama
mmoja baba mbalimbali, or rice
vtrsd, half-brother or sister.
Ndugu mke, sister, fomilo
cousin ; Ndugu mume, brother
or male cousin.
Ndui (n. 3), smallpox (sec Tete).
Nduli (n. 3), angel of death.
Nduma-kuwili (n. 3), double-
mouthed snake (so-called).
Ndume, third concord of mume.
Nduni (n. 3), new wonder, pretty
novelty.
Nduu (n. 3), ground-nut.
SWA HI LI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
211
Ndwele, Ndwee (n. 3), sickness,
disease.
Ndweo (n. 3), pride.
Neema (n. 3), grace, prosperous
season, plenty, favour, luxury.
Ku neemeka (v. n.), to become
prosperous, to be blessed or
favoured.
Ka neemesha (v. c.), to bless, be
gracious to, prosper.
Nemsi (n. 3), luxury, opulence,
high estate.
Ku nena (v. intr.), to speak, utter,
say.
Ku nenea (v. prepl.), to speak
against, accuse.
Ku neneka (v. n.), to be possible
to say, pronounceable,
nene (var. adj.), thick, stout,
dense, fat, corpulent.
Ku nenepa (v. intr.), to become
fat or stout (of persons).
Neno (u. 5), word, saying, thing,
matter.
Nga or Ngaa (adj.), just so much
as, just a little, like even ;
Huna ngaa pesa moja ? Have
you not even a pice ?
Ku ng'aa, or ng'ara (v. iutr.), to
shine, glitter, be bright or
conspicuous.
Ng'ambu (u. 3), the other side,
opposite shore (of river, etc.).
Ngamia (n. 3), camel.
Ngano in. 3), tale, story.
Nganu (n. 3), wheat.
Ngao (n. 3), shield,
-ngapi? (var. adj. of quan.), how
much ? how many ?
Ngarawa (n. 3), small canoe
(familiarly called galawa).
Ku ng'ariza (v. c.), to polish.
Ngawa (n. 3), large civet cat.
-ngawa, or -nga (verbal infix),
although, notwithstanding, in
spite of existing circumstances.
Ngawa (conj. and interj.), though,
Oh that, if only (followed by
negative).
Ngawa hakuchi, Oh that it
would dawn, would that it
were morning.
Ngazi (n. 3), ladder.
Ku ng'azia (v. prepl.), to show
light to, illuminate, lighten.
Ngazija (n. prop.), Great Comoro,
-nge, -ngeli, -gall, infixes of the
conditional mood.
Ng'ge (n. 3), scorpion ; Kitumbo
ng'ge.
-ngi (var. adj. qnan.), many,
much.
Ku ngia (v. intr.), to go or come
in, enten See Note 9, Study
XVI.
Ku ngilika (v. n.), to be open,
accessible.
-ngine (var. adj.), other.
Ngisi (n. 3), cuttle-fish.
Ku ngiwa ni khofu, to be seized
by ftar, experience, feel.
Ku jingiza (v. ref.), to introduce
oneself, intrude, meddle.
Ng'ngwe (n. 3), border, boundary ;
(pi. 7), line, cord.
Ngoa (n. 3), lust, carnal appetite,
envy, longing; Ku lilia ngoa,
to long for.
Ku ng'oa (v. tr.), to uproot, pull
up, root out, destroy.
Ku ngoa k'ome, to pull up the
caravan flag, start the day's
march.
Ku ngoja (v. intr.), to wait, have
patience.
Ku ngojea, to wait for, wait upon.
Ku keti kingojo, to keep watch,
wait, lie in wait.
Ngoja kwLiiza, wait a bit, wait a
minute.
Ku ng'oka (v. n.), to be rooted up.
Ku ng'olea (v. prepl.), to root out
by, with or for, etc.
Ngoma (n. 3), drum, dance, ball ;
Ku piga ngoma, to beat drum ;
Ku teza ngoma, to dance.
Ng'ombe (n. 3), ox, cow, bull,
cattle.
212
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ngome (Q. 3), fort, fortress,
castle ; hence prison.
Ku ng'ong'o (v. intr.), to speak
nasally.
Ng'ongo (n. 7 pi.), strips of
miyaa, with harsh inner edge.
Ngovi (n. 3), skin, hide, leather.
Ngumi (n. 3), fist dowuwards.
Ku piga ngumi, to cuff, box.
Nguo (n. 3), cloth, stuff, material,
clothes.
Kn nguruma (v. intr.), to roar,
thunder.
Ngurumo (n. 3), roaring, thunder.
nguu (n. 3), peak of hill, height.
Nguu, or nguru (n. 3), salt fish
imported from Arabia.
Nguvu (n. 3), strength, power,
authority, might, force.
Nguwe, nguruwe (n. 3), pig,
swine, hog.
Nguzo (n. 3), pillar, post, stake,
column, support.
Ngwa, God (used in ejaculatory
prayers).
Ngwena (n. 3), crocodile.
Ni (prep.), by (precedes the agent
after a passive verb).
Ni (simple copula or weak verb
To Be), is, are.
-ni (obj. infix first pers. sing.), me.
-ni? (abbreviated form of Nini?),
what, whatever ; Ujapopawani,
whatever you might be given.
-ni (locative termination to sub-
stantives having the force of
almost any preposition of
place).
Nia (n. 3), mind, intention, dis-
position, heart.
Nikali (first per. sing, continua-
tion tense), I em still.
Nili (n. 3), laundry blue.
Nili (idiomatical Part. Tense of
To Be), I being.
Nimilete (n. 3), lemonade.
Nina, I have.
Nina (n. 3), old word for mother.
Ninga (n. 3), green dove.
Nini? (pron.), what?
Nira (n. 3), yoke.
Njama (n. 3), secret council,
mystery.
Njozi (n. 3), walnuts, vision.
Njuga (u. 3), bells (worn as
ornaments).
Njugu (u. 3), ground-nuts (Zan-
zibar dialect).
Nne (num. adj.), four.
Ku noa (v. tr.), to sharpen, whet.
Ku nona (v. intr.), to get fat (of
animals).
Nondo (n. 3), clothes-moth.
Ku nong'ona (v. iiitr.), to whisper.
Ku nong'oneza (v. tr.), to whisper
to.
Nokoa (n. 5), overseer, foreman.
Nodsi (n. 3), public notice.
-nsha (idiomatic perfect of kwisha ;
see Note 1, Study IV.
Nt'a (n. 3), wax, secretion.
Ni'a (n. 3), point, end.
Ht'i (n. 3), earth, ground, land.
Nt'i (n. 3), earrings.
Nt'i (adv.), on the ground.
Nd (n. 3), chart.
N/ i ya t'ambarare, plain, flat,
open country.
Ku nuka (v. intr.), to smell,
stink, emit an odour or per-
fume.
Ku nuka (v. tr.), to smell, per-
ceive by the nose.
Numbi (n. 3), draught or haul of
fish, fishing-line.
Ku nuna (v. intr.), to grumble,
scowl, growl, grunt, pout.
Nundu (n. 3), hump iu cattle, etc.
Nugnu (n. 3), porcupine.
Ku nung'unika (v. intr.), to
grumble, murmur, complain.
Ku nunua (v. tr.), to buy, pur-
chase.
Ku nunuliwa (v. pass.), to be
bought.
Nuru (n. 3), light, brightness.
Ku nusa, tumbaku (v.tr.), to take
snuff.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
213
Nusu (n. 3), half; Nusu-saa,
half an hour.
Nusura (adv.), nearly, within a
hair's breadth of.
Ku nusuru (v. tr.), to protect.
Ku nwa (v. tr.), to drink, absorb
(imperative, Nwaa).
Ku jinwea (v. ref.), to quench
one's thirst at.
Ku nweka, to be drinkable.
Ku nwesheleza (v. c.), to water,
drench.
Ku nwisha, Ku nwesha (v. c.), to
give drink to, make to drink.
Ku nya, to fall, as rain ; Mvua
yanya, it rains.
Ku nyakua (v. tr.), to pick or
snatch up, catch away.
Nyama (n. 3), meat, flesh,
animal, game ; Nyama wa
mwitu, wild animal, beast of
the forest.
Ku nyamaa (v. intr.), to be silent,
quiet, hold one's peace.
Ku nyamaza (v. intr.), to stop
talking, by effort of will.
Ku nyamazisha (v. c.), to put to
silence, quiet, still.
Ku nyambnka (v. n.), to fall to
pieces, peel off, itself.
Ku nyang'anya (v. tr.), to rob,
plunder.
Nyani (n. 3), ape.
Nyanya (n. 3), grandmother (also,
tomatoes).
Ku nyanyuka (v. n.), to be
tattered or torn.
Nyara (n. 3), spoil, booty, plunder,
captive (see Ku teka).
Nyasi (sing. TTnyasi, a blade of
grass) ; (n. 7), grass.
Ku nyata (v. intr.), to come
stealthily, steal, creep, to go
softly.
Ku nyata (v. intr.), to be sticky,
as paint not yet dry.
Nyati (n. 3), buffalo, wild-ox.
Ku nyatuka (v. n.), to be hurried,
excited.
Ku nyauka (v. n.), to dry up,
shrivel, wither.
Nyavu (n. 3), net.
Ku nyea (v. intr.), to itch,
irritate, tickle.
Nyemi (n. 3), beauty, joy.
Ku nyenya (v. tr.), to worm in-
formation out of another.
Ku nyenyekea (v. intr. and prepl.),
to be humble, supplicate, en-
treat.
Nyenzo (n. 3), rollers, logs of
wood on which a' boat is
launched.
Ku nyesna (v. c.), to raiu down,
shower down.
Ku nyenyereza (v. tr.), to secrete.
Ku nyete (v. intr.), to be con-
ceited, self-opinionated, self-
important, exult, triumph.
Ku nye^'esha (v. c.), to increase
self-respect, encourage.
Nyie (abbr. form of Nyinywi).
Nyika (n. 3), desert.
Ku nyima (v. tr.), to withhold
from, refuse to give to, deprive
of.
Ku nyoa (v. intr.), to shave.
Ku nyoea (v. intr.), to evaporate,
dry up, subside.
Nyoka (n. 3), snake.
Ku nyoka (v. n.), to be straight,
direct.
-nyonge (var. adj.), weak, mean,
worthless, insignificant.
Nyongo (n. 3), the back (of the
body), bile, gall.
Ku nyong'onea (v. intr.), to feel
numb, languid.
Ku nyonya (v. tr.), to suck.
Ku nyonyesha (v. c.), to suckle.
Ku nyosha (v. c.), to straighten,
stretch.
Ku jinyosha (v. ref.), to lie down.
Nyoshi (n. 7, pi.), smoke.
Nyota (n. 3), star, planet; Nyota
yenyi mkia, comet.
Ku nyonyoa (v. tr.), to pluck
feathers of bird.
SWAHILI QBAMMAB
Nyoya (n. 5), feather.
Nyoyo, see moyo.
Ku nyua (v. tr.), to bite off.
Nyuki (n. 3), bee.
Nynma (adv.), behind, afterwards,
later, back, backwards.
Nyuma ya (adv. prep.), after,
behind, at the back of.
Nyumba (n. 3'), house, cottage,
villa, bungalow.
Nyumbn (n. 3), mule.
Nyumbu-bara (n. 3), \vildebceste.
Nyundo (n. 3), hammer.
Nyungu (n. 3), cooking-pot.
Nyuni (n. 3), bird.
Ku nyunya (v. tr.), to suck, draw
out by suction.
Ku nyunyiza (v. tr.), to sprinkle.
Nyusbi (n. 3), eyebrows.
Nyuta (pi. of uta).
Ny wele (n. 7, pi.), hair ; Unywele,
a single hair.
Nwinywi, or Nywinywi (pron.),
ye, you (pi.).
Nzao (n. 3), bullock, calf.
N'zi (n. 3), a fly.
Nzige (n. 3), locust.
Iszlo (n. 3), a large water-jar.
O
-o (var. poss. suf.) (abbrev. form
of -ako), thy.
Ku oa (v. tr.), to look, behold,
direct eyes.
Ku oa (v. tr.), to marry (said of
the bridegroom): Ku olewa
(v. pass.), to be married (said
of the bride).
Ku oama (v. n.), to be soaked or
steeped, swell iu water or be-
come soft.
Ku oamana (v. n.), to break up,
disintegrate, through being
steeped.
Ku oamisha (v. c.), to soften,
steep in water, soak.
Oga (n. 7), fear, cowardice.
Ku oga (v. intr.), to bathe.
Ku ogelea (v. intr.), to swim.
Ku ogesha (v. c.), to wash, give
a bath to.
Ku ogopa (v. iutr.), to fear, be
afraid.
Ku oka (v. tr.), to bake, roast.
Ku okoa (v. tr.), to save, deliver,
preserve.
Ku okoka (v. n.), to be saved,
escape.
Ku okota (v. tr.). to pick up.
rake together, individual
articles.
Ole (n. 7) (also wele), woe, fate,
God's ordaining or appointing.
Ole mbwangu (interj.), woe is
me, alas.
Ku olea (v. intr.), to float.
Ku olesha (v. c.), to float or sail a
boat.
Ku oleza (v. c.), to make to swim.
Ku omba (v. tr.), to pray, beg.
ask for, beseech.
Ku ombea (v. prepl.), to pray for,
intercede.
Ku omeka (v. tr.), to stick in.
Omo (adv.), forward, in the fore
part of a vessel.
Ku omoa (v. tr.), to spoil by
soaking, to bring to land.
Ku ona (v. tr.), to see, fiiid,
observe, feel ; Ku ona haya
(v. intr.), to feel ashamed.
Ku jiona(v. ref.). to think oneself
to be, boast.
Ku onana (v. rcf.), to meet, see
one another.
Ku onekana (v. n.), to be visible,
appear, be seen, known.
Ku ont?a (v. tr.), to taste, try,
tempt.
Kn ondoa (v. tr.), to take away,
remove.
Ku ondoka (v. n.), to get up, go
away, depart, start, appear on
the scene.
Ku ondolea (v. prepl.), to take
away from.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
215
Ku onea (v. tr.), to oppress, ill-
tr< at ; Ku onea mashaka, to
afflict.
Ku ongea (v. tr. and n.), to in-
crease, become many or much.
Ku ongeza (v. c.), to add, in-
crease, augment.
Ku ongezeka (v. n.), to be capable
of increase, become more.
Ku ongca (v. tr.), to soothe, to
lull a child, lead gently,
plea e.
Ku ongoka(v. n.), to be con verted,
bo le«l aright, to turn out well.
Ku ongokewa, to bo blessed.
Ku cngopa (v. intr.), to lie, to
tell lies.
Ku ongoza (v. tr.), to lead, take
the lead, direct, guide.
Ku onya (v. tr.), to warn, show.
Ku onya (v. intr.), to be trans-
parent.
Ku onyesha (v. c.), to show, indi-
cate, point out.
Ooo (derisive intcrj.), ha ha.
Oowa, hush-a-bye, lullaby.
Ku opoa (v. tr.), to draw up out
of a well, extricate.
Orcfa or Ghorofa (n. 7, no pi.),
top story, upper story, upper
chamber.
-ororo (var. adj.), soft, smooth.
Ku osha (v. tr.), to wash, cleanse.
Ku osheka (v. n,), to be wash-
able.
Ku ota (v. tr.), to sprout, grow ;
(2) to dream.
Kujota moto (v. intr.), to b *sk or
warm oneself by fire ; Ku ota
jua, to bask in the suu.
Ku ctama (v. n.), to sit on one's
heels, squat, crouch.
Ku otamia (v. prepl. ), to sit (of a
hen), hatch.
-ot'e (adj. ), all (see p. ).
Ku otea (v. prep.), to lie in wait
for, waylay, lurk.
-ovu (var. adj.), evil, bad.
Oya (n. 7), small handful.
Ku cza (v. intr.), to rot, be
rotten, putrid, spoil.
Ku oza (v. c.), to marry, perform
marriago ceremony (eaid of
officiating person or parcnte,
guardians).
Pa (var. prep.), of (8th el. con-
cord).
Pa (pronoml. particle, 8th cl.), it,
place.
Ku pa (v. tr.), to give, give to
(requires indirect obj. particle
to be conjugated with it).
Paa (n. 3), gazelle ; (n. 5), side
of sloping roof, roof.
Ku paa (v. iutr.), to ascend,
mount.
Kupaaza (v. tr.), to grind quickly
and coarsely ; Jito lanipaaza,
there is grit or sand in my
eye; Kusaga is to grind finely.
Padiri (n. 5), padre, priest.
Pafu (n. 3), lung.
Ku pagaa (v. tr ), to seize,
(Ku)pagara (v. tr.), to wear
charms (hirizi).
(Ku)pagawa ni pepo, to be pos-
sessed of devil.
Pahali (n. 8), place.
Paja (n. 5), thigh, hip, lap.
Paji(lauso), (or Kipaji cha uso)
(n. 5), forehead.
P'aka (n. 3), cat ; Paka mwitu,
Paka vue, wild cat.
(Ku)paka (v. tr.), to smear, faub,
paint, anoint, rub, spread upon.
(Ku)pakaza (v. c.), to anoint.
Pakacha (n. 5), basket made from
the green cocoa-nut leaves.
(Ku)pakata (v. tr.), to take on the
lap or knee.
(Kujpakia (v. tr.), to take iu
cargo or loads, put on board.
(Ku)pakua (v. tr.), to serve up
(food), dish.
216
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Pale (dem. pron.), there, in that
place (origly. demon, adj. 8th.
cl.).
Palepale, papale (redup. emphat.
pron., for off), just there, or
then ; on that spot, at that
very moment.
(Ku)palia (v. tr.), to choke,
permeate, hoe, dig up.
(Ku)palilia (v. prepl.), to dig
round a growing crop or plant.
(Ku)paliwa sauti, to be choked.
Pamba (n. 3), cotton, cotton wool.
(Ku)pamba (v. tr.), to adorn,
decorate, beautify, bedeck with
ornament.
(Ku)pambanisha (v. tr.), to con-
trast.
(Kn)pambanua (v. tr.), to differ-
entiate, separate, distinguish,
between, to make distinct
from.
(Ku)pambauka (v. n.), to dawn,
break(day), begin to get light.
(Ku)pambanukana (v. n. rec.),
to be contrasted with.
Pambizo (n. 3), the surrounding
border or edge or ornament of
anything, as a table, or a
building, or a church, precincts.
P'ambizoni (naut.), in wedge
shape.
Pampo (n. 5), ornament, decora-
tion (of house).
Pamqja (adv.), together (lit. one
place).
Pamoja na (adv. prep.), with,
together with.
Pana (see note on verb To have,
p. 58), there is, there are.
-pana (var. adj.), broad, wide;
Panapana, flat, level.
(Ku)pana (v. rec.), to give each
other.
Panda (n. 3), trumpet.
(Ku)panda (v. tr.), to plant, sow,
set.
(Ku)panda (v. intr.), to climb,
mount, ascend.
(Ku)panda farasi, to ride a horse.
(Ku)pandisha (v. c.), to raise,
promote, hoist up.
Pande (pi. of upande, cl. 7).
Panga (n. 5), sword (pi. of
upanga, cl. 7).
(Ku)panga (v. tr.), to put or set
out in rows, put in array,
arrange in order, to rent or
hire (a house).
(Ku)jipanga (v. ref.), to set one-
self out to be, aspire to, be
ostentatious.
(Ku)pangana (v. n.), to be spread
out, arranged in order.
(Ku)pangisha (v. c.), (1) to make
people sit in rows ; (2) to let
or lease (a house) to (some-
one).
P ango (n. 3), hole, den, cave.
(Ku)pangusa (v. tr.), to wip^,
rub.
(Ku)panua (v. tr.), to widen,
broaden, stretch, open wide.
Panya (n. 3), rat, mouse.
Panyamavu (n. 8), quiet place,
peaceful spot.
(Ku)panza (v. c.), to slide up on
to.
Panzi (n. 5), grasshopper, cater-
pillar.
Pao (poss. adj.), their, at their
place.
P apa (n. 3), shark.
Papa (adv.), here ; Papahapa
(adv. red.), just here, on this
same spot.
(Ku)papasa (v. tr.), to grope,
touch, feel, with a lingering
touch.
(Ku)papatika (v. intr.), to flap
the wings, flutter.
(Ku)papatua (v intr.), to flourish,
open out.
(Ku)papatuka (v. n.), to blossom.
Papayu (n. 5), Pawapaw fruit.
Papayuka (v. n.), to be light-
headed, delirious.
Papo (dem. pron.), there, then ;
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
217
Papohapo (pron. red. emphat.),
(near by), just then, just there.
Papo hapo (adv.), at that very
moment, at that very place.
(Ku)papura (v. tr), to tear
violently, lacerate, rend.
Para (n. 5), bald-headed man.
(Ku)para (v. tr.), to scrape.
Parafujo (n. 3), a screw.
Parap-anda (n. 3), trumpet (espc-
eially the trumpet of the
resurrection).
(Ku)parua (v. tr.), to scamp
(work).
(Ku)pamza (v. intr.), to be rough,
Imroh, to grate.
(KvTpasa (v. tr.), to behove,
" mutt," be necessary, become.
(Ku)paswa (v. pass.), to be
obliged.
(Ku)pasha (v. c.), to cause to get,
afford, yield ; (Ku)pasha fedha,
to lend money ; (Ku)pasha
msaada, to help.
Pashau (n. 3), energy, enthusi-
asm.
Pasi (n 3), an iron; (Ku)piga
pasi, to iron.
(Ku)pasi (v. intr.), to excel, do
well.
Pasipo (prep.) (lit. where there is
not), without.
Pasipckuwa na. Pasiwcko. Pasina,
without there being, there not
being.
Pasiwe, let there not be, but
there was not (see note 2,
Study X.).
(Ku)pasua (v. tr.), to split, rend,
tear (lengthwise).
(Ku)pasuka (v. n.), to burst,
split, be rent or torn (longi-
tudinally).
(Ku)pata (v. tr.), to get, acquire,
obtain, procure, succeed, to be
able.
(Ku)pata (v. intr.), to cut, be
sharp (knife).
Pate (n. G), twin.
(Ku)patana (v. rec.), to apree,
come to terms, be reconciled,
consent, be of oiie mind, make
a contract.
(Ku)patanisha (v. c.), to reconcile,
conciliate.
Patasi (Zanzibar) (n. 5), chisel
(see Tapasi).
(Ka)patika (v. tr.), to put in a
niche.
(Ku)pa/ika (v. tr.), to put, place.
(Ka)patikana(v. n.), to be obtain-
able, procurable ; (Ku)patikana
ni, to meet with, have happen
to one.
(Ku)patiliza (v. tr.), to punish,
visit (retribution).
(Ku)patiza (v. tr.), to take ad-
vantage of.
Pato (n. 5), advantage, profit,
gain.
(Ku)patwa (v. pass.), to be got
bold of (said of sun, or moon,
when eclipsed) (see (Ku)shik-
wa).
P'au (n. 3), slanting poles in
rcof, rafters, beams.
(Ku)paua (v. tr.), to bind rafters
to ridge poles, make notches in
rafters in order to do this.
Pauni (n. 3), pound, sovereign.
(Kn)pawa, (Ku)pewa (v. pass.),
to be given, receive.
(Ku)paya (v. intr.), to talk
foolishly, rave, be delirious,
talk wildly.
(Ku)paya (v. tr.), to graze (as
boat on rock).
(Ku)paza (v. c.), to raise, lift
up.
Pazia (n. 3), curtain, screen, veil.
(Ku)pea (v. tr.), to sweep (see
fyagia).
Pekee (inv. adj.), alone, solitary,
only.
Pekeyangu (etc.), by myself.
P'ele (n. 3), the itch. Almost
all pimples are called and
spoken of by this name.
218
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)peleka (v. tr.), to send, con-
vey, take (used of persons and
things).
Peleka barua hii kwa . . . , take
this letter to . . . ; (Ku)peleka
chuoni, lo send to school ;
(Ku)peleka mkono (v. tr.), to
touch, interfere with, handle.
(Ku)peleleza (v. tr.), to spy,
inquire into, examine.
P embe (n. 3), horn, ivory, tusk,
corner.
(Ku)penda (v. tr.), to love, like,
be fond of, will, wish, approve,
prefer.
(Ku)jipenda (v. ref.), to be selfish,
self-centred, study one's own
comfort.
(Ku)pendelea (v. prepl.), to
favour, be partial to, choose,
prefer.
(Ku)pendeza (v. c.), to please.
(Ku)jipendekeza, to court favour,
be ingratiating.
P'endo (n. 3, pi.), love, will, fond-
ness.
Pengine (var. adj.), other (place),
hence elsewhere, somewhere
else.
Pengine (conj.), on the other
hand, supposing, in case.
P'engo (n. 3), no'ch, gap (be-
tween teeth, where one is lost,
or space made by filing).
Pentekosito (n. 3), Pentecost,
Whitsunday.
(Ku)penya (v. tr.), to penetrate,
bore into.
(Ku)jipenyeza, to squeeze oneself
into.
Penyi (lit. a place having), i.e.
whore there is or are.
P'epe (n. 3), chaff, husks.
(Knipepea (v. tr.), to fan, blow.
(Ku)peperusha (v. c.), to blow
about, blow away.
(Ku)pepeta (v. tr.), to sift,
winnow.
P'epo (n. 3), evil spirit ; (n. 7, pi.),
winds ; P'eponi (loc.), cool
winds, Paradise, heaven.
Pera (n. 5), Guava.
Pesa (n. 3), pice, J anna.
(Ku)pesa (kope) (v. tr.), to wink,
blink.
(Ku)peta (v. tr.), to bend, crook.
(Ku)petana (v. rcc.), to be bout,
crooked, perverse.
P'ete (u. 3) ring.
-pevu (var. adj.), old, full-grown ;
(Ku)pevuka (v. n.), to be full-
grown, old.
Pezi (n. 5). fin (of fish).
-piT (var. inter, adj.), which?
Pia (n. 3), top, spinning-top ;
(conj.), also, too, as well as
(tee note on -ote, Study X.).
Pia-pia (adv.), all over, through-
out.
(Ku)piga (v. tr.), to beat, strike,
knock (this verb tikes its
meaning largely from the noun
it is coupled with : see note 14,
Study V.).
(Ku)piga bunduki, to fire a gun ;
(Ku)piga hodi, to announce
one's arrival by calling Hodi !
to knock at the door (cquiv.) ;
(Ku)piga kofi, to slap, smite,
strike, bos on the ears (with
the open hand) ; (Ku)piga kofi,
to clap hands ; (Ku)piga maru-
fuku, to prohibit ; ya msikiti,
to excommunicate; (Ku)piga-
piga (v. red.), to beat a little,
throb ; (Ku)piga rago, to camp ;
(Ku)piga randa, to plane;
(Ku)piga utari, to tow.
(Ku)pigana (v. rec.), to fight,
contend, wrestle.
(Ku)piganya (v. c.), to blend,
mingle, mix.
(Ku)pigilia (v. prep.), to make a
solid floor or roof by beating
with large flat hammers.
(Ku)pigizana (v. rec.). to resemble,
t •) be alike.
Pigo (n. 5), stroke, blow.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
219
(Ku)pika (v. tr.), to cook, boil.
Pili (num. adj.), two (in count-
ing); -a pili (var. ordl.), the
second, the other.
Pilipili (n. 3), pepper ; Pilipili
manga, black (Arabian) pepper;
Pilipili hokho, red (African)
pepper.
(Ku)pima (v. tr.), to measure,
weigh, take measurements of.
(Ku)pimwa (v. pas. appd.), to bo
measured for (coat, etc.).
(Ku)pinda (v. tr.), to beiid.
(Ku)pindamana, to be bent,
curved, crooked.
Pindi (n. 3), appointed time;
(adv.), when, at such time as,
so long as, while.
Pindo (n. 3), Ixirder of garment,
Lrenerally embroidered selvedge.
(Ku)pindua (v. tr.), to overturn,
upset, turn up-side down.
Pindwani (inv. adj.), crooked,
perverse, morally oblique.
(Ku)pinga (v. tr.), to hinder,
thwart, oppose, reject, with-
stand.
(Kn)pingamana na, to be con-
trary to, opposed to.
Pingu (n. 3), fetter, shackles,
handcuffs ; charm, talisman
(see hirizi).
Pipa (n. 5), barrel, tub.
Pirimbi (n. 3), flute, pipe.
(Ku)pisha (v. e.), k> make room
for one to pass.
Pishi (n. 3), dry goods measure,
about two quarts.
(Ku)pita (see degrees of com-
parison, Study XVI.) (v. tr.),
to pass, pass by, surpass, excel.
(Ku)pitiliwa (v. pas. appd.), to
be overlooked, passed by, neg-
bcted.
(Ku)pitisha (v. c.), to circu-
late; pitisha mkate, pass the
bread.
-po (rel. particle, 8th cl.), "Where,
when?
(Zu)poa (v. intr.), to get well,
recover ; (Ku)poa moto (v. intr.),
to become cool, lose heart.
(Ku)pofuka (v. n.), to be spoiled ;
(Ku)pofuka mato, to be blind.
Pojo (n. 3), species of small pea or
vetch.
(Ku)poka (v. tr.), to deprive, be-
reave.
(Zu)pokea (v. tr.), to receive, take,
accept.
(Ku)pokonya (v. tr.), to deprive of
by force, take or snatch from,
spoil, rob, dispossess.
P'ole ! I hope you will soon be-
better ! (sympathy conveyed by
tone of voice),
-pole (var. adj.), gentle, quiet,
mild, meek.
P'olep'ole (adv.), gently, meekly,
kindly, quietly, slowly, softly,
easily yielding.
P'ombe (n. 3), intoxicant made
from grain or fruit.
P'omboo (n. 3), porpoise.
(Ku)pomosha (v. c.), to cast down,
throw down.
(Ku.pona (v. intr.), to get well,
pull through or get over (an
illness), to get through safely,
to recover, escape.
(Ku)ponda (v. tr.), to pound, crush,
beat, bruise, wound.
(Ku)ponda-ponda (v. red.), to re-
duce to powder, break by pres-
sure, beat continuously.
P'ondo (n. 3), punting-pole.
Pongozi (n. 3), sea-monster.
(Kuyponya (v. c.), to deliver,
rescue, save.
(Ku)ponyoka (v. n.), to slip out of
one's hand, escape.
P'opo (n. 3), bat, butterfly.
Popoo (n. 3), areca-nut.
(Ku)pooza (v. n.), to be withered,
paralysed, palsied.
(Ku)pop'ota (v. tr.), to break, snap,
break to pieces.
Popo/e (compr. adj.), any (place)
220
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
whatsoever, anywhere, at any
time.
(Ku)popotoa (v. tr.), to strain,
sprain, wring, twist.
Pori (n. 3), long tangled forest;
Kutoboa porini = to get out of
the wood.
(Ku)posa (v. tr.), to betroth,
espouse, ask in marriagu.
Posho (n. 3), food-money, rations,
allowance of provisions.
(Ku)pota (v. 'tr.), to bend ; to
string a bow.
tot'e (var. adj.), all, every (8th cl.
concord) ; P ote (u. 7, pi.), bow-
strings.
(Ku)potea (v. n.), to be lost, err,
go astray, perish.
(Ku)poteka (v. n.), to be bent ; to
be well strung (bow).
Ku)po^elea mbali (v. prepl.), to
be lost for ever, gone out of
reach altogether.
(Ku)poteza (v. tr. and c.), to lose,
waste, ruin (morally), lead
astray.
(Ku)potoa (v. tr.), to pervert, dis-
tort, disfigure, lead astray, make
crooked ; (v. sub.), to unstring
a bow.
Po'toe(inv. adj.),perverse,crooked.
(Ku)potoka (v. n.), to turn from
right course, be perverse.
Povu (n. 3). foam, froth, scum.
(Ku)poza (v. c.), to heal, to make
well (said of God), cool.
P'ua (n. 3), nose, steel.
(Ku)pujua (v. tr.),to graze, scratch
slightly.
(Ku)pujuka (v. n.), to be grazed
(of the skin), lose self-respect.
Pukupuku (n. 3), wasting disease.
(Ku)pukulika (v. n.), to wither,
drop off.
(Ku)pukusa (v. tr.),to rub between
hands, crumble, throw off, to
shed (fruit).
(Ku)pulikiza (v. tr.), to attend,
listen to.
P'umba (n. 3), handful.
(Ku)pumbaa (v. n.), to be foolish,
weak, stupid ; to drivel, be
spoiled.
(Kuji)pumbaniza (v. ref.), to make
light of.
Pumu (n. 5), lung, disease of
lungs (generally asthma).
(Ku)pumua (v. iiitr.), to breathe,
rest, recover breath.
(Ku)jipunraza (v. ref.), to be at
rest.
(Ku)pum(u)zika (v. n.), to take
rest, breathe heavily.
(Ku)pum(u)zisha (v. c.), to ease,
give rest to, rest.
P'umzi (n. 3), breath, breathing.
P'unda (n. 3), ass, donkey ; Punda
milia (n. 3), zebra.
P'umte (adv.), a little; P'un<7e
ha<a p'un/Ze ; every now and
again, every moment.
(Ku)punguza p'unde ku . . . just to
stop short of ...
(Ku)punga (v. tr.), to fan, wave,
swing (as arms in walking).
(Ku)pungia (mkono) (v. prepl.),
to beckon to.
(Ku)pungna (v. intr.), to become
less, diminish, abate, decrease
(in number).
Punguani (n. 3), half caste,
hybrid.
(Ku)punguka (v. n.), to fall short,
be wanting, be; deficient, bo
below the standard ; to decrease
(in quantity).
Kupungukiwa ni, to lack, be short
of, ba in want of.
(Ku)punguza (v. c.), to lessen,
diminish.
Pupa (n. 3), haste, eagerness.
(Ku)puruka (v. n.), to fly, fly
away.
(Ku)purukusha (v. c.),to postpone,
procrastinate, slight, drive off.
(Ku)jipurukusb.a (v. ref.), to be
slack, desultory, casual, to set
lightly by.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
221
P'urukushani (n. 3), foolishness,
senselessness.
(Ka)purnra (v. tr.), to pick, pluck,
gather, strip, peel.
(Ku)pusa (v. intr.), to leave off
(of rain, etc.).
(Ku)puzia (v. prepl.), to blow
upon.
(Ku)pwa (v. intr.), to ebb of tide.
Pwani (n. 3), shore, beach, coast.
(Ku)pwaya (v. tr.), to clean corn ;
(v. n.), to be loose (clothes,
screws, etc.).
(Ku)pwea (v. n.), to come to laud,
reach the shore.
Pweke (adj.), unique.
(Ku)pwelea (v. prepl), to get low
(water), dry up ; Sauti kupwe-
lea, to be hoarse.
(Ku)pweleza (v. c.).to run aground
into shallow or ebbing water,
-pya(mpya) (var. adj.), new, fresh,
novel.
B
Raar// (n. 3), thunder, thunder-
bolt.
Rabana (n. prop.), our Lord (Mo-
hammedan name for God).
Rababi (n. 3), silver.
Rati/d (adj.), content, clement,
indulgent, willing, satisfied,
favourable.
R^'//(i (n. 3), favour, clemency,
pleasure, contentment, blessing,
approbation ; Kun r&dhi, do not
be angry ; Niwia r&dhi, forgive
me.
Rafiki (n. 3 and 5), friend.
Ragham (n. 3), figure, nnmber.
Rago (n. 3), camp ; (Ku)piga rado,
to camp, encamp.
Raha (n. 3), rest, ease, luxury,
repose, tranquillity ; Raha
msterehe; quiet rest, undis-
turbed repose.
Rahamani (n. 3), map, chart.
Rahani (u. 3), pledge, security ;
(Ku)weka rahani ; t > pawn.
Rahisi (inv. adj.), cheap, easy.
Rai (n. 3), strength, prudence,
thought.
(Ku)rairai (v. tr.), to beg, beseech,
mollify by entreaty.
Rajabu (n. prop.), tenth month in
Moslem year.
Rajamu (n. 3), markings on cases
for identification.
Raki (n. 3), slaves.
Rama<Mani, Mohammedan fast-
month.
(Ku)ramba (v. tr.), to lick, lick
up.
Ramli (n. 3), sand; (Ku)piga
ramli, to tell fortunes (origi-
nally by throwing sand).
Randa (u. 3), plane ; Kupiga-
randa = to plane.
Rangi (u. 3), colour, shade, paint,
tint.
(Ku)rarua (v. tr.), to tear, rend,
tatter, tear asunder; (Ku)ra-
ma-rarua (v. red.), to tear to
pieces.
(Ku)raruka (v. n.), to be torn,
tattered, rent.
Ras(rasi) (u. 3), cape, headland,
promontory.
(Ku)rasha-rasha (v. red.), to do
things by halves or superfici-
ally.
Rafabu (n. 3), dates (Ar.).
Radii (n. 3), pound (In.).
(Ku)rauka (v. intr.), to get up
early.
(Ka)raukia (v. prepl.), to rouso
early in the morning, pay one
an early visit.
Rayia(raia) (u. 3). subject, one
who livts under the power of
another.
Reale, Riali (n. 3), Dollar, crown
(2 rupees).
-refu (var. adj.), long, tall.
(Ku)rega-rega (v. red.), to waver,
shake about, be rickety, be
222
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
loose, be in a battered con-
dition.
Eehema (n. 3), mercy, compassion,
pity-
(Ku)rehemu (v. tr.), to have pity
or mercy on, take compassion
on.
(Ku)rehemea (v. prep.), to have
pity, show mercy for (not to).
Eejareja (adv. inv.), retail ; Kuuza
rejareja, to sell retail.
(Ku)rejea (v. intr.), to return, go
or come back.
(Ku)rejeza (v.c.), to give back,
repay.
Eiaka (n. 5), quiver.
Eiali (n. 3), dollar (2 rupees).
Elba (n. 3), interest, usury,
covetousness, love of gain.
(Ku)rir7M (v. tr.), to please.
(Ku)rirfMa (v. prcpl.), to grant to,
be pleased, comply with, ac-
quiesce in.
(Ku)ric7Msha (v. c.), to give satis-
faction, cause to accept.
Eihani (n. 3), basil.
Eima (n. 5), large pit (for catching
wild animals).
Einda (n. 5), skirt.
(Ku)ringa (v. iutr.), to rejoice,
triumph, exult.
Eika (n. 5), an equal.
Eisala (n. 3), message.
Eisasi (n. 3), lead, bullet, ball,
shot.
Risau (n. 5), small shot.
(Ku)rithi (v. tr.), to inherit.
(Ku)riyariya (v. red.), to keep
looking in one direction, keep
one's eye on a thing.
Eizki(riziki) (n. 3), common neces-
saries of daily fife.
Eoboo (n. 3), quarter, quarter of
a dollar (half rupee) ; Kasu ro-
boo, one less a quarter (hence
three-quarters).
Eoho (n. 3), spirit, soul, life, im-
mortal part of man, disposition,
spirit, principle of life; (Ku)ka-
ta roho, to breathe one's last
(breath).
Eohoni, part of animal's throat cut
in slaughtering.
Eoho Mtakatifu, Holy Spirit.
Eojo (n. 5), sediment, dregs.
Bokhara (n. 3), alabaster.
(Ku)roromoka (v. n.), to spread
(over a surface), diffuse, run.
Eoshani (n. 3), balcony, over-
hanging verandah.
Euaza (n. 3), pattern, model.
Eubani (n. 3), pilot guide.
(Ku)ru(/i (v. intr.), to go or come
back, return, retire, shrink (of
clothes, etc.) ; (v. tr.) to punish,
chastise.
(Ku)ru</isha (v. tr.), to draw back,
give back, return.
(Ka)rufuku (v. tr.), to prohibit,
refuse (sec marufuku).
Eugurugu (n. 5), swelling.
Enhusa, Eukhusa, Eukhsa (n. 3),
leave, permission, liberty.
(Ku)ruk'a (v. tr. and iutr.), to leap,
jump, fly, spring, skip, leave
out (in reading, etc.).
(Ku)mk'wa ni akili, to be deprived
of one's senses (by a blow), be
stunned.
(Ku)ruk'iza (v. c.), to omit, pass
over, skip.
(Ku)runda (v. intr.), to be stunted
in growth.
Eungu (n. 5), club, staff, knob-
kerry, shillelagh, blunderbuss.
Eupia (n. 3), rupee.
(Ku)rusha (v.c.), to throw info
the air, throw over, desert,
cast off; (Ku)rusha maji, to
splash.
Eushwa, rushua (n. 3), bribe.
Entuba (n. 3), moisture, damp
soil, humidity.
(Ku)ruza (v. intr.), to give up as
impossible.
(Ka)ruzuku (v. tr.), to supply
with the necessaries of life.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
223
Sa ! (inlcrj.). Yes (sir?) ! here I am !
Saa (n. 3), hour, time, watch,
clock; Saangapi? What time?
(Ku)saa (v. n.), to remain, be left.
Saamani (n. 3), tea-things, uten-
sils (see Samani).
Sabaa (inv. num. adj.), seven ;
-a sabaa, the seventh.
Sabaafaashara (num. adj.), seven-
teen.
Sababu (n. 3), cause, reason ; Kwa
sababu ya, because of, by reason
of.
(Kwa) sababu (gani) ? For what
cause? why?
(Ka)sabahi (v. tr.), to greet or
pay respects to in the morning.
Sabaifu (n. 3), Sabbath.
Sabuini (num. adj.), seventy.
Sabuni (n. 3), soap.
Saburi (also sabira) (n. 3),
patience, forbearance, en-
durance perseverance.
Sato (see msaada); (Ku)jaalia
saJa, to grant help or grace.
Sadhabu (n. 3), aniseed.
SarZaka (n. 3), sacrifice, alms,
offering.
(Ku)sadiki (v. intr.), to believe,
credit.
Sa'fiki (adj. inv.), credible, truth-
ful.
Safari (n. 3), journey, voyage.
Safi(Swafi) (inv. adj.), clean, pure,
guileless, ingenuous, net
(weight).
(Ka)safi (v. tr.), (Ku)safisha (v. c.),
to clean, cleanse, purify, refine.
(Ku)safiri (v. intr.), to travel, take
a journey, start on a journey,
set out.
Safu (n. 3), row, line, Lost, army,
rank.
Safura (n. 3), Anaemia, dropsy.
(Ku)saga (v. tr.), to grind, reduce
to powder; Jiwe la knsagia,
grindstone.
(Zu)sagika (v. n.). to be bruised.
Sahala (n. 3), facility, levity,
lightness.
(Zu)sahalika (v. n.). to be relaxed.
Sahani (n. 3), plate, dish.
(Ka)sahau (v. tr.), to forget; (Ku)-
sahauliwa (v. pass.), to be for-
gotten.
(Kuji)sahauliza (v. ref.), to forget
one's self.
(Ku)sahanza (v. c.), to make
oblivious of.
Sahibu (n. 5), friend.
Sabibl (n. 3), signature, sanction ;
(adj.), correct, right, authentic.
Sai<7i (n. 5), prince, sultan, king,
lord.
(Ku)sai</ia (v. tr.), to help, assist,
aid, succour.
(Ka)sai'Ziana (v. rec.), to help
each other.
Sai'/ina, our Lord, your majesty.
(Ku)saili (v. tr.) to question, in-
terrogate.
Sakafu (n. 3), beaten floor or roof
or pavement.
Sakaramen/i (n. 3), sacrament.
Sala (n. 3), prayer, liturgical
formal prayer (in the sense
of adoration rather than of
petition).
Salala ! (intcrj ), What next !
Salama (n. 3), safety, peace, wel-
fare, well-being; (adj.), safe,
well, all right; (Ku)weka sa-
lama, to keep safely.
Salamu (n. 3) (origly. safety,
peace, preservation, deliver-
ance), greeting, compliments,
kind regards.
(Ku)sali (v. intr.), io say prayers,
pray.
(Ku)salia (v. prepl.), to remain
over (used intransitively).
(Ku)salibu (v. tr.), to crucify ;
(Ka)salibiwa (v. pass.), to be
crucified.
Salihi (inv. adj.), good, just,
righteous.
224
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)salimika (v. n.), to be safe
(said of the soul when dying).
(Ku)salinm (salimia) (v. tr.), to
greet, send greetings to.
Nisalimia fulani, give my compli-
ments to (so and so).
(Ku)saliti (v. tr.), to betray,
mingle.
(Ku)salisha (v. c.), to make pray,
, by reading, leading or taking
prayers.
(Ku)sallimu (v. tr.), to surrender,
consecrate.
Sanuu/i (n. 3), manure, dunpr.
Samaki (n. 8), fish; Samaki wa
kuk'anga, fried fish (see vua).
Samani (n. 3), tools, utensils,
household things.
Samawi (adj.), blue, sky-blue.
Samawad (n. 3), skies, heavens.
Sambamba (adv.), with a train,
or following, in line, in rank
(as soldiers).
Sambo (u. 3), vessel.
(Ku)samene (v. tr.), to forgive,
pardon, excuse.
Samli (n. 3), clarified butter.
Sana (intensifying adverb), very,
a great deal, much, etc.
Sanaa (n. 3), Art, craft, handi-
craft, skilled work.
Sanamu (n. 3), idol, image, pic-
ture.
Sanda (n. 3), shroud, winding-
sheet.
Sandali (n. 3), sandal wood.
Sandarusi (n. 3), gum-copal.
Sanduku (n. 5), box, chest, case,
chest-of-drawers, etc.
(Ku)sangaa (v. iutr.), to be per-
plexed, be in a dilemma,
embarrassed, to stand still,
from doubt or astonishment.
(Ku)sanii (v. tr.), to fashion with
skill, elaborate, work dex-
terously.
Sanfuri (n. 3), harp, musical box.
Sarafa (n. 3), exchange (money).
Sarahangi(n. 3), first mate (naut.).
Saramala (n. 5), carpenter, joiner,
wheelwright, cabinet maker.
Sarara (n. 3), loin.
Sare (Jina la sare), surname.
Saruf (n. 3), grammar.
Sasa (adv.), now, at this time, at
present; Sasa hivi (adv.), im-
mediately, directly, at once,
presently, just now.
(Ku)sasanya (v. tr.), to gather.
8a(u (n. 3), python, serpent.
Saumu (n. 3). fasting, abstinence
from liquids, thirst, Lent.
Sauti (n. 3), voice, sound, tune.
Sawa (adj.), equal, right, correct,
straight, just.
(Ku)sawanisha, (Ku)sawanyiza
(v.c.), to put straight or right,
equalize, level, make alike.
Sawasawa (adj. red.), alike, just
the same, even, level.
(Ku)saza (v. c.), to leave over,
cause to remain ; Kusaza ku
(fa), to be almost (dead) ;
Kusaza ikdogo na, to be almost
entirely.
Sebule (n. 3), private room,
separated lobby near entrance.
Sehemu (n. 3), portion, share, part.
Sekeneko (n. 3), syphilis.
(Ku)selehi (v. intr.), to be service-
able, be of use.
(Ku)sema (v. intr.), to say, speak ;
(v. tr.), to mention, accuse, tell
talcs of, denounce ; (Ku)sema
uwongo, to tell lies; (Ku)ji-
semea (v. ref.), to meditate,
muse, talk idly, complain ;
Ku)semeka (v. u.), to be said,
be sayable ; (Ku)jisemezana
(v. rec.), to talk together.
(Ku)sengenya (v. tr.), to slander,
backbite.
Serikali (n. 3), the government.
Seruji (n. 3), saddle.
(Ku)seseteka (v. intr.), to reel,
stagger.
Shaaban (n. prop.), eleventh
month in Mohammedan year.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Shaba (n. 3), brass.
Shabaha (n. 3), aim, mark, target.
Shada (n. 5), nosegay, sprig.
Shaha (n. 5), prince, king, chief,
great man.
Sb.ab.amu (n. 3), fat.
Shahada (n. 3), forefinger ; (Ku)-
piga shahacfa, to witness to
Mohammedan by reciting creed
with first or index finger up-
lifted.
Shahidi (n. 5), witness.
Shairi (n. 5), verse of poetry,
poet.
Shaka (n. 5), doubt, distrust,
suspicion. (Hana shaka = he is
the man for the business.)
Shakawa (n. 5), oifence, quarrel,
opposition, hostility.
Shake (n. 5), sea-gull.
Shali (n. 3), shawl.
Sham (prop, n.), Syria.
Shamasi (n. 5), deacon.
Shamba (u. 5), field, garden,
plantation, cultivated ground.
(Ku)shambua (v. tr.), to peel,
husk, clean, pick, pare.
(Ku)shambulia (v. prep.), to
attack, assault, lay waste.
Shamili (n. 5), ear ornaments.
Shangazi (n. 5), aunt (father's
sister).
(Ku)shangiria (v. prep.), to shout
for joy, rejoice, triumph.
Shangwe (n. f>), joy, excitement,
ornament, frontlet.
Shani (n. 3), power, glory, ma-
jesty, beauty, lovely thing.
Shari (n. 5), evil, ill.
Sharia (n. 3), law.
(Ku)shariki (v. intr.), to go
shares, take part in, communi-
cate; (Ku)sharikana, to par-
ticipate, communicate.
Shard, Shad, Sharurt (adv.), of
necessity, " must," by all
means.
Sharuti (n. 3), obligation, com-
pulsory matters, misfortune.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)shaua (v. intr.), to make
fair promises not intending to
fulfil.
Shauku (n. 3), lust, desire.
Shauri (n. 5), palaver, council,
plan, advice, counsel, device,
consultation.
(Ku)shauri (v. tr.), to advise,
consult.
Shawi (n. 5), bud, branch.
(Ku)shawishi (v. tr.), to tempt,
coax.
Shazi (n. 5), oyster- shell.
Shehe (Shekhe) (n. 5), chief,
great man.
Shehena (n. 5), cargo, load.
Shela (n. 5), hammock.
Shemegi (n. 3), brother-in-law,
sister-in-law (a woman calls
her sister-in-law, wifi).
Sherbet (n. 3), drink, beverage,
sherbet.
Sherehe (n. 3), rejoicing, mirth.
Sheshe (n. 3), novelty, wonder.
(Ku)sheta (v. tr.), to bruise,
crush; (Ku)sheteka (v. n.), to
be broken in pieces, to be
bruised.
(Ku)sheta-sheta (v. red.), to break
in pieces.
Shefani, Sheifani, Shaifani (prop,
n.), Satan, devil.
(Ku)shiba (v. intr.), to be satis-
fied, be full, have enough.
Shiba (n. 3), abundance, suffi-
ciency, enough.
Sbibiri (n. 3), span, handbreadth.
Shi(/a (n. 3), hardship, difficulty,
strenuousness.
(Ku)shika (v. tr.), to hold, clasp,
seize, grasp, take ; (Ku)shi-
kana, (Ku)shikamana (v. rec.),
to hold together, cleave or
stick together, adhere.
Shikamou (lit. Nashika maguu),
slave's greeting to a superior.
Shikazi (n. 5), dollar.
Shikio, sikio (n. 5), ear, handle.
(Ku)shiliza (v. tr.), to complete,
226
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
to finish ; Ameshilizwa. his
education has been completed.
Shimo (n. 5), hole, hollow, pit,
cayity, cell.
Shina (n. 5), root, trunk.
Shinda (inv. adj.), half full,
partly full, half empty.
(Ku)shinda (see note on Study
XVI). (v. tr.), to conquer, sur-
pass, excel, beat ; (v. intr.), to
stay, remain, pass (time), pay a
visit, spend the day.
(Ku)shindamana (v. rec.), to be
compact, fitting close into each
other.
(Ku)sMndana (v. rec.), to com-
plete, dispute, contend to.
(Ku)shindika (v. tr. ), to shut to,
to close (door without fasten-
ing), press (used of extracting
vegetable oil and bottling
mineral waters).
(Ku)shindikiza (v. c.), to accom-
pany part of the way.
(Ku)shindilia (v. prepl ), to press
down, compress.
(Ku)shindua (v. sub.), to open,
undo.
Shingo (n. 3 and 5), neck.
(Ku)shiriki (see shariki).
KnshUaki (v. tr.), to accuse,
charge with wrong-doing.
(Ku)shifruka (see kushutuka).
Shoka (n. 5), axe, hatchet.
Shokoa (n. 3), forced labour,
compulsion.
Shokole (n. 3), eel.
Shomoro (n. 5), sparrow.
(Ku)shona (v. tr.), sew, mend.
(Kn)shonewa (v. prepl. pass.), to
be sewn for, have made for one.
(Ku)shonoka (v. n.), to become
unsewn.
(Ku)shonua (v. sub.), to unpick,
unstitch, undo.
Shore (u. 5)(?) swallow.
Shofo (short form of kushoto),
left-handed.
(Ku)shua (v. tr.), to launch.
Shuari (shuwari) (n. 3), calm.
(Ku)shuhudia (v. prepl.), Ku-
shulmdu (v. tr.), Kushuhudiza
(v. c.), to witness or testify to,
bear witness.
Shuhuli, shughuli (n. 3), busi-
ness, occupation, employment ;
Hana shuhuli = he is just the
one.
(Ku)shuhulika (v. n.), to be
pressed with business, be occu-
pied.
Shujaa (n. 5), warrior, brave
man, hero, champion.
Shuka (n. 3 and 5), length of
cloth (four hands), loin cloth,
sheet.
(Ku)shuka (v. intr.), to go or
come down, descend, get cut,
alight ; (Ku)shusha (v. c.), to
let down, put down, send down ;
Kushusha p'umzi, to breathe
deep.
Shake (n. 5), ear of corn.
Shukurani (n. 3), praise, thanks-
giving.
(Ku)shukuru (v. tr.), to give
thanks, worship, have prayers ;
(Ku)shukurisha (v. c.), to con-
duct worship or prayers.
(Ku)shuru<iza (kusharutiza) (v.
c.), to constrain, compel, per-
suade.
(Ku)shutuka (v. n.), to start,
move suddenly.
(Ku)shu<umu (v. tr.), to reproach,
revile, insult.
Si (neg. simple copula, sing, and
pi.), (he, she, it) is not ; (they)
are not.
Si (1st p. sing, neg., strong verb
to be), I am not.
-si- (neg. inf.), not. Mt'u asiye
kwao, man with no home.
Siafu (n. 3), soldier-ant, biting-
ant.
Siagi (n. 3), butter.
Siala (n. 5), question.
Siara, see Ziara.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
227
Sibabu (n. 3), see Sababu.
Sifa (n. 3), praise, commendation,
fame, reputation.
(Ku)sifu (v. tr.), to praise, com-
mend ; (Ku)sifiwa (v. pass.), to
be praised.
(Ku)jisifu (v. ref.),to boast, sound
one's own praises.
Sifuri (n. 3), copper.
Sifuria (see Sufuria), (n. 5), sauce-
pan, pot (primarily of copper).
(Ku)sibl (v. tr.), to beseech, im-
plore, beg; Nakusihi, if you
please.
-sije (ver. inf.), lest (followed by
Ka tense).
Siki (n. 3), vinegar.
(Ku)sikia (v. tr.), to hear, feel, be
sensible or conscious of, take
in, comprehend, obey.
(Ku)sikilika (v. n.), to be audible
with difficulty.
(Ku)sikilikana (v. n.), to be
audible, be Leaid (all round),
come to be known.
(Ku)sikiiika (v. n.), to be sorry,
regret, grieve, mourn.
(Ku)sikidkiwa (v. pass.), to be
lamented or pitied.
(Ku)sikiza (v. tr.), to hearken,
listen.
Siku (n. 3), day (24 hours) ; Siku
k'uu, great day, festival, fete.
Siku kwa sikn (adv.). every now
and then, intermittently, fit-
fully.
Siku ha<a siku (adv.), day by day,
regularly, daily, day after day.
(Kilia)siku (adv.), every day ;
Siku hizi (adv.), nowadays ;
Sikuzote (adv.), always.
Siku biyo -— once upon a time.
Silaha (n. 3.), weapon, arms.
Silisili (n. 3), chain.
(Ku)silimu (v. intr.), to capitu-
late ; Kusalimu Kiswahili, to
become Mohammedan ; Kusa-
limu Kimashia, to become
Christian.
Sima (n. 3), Indian-corn porridge.
(Ku)simama (v. intr.), to stand
up, stand still, rise, stop (as of
machinery).
(Ku)simamia (v. prepl.), to super-
vise, superintend, oversee,
stand up for, espouse cause of.
(Ku)simamisb.a (v. c.), to estab-
lish, set upright, make stand
up.
Simanzi (n. 3), grief, sorrow.
Simba (n. 3), lion ; Simba
Marara, man-eating hyaena
(striped).
Sime (n. 3), sword, scimitar.
Simi equals si mimi ; Simi nayo,
I have not.
(Ku)simika (v. tr.), to erect, set
up.
Simo (n. 3), proverb, parable by
word. Also verb to be with
suffix I am not in it, or con-
nected with it.
Simu (n. 3), electric wire, tele-
phone, telegraph, cable ; Ku-
piga simu, to telephone, etc.
Sintfano (n. 3), needle.
Singa (n. 3), hair (of animals).
Singiza (singizia) (v. tr.), to
slander, calumniate, accuse,
suspect.
Sinia (n. 3), tray, salver.
(Ku)sinyaa (v. n.), to wither,
wrinkle.
(Zu)sinzia (v. intr.), to slumber,
doze, be drowsy.
(Ku)sinzilia (v. prepl.), to look
askance at, watch suspiciously.
-sipo (v. inf.), except, if.
(Ku)sira-sira (v. tr.), to scamp
(work), tiifle with.
Siri (u. 3), secret, mystery.
(Ku)sisimka (v. n.), to sliuddrr
thrill, tremble.
(Ku)sisitiza (v. tr.), to enjoin,
charge, pre. s upon, to entreat.
Si/a (inv. num adj.), six.
(Ku)siJa (v. intr.), to hesitate,
doubt.
228
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Siteashara (inv. num. adj.),
sixteen.
Sit&di (adj.), skilful, expert,
clever.
Sifaha (n. 3), politeness, deck of
a vessel.
(Ku)sifahabu, vide Sdahabu.
(Ku)sitahamili (v. intr.), to en-
dure, be patient, bear, suffer.
(Ku)sifahi (v. tr.), to respect,
reverence, honour.
(Ku)sitehili (v. intr.), to be
worthy, deserving, deserve,
merit.
Sifara (n. 3), covering, cloak,
secret place, protection for
faults.
(Ku)sitarelie (v. intr.), to be at
ease, at leisure, at rest.
Sitarehe ! do not disturb your-
self ! pray do not get up ! (said
to those inside house by person
entering).
Si/awa (n 3), prosperity, abun-
dance.
(Ku)sUawi (v. intr.), to flourish,
prosper, grow, succeed.
(Ku)sifawisha (v. c.), to make
succeed or do well.
Si<i (n. 3), virgin.
Sitiini (inv. num. adj.), sixty.
(Ku)sttiri (v. tr.), to hide, cover,
protect, defend.
(Ku)si<irika (v. n.), to be hidden,
concealed.
Siuzs (lit. don't ask about), much
more, much less.
Siyo, sivyo (adv. neg.), no ! not
so, not thus (these are not
they).
Soko (n. 3), market, bazaar.
(Ku)sokoia (v. tr.), to plait, spin,
weave, twist, twine.
(Ku)soma (v. intr.), to read, go to
school, study.
(Ku)somesha (v. c.), to teach (to
read), instruct.
Somo (n. 5), reading lesson ; (n. 3),
friend, chum (namesake).
(Ku)sonda (v. tr.), to suck.
(Ku)songa (v. tr.), to press, crowd,
close up, oppress, squeeze,
choke, plait (hair).
(Zu)songana (v. rec.), to throng,
jostle.
(Ku)songea (v. prepl.), to ap-
proach, come near to.
(Ku)songeza (v. c.), to bring near
to.
(Ku)songoa (v. tr.), to strangle,
suffocate.
(Ku)sonona (v. intr.), to be rest-
less, uneasy.
Sononeko (n. 5), grief, pain, un-
easiness.
(Ku)sonya (v. tr.), to scorn, dis-
dain, make mocking sound at,
pooh-pooh, to draw up the lips
in disgust.
Sote (adj.). all (of us).
(Ku)soza (v. tr.), to touch, strike,
hit.
(Ku)sozana (v. rec.), to jostle,
collide.
(Ku)s<ahabu. (v. intr.), to choose,
prefer.
Stambul (n. prop.), Constanti-
nople.
Subili (n. 3), aloe.
Subira (n. 3), patience.
(Ku)subiri (v. iutr.), to have
patience, wait.
(Ku)subu (v. tr.), to smelt, cast.
(Ku)suburishana (v. rec.), to ex-
hort mutually to patience.
(Ku)subuiu (v. intr.), to dare,
have courage.
Sufi (n. 3), wool
Sufuri (n. 3), copper.
Sufuria (n. 5), copper saucepan.
(Ku)sugna (v. tr.), to rub, scrub,
scour, polish by rubbing.
(Ku)sujudu, to worship, bow
down to.
(Ku)suka (v. tr.), to plait, twist,
spin, weave.
(Ku)suka-suka (v. n.), to shake
about, tremble, sway.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
229
Sukani (n. 3), rudder, helm ; Ku-
shika sukani, to steer.
Sukari (n. 3), sugar ; Mnara wa
sukari, sugar loaf; Sukari ya
mawe, lump sugar ; Sukari ya
Bungala (i.e. Bengal), moist
sugar.
(Ku)sukuma (v. tr.), to push,
hustle, drive.
(Ku)sukumiza (v. c.), to cast off,
«et asi«lc, throw over, thrust at,
semi right away.
Sukuo (n. 3), large grindstone.
(Ku)sukutua (v. tr.), to rinse the
month.
(Ku)snluhisha (v. c.), to concili-
ate, make peace.
Suluhu
Salufani (n. 5), sultan, king,
emperor.
(Ku)sumbua (v. tr.), to trouble,
vex, annoy, worry, harrass,
torment.
Sumile ! make way ! (Contraction
of Bismillahi, in rae name of
God.)
Sumu (n. 3), poison, natural
enemy. (See " African Aphor-
ism," p. 117.)
(Kn)sumulia (v. intr.), to talk,
chat, converse.
(Ku)sumulika (v. n.), to be told,
talked about.
Sungula (n. 3), hare.
(Ku)sunza (v. tr.), to shake.
Sara (n. 3), feature, countenance,
form of face, chapter of Koran.
Suria (n. 5), concubine.
Suruji (n. 3), inferior mortar.
Suruale (n. 3), trousers.
Susani (u. 3), Ua la susani, lily.
Susu (n. 3), hanging-shelf for
food.
Suudi (n. 3), interest, usury.
Suwesi (n. prop.), Suez.
Swali, Suali (n. 5), question.
Swi (n. 3), fish (obsolete).
Swiswi (pron.), we, us.
T
(Zu)ta (v. tr.), to put forth, lay
(eggs).
-<a- (verbal infix, indicating
future tense).
Taa (n. 3), fish with long thin
tail — the thrasher or sting ray.
Taa (n. 3), lamp, lantern ; T'aa,
obedience, submission.
(Ku)toabika (v. n.), to be in
trouble, be distressed, be
anxious.
jTaabu (n. 3), hardship, trouble,
adversity, mischief, misfortune,
distress.
(Ku)faajabu (v. n.), to wonder,
be astonished, be amazed.
(Ku)teakMri (v. intr.), to be late,
delay, tarry, linger, loiter.
Taarishi (n. 3), mail-runner, mail-
bearer.
(Ku)fabasanro (v. intr.), to smile.
Tabekero (n. 3), snuff-box.
Tabia (n. 3), nature, character,
disposition, temper.
Tabiba (n. 5), physician.
(Ku)tabiri (v. iutr.), to prophesy,
foretell, prognosticate.
(Ku)tabua (v. tr.), to break down,
rend, destroy.
Tafad/jali ! please do me the
kindness, I beg of you.
(Ku)tafakari (v. intr.), to con-
sider, reflect, meditate, think.
Tafauti (n. 3), difference; Ku-
weka Zofauti, to make a differ-
ence, differentiate.
Tafi (n. 3), Indian-Ocean fish not
much accounted of.
(Ku)tafiti (v. intr.), to pry into.
(Ku)fafuna (v. tr.), to chew,
masticate, eat. (Yuatafuna
Kiswahili kanamaji, he is a
fluent speaker in Swahili).
Tafsiri (n. 3), interpretation,
explanation.
(Ku)tefusiri (v. tr.), to translate,
interpret.
230
SWAHILI GKAMMAR
(Ku)<afute (v. tr.), to seek or
look for, search, investigate,
examine.
(Kn)taga (v. tr.), to lay (eggs).
T'agaa (n. 7, pi.), stems, branches.
(Ku)/agua (v. tr.), to choose,
elect.
7'ab.abihu (Kutia), to flourish,
sword.
(Ku)/ahadhari (v. intr.), to
beware, to take heed, be on
one's guard, to avoid.
Tahara (n. 3), eircumcisiou.
(Ku)/aharuki (v. intr.\ to be
excited by anger, be dismayed,
be vexed.
(Ku;<ahayari (v. intr.), to be
ashamed.
(Ku)ji<ahirfi (v. ref.), to exert
one's self, take pains.
(Ku)tehiri (v. tr.), to circumcize.
Tai (n. 3), eagle.
Taib (inv. adj.), well, good.
Taifa (n. 3), nation, Gentile.
T'aja (n. 3), tribute, tax.
(Ku)taja (v. tr.), to mention,
name.
Taji (n. 5), crown.
7'ajindi (n. 3), elocution.
Tajiri (n. 5), rich man.
(Ku)<aka (v. tr.), to want, desire,
need, ask, request.
Taka (n. 3), dirt, filth ; Takataka
(n. 3), rubbish, refuse, offal.
(Ku)fakaba(7M (v. tr.), to receive,
accept.
(Ku)<akabali, sec Kubali.
(Ku)tokabari (v. intr.), to be
proud.
(Ku)<akadamu (v. tr.), to precede.
(Ku)takasa (v. tr.), to cleanse,
purify, clean, sanctify.
(Ku)takasika (v. u.), to be
cleansed, to become extra-
ordinarily clean.
(Ku)takata (v. n.), to become
clean or clear, be pure,
-takatifu (var. adj.), holy, sacred,
pure, saintly, chaste.
Takato (n. 5), chastity, cleanli-
ness, purity.
Takia (n. 5), footstool, cushion.
Talaka (n. 3), divorce.
Talasimu (n. 3), amulet, charm,
talisman, phylactery.
(Ku)teliza (v. tr.), to plaster, to
daub.
Tama (n. 3), end, finis, it is
finished ; Tama (n. 5), cheek ;
T'ama (n. 3), refuse, rubbish,
sweepings, offscourings.
(Ku)/ama(v. intr.), to move (from
one house to another), emi-
grate ; (v. n.), to come to an
end : (Kushika)tama (v. intr.),
lo meditate, reflect, be silent
(lit., to hold the check).
(Ku)/amisha (v. c.), to remove.
Tamaa (n. 3), desire, longing,
lust, craving, coveting.
(Ku)<amalaM (v. tr.), to rule,
govern, possess, appropriate,
purchase, to be promoted.
(Ku)temani (v. tr.), to desire, long
for, covet, lust tifter.
Tamasha (n. 3), curiosity, show,
something rare.
(Ku)tamba (v. intr.), to go about,
walk abroad, pass through.
T'ambi (n. 7, pi.), macaroni, ver-
micelli (made by Swahili house-
wives).
(Ku)tambaa (v. intr.), to creep,
crawl, spread.
Tambarare (inv. adj.), level, flat;
N<i ya tambarare, a plain.
T'ambazi (n. 3), abscess.
(Ku)tambua (v. tr.), to recognize,
discern, distinguish, decipher.
(Ku)tambulikana (v. n.), to be
recognizable, discernible.
(Xu)tamburikana (v. n.), to be
well known.
(Ku)tambmisha (v. c.), to make
known, to decide.
Tambuu (n. 3), leaf of betel -treo
used for chewing.
Tamko (n. 5), pronunciation,
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
231
enunciation, accent, utterance,
promise, speech, expression,
word.
Tanm (n. 3), sweetness, pleasant-
ness.
-<amu (var. adj.), sweet, nice,
delicious. (This can bo used
adverbially.)
(Ku)tana (v. tr.), to separate,
slit up, comb.
(Ku)tanakali (v. n.), to be trans-
lated, carried away.
(Ku)<anawari (v. intr.), to shine,
jriv<; light.
T'anda (n. 3), link of chain, husk,
shell.
(Ku)tanda (v. tr.), to spread out,
lace (with rope) ; (v. intr.), to
be spread out, be set in array.
Tande (n. 3), tortoise.
Tan</aa (n. 3), open country
cleared by burning under-
growth.
(Ku)tandika (v. tr.), to spread
out, lay in order, set in array.
Tandu (n. 3), tattooing, tribal
incisions in face ; (n. 5), web ;
Tandu la buibui, spider's web.
Tandu (n. 3), centipede.
T'anda (n. 7, pi.), film or crust
on cooked rice, etc.
(Ku)tandua (v. sub.), to strip (a
bed) (in contradistinction to
tandika, making a bed) and
roll up the bedding.
(Ku)tanduka (v. n.), to be folded
or rolled up.
Tanga (n. 5), sail; Tanga mbili;
period of •variable winds
between SW. and NE. Mon-
soon after Demani.
(Ku)tanga (v. tr.), to split (as
wood).
(Ku)Janga (v. intr.), to wander,
err, stroll, collect, or contribute
(as of money).
(Ku)/anga-/anga (v.), to stroll or
wander about.
(Ku)tangaa (v. n.), to be spread
abroad, be circulated, be well
known.
(Ku)tengamana (v. rec.), to be
mixed together, make common
cause, have fellowship with,
join.
Tangamano (n. 5), league.
(Ku)tengamka (v. n.), to cheer
up, throw off grief, take
courage.
Tangamko (u. 5), joy, cheer,
rejoicing.
(Ku)tangamsha (v. c.), to en-
courage, cheer.
(Ku)tenganya (v. tr.), to mix,
mingle, blend, betray.
(Ku)tenganyika (v. n.), to be
mixed.
(Ku)/anganyikana (v. rec.), to be
intermingled.
Tangauko (n. 5), trouble, vexa-
tion, strength.
Tangawe (n. 3), gravel, grit.
Tangawizi (n. 3), ginger.
(Ku)tangaza (v. c.), to publish,
announce, make known, de-
clare, divulge.
Tange (n. 3), newly-cleared
ground.
Tangi (n. 3), tank, cistern.
(Ku)tengisha (v. c.), to scatter.
Tango (n. 5), contribution,
pumpkin, gourd.
Tango pepete (n. 5), dwarf
cucumber.
Tangu (adv.), since, after ; Tangu
zamani, a long time ago; -a
tangu, from the beginning ;
Zamani za tangu, old times ;
Tangu lini ? since when ? how
long ago ?
(Ku)fangua (v. tr.), to abrogate,
annul, abolish, bring to nought,
make void, separate, loosen.
(Ku)tangulia (v. tr.), to go before,
lead the way, be in front, fore-
stall, precede.
Tani (inv. adj.), wide-open, out-
stretched, uplifted,
232
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Tankil (n. 3), copy (manu-
script).
-tano (var. num. adj.). five ; -a
/ano, fifth.
Tanu (or fanuu) (n. 3), oven,
furnace, kiln.
(Ku)<anua (v. intr.), to expand,
stride, stretch out, spread.
(Ku)fanuka (v. n.), to be stretched
out ; Kutanuka t'ani, to lie
prone with arms extended.
Tanzi (n. 5), snare, trap, noose,
loop.
Tanzia (n. 3), announcement of
death.
jT'anzu (n. 3), large branch of
tree, bough.
Tao (n. 5), arch, curve, bay,
harbour.
(Ku)<apa (v. inir.), to shiver,
tremble ; Ku£apa-/apa (v. intr.),
to fidget, be restless, flounder.
(Xu)fapakaa (v. n.), to be dis-
tributed, scattered broadcast,
spread.
(Ku)/apanya (v. tr.). to scatter,
dis-perse, throw about.
Tapasi (n. 5), chisel (see Patasi).
(Ku)tapika (v. tr.), to vomit, be
sick.
(Ku)tarac7/aa (v. pr.), to be
pleased with.
Taraji (n. 3), hope, expectation ;
Kuteraji (v. tr.), to hope ; Ku-
farajia, to hope for, expect.
Tarambeta (n. 3), cornet, bugle.
Taralibu (n. 3), order, decorum,
method; (adj.), orderly, care-
fully.
Tari (n. 3), timbrel, cymbal.
Tarishi (n. 5), mail-man, runner.
-/asa (v. inf.), not yet, before,
ere ; T'asa (inv. adj.), barren ;
7 asa (n. 3), basin.
Tasbihi (n. 3), rosary (contains
99 beads, each one said 1o
stand for a name of God).
Tashuishi (n. 3), doubt, mis-
giving, distrust.
Tasibili (adj. and n. 3), quickly,
haste, rapidity.
Tasila (n. 3), farewell, adieu,
leave-taking.
Tasuira (n. 3), picture, en-
graving, image.
(Ku)tata (v. intr.), to be en-
tangled, complicated, wind.
(Ku)tatanua (v. sub.), to dis-
entangle, unravel, solve, un-
wind.
(Ku)tatiza (v. tr.), to tie round
(parcel).
-tatu (var. num. adj.), tliron;
-a tatu, third; T'&tu (n. 3),
yeast, leven, fermentation,
balm.
(Ku)tatua (v. tr.), to rend, tear,
burst, rip up, to unravel, to
extricate.
(Ku)tatuka (v. n.). to Ic dis-
entangled, unravelled, disin-
tegrated, torn into tatters.
Kufatuka (v. n.), to clear away
(of clouds).
Tau (n. 3), branding-iron.
(Ku)teua (see Teua) (v. tr.). to
choose, elect.
Taumu (n. 5). prop, shore (for
boats).
Tauni (adj. and n. 3), pestilence,
plague.
Taureti (n. 3), Mosaic law,
Pentateuch.
Tausi (n. 3), peacock.
Tauwaa (var. adj.), devout, pious,
godly, religious.
Tavu (n. 5), cheek (of face);
T'avu, calves (of legs), biceps
(muscle), (sing. Utevu).
T'awa (n. 3), louse ; Kutawa (v.
intr.), to remain indoors, be
secluded (women).
(Ku)£awaeMa (v. intr.), to per-
form ceremonial ablutions.
(Ku)iawakali (v. intr.), to trust,
have confidence, rely.
(Ku)lawala (v. tr.), govern, reign,
have power over.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
233
(Xu)tewanya (v. tr.), to scatter,
disperse, dissipate.
(Ku)tewanyika (v. n.), to be
scattered.
(Ku)/awaza (v. c.), to enthrone,
install (as ruler).
7'awi (n. 5), branch.
!/'aya (n. 3), jaw, jawbone, cheek-
bone ; (Ku)taya (v. tr.), to
reproach.
Tayari(tiari) (inv. adj.), ready,
willing; Kuweka <ayari, to
prepare.
(Ku)tefua (v. tr.), to stir up,
raise, trouble, agitate.
(Ku)tega (v. tr.), to snare, entrap,
decoy ; Kutega sikio, to lend
an ear, to incline the ear.
Tege (n. 5), bowed-leg.
(Ku)tegemea (v. tr.), to lean upon
(literally and figuratively).
(Ku)tegemeza (v. c.),' to support,
prop.
Tego (n. 3), snare, trap, charm,
spell.
(Ku)tegua (v. sub.), to remove,
undo, sprain.
(Ku)teguka (v. n.), to be sprained.
(Ku)teka (v. tr.), to draw (as
water), capture, plunder, carry
off.
(Ku)teka nyara, to take captive,
loot, pillage, spoil.
(Ku)teka (v. tr. and intr.), to
laugh, smile, laugh at, deride,
be merry, ridicule.
Teke (n. 3), kick ; Kupiga teke,
to kick.
(Ku)tekelea (v. tr.), to reach as
far as, arrive at.
(Ku)fekeleza (v.c.), to accomplish,
perform, bring to successful
issue.
(Ku)tekenya (v. tr.), to tickle.
(Ku)tekerea (v. intr.), to bo
glad, shout or sing for joy,
rejoice.
Tekeshaji (n. 5). jester, humorist.
(Ku;teketea (v. n.), to be on
fire, be burning or burnt, be
scorched.
(Ku)teketeza (v. c.), to burn, set
on fire.
(Ku)tekua (v. tr ), to break down,
force, undermine, knock, up-
root, tear off.
Tele (adj. inv. and adv.), much,
many, plentiful, abundant, to
the brim.
(Ku)teleka (v. tr.), to put on the
fire with a view to cooking.
(Ku)telemka (v. intr.), to run or
come down, descend (see
Teremuka).
(Ku)teleza (v. intr.), to slip, slide.
Telezi (n. 3), mire, mud, slipperi-
ncss.
(Ku)tema, to spit, expectorate
(see mate), clear forest.
(Ku)tema, to cut down, cut, hew,
slash, cut off, fell.
T'einbe (n. 3), grain, seed ; (adj.),
a little, a few.
(Ku)tembea (v. intr.). to go for a
walk, take a walk or trip;
Kutembea baharini, to go for a
row.
(Ku)jitembelea, to strut about.
(KuXembeza (v. c.), to take for a
walk, hawk about, advertise.
Tembo (n. 5), palm wine ; Tembo
la tamu, sweet unfermented
palm wine ; Temlo la kali,
strong fermented palm wine.
Tena (conj.), again, still, yet,
more, moreover, also, further.
(Ku)tenda (v. intr.), to do, act ;
(v. tr.), to do to, act towards
(unfavourably), deal with.
T'ende (n. 3), dates, elephanti-
asis ; Tende guu (u. 5), leg (of
chair, bedstead, etc.).
(Ku)tendea (v. prepl.), to deal
with, do for, act towards
(favourably).
(Kn)jitendekeza (v. ref.), to be
occupied with, busy oneself
about.
234
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Tendo (n. 5), act, action.
Tenga (n. 3, pi.), coarse flour ;
T'enga (n. 3), sea-monster.
(Ku)tenga (v. intr,), to alight (as
bird on bough).
(Ku)tenga (v. tr.), to separate,
set aside, withdraw, sever, set
apart.
(Ka)tengea, Kutengeka, to bo
arranged, settled properly,
regulated, made nice.
T'engelele (n. 7, pl.)> small
intestines.
(Ku)tengeneza (v. tr.), to put the
finishing touch to, bring about
desired end.
(Ku)tengeza (v. c.), to prepare.
arrange, regulate, mend, set to
rights.
Tengo (n. 3), dwelling, resting-
place.
(Ku)tenza nguvu (v. tr.), to
compel, treat violently.
T'eo (n. 3), sling, catapult ; Teo
(n. 7, pi.), sieves, winnowing
fans or trays.
(Ku)tepetea (v. n.), to be languid,
weary, dilapidated.
(Ku)/epuza (tepukuza) (v. intr.),
sprout, shoot, bud, blossom,
spring up.
Tepuzi (fepukuzi) (n. 5), shoot,
sprout, branch.
(Ku)terekeza (v. intr.), to halt
for refreshments.
(Ku)teremea (v. tr.), to take care
of, shew kindness to, make
feel at home.
Teremko (n. 5), steep hill, de-
clivity, descent.
(Ku)feremuka (KtUeremka) (v.
intr.), to go or come down,
descend,
(Ku)tesa (v. tr.), to persecute,
afflict; Kuteseka (v. n.), to
suffer, be in distress.
Teso (n. 5), suffering, distress.
(Ku)teta (v. intr.), to quarrel, dis-
pute, disagree, contend, strive.
T'ete (n. 3), small-pox, grain of
corn ; (n. 7), dried stalks of
common straw, stagger; t'ete
za maji (n. 3), chicken- or
water-pox ; T'et'e (n. :•>),
sparks.
(Ku)ietea (v. prep.), to oppose,
to dispute, to champion, to fight
for.
(Ku)<'etea (v. intr.), to walk
lame, to halt, to totter, to
cackle.
(Ku)tetema (v. intr.), to tremble,
shake ; Kutetemeka (v. n.), to
shiver, quake, be moved.
T'eu (n. 3), ant-hill ; T'eu, heart-
burn, eructations.
(Ku)feua (see <agua and /aua)
(v. tr.), to choose, elect, pre-
destinate.
(Ku)teuka (v. n.), to break wind,
belch.
(Ku)teuliwa (v. pas.), to be chosen,
predestinated, elected (see
mteule).
Tewa (n. 3), kind of fish.
(Ku)teza (v. intr.), to play, sport,
. dance.
(Ku)leza Kinanda, Kuteza gwa-
ride = musical drill.
(Zu)teza-feza, to shake about, be
loose.
(Ku)tezama (tazama) (v. tr.), to
look at, look after, observe.
(Ka)tezamia mbao (v. prepl.), to
tell fortunes (by shaking sand
on board).
(Ku)tezamika (v. n.), to be
presentable, of pleasing appear-
ance.
I'ezi (adv.), aft, in Ihe after part
of the ship.
T'ezo (n. 3), adze ; Tezo (n. 5),
game, plaything.
Thabiii (inv. adj.), firm, strong,
immovable, established, fixed.
(Ku)thabKisha (v. c.), to
strengthen, confirm, establish,
set fast.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
235
T//ahiri (inv. adj.), plain, clear,
open, evident, obvious.
Thalatha (num. adj.), three.
Thalathini (num. adj.), thirty.
TVialimu (n. 5), criminal, trans-
gressor, fraudulent person.
Thaliiaashara (num. adj.),
thirteen.
Thaluji (Thalji) (n. 3), snow.
Thamani (n. 3), value, price,
l>r ciousness, worth.
Thamanini (num. adj.), eighty.
Thamanya (num. adj.), eight.
Thamin<aashara (num. adj.),
eighteen.
T/iana (n. 3), thought, suspicion,
supposition, hypothesis.
(Ku)</*ani (v. intr.), to think,
suppose, presume.
Thawabu (n. 3), reward of
merit.
(Ku)<7uhirisha (v. c.), to make
manifest, show, demonstrate.
(Ku)</ulimu (v. tr.), to wrong,
defraud, harm.
Thinaashara (num. adj.), twelve.
TMneni (num. adj.), two.
Thorn (n. 3), garlic.
(Ku)thubu<u (v. intr.), to dare
(see subufu).
(Ku)thubu<ika (v. n.), to be
assured, convinced of, have
proof of.
(Ku)tb.ubudsha (v. c.), to estab-
lish, strengthen, convince, con-
firm.
Thulutbi (n. 3), third.
Thumuni (n. 3), eighth, groat,
four annas, sixteen pice
(eighth part of a dollar).
T'ia (n: 3), giraffe.
(Ku)tia (v. tr.), to put in or on or
into (used of persons and
things). Like piga, this verb
is capable of various mean-
ings according to the word
it is coupled with : Kutia
maji, to water or dilute ; Kutia
huzuni, to sadden; Kutia ka-
zini, to employ; Kutia moto,
to set on fire.
Tiara (n. 3), kite.
(Ku)fibika (v. n.), to get well, bo
cured.
(Ku)fibu (v. tr.), to heal, cure.
(Ku)tibua (v. tr.), to stir up, as
muddy water.
(Ku)tibuka (v. n.), to be in an
uproar.
Tibuko (n. 5), commotion, uproar,
disturbance,
-tifu (var. adj.), light, fine,
powdery.
(Ku)tifuka (v. n.), to rise, fly
(as dust).
(Ku)fii (v. tr.), to obey, submit
to.
Tikiti (n. 5), water melon,
vegetable marrow.
Tiki<iki (adv.), finely ground,
fine, small.
(Ku)dlifu (v. intr.), to run risks,
to venture.
Timamu (inv. adj.), full, com-
plete, perfect.
(Ku)fimba (v. tr.), to dig.
Timbo (n. 5), hole, pit, hollow.
(Ku)<imbuza (v. c.), to break
through, appear (as sun
through clouds).
(Ku)dmia (Kutimu) (v. n.), to be
fulfilled, be complete, bo
perfect,
-timilivn (var. adj.), perfect,
entire, complete, brought to
successful end.
(Ku)dmiza (v. c.), to accomplish,
finish completely, fulfil.
(Ku)'in(fo (v. tr.), to slaughter,
cut off, kill ; to slit cloth
lengthways, cut out; Kutinrfa
kiu, to quench thirst.
Ku/in-/a, Ku/hWika, KufinJikia.
(Ku)findikana (v. n.), to be-
come less, to be cut off (as
water), be short or scarce,
come to au end, staunch, fail,
be insufficient, waste away.
236
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)dndanga (v. tr.),to slaughter.
Tindi (n. 3), tomato.
Tindo (n. 3), chisel.
Tini (n. 3), fig.
T'ini (adv.), down, below, under-
neath, inferior ; T'ini ya (adv.
prep.), under, beneath, etc.
(Ku)firirika (v. intr.), to flow or
trickle down.
Tisaa (inv. adj.), nine.
Tisaafashara (num. adj.), nine-
teen.
(Ku)tisha (v. tr.), to terrify,
intimidate, scare, subdue.
Tishali (n. 5), lighter.
(Ku)tisMka (v. n.), to fear, be
afraid.
7'isia (inv. num. adj.), nine.
Tisiini(tisaini) (num. adj.),
ninety.
Ti/i (n. 5), breast, teat, nipple.
(Ku)tit'ima (v. intr.), to thunder,
roar, roll (as thunder).
-t'o, an enelitic denoting
thoroughness ; Fungat'o haiu-
mizi mkono, bind well, hurts
not the arm ; Fanyet'o, do
thoroughly.
(Ku)£oa (v. intr.), to put or take
out, bring or give out, spend,
dismiss, omit (to do a thing),
part witli ; Kutoakosa, to point
out a mistake, blame.
Toba (n. 3), repentance.
(Ku)toboa (v. tr.), to pierce,
break through, thrust into,
make a hole in.
(Ku)toboka (v. n.), to burst, burst
open, come asunder.
(Ku)toea v. (prepl.), to put sauce
to food, flavour, make savoury.
Tofali, (n. 5), tile, brick.
Tohara (see tabara) (n. 3), cir-
cumcision, cleanliness, purity.
(Ku)toja (v. tr.), to scarify, tattoo,
make incisions in skin, cup,
bleed, vaccinate.
Tojo (n. 5), incision, etc.
(Ku)/oka (v. intr.), to go or come
out, to have just done such and
such a thing ; (v. tr.), Jasho
lamioka, he perspires ; Aiokwa
nl maiozi, he weeps.
(Ku)toka kati (v. intr.), to pass
away, disappear.
Tokaa (n. 3), lime, chalk.
Tokea (prep.), from, out of.
(Ku)iokea (v. prepl.), to go out
by, etc., happen, appear, conio
to pass, be manifest; NWia >a
ku/okoa, a way of means of
exit.
(Ku)tokomea (v. n.), to disappear,
vanish, pass away.
(Ku)tokosa (v. c.), to boil, cook
by boiling.
(Ku)tokota (v. n.), to boil, come
to boiling point.
(Ku)tokoz i (v. tr.), to scoff, tease,
provoke.
(Ku)/olea (v. prepl.), to give out
to or for; Amemtolea makali,
ho used strong language to
him.
(Ku)<oma (v. tr.), to pierce, stab,
burn, toast, brand, prick,
cauterize.
Tomo (n. 5), dross.
Tomoko (n. 5), custard-apple.
(Ku)tona (v. intr.), to drop, drip ;
(Ku)toneka (v. n.), to fall in
drops.
Tone (n. 5), drop.
(Ku)tonesha (v. c.), to touch a
sore place (thereby making it
" run " or drop).
(Ku)tonga (v. tr.), to carve, point,
sharpen, cleave, hew.
Tonge (n. 3), bit, lump, morsel,
piece.
Kuiongea (v. tr.) to slander, to
betray.
(Ku)<ongeka (v. n.), to be sharp,
be pointed.
T'ongo (n. 3), blindness of one
eye.
(Ku)tongoa (v. tr.), to sharpen ;
Ku/ongoa Kilcmba, to arrange
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
237
turban symmetrically with a
point.
(Ku)<ongokana (v. n.), to be
brought into points at either
end.
(Ku)^ononepha (v. c.), to make
rich.
(Ku)tononoka (v. n.), to become
rich.
Tope (n. 7, pi.), mud, mire, boggy
or marshy earth, dirt, clay.
(Ku)topea (v. intr.), to sink (as
in mud or mire, or as an arrow
in flesh), to stick in.
Topi (n. 3), hat, helmet.
(Ku)topoa (v. tr.), to remove,
take away, counteract (power
of spell, etc.).
(Ku)toroka (v. intr.), to run
away, escape, play traunt.
-tosa (var. adj.), unripe, hard,
nearly ripe (ctr. -bifi, raw).
(Ku)tosa (v. c.), to drown, wet.
(Ku)tosha (v. n.), to be enough,
be sufficient, suffice.
(Ku)toshewa (v. pass), to be
astonished, amazed.
(Ku)tota (v. intr.), to sink, get
wet ; Kutota mato (v. intr.), to
lose eyesight.
(Ku)fovya (Kufovyeka) (v. tr.),
to dip.
(Ku)foweka (v. n.), to disappear.
vanish.
(Ku)/owesha (v. c.), to kill, put
out of sight.
(Ku)/oza (v. c.), to oblige, give :
hence to tax, exact, extract,
levy.
Tbzi (n. 5), tear, tear-drop.
Tu, 7'uu (inv. adj.), only, alone,
just, nothing but.
T'uu (n. 3), white-ant hill.
Tu (pron., 1st pers., pi.), we, ua
(also we are, strong verb
to be).
T'ua (n. 3), blemish, stain, defect,
disgrace.
(Ku)tua (v. tr.), to put or lay
down (load or burden), furl
(sail); (v. n.). to set (of sun),
halt, camp, sojourn ; Kutua
moyo, to feel comforted.
(Ku)<ua (v. tr.), to grate, rasp,
grind, or rub to powder..
(Ku)tuama (v. n.), to settle (as
sediment).
(Ku)<ubai (v. intr.), to agree to
terms (rebels).
(Ku)<ubia (v. prep.), to repent of
or towards (God) (used with
more seriousness than tubu).
(Ku)£ubu (v. intr.), to repent.
(Ku)tubua (v. tr.), to graze
(skin), rub slightly.
(Ku)tubwikia (v. prepl.), to fall
or tumble into.
Tufani (n. 3), storm, hurricane,
gale.
T'ufe (n. 3), ball (for playing).
-tufu (var. adj.), bad, worthless,
corrupt.
(Ku)tufuka (v. n.), to become use-
less, bad, etc.
Tui (n. 3), fat, marrow, fatness,
oil ; T'ui (n. 3), leopard ; Tui la
nazi, oily milk from cocoa-nut
squeezed through grass bag to
separate from grated iibre.
(Ka)£uja (v. tr.), to strain, filter.
(Ku)<ujika (v. n.), to be strained,
filtered, cleansed by straining.
(Ku)hijua (v. tr.), to thin down
(as gruel).
(Ku)/ujuka (v. n.), to become thin
or watery.
(Ka)hika (v. intr.), to bf moan,
low, vile, oppressed.
(Ku)tukana (v. tr.), to abuse,
slander, insult, use bad lan-
guage to, revile.
(Ku)tukanana (v. rec.), to insult
mutually (see matnkano).
(Ku)tukia (kutuka) (v. n.), to hap-
pen, chance, come to pass, hap-
pen suddenly.
(Ku)takia (v. tr.), to hate, dis-
like.
238
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)tukiza (v. c.), to cause to
hate, annoy, ridicule, tease,
offend, vex, displease.
(Ku)tukizwa (v. pass.), to be
angry, vexed, offended.
(Ku)<ukua (v. tr.), to carry, bear,
endure, put up with.
-fukufu (var. adj.), glorious, ex-
cellent, exalted.
(Ku)fukuka (v.. u.), to be exalted,
glorified.
(Ku)<ukulia (v. prep.), to bear,
carry, or endure for.
(Ku)frikuliana (v. rec.), to bear
and forbear, get on well to-
gether.
(Xu)fakulika (v. n.) to be bear-
able, tolerable.
(Ku)tukusa (v. tr.), to shake,
agitate.
(Kujtukusika (v. n.), to be moved,
shaken.
(Ku)tukuta (v. intr.), to move,
fidget, be restless, uneasy.
-tukutu (var. adj.), fidgetty, un-
manageable, insubordinate.
(Ku)<ukuza (v. tr.), to glorify,
exalt, magnify ; (v. c.), to make
carry.
Tule (adj.), low, base, unworthy.
(Ku)tulia (v. prepl.), to let off,
exonerate (from responsibility
or blame^; (v. intr.), to bo
quiet, settle down, be at rest,
tranquil, serene; (v. tr.), to
plant, set.
(Ku)tuliza (see Tuza) (v. c.), com-
fort, console, quiet, calm, allay,
to fix or set (as of eyes).
(Ku)tuma (v. tr.), to send on an
errand, commission (used only
of persons).
(Ku)tuma(v. intr.), to trade, make
gain or advantage, profit.
(Ku)tumai (v. intr.), to trust, be
confident.
Tumaini (n. 3), trust, hope, con-
fidence.
(Ku)tamaini (v. tr.), to trust, trust
in, rely upon ; (v. intr.), to
hope, expect.
T'umba (n. 3), bud; (n. 5), catc,
sheath, cover.
(Ku)tumbaa (v. intr.), to loaf
about, lurk, stand idle.
Tumbaku (n. 3), tobacco, snuff
(see fctudy 17).
Tumbawe (n. 5), coral-rag ; Jiwe
la fumbawe, coral.
T'umbi (n. 3), net for fishing made
of cocoa-nut fibre, heap.
Tombiri (n. 3), monkey.
T'umbit'umbi (adv.), in heaps.
Tnmbo (n. 5), stomach, abdomen,
intestines, womb.
(Ku)<umbua (v. tr.), to pierce,
wound, perforate, bore a hole
in, break up.
(Ku)/umbuiza (v. c.), to comfort.
Tumbuizo (Jumbuize (n. 3), short
flowery poem.
(Ku)<umbua (v. N.), to burst
open, split up, be wounded, be
worn through into a hole.
(Ku)tumbukia (v. prepl.), to fall
or tumble into.
Tome (n. 3), messenger, sent one
emissary.
(Ku)tumia (v. tr.), to use, em-
ploy, make use of, spend ;
(Situmii nyama, I do not take
meat).
(Kujtumika (v. intr.), to serve, be
in service; (v. n.), to be of use,
be in use.
(Ka)tumikana (v. n.), to be used
up.
(Ku)tumikia (v. prepl.), to serve
(a person).
Tamo (n. 5), sphere of bui-incss ;
Tamo (n. 5), errand, message.
(Ku)tumwa (v. puss.), to ]>c .scut
on a message.
(Ku)<una (v. tr.), to flay, skin.
Tunda (n. 5), fruit ; Tu'nda (n. 3),
waistlet.
(Ku)tunda (v. tr.), to pluck, pick,
gather, to catch.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
239
(Ku)tundamana (v. n.), to hang,
hold together.
(Ku)tundika (v. tr.), to hold, sus-
pend, to hang on a line.
Tundu (n. 4), nest, long basket,
cage.
Tandu (n. 3), hole.
(Ku)tunduwaa (v. intr.), to be
silent, morose, taciturn.
(Ku)tunga (v. tr.),to put or string
together, thread, compose.
(Ku)funga (v. tr.), to winnow,
sift, shepherd, tend, guide.
(Ku)tungamana (v. n.), to be
established, hang together as a
whole.
(Ku)tungia (v. tr.), to lead, to
string up.
(Ku)tungika (v. tr.), to hang up,
suspend, to hang on a line.
T'ungu (n. 3), small ant, emmet ;
-/ungu (var. adj ), bitter.
(Ku)tungua (v. tr ), to cast down,
violate, degrade, profane, dese-
crate.
T'unguja (n. 3), tomato.
(Ku)tunguka (v. ^n.), to be cast
down, come to grief, evil to
befall one.
(Ku)<ungulia (v. prepl.), to look
in, peep in, stoop and look in.
T'unu (n. ;!), treasure, rarity, de-
light, something prized and
valued, present.
(Ku)hmua (v. tr.), to scratch,
scarify.
(Ku)iunza (v. tr. & intr.), to take
care of, guard, keep, protect,
preserve, watch closely, look
out.
T'uo (n. 3), camp, encampment.
^"upa (n. 3), file; T'upa (n. 3),
bottle, flask, phial.
(Ku)<upa (v. tr.), to throw, throw
away, cast, fling.
(Ku)i'upa (v. tr.), to leap, leap
over ; Km'upa mpaka, to over-
step limit, encroach, go beyond
boundary.
(Ku)/upilia mbali, to throw right
away, banish out of sight.
-tupu (var. adj.), empty, only,
nothing but ; Tupu (invar, adj.),
naked, nude.
Tupu- tupu (adv.), in a state of
nudity or destitution.
Turki (n. 5), Turk.
(Ku)<urup'uka (v. n.), to escape,
get loose (from confinement).
(Ku)<urup'usha (v. c.), to assist in
escaping, set free, deliver,
rescue.
(Ku)turuzika (v. intr.), to trickle,
run down.
(Ku)tasha (v. tr.), to curse, vilify,
execrate, defame.
Tusifusi (n. 5), roaring of waves.
Tuta (n. 5), row, raised bed
for vegetables, furrow, com-
pany, band.
(Ku)t'utia (v. n.), to rise high, bo
lofty.
(Ku)tutiza (v. c.), to heap up,
pile together.
Tutu! (interj.), hands off! take
. care !
(Ku)tutuma (v. intr.), to rumble,
roll.
(Ku)tutuzika (v. n.), to pant,
throb.
T\m (tu) (adj. and adv.), only,
merely.
(Ku)iuuza (v. intr.), to trickle,
flow.
2\iwashi (n. 5), eunuch.
Tuwazi (n. 5), cymbal, timbrel.
(Ku)tuza (tuliza) (v. tr.), to soothe,
pacify, console, curry favour.
Tuzo (n. 3), reward, consolation
prize, tip, " douceur."
(Ku)fwa (v. intr), to set (of
sun).
(Ku)twaa (v. tr.), to take, receive,
take with the hand; Kutwaa
p'ole, to treat tenderly.
(Ku)twanga (v. tr.), to pound
com in mortar for removing
husk.
210
BWAHILI GRAMMAR
(Ku)tweka (v. tr.), to raise, hoist,
lift up, put upon (load or re-
sponsibility.
(Ku)twesha (v. tr.), to pay respects
to, greet (in the evening).
(Ku)tweta (v. intr.), to gasp, pant,
struggle for breath.
(Ku)iweza (v. tr.), to subdue,
abase, humble, bring low.
(Ku)ji<weza (v. ref.), to humble
oneself, grovel, submit.
Twiga (n. 3), giraffe.
II
IT (pron. 2nd p. sing.). .Also 2nd
p. s. of strong verb to be, thou
art.
TJa (n. n), flower, blossom; TTa la
warirZi, rose ; (n. 7), fence round
court, courtyard, enclosure.
(Ku)ua (v. tr.), to kill, murder
(cannot be used of slaughtering
animals).
UarZui (n. 7), enmity, hostility,
ill-will.
Uaminifa (n. 7), faithfulness,
truth.
Uangalizi (n. 7), care, super-
vision, providence.
Uashi (n. 7), building, con-
struction.
Uasi (n. 7), rebellion, apostacy.
(Ka)uawa (Kuwawa (v. pass.), to
be killed, murdered.
-ubaa (n. 7), vcxatiousness.
Ubahili (n. 7), avarice, miserli-
ness.
Tlbaini (n. 7), discernment.
Ubainifu (n. 7), manifestation,
proof.
Ubambo (n. 7), slit-stick for
roasting meat on.
TTbani (n. 7), frankincense (a
TTbao (n. 7), board, plank.
Uba<i (n. 7), lean-to shed, pent-
house.
Ubadli (n. 7), iniquity, wicked-
ness.
TJbavu (n. 7), rib, side.
Ubaya (n. 7), sadness, wickedness.
Ubeti (n. 7), couplet (poetry)
Ubishi (n. 7), joke.
Ubivu (n. 7), ripeness.
Ubiti (n. 7), rawness, greenness.
Uboi (n. 7), position and work of
houee-boy.
TTbongo (n. 7), brain.
Ubora (n. 7), power, superiority,
prowess.
Ubovu (n. 7), rottenness, corrup-
tion.
Ububwi (n. 7), dumbness.
Ubwabwa (n. 7), pap, sop.
Uchache (n. 7), littleness, scarcity,
smallness, insignificance, mini-
mum.
Uchafu (n. 7), filth.
Uchaga (n. 7), grain-store, barn.
Uchanga (n. 7). youngness, nn-
developedness.
Uchao (n. 7), dawn, morning.
TTdaku (n. 7), slander, gossip.
UfZanganyifu (n. 7), deception,
cheating, fraud.
Udevu (n. 7), a hair (of board).
Udhaifu(n. 7), feebleness, wretch-
edness, weakness.
TJdhamini (n. 7), security, bail,
sponsorship.
(Ku)udhi(v.tr.), totrouble, annoy.
persecute, harass, molest ; Lika-
kuudhi hafa Ku-Kuua, It mort-
ified you.
Udhia (n. 7), trouble, annoyance,
vexation, worry, uproar.
(Ku)udhika (v. n.), to b:: in
trouble, perplexed, disturbed.
TJdhilifu (n. 7), insignificance.
TJWAi (n. 7), ceremonial purifica-
tion (Muha.) Kutanguka urf/m,
to be defiled.
(Ku)udhurisha (v. c.), to make
excuses for.
TTdhuru (n. 7), excuse.
Udogo (n. 7), (childhood, infancy)
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
241
smal Iness, insignificance, youth-
fulness, youth.
Udohoudoho (n. 7), odds and ends.
TTdongo (n. 7), Boil, clay, ground.
Ufa (n. 7), crack, fissure.
Ufanifu(u. 7), success, prosperity.
Ufaume (n. 7), kingdom, kingship.
Ufi'Muli (n. 7), insolence, over-
bearing behaviour, rudeness,
arrogance.
Ufifilizi (n. 7), distraint, destruc-
tion.
Ufisadi (n. 7), ill-fame, vice, vile-
ness.
Ufito (n . 7), thin stick, lath, pole.
Ufu (n. 7), death, corpse.
Ufufuo (n. 7), resurrection.
Ufunga (n. 7), long seat on
verandah.
Ufunguo (n.7), key.
Ufuo (u. 7), strand, shore, beach,
water's edge.
Ufuraha (n. 7), small box for
keeping chewing-lime.
Ufyagio (n. 7), broom, sweeping-
brush.
Ufyozi (n. 7), abuse, insult.
Uga (see ua) (7), open, space.
Ugali (n. 7), Indian-corn porridge.
Uganga (n. 7), witch-doctor's art,
magic.
Ugema (n. 7), tapping of palm-
trees for today.
TJgeni (n. 7), state of being a
stranger ; TTgenini ; in a foreign
country.
TIghaibu (n. 7), chewing mixture
consisting of tobacco, lime,
betel-leaf, areca-nut and gum
(k'atu).
TTgo (n. 7), fence, hedge.
Ugomvi, quarrel.
Ugonjwa, sickness, illness, disease.
(Ku)agua (v. intr.), to fall ill, ail,
ache, be in pain.
TTgurau (n.) hardness, toughness,
hardship, difficulty.
(Ka)ugnza (v. c.) to nurse, see
through an illness.
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
TJgwe (pi. ng'ngwe) (n. 7), thong,
cord, line.
Uhaba (n.7),8mallness, paucity.
Uhai(n. 7), life.
Uhalifu (n. 7), rebellion, trans-
gression.
Uhalimu (n. 7), condescension.
Uharibifu (n. 7), corruption,
depravity.
Uhasharaii (n. 7), immorality,
licentiousness.
Uhasidi (n. 7), envy.
Uhiteji (n. 7), want, need, destitu-
tion.
Uhotfari (n. 7), encouragement.
Uhunzi (n. 7), smith-work.
Uhunt (n. 7), freedom.
Uhusida (n. 7), envyings.
Uin«7a (n. 7), hunting, chase,
sport.
TTja (n. 7), slavery, servility.
Ujaka (n. 7), wild spinach.
Ujana (n. 7), youth, childhood.
Ujane (n. 7), widowhood.
Ujani (n. 7), captivity.
Ujanja (n. 7), swindling, cheating,
Ujenzi (n. 7), building, construc-
tion.
Uji (n. 7), gruel, porridge, stir-
about ; TTji wa mtama, kaffir-
corn porridge; Uji wa mfele,
rice gruel.
Ujinga (n. 7), stupidity, ignorance.
Ujira (n. 7), wages, salary, hire.
Ujumbe (n. 7), message, prince-
dom.
U'kabail (n. 7), nobility, dignity.
Ukahaba (n. 7), whoredom.
Ukaidi (n. 7), obstinacy, perver-
sity.
Ukakaya (n. 7), extent, expanse.
Ukali (n. 7), fierceness, sharp.
ness.
Ukamba (u. 7), belt, girdle.
Ukambaa (n. 7), cord made from
slips of dwarf-palm.
Ukambi (n. 7), measles.
Ukamilifa (n. 7), perfectness, in-
tegrity.
Q
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Ukanda (n. 7), cord, thong,
bridle.
Ukarimu (n. 7), liberality, gene-
rosity, large-hcarteduess.
Ukavu (n. 7), insolence, dryncss.
Ukazi (n. 7), dwelling.
Ukelele (n. 7), great noise, out-
cry.
Ukeme (n. 7), cry of distress, call
for help.
Ukhaini (n. 7), treachery.
Ukhiana (n. 7), guile, deceit.
(Ku)ukilia (v. prepl.), to intend,
plan, determine, devise.
Ukinaifu (n.), pride, self-suffi-
ciency.
Ukindani (n. 7). stubbornness, con-
tradictoriuess.
TJkindu (n.), fine vegetable fibre,
strips from leaves of wild
date.
TTkiwa (n. 7), poverty, penury,
destitution.
Ukohozi (n. 7), phlegm, expectora-
tion.
Ukoko (n. 7), crust of food in cook-
ing-pot.
TTkonzo (n. 7), goad, long stick
with pointed end.
Ukoma (n. 7), leprosy.
Ukombo (n.), crookedness, curved
tool for hollowing wood.
Ukombozi (n. 7), redemption, ran-
som.
Ukomo (n.), end, termination.
Ukono (n. 7), arm (of lake, etc.),
offshoot, branch.
Uk'onyezo (n. 7), winking, making
signs with eyebrows.
Ukoo (n. 7), dirt, filth.
TTkope (u.), eyelash.
TTkorofl, impiety, ungodliness,
wickedness.
TJkosevu (n. 7), want, deficiency,
insufficiency, fault.
TTkubali (n. 7), acceptance.
Ukubwa (n.), size, seniority,
priority, greatness.
tJkucha (n. 7), claw, nail.
Uk'ulima (n. 7), cultivation, til-
lage, husbandry.
Ukumbi (n. 7), entrance hall.
Ukumbiza (n. 7), space under
eaves of house.
Ukumbusho (n.), memorial, me-
mento.
Uknnrfufu (n. 7), olearing-up,
simplicity.
Ukungo (n. 7), edge, brink, brim.
Ukurasa (n. 7), leaf of book,
sheet of paper. (See Kata.)
Ukuta (n. 7), wall.
Ukuu (n, 7), greatness, strength,
honour.
Ukwato (n. 7), hoof.
Ukwasi (n. 7), riches, opulence.
Ulabibu (n. 7), perseverance.
Ulafi (n. 7), gluttony, excess.
Dlaini, Ulainifu (n. 7), softness,
smoothness ; TTlaini-ulaini, flat-
tery.
Ulaiti (n.), European calico (also
adj. applied to anything of
European origin).
TTlanifu (n. 7), self-indulgence,
cursing.
Ulatifu (n. 7), gentleness.
TTlaya (n. prop.), Europe, mother-
country.
Uler/i (n.), boy, lad.
TJlegevu (n. 7), languor, lassitude,
slackness, sloth, sluggishness.
Ulekevu (n. 7), straightforward-
ness, uprightness, equity, in-
tegrity.
TTlevi (n. 7), drunkenness.
TTlili (n. 7), superior kind of
bedstead.
Ulimi (n. 7), tongue (pi. ndimi).
TJlimwengu (n. 7), inhabited
world, universe, world.
TTlindi (n. |7), African's tinder-
box.
TTlinganifu (n. 7), comparison,
resemblance.
Ulingo (n. 7), watchers' hut in
field.
Ulinzi (n. 7), guard, watching.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
243
(Ku)uliza (v. tr.),to ask a question.
Ulizi (n. 7), art and practice of
wailing at funerals.
Ultima (n. 3), run of ill luck.
Uraa (u. 7), fork, gridiron, cautery,
iron (pi. Mauma and Nyuma).
(Ku)uma (v. tr.), to bite ; (v. intr.),
to ache, hurt, pain (only used
transitively of a wound or in-
jured member affecting suf-
ferer's own person as Kiiwa
chaniwuma, his head pains
him).
Umande (n. 7), dew, moisture;
Uman<7e ulioganda, hoar frost.
Umasikini (n. 7), poverty, want.
Umasihia (n. 7), Christianity.
Umad (n. 7), multitude, crowd,
everybody.
(Ku)umba (v. tr.), to create, shape,
form ; to descry, pick out (object
far off).
(Ku)umbia (v. intr.), to soar
about, glide round.
(Ku)umbika (v. n.), to be well
formed or fashioned, be strong.
Umbo (n. 5), form, shape, mould-
ing, figure.
TJmbu (n. 5), sister.
(Ku)umbua (v. sub.), to deface,
mutilate, disfigure, destroy.
-ume (var. adj.), masculine, male,
manly, strong.
Ume (n. 7), courage, manliness.
Umeme (n. 7), lightning, thunder-
bolt.
(Ku)umia (v. prepl.), to be in
pain.
(Ku)umika (v. tr.), to cup.
Umio (n. 7), throat, windpipe.
(Ku)umiza (v. c.), to hurt, cause
pain to, inflict suffering.
(Ku)umka (v. n), to rise up, foam,
bubble up, froth, effervesce.
Umoja (n. 7), union, oneness,
unity.
Umri (n. 7), lifetime, age, life.
(Ku)umua (v. tr.), to take away,
deprive.
(Ku)umwa ni (v. pass.), to be
bitten by, suffer pain from.
Unafiki (n. 7), hypocrisy, lying,
deceit.
Unajisi. (See Najisi.)
(Ku)nnda (v. tr.), to build, con-
struct.
Undu (n. 7), cock's comb.
(Ku)undaa (v. intr.), to overflow,
pass over.
Une, four (in counting).
Unene (n. 7), thickness, stoutness,
bigness, bulk.
Unga (n. 7), flour, meal.
(Ku)unga (v. tr.), to unite, join,
connect.
(Zu)ungama (v. tr.), to confess,
own, admit, acknowledge.
(Ku)ungamana, (Ku)ungana (v.
rec.), to be united, cohere.
Ungereza (n. 7), England.
Ungi (n. 7), muchness, plenty,
multitude, quantity, maximum.
(Ku)ungika (v. n.), to be set (as
of bones), knit, be joined.
Ungo (n. 5), member, joint, limb.
Ungo la sb.ingo(n. 5), prominence
between shoulders.
Ung'ongo (n. 7), palm-leaf slip.
(See Ng'ongo, dwarf-palm).
(Ku)ungua (v. sub.), to disunite,
sever, cut ; (v. intr.), to be
burnt, be scorched, be singed,
catch fire.
Unguja (n.), Zanzibar.
(Ku)ungulika ( v. n.), to be troubled
at ht art.
(Ku)unguza (v. c.\ to burn,
scorch, singe, scald.
Ungwana (Uungwana) (n. 7),
gentle birth, freedom, good
breeding and education.
Unono (n.), fatness.
Unyago (n. 7), mourning, ngoma.
Unyamavu (n.), silence, quiet-
ness.
Unyang'anyi (n.), robbery, extor-
tion.
Unyasi (n. 7), blade of grass.
244
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Unyenyekevu (n. 7), humility,
meekness, lowliness, supplica-
tion.
TJnyeii (n. 7), pride, conceit.
Unyonge (n. 7), weakness, mean-
ness, poorness, feebleness.
Unyoya (n. 7), a single feather.
TInyozi (n. 7), shaving.
TTnyushi (n. 7), a hair of the eye-
brows.
TTnywele (n. 7), a single hair (of
head).
Uo (n. 7), scabbard.
TJombezi (n. 7), meditation, inter-
cession.
Uongofu (n. 7), prosperity, happy
ending, well-being.
TJovu (n. 7), evil, wickedness.
TJozi (n. 7), marriage.
Upaa (n. 7), scalp, pate, side of
sloping roof, bump of venera-
tion ; Anaupaa = he is bald.
Upaji (n. 7), gift, benefit, gene-
rosity.
Upamba (n. 7), curved knife used
in tapping.
Upana (n. 7), breadth, width,
extent.
Upande (n. 7), side, part, portion ;
P'ando za . . . in the vicinity
of ...
Upanga (n. 7), a sword ; (pi.
panga).
Upau (n. 7), slanting roof-pole,
rafter.
Vpawa (n.), ladle made of half a
cocoa-nut shell.
Upele(u. 7), pimple, eruption, itch.
Upembo (n. 7), long stick for
gathering fruit.
TJpcndano (n. 7), state of mutual
love.
TTpendeleo (n.), preference, favour-
itism.
Upenu (n. 7), verandah-roof,
eaves.
Upenzi (n. 7), lovingness.
TTpeo (wa mato) (n. 7), horizon,
limit of sight.
Upeo (u. 7), broom, (adv.), ex-
tremely, of the utmost.
TJpepeo (n. 7), fan, bellows.
Upepo (n. 7), wind, cool breeze,
zephir ; Kubadili upepo, to go
away for change of air.
TTpesi (n.), quickness, rapidity,
speed.
Up'.nda (n. 7), bow.
Uplndo (n. 7), edge or border of
cloth, selvage, fold, hem.
Upo (n. 7), long-handled ladle.
TJpofu (n. 7), blindness.
Up'ole (n. 7), gentleness, meek-
ness, mildness, moderation.
Uposo (n. 7), sum paid lo brido
by bridegroom before marriage.
Upote (n. 7), bow-string (of ox-
sinews).
TJpotevu (u. 7), destruction, state
of being, lost, moral ruin.
Upotofu (n. 7), pervo rseness,
crookedness, iniquity.
Upumbavu (n. 7), foolishness,
folly.
Upunga (n. 7), flower-bud blos-
som.
Upungufu (n. 7), decrease, deficit,
deficiency.
Upuuzi (n. 7), mischief, nonsense,
knavery, iniquity.
TTpwa (n. 7), shore.
Upweke (n. 7), loneliness, aloof-
ness, independence.
TTpya (n. 7), newness, anew,
newly.
Uradi (n. 7), invocation.
Urari (n. 7), even balance, equal-
ity.
Uraflki (n. 7), friendship, friend-
liness, sociability.
Urefu (n. 7), length, height, tall-
ness.
Urembo (n. 7), adornment, orna-
ment, finery, glory, beauty.
Urithi (urathi) (n. 7), inherit-
ance, heritage.
Urufuba (n. n.), moisture.
Usadiki (n. 7), faithfulness.
SWAHILI-ENGL1SH VOCABULARY
245
Usafi (n. 7), cleanness, purity,
brightness.
UsafiM (n. 7), pride.
Usemi (n. 7), conversational
powers, oratory, art of speak-
ing.
Ushadi'/i (n. 7), strength.
Ushahidi (ushuhur/a) (n. 7), testi-
mony, witness.
Ushairi (n. 7), long string of
poetry.
Ushanga (n. 7), beads, necklace,
string of beads.
Ushekhe (n. 7), chieftainship.
Ushi (n. 7), hair of eyebrow.
UsM (n. 7), string course (archit).
Ushirika (n. 7), communion, part-
nership.
Ushujaa (n. 7), courage, bravery.
Ushungu (n. 7), poison, gall,
sting (of bee, etc.).
Ushupavu (n. 7), foolishness,
folly, hardness, obstinacy.
Ushuru (n. 7), tax, customs, duty.
(Zu)nsia (v. tr.), to command,
give orders or instructions con-
cerning charge, bequeath.
Usikizi (u. 7), attention, heed,
hearing.
Usiku (n. 7), night (pi. masiki) ;
Usiku kucha, all night long,
till dawn ; Usiku wa manane,
midnight, dead of night.
Usiku sana (adv.), late at night.
Usingizi (n. 7), sleep, uncon-
sciousness. Kulala usingizi, to
be asleep.
Usiri (n. 7), delay, tarrying, pro-
crastination.
Usitadi (n. 7), skilled workman-
ship, dexterity, expertness.
Usita (n. 7), strip of plated grass
for making mats.
Uso (pi. nyuso) (n. 7), face, edge.
Uso nati, face to the ground
(shame).
Usomo (n. 7), friendliness, fellow-
ship.
lisa! hush I
Usubi (n. 7), sand-fly, midge.
Usulufani (n. 7), mastery, do-
minion.
Usumbufu (n. 7), trouble, vexa-
tion.
Uswafi (see Usafi).
Uta (n. 7), bow; (pi. mata or
nyuta).
Utaa (n. 7), corn-store, hen-roost.
Utagaa (n. 7), stem, branch.
Utaji (n. 7), veil, head-cloth.
Utajiri (n. 7), riches, wealth.
Utakatifu (n. 7), holiness.
Ufambi (n. 7), wick.
Utambuzi (n. 7), divination.
Utandu (n. 7), cataract on eye,
crust on boiled rice, etc., film.
Utanga (n. 7), long mat.
Utangule (n. 7), central portion
of palm-leaf slip.
Ufari (n. 7), towing.
Utasa (n. 7), barrenness, unfruit-
fulness.
Ufashi (n. 7), desire, intention,
longing.
Utatu (n. 7), the Trinity. Ut'ata
(n.), fermentation.
Utauaa (n. 7), godliness, piety.
U<awa (n. 7), lice.
U<awa/awa (n. 7), poultry -lice.
U<awi (n. 7), witchcraft, sorcery.
Uteka (n. 7), captivity.
Utelezi '(n. 7), slipping, slipperi-
ness.
Utenzi (n. 7), work, doing, work-
manship ; religious ballad.
Uteo (n. 7), sieve, winnowing-
basket.
U/euzi (n. 7), election.
Uthabiii (n.), firmness, daring,
intrepidy.
Uthalimu (n. 7), cruelty, wicked-
ness, violence.
Utimilivu (n. 7), perfection, com-
pleteness, integrity.
Ufindio (n. 7), altar for sacrifice.
Utiriri (n. 7), mischief, annoy-
ance.
Utisho (n. 7), terror, intimidation
246
SWAHILI GRAMMAK
fJtitiri (n. 7), poultry-lice, fleas.
Tito (n. 7), semscm plant, fluid
matter, dripping.
Utofu (n. 7), spoiling, ruination ;
Utofu wa ma<o, blindness.
Utonganyi (n. 7), deceit, fraud.
D7oro (n. 7), running away,
plundering, piracy.
TTtosi (n. 7), crown of head.
Utoto (n. 7), childhood, infancy.
TJtu uzima, prime of life.
TKovu (n. 7), destitution.
TJt'u (n. 7), state, condition (of
persons).
Ufukizi (n. 7), hatred, provoca-
tion.
Ufoku (n. 7), market (poetical)
U/ukufu (n. 7). glory.
Utukutu (n. 7), insubordination,
unruliness, naughtiness.
TKukuzi (n. 7), porterage.
Utulivu (n.), tranquillity, good
behaviour.
TTtulizi, utuvu (n. 7), comfort,
consolation.
Utamba (n. 7), betrothal, engage-
ment.
Utumbo (n. 7), entrails.
TTftunbuizo (n. 7), song, psalm,
agony.
U<ume (n. 7), apostleship.
U/umi (n. 7), business, trade,
livelihood, work.
Utumishi (n. 7), service.
Utumizi (u. 7), use, service.
U<umo (n.), profit, gain.
TJtumwa (n. 7), slavery.
THunga (n. 7), pasture, herd-
! ing.
TTtungo (n. 7), string (of beads),
composition.
THungu (n. 7), bitterness, agony,
pain.
Utupu (n. 7), nakedness, empti-
ness.
TT<wao(n. 7), dusk, sunset, even-
ing.
TJudi (n. 7), scented wood used
for fumigating.
TTumbufu (n. 7), destruction, mu-
tilation.
Uungu (n. 7), theology.
Uuwaji (n. 7), murder.
TJvao (n. 7), garment, dress.
Uvivu (n. 7), idleness, laziness,
sloth, indolence.
TTvuguvugu (n. 7), lukewarmness.
Uvuli (n. 7), shadow, shade.
TJVumba (n. 7), incense ; (galba-
num) Ku-fukizn, uvumba, to
burn incense.
Uvumbi (n. 7), dust, dirt, small
dust.
TJvumilivu (n. 7), patience, long-
suffering.
Uvnmvu (n.7), mourning, lamen-
tation.
UVimdfu(n. 7), desolation, break-
ing down.
Uvundo (n. 7), stench, offensive
smell.
TJvurungu (n. 7), hollow, hollow-
ness, cavity, i
ITvyazi (or uzazi) (n. 7), birth,
bearing of children.
TTwakili (n.), stewardship.
Uwan<Za (n. 7), yard, court, open
space.
TJwanga (n. 7), arrowroot.
TTwao (ubao) (n.), hull (of ship).
TTwaziri (n.), superintendence,
viziership.
Uwele (n. 7), sickness, disease
(pi. ndwele).
TTweza (uwezo) (n. 7), power,
valour, strength, might, riches.
Uwlngu (n. 7), heaven, sky.
Tlwongo (urongo) (n. 7), lie, un-
truth, falsehood.
Uyabisi (n. 7), dryness.
(Ku)uza (Kuza) (v. tr.), to sell.
(Ku)uzanya, to cause to sell.
Uzalishi (n. 7), midwifery.
TTzao (n.), seed, posterity, fruit,
progeny.
Uzee (n. 7), old age.
TTzi (pi. nyuzi) (n. 7), cotton,
thread, string, wire.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
247
(Ku)uzia, kuuzilia (v. prepl.), to
sell to.
Uzima (n. 7), life, health, sound-
ness, durability.
Uzinduo (n. 7), alarm.
TTzinifu (n. 7), whoredom.
TTzinzi (n. 7), adultery, immora-
lity.
Uzio (n. 7), fish-trap.
Uzishi (n. 7), bnrial preparations,
undertaker's duty.
Uzito (n.), heaviness, sorrow,
\veight.
TJziwa (n. 7), deep sea, depth,
open sea.
TTzuio (n. 7), hindrance.
(Ku)uzulu (v. tr.), to remove from
office, dethrone, depose, de-
grade.
Uzongo (n. 7), halo round moon.
TTznngu, Europe.
Uzuri (n. 7), beauty.
Uzushi (n. 7), raising, resuscita-
tion, bringing to surface.
Uzuzi (n. 7), falsehood, invention,
fiction.
(Zu)vaa (v. tr.), to wear, put on ;
(Ku)vaa nguo, to dress, put on
one's clothes.
(Ku)valisha (kuvisha) (v. c.), to
cause one to dress.
(Ku)vama (v. n.), to wear or cut
by friction.
Vao (n. 5), garment, dress.
Vi (pi. prefix) (see note 3, study
18).
Via (v. n.), to he spoiled, stunted
in growth, blighted.
Viasi (n. 4, pi.), the mean, the
middle, average.
Vibaya (adj. and adv.), bad,
badly.
Vifaa (n. 4, pi.), necessaries.
(Ku)vika (v. tr.), to clothe, to
dresa (another), to overlay
(with gold, etc.).
Vile (dem. adj., 4th cl. pi.), those ;
(adv.), thus ; Vilevile (adj. and
adv.), those same, exactly thus.
(Ku)vimba (v. intr.), to swell;
(v. tr.), to thatch (roof).
Vimbi (n. 4), bad things, evil.
(Ku)vinjari (v. intr.), to cruise.
(Ku)vinya (v. tr.), to shake,
dandle.
Viovu (n. 4, pi.) (elliptical for
vitu viovu), evil, wrong, harm.
Vipele(vidudusi) (n. 4, pi.), rash,
eruption, pimples.
Virakaraka (n. 4), streaks, stripes.
(Ku)viringa (v. tr. and n.), to
make or become round.
(Ku)viringana (v. rec.), to become
round or spherical.
Virugu (n. 4), anger.
Vita (n. 4, pi.), war, conflict,
warfare.
Virtmvi (n. 4, pi.), plotting,
intrigue, treachery.
Vitushi (n. 4), sudden calamities.
Vi£wa-vi<wa (adv.), topsy-turvy.
Vivi Mvi (adv.), precisely thus.
(Ku)vivia (v. n.), to smoulder,
burn low.
-viva (var. adj.), idle, lazy,
slothful, indolent.
Vivyo (ref. pron.), those same
(tilings, cl. 4) ; (adv.), in that
' manner.
Vivyo Mvyo (dem. adj. and adv.),
those very same.
Viweo (n. 4, pi.), lap.
(Ku)viza (v. c.), to spoil, damage,
mar.
(Zu)vizhia(vizia) (v. tr.), to
watch, keep in view, spy.
Vizuri (adj. and adv.), beautiful,
nice, beautifully, prettily,
nicely, well, etc.
(Ku)vua (v. sub.), to take off
(clothes), to undress ; Kuvaa
kofia, to take off one's hat ; (v.
tr.), to lift up, fish, catch fish ;
Kuvulia(samaki) (v. prepl), to
fish with or by; Kuvua ma/o,
248
SWAHILI GBAMMAB
to look up ; Kumvulia mt'u
mato, to stare at one.
(Ku)vnata (v. tr.), to press be-
tween palate without biting.
(Ku)vuaza (v. tr.), to scratch,
tear, graze, cut, wound, gash.
(Ku)vuja (v. intr.), to leak, let in
water.
(Ku)vuka (v. n.), to come off, fall
off (clothes) ; (v. intr.), to cross
over, ferry across.
(Ku)vusha (v. c.), to ferry one
across.
(Ku)vukuta (v. tr.), to blow
(bellows).
Vukuto (n. 3), sweat, perspira-
tion.
Vuli (n. 3), latter-rains. Period
of latter rains (October —
November).
(Ku)vuma (v. intr.), to roar, rage,
make commotion.
Vumbi (n. 5), dust, rubbish,
litter.
(Ku)vumbika (v. tr.), to bury
in sand or hot ashes, roast in
ashes, to be dust.
(Ku)vumburuka (v. n.), to start
upsuddenly (sleeping animals).
(Ku)vumilia (v. intr.), to endure,
bear, be long-suffering.
(Ku)vumiza (v. c.), to make to be
heard, cause a noise.
(Zu)vuna (v. tr.)> to reap, gather
in.
(Ku)jivuna (v. ref.), to boast,
glory, bo puffed up, conceited,
vain.
(Ku)vimda (v. tr.), to break,
smash, destroy, annul, change
(money); Kuvnnda kambi. to
break up camp, i.e. to start
day's march ; Upepo ukavunda,
the wind lessened.
(Ku)vnnrfanga (v. tr.), to crush,
break by pressure.
(Ku)vun<iika (v. n.), to become
broken, be conceited, come to
grief.
(Ku)vuruga (v. tr.), to stir.
(Ku)vurumiza (v. tr.), to roll
down, throw, fling.
(Ku)vuta (v. tr.), to draw, pull,
attract ; Kuvuta makasia, to
row (oars) ; Kuvuta tumbaku,
to smoke (tobacco).
(Ku)vuvia (v. intr.), to blow,
breathe on.
Vya (var. prep.), of (4th cl. pi.).
(Ku)vyaa (see Kuzaa) (v. tr.), to
bear, bring forth, be fruitful.
Vyakula (n. 4, pi.), food, eatables,
provisions.
Vyema (adj. and adv.), well, in
good state, all right, rightly ;
Kuona vyema kwa, to delight
in.
Vyengine (adj. and adv.), other,
otherwise, differently.
Vyengulima (n. 4, pi.), small, low
hills.
Vyepesi (adj. and adv.), light,
easy, trifling, then, easily.
(Ku)vyoga (v. tr.), to tread upon,
trample.
W
Wa (var. prep.), of; Wa (conj.),
ami (Arabic) ; Wa-miji (of
towns) (n. 1, pi.), citizens,
people, members of a federa-
tion.
(Ku)wa (v. intr. and copula), to
be, become.
(Ku)wadia (v. intr.), to be the
appointed time.
Warfinasi (n. 3), gentlefolk (lit.
sons of men, Ar.).
Wan (n. 7), stinging-nettle.
Wahedi (num. adj.), one; Wa-
hedi wa ishirini, one and
twenty.
(Ku)wahi (v. intr.), to be able (to
go to a place, etc.).
Wajibu (n. 7), necessity, obliga-
tion, inevitable duty.
SWAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
249
(Ku)waka (v. intr.), to burn, bo
aliirht, burn up brightly.
Wakadhalika, etcetera, and so on,
and the rest.
Waka£i (n. 7), time, appropriate
time, season.
Wakf (ece Wakufu).
Wakili (n. 5), steward.
Wako (n. 5), building (see
Kuaka).
Wakufu (adj.), consecrated, dedi-
cated, sacred, set apart ; Ku-
weka wakufu, to consecrate,
dedicate.
Wala (adv. conj.), neither, nor.
Walakini (CODJ.), but, neverthe-
less.
Walau (conj.), not even.
Wale (var. dem. adj.), those (cl. 1,
pi.).
Wall (n. 7), boiled rice (sec
Miele and Mpunga). (See
Liwali, native governor.)
Walii (n. 3), saint (Muhnd.).
Wallahi (interj.), by God.
(Ku)wama (v. intr.), to stick fast,
press into.
(Ku)wamba (v. tr.), to stretch
over, lace bedstead.
Wambe (n. 7), corn-dust.
Wanda (n. 3), antimony (used by
women for painting eyebrows
and eyelids).
Wandiko (n. 7), plaster.
(Ku)wanda (v. intr.), to become
fat.
Wangwa (n. 7), swampy or boggy
ground, valley, marsh (pi. nya-
ngwa).
Wano (n. 5), wooden part of arrow
or &pear.
Wapi ? (inter, adv.), Where ?
Waraka (n. 7), letter, epistle (pi.
nyaraka).
Waria (inv. adj.), skilful, ex-
pert.
WarifZi (n. 5), Rose (see ua).
Wasa (n. 7), lath, stick.
(Ku)washa (v. c.), to set light to,
kindle, irritate, burn, sting,
smart, be pungent.
(Ku)wasili (v. intr.), to arrive.
Kuwasilisna (v. c.), to convey,
cause to arrive.
Wasiwasi (n. 3), doubt,hesitation.
Wafani (see Aufani) (n. 7), home,
dwelling, habitation.
Wavu (n. 7), net, snare, hammock.
Wavyele (n. 1, pi.) elders.
(Ku)wawa (v. intr.), to be uneven,
slanting, out of the perpen-
dicular.
(Ka)wayawaya (v. red.), to bo
perplexed, hesitate, waver, be
troubled.
Wayo (n. 7), foot-print.
(Ku)waza (v. intr. and tr.), to
think, reflect.
Wazi (adj. inv.), plain, clear,
open, manifest, ajar, obvious,
patent, evident, hollow ; Ku-
weka wazi, to show, demon-
strate.
Waziwazi (adv.), clearly, in-
telligibly, audibly, publicly,
frankly.
Wazinm (n. 7), lunacy, madness,
imbecility.
Waziri (n. 5), prime minister,
overseer, superintendent, vizier.
Wazo (n. 5), thought, intention,
idea, opinion.
(Ku)wea (v. prepl.), to be to (sec
welea).
(Ku)weka (v. tr.), to put, place,
lay by, put aside, appoint ;
Kuweka Salama, to save.
(Ku)wekea (v. prepl.), to commit
to, place or deposit with.
Weko (n. 5), joint, joining, weld-
ing together.
Wekundu (n. 7), redness.
Wele (n. 5), udder.
(Ku)welea (v. prepl.), to do to,
show towards, be to, conduce to.
Weleko (n. 7), cloth for carrying
infant on back.
Wema (n. 7), good, goodness.
250
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
Wembamba (n. 7), thinness,
cramperl, circumstances, nar-
rowness.
Wembe (n. 7), razor (pi. nyembe).
Wendeleo (n. 7), continuance,
durability.
Wengo (n. 7), spleen, reins.
Wepesi (n. 7), ease, facility.
Werevu (n. 7), cunning, skill,
shrewdness, device, diplomacy,
artfulness, tact.
Weu (n. 7), veldt, plateau, water-
less plain, open country.
Weupe (n. 7), whiteness, bright-
ness.
Weusi (n. 7), blackness, darkness.
Wewe (sep. pron.), tliou, thee.
(Ku)weza (v. intr.), to be able,
" can " (used negatively for dis-
ability through sickness) ; (v.
tr.) to be equal to, be a match
for.
(Ku)wezeka (Ku)wezekana (v. n.),
to be feasible, practical, pos-
sible.
(Ku)wezesha (v. c.), to enable.
-wi (var. adj.), sad, evil, wicked
(concords are muwi, kiwi, viwi,
etc.).
(Ku)wia (v. prcpl.), to be creditor
to, claim or exact from, be
owed by (money, etc.) ; Kuwia
rar77ti; to forgive (lit. to be
indulgent or clement to).
Wifi (n. 3), sister-in-law (hus-
band's sister, or brother's wife).
(Ku)wika (v. intr.), to crow.
Wimbi (n. 5), wave, billow ; Ma-
wimbi yaumkayo, foaming
billows, breakers.
Wimbo (n. 7), song, hymn.
(Ku)winda (v. tr.), to search or
seek for, hunt, chase.
Wingu (n. 5), cloud.
Wino (n. 7), ink.
Wishwa (n. 7), chaff, bran.
Wi<o (n. 7), infection, contagion.
Wivi (n. 7), theft (no pi.).
Wivn (n. 7), jealousy, zeal, envy.
(Ku)wiwani (v. pass.), to be in
debt to, owe, be sued by.
Wiwi (n. 5), fern, bracken.
Wizani (n. 7), the weight of a
thing weighed.
Wokofu (n. 7), salvation, deliver-
ance, help, safety.
Wokozi (u. 7), salvation, aid,
succour, help.
Wonyesho (n. 7), manifestation,
demonstration, setting forth.
Waroro (n. 7), softness.
Wusuli (n. 7), Advent.
Ya (var. prep.) of; Ya kwamba
(conj.), that.
Yabisi (inv. adj.), dry, hard;
(Ku)yabisika (v. n.), to become
dry, solidify.
Yahudi (n. 5), Jew.
(Ku)yaika (v. n.), to melt, dis-
solve.
(Ku)yaisha (v. c.), to melt, smelt,
dissolve, liquefy.
Yakiiii (n. 3), truth, veracity,
certainty, proof.
(Xu)yakinisha (v. c.), to certify,
prove, confirm.
Yale (dem. pron.), those (5th. cl.
pi.).
Yambo (see Jambo).
Yamini (n. 3), oath taken with
the right hand on sacred book.
Yamkini (adv.), possibly, pro-
bably; Yamkinika, it is pos-
sible.
Yasimini (n. 3), jasmine, jessa-
mine.
Yadma (n. 5), orphan.
Yaya (n. 5), ayah, nurse.
Yayi (n. 5), egg (see li).
Yayo Kwayayo (Prouom. phrase),
same things over and over
again.
Yeye (sep. pron,), he, him, she,
her.
8WAHILI-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
251
(Ku)yonga-yonga (v. red.), to
sway to and fro, bend, bow.
Yowe (n. 5), alarm, cry of fear,
cry of distress.
Yu (pron. pref.), he, she.
(Ku)yu'a (v. intr.), to wobble,
waddle.
(Ku)yuga-yuga (v. red.), to shake,
sway, stagger.
Yule (dcm. adj.), that (1st cl.).
(Ku)yumba (v. intr.), to soar.
(Ku)yumba-yumba (v. red.), to
reel, vacillate, roll.
Yumbe (n. 5), palace.
Yunga-yunga (n. 5), worm.
Yungi (n. 5), lily, water-lily.
Za (var. prep.), of.
(Ku)zaa (v. tr.), to bear (fruit),
bring forth, beget, breed, givo
birth to.
Zaba</i(n. 3), civet-cat ; Kuzabirft,
to take civet from the fat.
Zabibu (n. 3), raisins, grapes.
(Ku)zabuni (v. tr.), to buy, pur-
chase.
Zaburi (n.3), psalm, prayer-book.
Zafarani (n. 3), saffron.
(Ku)zagaa (v. intr.), to shine, be
bright, lighten, glisten.
Zaibak (n. 3), mercury, quick-
silver.
ZaicZi (adv. and conj.), more, fur-
ther, moreover.
Zaka (n. 3), tithe.
(Ku)zalisha (v. c.). to assist at
birth, deli\-er, act midwife.
Zalizali (n. 3), earthquake.
(Ku)zama (v. n.), to sink, dive, be
submerged.
Zamani (n. 3), time, period, sea-
son ; Zamani hizi, nowadays ;
Zamani k'ubwa, Zamani nyi-
ngi, long time.
Zambarau (n. 3), fruit (similar to
damson).
Zamiri (n. 5), psalm.
(Ku)zamisha (v. c.), to immerse
(hence to baptize).
Zamu (n. 3), turn, watch.
Zana (n. 3), ammunition, store.
Zani (n. 3), accident, sudden
danger, crime.
Zari (n. 3), gold thread (very
valuable).
(Ku)zawa, Kuzaliwa (v. pass.), to
be lx>rn.
Za.wa.<li (ZarZi) (n. 3), present
brought from a distance, gift,
keepsake.
Zawani (n. 3), tares.
Zei/uni (n. 3), olive.
Zeze (n. 3), stringed musical in-
strument resembling lute.
Zia.<la. (adv.), more. (See Zaidi.)
Ziara (n. 3), visit; Ziara (or
Siara) (n. 5), tomb, grave,
burying-place.
(Ku)ziba (v. tr.), to stop or plug
up, close, seal, cover, hide, fill
up.
(Zuji)zibaziba (v. ref.), to hide
one's self.
Kuzibika, Kuzibikana (v. n.), to
be stopped, closed, hidden.
(Ku)zibisha (v.c.), to have stopped
up or closed.
Zibo (n. 5), stopper, plug.
(Ku)zibua (v. sub.), to unstop,
undo, open.
(Ku)zicZi (v. intr.), to increase,
augment, grow, do all the
more.
(Ku)zidisha (v. c.), to add, in-
crease, multiply (arithmetic).
(Ku)zika (v. tr.), to bury.
Zile (var. dem. adj.), those (cl. 3
and 7, pL).
-zima (var. adj.), whole, sound,
healthy, complete.
(Ku>ima* (v. tr.), to extinguish,
put out, cool.
(Ku)zimbaa (v. intr.), to be repro-
bate, cast-away.
(Ku)zimia, Kuzima (v. intr.), to
252
SWAHILI GRAMMAR
become faint, go out (lamp,
fire), bo quenched, become
cool.
(Ku)zimika (v. n.), to go out (fire,
etc.), burn low.
(Ku)zimua (v. sub.), to water
down, cool, weaken.
(Ku)zinduka (v. n.), to wake up
suddenly, rise.
(Ku)zinga (v. n,), to turn round,
revolve, change front, turn.
(Ku)zingada (v. n.), to bethink
one's self, turn over mentally,
reflect, repent.
(Ku)zinga-zinga (v.), to be a turn-
coat.
(Ku)zingira (v. tr.), to inclose,
surround, comfort.
(Ku)zini (v. intr.), to commit
adultery.
(Ku)zira (v. tr.), to abstain from,
avoid, abhor.
(Ku)zirisha (v. c.), to cause to
abhor (hence to be outrageous,
abhorrent, abominable).
-zito (var. adj.), heavy, pon-
derous, difficult, hard, thick,
sad.
Ziwa (n. 5), pond, lake, reservoir,
breast.
Zizi (n. 5), cattle-pen, sheepfold,
stable, yard.
(Ku)zoa (v. tr.), to collect together
for picking up, scoop up, gather
up (used in a collective sense,
ctr. okota).
(Ku)zoea (v. tr. and intr.), to be-
come accustomed to, acquire
the habit of, get used to, be-
come tame.
(Ku)zoeleka (v. n.), to be capable
of being scooped or gathered
up.
(Ku)zonga-zonga (v. red.), to in-
close, surround, encompass,
gird, wind round.
(Ku)zongomaza (v. c.), to cause
to gird.
(Ku)zoweza (v. c.), to accustom,
habituate.
(Ku)zua (v. intr. and sub.), to un-
earth, unbury, invent, romance,
tell untruths, deal falsely.
(Zu)zubua (v. tr.), to pierce.
(Ku)zuia (v. tr.), to prevent,
hinder, restrain, refrain, with-
hold, keep back.
(Ku)jizuilia (v. ref.), to exercise
self-control, be temperate, mo-
derate, restrain one's self.
(Ku)zuiliwa, Kuzuiwa (v. pass.),
to bo hindered, prevented, with-
held, etc.
(Ku)zuka (v. n.), to appear from
under the surface, emerge,
come on the scene as an up-
start, rise.
(Ku)zulu (v. intr.), to be giddy,
light-headed, deranged.
Zulia (n. 5), carpet.
Zumari (n. 3), wind instrument,
pipe, clarionet.
(Ku)zumbua (v. tr.), to find, dis-
cover, search, seek.
(Ku)zumbukana (v. n.), to be dis-
coverable.
(Ku)zunguka (v. tr. and intr.), to
go-round, walk round, revolve,
turn round, surround.
(Ku)zungumza (v. intr.), to talk,
converse, chat, hold conversa-
tion.
(Ku)jizungumza (v. ref.), to medi-
tate, amuse one's self by talk-
ing, etc.
(Ku)zungusha (v.c.), to turn, make
go round.
Zuri (n. 3), false oath, perjury.
-zuri (var. adj.), pretty, beautiful,
nice, handsome.
(Ku)zurn (v. intr.), to visit, pay
a visit.
PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, LONDON AND BECCI.KS.
University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388
Return this material to the library
from which it was borrowed.
JEC'O URL CIRC
OCT181993
SEP 1 3 1993
A 000 565 385 2
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11